Chevrolet Tahoe Owners

Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2012 - 2nd - 11/9/11 Black plate (1,1)
2012 Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Rear Seat Infotainment . . . . . . . 7-35

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Additional Storage Features . . . 4-2 Trademarks and License
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
Performance and
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28 Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Keys, Doors, and Warning Lights, Gauges, and Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37 Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-47 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-22
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Universal Remote System . . . . 5-56 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-32
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-47
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-54
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-90
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
2012 Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual M
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1

General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-19
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Vehicle Data Recording and
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89 OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93 OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99 OnStar Additional
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3
Special Application
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Additional Maintenance
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-12
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-15
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Introduction iii
This manual describes features that Canadian Vehicle Owners

may or may not be on your specific
vehicle either because they are Propriétaires Canadiens
options that you did not purchase or A French language copy of this
due to changes subsequent to the manual can be obtained from your
printing of this owner manual. dealer or from:
Please refer to the purchase
The names, logos, emblems, documentation relating to your On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
slogans, vehicle model names, and specific vehicle to confirm each of ce guide en français auprès du
vehicle body designs appearing in the features found on your vehicle. concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
this manual including, but not limited For vehicles first sold in Canada, suivante:
to, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET, substitute the name “General
the CHEVROLET Emblem, Helm, Incorporated
Motors of Canada Limited” for Attention: Customer Service
TAHOE, SUBURBAN, and Z71 Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it
are trademarks and/or service 47911 Halyard Drive
appears in this manual. Plymouth, MI 48170
marks of General Motors LLC, its
subsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors. If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
hybrid supplement for more
information.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for
quick reference.
Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 20902914 B Second Printing 2011 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
iv Introduction
Using this Manual Symbols

{ WARNING
To quickly locate information about The vehicle has components and
the vehicle, use the Index in the These mean there is something labels that use symbols instead of
back of the manual. It is an that could hurt you or other text. Symbols are shown along with
alphabetical list of what is in the people. the text describing the operation or
manual and the page number where information relating to a specific
it can be found. component, control, message,
Notice: This means there is
gauge, or indicator.
something that could result in
Danger, Warnings, and property or vehicle damage. This M : This symbol is shown when
Cautions would not be covered by the you need to see your owner manual
vehicle's warranty. for additional instructions or
Warning messages found on vehicle
information.
labels and in this manual describe
hazards and what to do to avoid or * : This symbol is shown when
reduce them. you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
Danger indicates a hazard with a
information.
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a A circle with a slash through it is a
hazard that could result in injury or safety symbol which means “Do
death. Not,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not let
this happen.”
Introduction v
Vehicle Symbol Chart + : Fuses

Here are some additional symbols 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
that may be found on the vehicle Changer
and what they mean. For more
information on the symbol, refer to (: Heated Steering Wheel
the Index. j: LATCH System Child
0 : Adjustable Pedals Restraints
9 : Airbag Readiness Light * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
# : Air Conditioning : : Oil Pressure
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) g : Outside Power Foldaway
Mirrors
% : Audio Steering Wheel Controls
or OnStar® O : Power
$ : Brake System Warning Light / : Remote Vehicle Start
" : Charging System > : Safety Belt Reminders
I : Cruise Control 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
B : Engine Coolant Temperature _ : Tow/Haul Mode
O : Exterior Lamps d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®
# : Fog Lamps M : Windshield Washer Fluid
. : Fuel Gauge
vi Introduction
2 NOTES
In Brief 1-1
In Brief Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Passenger Sensing
1-12 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . .
1-24
1-25
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Side Blind Zone
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Instrument Panel Steering Wheel Rear Vision
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . 1-2 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Initial Drive Information Throttle and Brake Pedal Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-26
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Universal Remote System . . . 1-26
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-17
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Performance and Maintenance
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-28
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-29
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Vehicle Features Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 1-29
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 Driving for Better Fuel
Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-23 Roadside Assistance
Heated and Ventilated Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-24 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Head Restraint
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview
English Version Shown; Metric Similar

In Brief 1-3
A. Air Vents on page 8‑13. I. Exterior Lamp Controls on O. Cruise Control on page 9‑52.
B. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever. page 6‑1. P. Steering Wheel Adjustment on
See Turn and Lane-Change J. Dome Lamps on page 6‑8. page 5‑2.
Signals on page 6‑5. Instrument Panel Illumination Q. Horn on page 5‑5.
Windshield Wiper/Washer on Control on page 6‑7. R. Steering Wheel Controls on
page 5‑5. Fog Lamps on page 6‑6 page 5‑3.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer on (If Equipped). S. Climate Control Systems on
page 5‑6. K. Hood Release. See Hood on page 8‑1 (If Equipped).
C. Instrument Cluster on page 10‑5. Dual Automatic Climate Control
page 5‑12. L. Integrated Trailer Brake System on page 8‑4
D. Hazard Warning Flashers on Controller (If Equipped). See (If Equipped).
page 6‑5 (Out of View). Towing Equipment on T. Power Outlets on page 5‑9.
E. Shift Lever. See Automatic page 9‑79.
U. StabiliTrak® System on
Transmission on page 9‑32. M. Data Link Connector (DLC) page 9‑47 (If Equipped).
F. Manual Mode on page 9‑35 (Out of View). See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 5‑20. Pedal Adjust Button
(If Equipped). (If Equipped). See Adjustable
Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑36 N. Automatic Transfer Case Throttle and Brake Pedal on
(If Equipped). Control (If Equipped). See page 9‑22.
Four-Wheel Drive (Single
G. Driver Information Center (DIC) Speed Automatic Transfer Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
Buttons. See Driver Information Case) on page 9‑42 or page 9‑54 (If Equipped).
Center (DIC) on page 5‑28. Four-Wheel Drive (Two Speed Power Assist Steps on
H. Infotainment on page 7‑1. Automatic Transfer Case) on page 2‑14 (If Equipped).
page 9‑37.
1-4 In Brief
Initial Drive L : Press and release to locate

the vehicle.
Information
Press L and hold for more than
This section provides a brief
two seconds to sound the panic
overview about some of the
alarm.
important features that may or may
not be on your specific vehicle. Press L again to cancel the panic
For more detailed information, refer alarm.
to each of the features which can be See Keys on page 2‑2 and Remote
found later in this owner manual. Keyless Entry (RKE) System on
page 2‑3.
Remote Keyless Entry RKE Transmitter with Remote
(RKE) System Start and Power Liftgate/Liftglass Remote Vehicle Start
The RKE transmitter is used to K: Press to unlock the driver door. With this feature the engine can be
remotely lock and unlock the doors Press K again within three seconds started from outside of the vehicle.
from up to 60 m (195 ft) away from to unlock all remaining doors.
the vehicle.
Starting the Vehicle
Q: Press to lock all doors. 1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
Lock and unlock feedback can be vehicle.
personalized. See Vehicle
Personalization (With DIC Buttons)
2. Press and release Q.
on page 5‑47. 3. Immediately after completing
m: Press and hold to unlock the Step 2, press and hold / until
liftglass. the turn signal lamps flash.
8 : Press and hold to open or
close the power liftgate.
In Brief 1-5
When the vehicle starts, the parking Door Locks

lamps will turn on and remain on as
long as the engine is running. The There are several ways to lock and
doors will be locked and the climate unlock the vehicle.
control system may come on. From outside, use the Remote
The engine will continue to run for Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or
10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a the key in the driver door.
10-minute time extension. Remote From inside, use the power door
start can be extended only once. locks or the manual door locks. To
lock or unlock the door with the
Canceling a Remote Start
manual locks, push down or pull up
To cancel a remote start: on the manual lock knob.
Power Folding Mirrors Shown,
. Aim the RKE transmitter at the Power Door Locks Other Models Similar
vehicle and press and hold /
until the parking lamps turn off. Press Q or K on the RKE Q: Press to lock the doors.
transmitter. See Remote Keyless K: Press to unlock the doors.
. Turn on the hazard warning Entry (RKE) System Operation on
flashers. page 2‑3. See Door Locks on page 2‑8.
. Turn the ignition on and then
back off.
See Remote Vehicle Start on
page 2‑6.
1-6 In Brief
Liftgate Manual Liftgate Operation There are several ways to open and
close the power liftgate:
To unlock the liftgate, press " on
the power door lock switch or press . Press and hold 8 on the
" on the Remote Keyless Entry RKEtransmitter until the liftgate
(RKE) transmittertwice, see Remote starts moving.
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2‑3.
. Press 8 on the overhead
console.
Press the touch pad on the
underside of the liftgate handle (B) . Press l on the bottom of the
and lift up. liftgate next to the latch to close.
Use the pull cup to lower and close Pressing a second time while the
the liftgate. Do not press the touch liftgate is moving reverses the
pad while closing the liftgate. This direction.
The liftglass or liftgate cannot be will cause the liftgate to be To disable the power liftgate
opened if the rear wiper is in motion. unlatched. function, press OFFon the liftgate
Attempting to open the liftglass or Power Liftgate Operation switch, see Liftgate on page 2‑10.
liftgate while the rear wiper is in
motion will cause the release of the On vehicles with a power liftgate, Liftglass
liftglass or liftgate to delay until the the switch is on the overhead If equipped, there are two ways to
wipers are parked off the liftglass. console. open the liftglass:
The vehicle must be in P (Park) to . Press the button on the
use the power feature. The taillamps underside of the license plate
will flash and a chime will sound applique (A).
when the power liftgate moves.
. Press m on the
RKEtransmitter.
In Brief 1-7
Windows For more information, see: 3. Try to move the seat back and
. Windows on page 2‑23. forth to be sure the seat is
locked in place.
. Power Windows on page 2‑24.
See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3.
Seat Adjustment Power Seats
Manual Seats
Power Folding Mirrors Shown,

Other Models Similar
The driver door has switches that
control all windows, the passengers
door switch only control that
window. The power windows work To adjust a power seat, if equipped:
when the ignition is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY, or in Retained To adjust the seat: . Move the seat forward or
Accessory Power (RAP). See rearward by sliding the control
1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat. forward or rearward.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 9‑27 for more information. 2. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the bar.
Press the switch to lower the
window. Pull the switch up to
raise it.
1-8 In Brief
. If available, raise or lower the Lumbar Adjustment Power Lumbar
front or rear part of the seat
cushion by moving the front or Manual Lumbar
rear of the control up or down.
. If available, raise or lower the
entire seat by moving the entire
control up or down.
See Power Seat Adjustment on
page 3‑4.
To adjust the power lumbar support,

if equipped:
If equipped, increase or decrease . On vehicles with two-way
manual lumbar support by turning
lumbar, press and hold the top
the knob forward or rearward.
or bottom of the control to
See Lumbar Adjustment on increase or decrease lumbar
page 3‑5. support.
In Brief 1-9
. On vehicles with four-way Reclining Seatbacks To return the seatback to the upright
lumbar, press and hold the front position:
or rear of the control to increase Manual Reclining Seatbacks
or decrease lumbar support. To 1. Lift the lever fully without
raise or lower the height of the applying pressure to the
support, press and hold the top seatback, and the seatback will
or bottom of the control. return to the upright position.
See Lumbar Adjustment on 2. Push and pull on the seatback to
page 3‑5. make sure it is locked.
See Reclining Seatbacks on
page 3‑6.
To recline a manual seatback:

1. Lift the lever.
2. Move the seatback to the
desired position, and then
release the lever to lock the
seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
1-10 In Brief
Power Reclining Seatbacks Memory Features Storing Memory Positions

To save into memory:
1. Adjust the driver seat and
seatback recliner, both outside
mirrors, and the throttle and
brake pedals, if equipped.
See Power Mirrors on page 2‑19
and Adjustable Throttle and
Brake Pedal on page 9‑22.
Not all mirrors and adjustable
throttle and brake pedals will
have the ability to save and
recall their positions.
To adjust a power seatback,
if equipped: On vehicles with the memory 2. Press and hold “1” until
feature, the controls on the driver two beeps sound.
. Tilt the top of the control door are used to program and recall
rearward to recline. memory settings for the driver seat, 3. Repeat for a second driver
outside mirrors, and the adjustable position using “2.”
. Tilt the top of the control forward
to raise. throttle and brake pedals,
if equipped.
See Reclining Seatbacks on
page 3‑6.
In Brief 1-11
To recall, press and release “1” or Second Row Seats Heated and Ventilated
“2.” The vehicle must be in P (Park).
A single beep will sound. The seat, On vehicles with a 60/40 split bench Seats
outside mirrors, and adjustable or buckets seats, the seatbacks can
throttle and brake pedals, be folded for additional cargo space,
if equipped, will move to the position or the seats can be folded and
previously stored for the identified tumbled for easy entry/exit to the
driver. third row seats, if equipped. On
vehicles with bucket seats, the
See Memory Seats on page 3‑8 and seatbacks also recline.
Vehicle Personalization (With DIC
Buttons) on page 5‑47. See Second Row Seats on
page 3‑12.
Easy Exit Driver Seat
This feature can move the seat Third Row Seats
rearward to allow extra room to exit On vehicles with third row seats, the
the vehicle. Heated and Cooled Seat Buttons
seatbacks can be folded, and the
B: Press to recall the easy exit entire seat can be tumbled or Shown, Heated Seat Buttons
seat position. The vehicle must be removed from the vehicle. Similar
in P (Park). For detailed instructions, see Third If available, the buttons are on the
See Memory Seats on page 3‑8 and Row Seats on page 3‑16. front doors. To operate, the ignition
Vehicle Personalization (With DIC must be in ON/RUN.
Buttons) on page 5‑47. H : If available, press to cool
the seat.
I : Press to heat the
seatback only.
1-12 In Brief
J: Press to heat the seat and Safety Belts Passenger Sensing

seatback. System
Press the button once for the The passenger sensing system,
highest setting. With each press of if equipped, turns off the front
the button, the seat will change to outboard passenger frontal airbag
the next lower setting, and then to under certain conditions. No other
the off setting. The lights indicate airbag is affected by the passenger
three for the highest setting and one sensing system.
for the lowest.
If the vehicle has one of the
See Heated and Ventilated Front indicators pictured in the following
Seats on page 3‑10. illustrations, then the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system for the
Head Restraint right front passenger position.
Adjustment Refer to the following sections for
Do not drive until the head restraints important information on how to use
for all occupants are installed and safety belts properly.
adjusted properly. . Safety Belts on page 3‑20.
To achieve a comfortable seating . How to Wear Safety Belts
position, change the seatback Properly on page 3‑21.
recline angle as little as necessary
while keeping the seat and the head
. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑22.
restraint height in the proper . Lower Anchors and Tethers for
position. Children (LATCH System) on
See Head Restraints on page 3‑2 page 3‑55.
and Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3.
In Brief 1-13
The passenger airbag status Mirror Adjustment 3. Adjust the outside mirror so that
indicator, if equipped, will be visible the side of the vehicle and the
on the overhead console when the Exterior Mirrors area behind are seen.
vehicle is started. 4. Press either (A) or (B) again to
deselect the mirror.
See Power Mirrors on page 2‑19 for
more information .
To power fold the mirrors:
1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors out
United States to the driving position.
2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to
the folded position.
With Power Folding Mirrors

To adjust the mirrors:
Canada and Mexico 1. Press (A) or (B) to select the
See Passenger Sensing System on driver or passenger side mirror.
page 3‑39 for important information. 2. Press one of the four arrows
located on the control pad to
adjust the mirror.
1-14 In Brief
See Power Mirrors on page 2‑19 for Park Tilt Mirrors

more information. If the vehicle has the memory
Keep the selector switch in the package, the exterior mirrors tilt to a
center position when not adjusting preselected position when the
either outside mirror. vehicle is in R (Reverse). This
To manual fold the mirrors: feature lets the driver view the curb
when parallel parking. The mirrors
Fold the mirrors inward to prevent return to the original position when
damage when going through an the vehicle is shifted out of
automatic car wash. To fold, pull the R (Reverse), or the ignition is turned
mirror toward the vehicle. Push the off or to OFF/LOCK.
mirror outward, to return to its
original position. This feature can be programed
With Manual Folding Mirrors
through the Driver Information
To adjust the mirrors: Heated Mirrors Center (DIC). See Vehicle
1. Move the selector switch located Personalization (With DIC Buttons)
Press 1 to heat the mirrors. on page 5‑47 for more information.
above the four-way control pad
to the left or right to choose See “Rear Window Defogger” under Trailer-Tow Mirrors
either the driver side or Dual Automatic Climate Control
passenger side mirror. System on page 8‑4 or Climate For vehicle with towing mirrors, they
Control Systems on page 8‑1 for can be extended for a clearer view
2. Press one of the four arrows more information. of the objects behind the vehicle.
located on the control pad to Manually pull out the mirror head to
move the mirror in the desired extend it for better visibility when
direction. towing a trailer.
3. Adjust the outside mirror so that See Trailer-Tow Mirrors on
the side of the vehicle and the page 2‑19 for more information.
area behind are seen.
In Brief 1-15
Interior Mirror Steering Wheel Do not adjust the steering wheel

while driving.
Adjustment Adjustment
Hold the rearview mirror in the Throttle and Brake Pedal
center and move it to view the area Adjustment
behind the vehicle.
On vehicles with this feature, you
Manual Rearview Mirror can change the position of the
For vehicles with a manual rearview throttle and brake pedals.
mirror, push the tab forward for
daytime use and pull it for nighttime
use to avoid glare from the
headlamps from behind. See
Manual Rearview Mirror on
page 2‑22 for more information.
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror The tilt lever is located on the lower The control used to adjust the
left side of the steering column. pedals is located on the instrument
For vehicles with an automatic panel below the climate control
dimming rearview mirror. The mirror To adjust the steering wheel:
system.
will automatically reduce the glare 1. Hold the steering wheel and pull
from the headlamps from behind. the lever. Press the bottom of the control to
The dimming feature comes on and move the pedals closer to your
2. Move the steering wheel up body. Press the top of the control to
the indicator light illuminates each
or down. move the pedals away.
time the ignition is turned to start.
3. Release the lever to lock the See Adjustable Throttle and Brake
See Automatic Dimming Rearview
wheel in place. Pedal on page 9‑22.
Mirror on page 2‑22 for more
information.
1-16 In Brief
Interior Lighting Dome Lamp Override Reading Lamps
Dome Lamps The dome lamp override button is For vehicles with reading lamps in
located next to the exterior lamps the overhead console, press the
The dome lamps are located in the control. button located next to the lamp to
overhead console. turn it on or off.
They come on when any door is The vehicle may also have reading
opened and turn off after all the lamps in other locations. The lamps
doors are closed. cannot be adjusted.
Turn the instrument panel For more information about interior
brightness knob located below the lamps, see:
dome lamp override button,
clockwise to the farthest position to
. Dome Lamps on page 6‑8.
manually turn on the dome lamps. . Reading Lamps on page 6‑8.
The dome lamps remain on until the . Instrument Panel Illumination
knob is turned counterclockwise. k: Press the button in and the Control on page 6‑7.
dome lamps remain off when a door
is opened. Press the button again to
return it to the extended position so
that the dome lamps come on when
a door is opened.
In Brief 1-17
Exterior Lighting AUTO: Automatically turns on the Windshield Wiper/Washer

headlamps, parking lamps,
taillamps, instrument panel lights,
and license plate lamps.
; : Turns on the parking lamps,
taillamps, instrument panel lights,
and license plate lamps.
5 : Turns on the headlamps,
parking lamps, taillamps, instrument The front wiper control is located on
panel lights, and license plate the turn and lane‐change lever. Turn
lamps. the band with the wiper symbol to
The exterior lamps control is located control the windshield wipers.
on the instrument panel to the left of For more information, see:
the steering wheel. . Exterior Lamp Controls on 8: For a single wipe, turn to 8 ,
page 6‑1. then release. For several wipes,
O : Turns off the automatic
headlamps and Daytime Running hold the band on 8 longer.
. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Lamps (DRL). Turn the headlamp on page 6‑3. 9 : Turns the windshield
control to the off position again to wipers off.
turn the automatic headlamps or
. Fog Lamps on page 6‑6.
DRL back on. 6: Turn the band up for more
frequent wipes or down for less
For vehicles first sold in Canada, frequent wipes.
the off position will only work when
the vehicle is shifted into P (Park). 6 : Slow wipes.
? : Fast wipes.
L : Push this paddle to spray
washer fluid on the windshield.
1-18 In Brief
Rear Wiper Window Wiper/Washer Climate Controls

To turn the rear wiper on, slide the The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with
lever to a wiper position. these systems.
9 : Turns the wiper off. If this vehicle is a hybrid, see the hybrid supplement for more information.
5 : Turns on the rear wiper delay.
Z : Turns on the rear wiper.
= : Press the button on the end of
the lever to spray washer fluid on
the rear window.
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑5 and Rear Window Wiper/
Washer on page 5‑6.
Climate Control System
A. Fan Control F. Driver and Passenger

B. REAR (Rear Climate Control) Temperature Controls
C. Recirculation G. Rear Window Defogger
D. Air Delivery Mode Control See Climate Control Systems on

page 8‑1.
E. Air Conditioning
In Brief 1-19
Transmission
Range Selection Mode
Base Trim Shown (Uplevel Similar)

The Range Selection Mode switch
Dual Automatic Climate Control System is located on the shift lever.
1. To enable the Range Selection
A. Fan Control K. Air Conditioning feature, move the column shift
B. AUTO (Automatic Operation) lever to the M (Manual) position.
L. PASS
The current range will appear
C. Defrost M. Passenger Temperature Control next to the M. This is the highest
D. Recirculation See Dual Automatic Climate Control attainable range with all lower
System on page 8‑4 (If Equipped) . gears accessible. As an
E. REAR (Rear Climate Control) example, when 5 (Fifth) gear is
For vehicles with rear heating and
F. Air Delivery Mode Control air conditioning controls, see Rear selected, 1 (First) through
Climate Control System (Rear 5 (Fifth) gears are available.
G. Driver Temperature Control
Climate with Rear Seat Audio) on
H. Display page 8‑11 or Rear Climate Control
I. Power Button System (Rear Climate Control Only)
on page 8‑10.
J. Rear Window Defogger
1-20 In Brief
2. Press the plus/minus buttons, Four-Wheel Drive

located on the steering column
shift lever, to select the desired If the vehicle has Four-Wheel Drive,
range of gears for current driving you can send the engine's driving
conditions. See Manual Mode on power to all four wheels for extra
page 9‑35. traction.
While using Range Selection Mode, Automatic Transfer Case
cruise control and the Tow/Haul
mode can be used.
Grade Braking is not available when
Range Selection Mode is active.
See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑36.
Single Speed Transfer Case
The transfer case knob is located to
the left of the instrument panel
cluster. Use this knob to shift into
and out of the different Four-Wheel
Drive modes.
2 m : This setting is used for driving
Two Speed Transfer Case in most street and highway
situations.
AUTO: This setting is ideal for use
when road surface traction
conditions are variable.
In Brief 1-21
4 m : Use the Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle Features

High position when extra traction is
needed, such as on snowy or icy Radio(s)
roads or in most off-road situations.
4 n : Vehicles with a
two speed transfer case have a
Four-Wheel-Drive Low position. This
setting sends maximum power to all
four wheels. You might choose
Four-Wheel-Drive Low if you are
driving off-road in deep sand, deep
mud, deep snow, and while climbing
or descending steep hills.
N (Neutral): Vehicles with a
two speed transfer case have a
N (Neutral) position. Shift the
transfer case to N (Neutral) only
when towing the vehicle. See
Recreational Vehicle Towing on
page 10‑93 or Towing the Vehicle
on page 10‑93. Radio with USB, CD, and DVD (MP3)
See Four-Wheel Drive (Single
Speed Automatic Transfer Case) on O : Press to turn the system on BAND: Press to choose between
page 9‑42 or Four-Wheel Drive (Two and off. Turn to increase or FM, AM, or XM™, if equipped.
Speed Automatic Transfer Case) on decrease the volume. f: Select radio stations.
page 9‑37.
1-22 In Brief
© SEEK or ¨ SEEK: Seek or scan Storing Radio Stations Setting the Clock
stations. A maximum of 36 stations can be To set the time and date:
4: Press to switch the display stored as favorites using the six 1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/
between the radio station frequency softkeys located below the radio ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, then
and the time. While the ignition is station frequency tabs and by using
the radio FAV button. Press FAV to press O , to turn the radio on.
off, press this button to display the
time. Press to display additional text go through up to six pages of 2. Press H to display HR, MIN,
information related to the current favorites, each having six favorite
MM, DD, and YYYY (hour,
FM-RDS or XM station; or CD, MP3, stations available per page. Each
minute, month, day, and year).
or WMA song. If information is page of favorites can contain any
available during XM, CD, MP3, combination of AM, FM, or XM 3. Press the softkey located under
or WMA playback, the song title stations. any one of the labels to be
information displays on the top line changed.
For more information, see “Storing
of the display and artist information Radio Stations” in AM-FM Radio on 4. To increase or decrease the time
displays on the bottom line. When page 7‑8. or date, turn f clockwise or
information is not available, “NO
counter‐clockwise.
INFO” displays.
For detailed instructions on setting
For more information about these
the clock for the vehicle's specific
and other radio features, see
audio system, see Clock on
Operation on page 7‑3.
page 5‑8.
For vehicles with a Rear Seat
Entertainment System (RSE) and
Rear Seat Audio System (RSA), see
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
System on page 7‑35 and Rear
Seat Audio (RSA) System on
In Brief 1-23
Satellite Radio Portable Audio Devices Bluetooth®

XM is a satellite radio service based This vehicle has an auxiliary input, For vehicles with a Bluetooth
in the 48 contiguous United States located on the audio faceplate, and system, it allows users with a
and 10 Canadian provinces. a USB port located on the Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone to
XM satellite radio has a wide instrument panel or in the center make and receive hands-free calls
variety of programming and console. External devices such as using the vehicle’s audio system
commercial-free music, coast to iPod®, laptop computers, and controls.
coast, and in digital-quality sound. MP3 players, CD changers, USB The Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone
A fee is required to receive the storage device, etc. can be must be paired with the Bluetooth
XM service. connected to the auxiliary port using system before it can be used in the
a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jack or the vehicle. Not all phones will support
For more information, refer to: USB port depending on the audio all functions. For more information,
. www.xmradio.com or call system. visit www.gm.com/bluetooth.
1-800-929-2100 (U.S.) See Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑31 For more information, see Bluetooth
. www.xmradio.ca or call for further information. on page 7‑48.
1-877-438-9677 (Canada)
See Satellite Radio on page 7‑9.
1-24 In Brief
Steering Wheel Controls b / g : Press to silence the vehicle Cruise Control

speakers only. Press again to turn
the sound on. Press and hold longer
than two seconds to interact with
OnStar® or Bluetooth systems,
if equipped.
+e: Press to increase volume.
−e: Press to decrease volume.
SRCE: Press to switch between
the radio and CD, and for equipped
vehicles, the DVD, front auxiliary,
and rear auxiliary.
If equipped, some audio controls ¨ : Press to seek the next radio

can be adjusted at the steering station, the next track or chapter T : Press to turn the system on
wheel. while sourced to the CD or DVD or off. The indicator light is on when
slot, or to select tracks and folders cruise control is on and turns off
w : Press to go to the next favorite on an iPod or USB device. when cruise control is off.
radio station, track on a CD,
or folder on an iPod® or USB For more information, see Steering + RES: Press briefly to make the
device. Wheel Controls on page 5‑3. vehicle resume to a previously set
speed, or press and hold to
c / x : Press to go to the accelerate.
previous favorite radio station, track
on a CD, or folder on an iPod® or SET −: Press to set the speed and
USB device. Press to reject an activate cruise control or make the
incoming call, or to end a call. vehicle decelerate.
In Brief 1-25
[ : Press to disengage cruise Side Blind Zone See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
control without erasing the set on page 9‑56 for more information.
Alert (SBZA)
speed from memory.
See Cruise Control on page 9‑52.
If available, this feature will alert you Rear Vision
to vehicles located in the vehicle's Camera (RVC)
side blind zone. When the system
Navigation System detects a vehicle in the side blind If available, the RVC displays a
If the vehicle has a navigation zone, the SBZA display will light up view of the area behind the vehicle
system, there is a separate in the corresponding outside side when the vehicle is shifted into
navigation system manual that mirror. R (Reverse). The display will appear
includes information on the radio, on either the inside rearview mirror
The system is enabled at every
audio players, and navigation or navigation screen, if equipped.
vehicle startup. It can be disabled
system. through the Driver Information To clean the camera lens, located
The navigation system provides Center (DIC). above the license plate, rinse it with
detailed maps of most major water and wipe it with a soft cloth.
If the message SIDE BLIND ZONE
freeways and roads. After a SYSTEM UNAVAILABLE appears See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) on
destination has been set, the on the DIC, the system has been page 9‑59.
system provides turn-by-turn disabled because the sensor is
instructions for reaching the blocked and cannot detect vehicles
destination. In addition, the system in the blind zone. The sensor may
can help locate a variety of points of be blocked by mud, dirt, snow, ice,
interest (POIs), such as banks, slush, or even heavy rainstorms.
airports, restaurants, and more. This message may also activate
See the navigation system manual during heavy rain or due to road
for more information. spray. The vehicle does not need
service.
1-26 In Brief
Ultrasonic Parking Assist Power Outlets Universal Remote System

If available, the Ultrasonic Rear The accessory power outlets can be
Parking Assist (URPA) system uses used to plug in electrical equipment,
sensors on the rear bumper to such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
assist with parking and avoiding There are two under the climate
objects while in R (Reverse). controls, one inside the center floor
It operates at speeds less than console, one on the rear of the
8 km/h (5 mph). URPA uses audible center floor console and one
beeps to provide distance and accessory power outlet in the rear Vehicles with the Universal Remote
system information. cargo area on the passenger side. System will have these buttons
Keep the sensors on the vehicle's located in the headliner.
The accessory power outlets are
rear bumper clean to ensure proper powered, even with the ignition off. This system provides a way to
operation. Continuing to use accessory power replace up to three remote control
See Ultrasonic Parking Assist on outlets while the ignition is in LOCK/ transmitters used to activate
page 9‑54. OFF may cause the vehicle's devices such as garage door
battery to run down. openers, security systems, and
home automation devices.
See Power Outlets on page 5‑9.
Read the instructions completely
before attempting to program the
transmitter. Because of the steps
involved, it may be helpful to have
another person assist with
programming the transmitter.
See Universal Remote System on
page 5‑56.
In Brief 1-27
Sunroof Vent: From the closed position, When the sunroof is opened, an air
press the rear of switch (B) to vent deflector will automatically raise.
the sunroof. The air deflector will retract when
Open/Close: To open the sunroof, the sunroof is closed.
press and hold switch (A) until the The sunroof also has a sunshade
sunroof reaches the desired which can be pulled forward to block
position. Press and hold the front sun rays. The sunshade must be
of switch (A) to close it. opened and closed manually.
Express-Open/Express-Close: If an object is in the path of the
To express-open the sunroof, fully sunroof while it is closing, the
press and release the rear of anti-pinch feature will detect the
switch (A) until the sunroof object and stop the sunroof.
reaches the desired position. To See Sunroof on page 2‑25 for more
express-close the sunroof, fully information.
A. Open or Close press and release the front of
B. Vent switch (A). Press the switch again to
stop it.
On vehicles with a sunroof, the
sunroof only operates when the
ignition is in the ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN, or when Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 9‑27 for more
information.
1-28 In Brief
. To turn off both traction control
Performance and and StabiliTrak, press and hold
shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Vehicle Load
Maintenance g until g illuminates and the Limits on page 9‑16. The warning
appropriate DIC message light will remain on until the tire
StabiliTrak® System displays. See Ride Control
System Messages on page 5‑43.
pressure is corrected.
If equipped, the vehicle has a During cooler conditions, the low tire
traction control system that limits
. Press and release g again to pressure warning light may appear
wheel spin and the StabiliTrak turn on both systems. when the vehicle is first started and
system that assists with directional then turn off. This may be an early
For more information, see
control of the vehicle in difficult indicator that the tire pressures are
StabiliTrak® System on page 9‑47.
driving conditions. Both systems getting low and the tires need to be
turn on automatically every time the inflated to the proper pressure.
Tire Pressure Monitor
vehicle is started. The TPMS does not replace normal
This vehicle may have a Tire monthly tire maintenance. It is the
. To turn off traction control, press Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). driver’s responsibility to maintain
and release g on the instrument
correct tire pressures.
panel. The appropriate DIC
message displays. See Ride See Tire Pressure Monitor System
Control System Messages on on page 10‑59.
page 5‑43.
The TPMS warning light alerts you

to a significant loss in pressure of
one of the vehicle's tires. If the
warning light comes on, stop as
soon as possible and inflate the
tires to the recommended pressure
In Brief 1-29
Engine Oil Life System On all vehicles, the Engine Oil Life Driving for Better Fuel
System can be reset as follows:
The engine oil life system calculates Economy
engine oil life based on vehicle use 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
the engine off. Driving habits can affect fuel
and, on most vehicles, displays a mileage. Here are some driving tips
DIC message when it is necessary 2. Fully press the accelerator pedal to get the best fuel economy
to change the engine oil and filter. slowly three times within possible.
The oil life system should be reset five seconds.
to 100% only following an oil
. Avoid fast starts and accelerate
3. Display OIL LIFE REMAINING smoothly.
change.
on the DIC. If the display shows
Resetting the Oil Life System 100%, the system is reset.
. Brake gradually and avoid
abrupt stops.
To reset the Engine Oil Life System See Engine Oil Life System on
on most vehicles: page 10‑10.
. Avoid idling the engine for long
periods of time.
1. Display OIL LIFE REMAINING
on the DIC. If the vehicle does Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . When road and weather
not have DIC buttons, the conditions are appropriate, use
Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge cruise control.
vehicle must be in P (Park) to and a yellow fuel cap can use either
access this display. unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel . Always follow posted speed
2. Press and hold the SET/RESET containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). limits or drive more slowly when
button on the DIC, or the trip See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on conditions require.
odometer reset stem if the page 9‑66. For all other vehicles, . Keep vehicle tires properly
vehicle does not have DIC use only the unleaded gasoline inflated.
buttons, for more than described under Recommended
Fuel on page 9‑63.
. Combine several trips into a
five seconds. The oil life will
single trip.
change to 100%.
1-30 In Brief
Replace the vehicle's tires with

OnStar®
.
Roadside Assistance and OnStar
the same TPC Spec number (U.S. and Canada)
molded into the tire's sidewall If equipped, this vehicle has a
near the size. If you have an active OnStar comprehensive, in-vehicle system
subscription, press the Q button that can connect to a live Advisor
. Follow recommended scheduled
and the current GPS location will be for Emergency, Security, Navigation,
maintenance.
sent to an OnStar advisor who will Connection, and Diagnostic
assess your problem, contact Services. See OnStar Overview on
Roadside Assistance Roadside Assistance, and relay page 14‑1.
Program your exact location to get the help
U.S.: 1-800-243-8872 you need.
TTY Users (U.S.): 1-888-889-2438 Online Owner Center

(U.S. and Canada)
Canada: 1-800-268-6800
The Online Owner Center is a
Mexico: 01-800-466-0800 complimentary service that includes
As the owner of a new Chevrolet, online service reminders, vehicle
you are automatically enrolled in the maintenance tips, online owner
Roadside Assistance program. manual, special privileges,
and more.
See Roadside Assistance Program
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8 or Sign up today at:
Roadside Assistance Program U.S.: chevrolet.com (click on
(Mexico) on page 13‑10. “Owners,” then “Manage My
Chevrolet/Owners Login”)
Canada: chevroletowner.ca
Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors, and Doors

Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Interior Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-22
Windows Power Assist Steps . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Vehicle Security
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Windows
Keys and Locks Anti-theft Alarm System . . . . . . 2-15 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-17 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Exterior Mirrors Roof
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Trailer-Tow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . 2-21
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Keys and Locks See your dealer if a replacement

key or additional key is needed.
Keys Notice: If the keys get locked in
the vehicle, it may have to be
damaged to get them out. Always
{ WARNING carry a spare key.
Leaving children in a vehicle with If you are locked out of the vehicle,
the ignition key is dangerous for call the Roadside Assistance
many reasons. Children or others Center. See Roadside Assistance
could be badly injured or even Program (U.S. and Canada) on
killed. They could operate the page 13‑8 or Roadside Assistance
power windows or other controls Program (Mexico) on page 13‑10.
The key is used for the ignition and
or even make the vehicle move. With an active OnStar subscription,
all door locks.
The windows will function with the an OnStar Advisor may remotely
keys in the ignition and children The key has a bar-coded key tag unlock the vehicle. See OnStar
could be seriously injured or killed that the dealer or qualified locksmith Overview on page 14‑1.
if caught in the path of a closing can use to make new keys. Store
window. Do not leave the keys in this information in a safe place, not
a vehicle with children. in the vehicle.
Remote Keyless Entry Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) System (RKE) System Operation
See Radio Frequency Statement on The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
page 13‑22 for information transmitter functions work up to
regarding Part 15 of the Federal 60 m (195 ft) away from the vehicle.
Communications Commission (FCC) There are other conditions which
rules and Industry Canada can affect the performance of the
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310. transmitter. See Remote Keyless
If there is a decrease in the RKE Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑3.
operating range:
. Check the distance. The With Remote Start and Power
transmitter may be too far from
Liftgate and Liftglass
the vehicle.
. Check the location. Other The following functions may be
vehicles or objects may be available if your vehicle has the
blocking the signal. RKE system:
. Check the transmitter's battery. / (Remote Vehicle Start): For
See “Battery Replacement” later vehicles with this feature, press to
start the engine from outside the
in this section.
vehicle using the RKE transmitter.
. If the transmitter is still not See Remote Vehicle Start on
working correctly, see your With Remote Start and Liftglass page 2‑6 for additional information.
dealer or a qualified technician
for service.
Q (Lock): Press to lock all the
doors.
If enabled through the Driver If enabled through the DIC, the turn L (Vehicle Locator/Panic
Information Center (DIC), the turn signal lamps flash twice to indicate Alarm): Press and release to
signal lamps flash once to indicate unlocking has occurred. See Vehicle locate the vehicle. The turn signal
locking has occurred. If enabled Personalization (With DIC Buttons) lamps flash and the horn sounds
through the DIC, the horn chirps on page 5‑47. If enabled through three times.
when the lock button is pressed the DIC, the exterior lights turn on
again within three seconds. See briefly if it is dark enough outside. Press and hold L for more than
Vehicle Personalization (With DIC See “Approach Lighting” under two seconds to activate the panic
Buttons) on page 5‑47 for additional Vehicle Personalization (With DIC alarm. The turn signal lamps flash
information. Buttons) on page 5‑47. and the horn sounds repeatedly for
30 seconds. The alarm turns off
Pressing Q arms the content Pressing K on the RKE transmitter when the ignition is moved to ON/
theft‐deterrent system. See disarms the content theft‐deterrent RUN or L is pressed again. The
Anti-theft Alarm System on system. See Anti-theft Alarm
ignition must be in LOCK/OFF for
page 2‑15. System on page 2‑15.
the panic alarm to work.
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock m (Liftglass): Press and hold to
only the driver door. If K is pressed unlock the liftglass.
again within three seconds, all 8 (Power Liftgate): Press and
remaining doors unlock. The interior hold to open and close the liftgate.
lamps may come on and stay on for The taillamps flash and a chime
20 seconds or until the ignition is sounds to indicate when the liftgate
turned on. is opening and closing.
Programming Transmitters to Battery Replacement

the Vehicle Replace the battery if the REPLACE
Only RKE transmitters programmed BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
to this vehicle will work. If a message displays in the DIC. See
transmitter is lost or stolen, a “REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE
replacement can be purchased and KEY” under Key and Lock
programmed through your dealer. Messages on page 5‑41 for
When the replacement transmitter is additional information.
programmed to this vehicle, all Notice: When replacing the
remaining transmitters must also be battery, do not touch any of the
reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen circuitry on the transmitter. Static
transmitters will no longer work from your body could damage the
once the new transmitter is transmitter. To replace the battery:
programmed. The vehicle can have 1. Separate the transmitter with a
a maximum of eight transmitters flat, thin object, such as a flat
programmed to it. See your dealer head screwdriver.
to program transmitters to the
vehicle. . Carefully insert the tool
into the notch located along
the parting line of the
transmitter. Do not insert
the tool too far. Stop as
soon as resistance is felt.
. Twist the tool until the
transmitter is separated.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not If the vehicle has an automatic Laws in some communities may
use a metal object. climate control system, the climate restrict the use of remote starters.
3. Insert the new battery, positive control system will default to a For example, some laws may
side facing down. Replace with a heating or cooling mode depending require a person using the remote
CR2032 or equivalent battery. on the outside temperatures. If the start to have the vehicle in view
vehicle does not have an automatic when doing so. Check local
4. Snap the transmitter back climate control system, the system regulations for any requirements on
together. will turn on at the setting the vehicle remote starting of vehicles.
was set to when the vehicle was Do not use the remote start feature
Remote Vehicle Start last turned off. if the vehicle is low on fuel. The
If available, this feature allows you During a remote start, if the vehicle vehicle may run out of fuel.
to start the engine from outside of has an automatic climate control If the vehicle has the remote start
the vehicle. It may also start up the system and heated seats, the feature, the RKE transmitter
vehicle's heating or air conditioning heated seats will turn on during functions will have an increased
systems and rear window defogger. colder outside temperatures and will range of operation. However, the
Normal operation of the system will shut off when the key is turned to range may be less while the vehicle
return after the key is turned to the ON/RUN. If the vehicle does not is running.
ON/RUN position. have an automatic climate control
system, during remote start, There are other conditions which
manually turn the heated seats on can affect the performance of the
and off. See Heated and Ventilated transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Front Seats on page 3‑10 for Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑3 for
additional information. additional information.
/ (Remote Start): This button will
be on the RKE transmitter if the
vehicle has remote start.
To start the vehicle using the remote After entering the vehicle during a For example, if Q and then / are
start feature: remote start, insert and turn the key pressed again after the vehicle has
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle. been running for 5 minutes,
vehicle. To cancel a remote start: 10 minutes are added, allowing the
engine to run for 15 minutes.
2. Press and release Q. . Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle and press and hold / The additional 10 minutes are
3. Immediately press and hold / until the parking lamps turn off. considered a second remote vehicle
until the turn signal lamps flash. start.
If you cannot see the vehicle's
. Turn on the hazard warning
flashers. Once two remote starts, or a single
lamps, press and hold / for remote start with one time extension
two to four seconds. . Turn the ignition on and then has been done, the vehicle must be
back off. started with the key. After the key is
When the vehicle starts, the
The vehicle can be remote started removed from the ignition, the
parking lamps will turn on and
two separate times between driving vehicle can be remote started again.
remain on while the vehicle is
running. The doors will be sequences. The engine will run for The vehicle cannot be remote
locked and the climate control 10 minutes after each remote start. started if the key is in the ignition,
system may come on. Or, you can extend the engine run the hood is not closed, or if there is
time by another 10 minutes within an emission control system
The engine will continue to run
the first 10 minute remote start time malfunction and the check engine
for 10 minutes. Repeat the steps
frame, and before the engine stops. light is on.
for a 10-minute time extension.
Remote start can be extended Also, the engine will turn off during a
only once. remote vehicle start if the coolant
temperature gets too high or if the
oil pressure gets low.
Remote Start Ready There are several ways to lock and

WARNING (Continued) unlock the vehicle.
If the vehicle does not have the
remote vehicle start feature, it may doors are not locked. So, all From outside, use the Remote
have the remote start ready feature. passengers should wear Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or
This feature allows your dealer to safety belts properly and the the key in the driver door.
add the manufacturer's remote doors should be locked From inside, use the power door
vehicle start feature. whenever the vehicle is locks or manual door locks. To lock
See your dealer to add the driven. or unlock the door with the manual
manufacturer's remote vehicle start . Young children who get into locks, push down or pull up on the
feature to the vehicle. unlocked vehicles may be manual lock knob.
unable to get out. A child can
Door Locks be overcome by extreme heat
and can suffer permanent
{ WARNING injuries or even death from
heat stroke. Always lock the
Unlocked doors can be vehicle whenever leaving it.
dangerous. . Outsiders can easily enter
. Passengers, especially through an unlocked door
children, can easily open the when you slow down or stop
doors and fall out of a moving the vehicle. Locking the doors
vehicle. When a door is can help prevent this from
locked, the handle will not happening.
open it. The chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash is increased if the
(Continued)
Power Door Locks Delayed Locking Automatic Door Locks

Press Q or K on the Remote When locking the doors with the The vehicle may have an automatic
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. power lock switch and a door or the lock/unlock feature. This feature can
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) liftgate is open, the doors will lock be programmed using the Driver
System Operation on page 2‑3. five seconds after the last door is Information Center (DIC). See
closed. You will hear three chimes Vehicle Personalization (With DIC
to signal that the delayed locking Buttons) on page 5‑47 for more
feature is in use. information on DIC programming.
Pressing the power lock switch
twice will override the delayed Lockout Protection
locking feature and immediately lock If the driver side power door lock
all the doors. switch is pressed when the driver
This feature will not operate if the door is open and the key is in the
key is in the ignition. ignition, all of the doors will lock and
then the driver door will unlock.
You can program this feature using
the Driver Information Center (DIC). If the passenger side power door
See “Delay Door Lock” under lock switch is pressed when the
Power Folding Mirrors Shown, Vehicle Personalization (With DIC front passenger door is open and
Other Models Similar Buttons) on page 5‑47. the key is in the ignition, all of the
doors will lock and then the front
Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors. passenger door will unlock.
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
doors.
Safety Locks To set the locks, insert a key into Doors

the slot and turn it to the horizontal
The vehicle has rear door security position. The door can only be
locks to prevent passengers from opened from the outside with the Liftgate
opening the rear doors from the door unlocked. To return the door to
inside. normal operation, turn the slot to the { WARNING
vertical position.
Exhaust gases can enter the
vehicle if it is driven with the
liftgate or trunk/hatch open,
or with any objects that pass
through the seal between the
body and the trunk/hatch or
liftgate. Engine exhaust contains
carbon monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled. It can
cause unconsciousness and even
death.
If the vehicle must be driven with
Open the rear doors to access the
the liftgate or trunk/hatch open:
security locks on the inside edge of
each door. . Close all of the windows.
. Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
(Continued)
Manual Liftgate Operation

WARNING (Continued)
To unlock the liftgate, press " on
. Adjust the climate control the power door lock switch or press
system to a setting that " on the Remote Keyless Entry
brings in only outside air and (RKE) transmittertwice, see Remote
set the fan speed to the Keyless Entry (RKE) System
highest setting. See “Climate Operation on page 2‑3.
Control Systems” in the
Index. Press the touch pad on the
underside of the liftgate handle (B)
. If the vehicle is equipped with and lift up.
a power liftgate, disable the
power liftgate function. Use the pull cup to lower and close
The liftglass or liftgate cannot be the liftgate. Do not press the touch
For more information about opened if the rear wiper is in motion. pad while closing the liftgate. This
carbon monoxide, see Engine Attempting to open the liftglass or will cause the liftgate to be
Exhaust on page 9‑30. liftgate while the rear wiper is in unlatched.
motion will cause the release of the
liftglass or liftgate to delay until the
Notice: If you open the liftgate
wipers are parked off the liftglass.
without checking for overhead
obstructions such as a garage
door, you could damage the
liftgate or the liftgate glass.
Always check to make sure the
area above and behind the liftgate
is clear before opening it.
Power Liftgate Operation There are several ways to open and

WARNING (Continued) close the power liftgate:
On vehicles with a power liftgate,
the switch is on the overhead If the vehicle must be driven with . Press and hold 8 on the
console. the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open: RKEtransmitter until the liftgate
The vehicle must be in P (Park) to . Close all of the windows. starts moving.
use the power feature. The taillamps . Press 8 on the overhead
will flash and a chime will sound
. Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument console.
when the power liftgate moves.
panel. . Press l on the bottom of the
{ WARNING . Adjust the Climate Control
system to a setting that
liftgate next to the latch to close.
Exhaust gases can enter the brings in only outside air and Pressing a second time while the
set the fan speed to the liftgate is moving reverses the
vehicle if it is driven with the
highest setting. See Climate direction.
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with
any objects that pass through the Control System in the Index. To disable the power liftgate
seal between the body and the . If the vehicle is equipped with function, press OFFon the liftgate
trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine a power liftgate, disable the switch.
exhaust contains Carbon power liftgate function. The power liftgate may be
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be temporarily disabled under extreme
For more information about
seen or smelled. It can cause temperatures, or under low battery
carbon monoxide, see Engine
unconsciousness and even death. conditions. If this occurs, the liftgate
Exhaust on page 9‑30.
(Continued) can still be operated manually.
If the transmission is shifted out of Obstacle Detection Features Manual Operation of Power
P (Park) while the power function is Liftgate
If the liftgate encounters an obstacle
in progress, the liftgate power
during a power open or close cycle, To change the liftgate to manual
function will continue to completion.
a warning chime will sound and the operation, press OFFon the liftgate
If the transmission is shifted out of
liftgate will automatically reverse switch.
P (Park) and the vehicle accelerates
direction to the full closed or open
before the power liftgate latches With the power liftgate disabled and
position. After removing the
closed, the liftgate may reverse to all of the doors unlocked, the liftgate
obstruction, the power liftgate
the open position. Cargo could fall can be manually opened and
operation can be used again. If the
out of the vehicle. Always make closed.
liftgate encounters multiple
sure the power liftgate is closed and
obstacles on the same power cycle, To open the liftgate, press the touch
latched before driving away.
the power function will deactivate pad on the handle (B) and lift up.
If the liftgate is opened using power and a message will display in the Use the pull cup to lower and close
operation and the liftgate support Driver Information Center (DIC), see the liftgate. Do not press the touch
struts have lost pressure, the turn Object Detection System Messages pad while closing the liftgate. This
signals flash and a chime will on page 5‑41. After removing the will cause the liftgate to be
sound. The liftgate stays open obstructions, the liftgate will resume unlatched. The liftgate latch will
temporarily, and then slowly closes. normal power operation. power close. Always close the
See a dealer for service before liftgate before driving.
Pinch sensors are located on the
using the liftgate.
side edges of the liftgate. If an
object is caught between the liftgate
and the vehicle and presses against
this sensor, the liftgate will reverse
direction and open fully. The liftgate
will remain open until it is activated
again or closed manually.
8 on the RKEtransmitter or
If If the battery is properly connected Power Assist Steps
l on the liftgate is pressed while with adequate voltage, the switch is
power operation is disabled, the not disabled, and the liftgate still will
lamps will flash three times, but the not function, see a dealer for
liftgate will not move. service.
It is not recommended to drive with Liftglass
the liftgate open, however, when If equipped, there are two ways to
driving with the liftgate open; the open the liftglass:
liftgate should be set to manual
operation by pressing OFFon the
. Press the button on the
liftgate switch on the center console. underside of the license plate
applique (A).
The liftgate has an electric latch.
If the battery is disconnected or has . Press m on the
low voltage, the liftgate will not RKEtransmitter.
open. The liftgate will resume The vehicle may have power assist
operation when the battery is steps. To enable or disable the
reconnected and charged. power assist steps push j.
The power assist steps Vehicle Security To arm the theft-deterrent system:
automatically extend from beneath 1. Open the door.
the vehicle on the side in which the This vehicle has theft-deterrent
door has been opened. Once the features; however, they do not make 2. Lock the door with the Remote
door is closed, the assist steps it impossible to steal. Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
automatically move back under the or the power door lock switch.
vehicle after a brief delay. The Anti-theft Alarm System The security light will come on to
vehicle must not be moving for the inform the driver the system is
assist steps to extend or retract. Your vehicle has a content arming. If a door is open when
theft-deterrent alarm system. the doors are locked, the
The assist steps cannot be disabled security light will flash.
in the extended position.
If the delayed locking feature is
turned on, the theft‐deterrent
system will not start the arming
process until the last door is
closed and the delay timer has
expired. See Delayed Locking
This is the security light. on page 2‑9.
3. Close all doors. The security
light should go off after about
30 seconds. The alarm is not
armed until the security light
goes off.
If a locked driver door is opened To avoid setting off the alarm by 2. Activate the system by locking
without using the RKE transmitter, a accident: the doors with the power door
10-second pre-alarm will occur. The . If you do not want to activate the lock switch while the door is
horn will chirp and the lights will theft-deterrent system, the open, or with the RKE
flash. If the key is not placed in the vehicle should be locked with transmitter.
ignition and turned to START or the the door key after the doors are 3. Get out of the vehicle, close the
door is not unlocked by pressing closed. door and wait for the security
the unlock button on the RKE light to go out.
transmitter during the 10-second . Always unlock the doors with the
pre-alarm, the alarm will go off. Your RKE transmitter. Unlocking a 4. Then reach in through the
vehicle's headlamps will flash and door any other way will set off window, unlock the door with the
the horn will sound for about the alarm if it is armed. manual door lock and open the
30 seconds, then will turn off to save If you set off the alarm by accident, door. This should set off the
the battery power. press unlock on the RKE transmitter alarm.
The theft-deterrent system will not or place the key in the ignition and While the alarm is set, the power
activate if the doors are locked with turn it to START to turn off the door unlock switch will not work.
the vehicle's key or the manual door alarm. The alarm will not stop if you If the alarm does not sound when it
lock. It activates only if you use the try to unlock a door any other way. should but the headlamps flash,
power door lock switch with the door check to see if the horn works. The
open or the RKE transmitter. You
Testing the Alarm
horn fuse may be blown. To replace
should also remember that you can To test the alarm: the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit
start your vehicle with the correct 1. From inside the vehicle, lower Breakers on page 10‑41.
ignition key if the alarm has been the driver window and open the
set off. If the alarm does not sound or the
driver door. headlamps do not flash, the vehicle
should be serviced by your dealer.
Immobilizer The security light will come on if If the vehicle does start, the first key
there is a problem with arming or may be faulty. See your dealer who
See Radio Frequency Statement on disarming the theft-deterrent can service the PASS-Key III+ to
page 13‑22 for information system. have a new key made.
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) When the PASS-Key III+ system It is possible for the PASS-Key III+
rules and Industry Canada senses that someone is using the decoder to learn the transponder
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310. wrong key, it prevents the vehicle value of a new or replacement key.
from starting. Anyone using a Up to 10 keys may be programmed
Immobilizer Operation trial-and-error method to start the for the vehicle. The following
vehicle will be discouraged because procedure is for programming
This vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ of the high number of electrical key additional keys only. If all the
(Personalized Automotive Security codes. currently programmed keys are lost
System) theft-deterrent system. or do not operate, you must see
If the engine does not start and the
PASS-Key III+ is a passive your dealer or a locksmith who can
security light on the instrument
theft-deterrent system. service PASS-Key III+ to have keys
panel cluster comes on when trying
The system is automatically armed to start the vehicle, there may be a made and programmed to the
when the key is removed from the problem with the theft-deterrent system.
ignition. system. Turn the ignition off and try See your dealer or a locksmith who
The system is automatically again. can service PASS-Key III+ to get a
disarmed when the key is turned to If the engine still does not start, and new key blank cut exactly as the
ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, the key appears to be undamaged, ignition key that operates the
or START from the LOCK/OFF try another ignition key. At this time, system.
position. you may also want to check the
You do not have to manually arm or fuse. See Fuses and Circuit
disarm the system. Breakers on page 10‑41. If the
engine still does not start with the
other key, the vehicle needs service.
To program the new additional key: 5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if Exterior Mirrors
additional keys are to be
1. Verify that the new key has a 1 programmed.
stamped on it. Convex Mirrors
If you lose or damage your
2. Insert the original, already PASS-Key III+ key, see your dealer
programmed key in the ignition or a locksmith who can service { WARNING
and start the engine. If the PASS-Key III+ to have a new
engine will not start, see your A convex mirror can make things,
key made. like other vehicles, look farther
dealer for service.
Do not leave the key or device that away than they really are. If you
3. After the engine has started, turn disarms or deactivates the cut too sharply into the right lane,
the key to LOCK/OFF, and theft-deterrent system in the vehicle. you could hit a vehicle on the
remove the key.
right. Check the inside mirror or
4. Insert the new key to be glance over your shoulder before
programmed and turn it to the changing lanes.
ON/RUN position within
five seconds of turning the
ignition to the LOCK/OFF The passenger side mirror is convex
position in Step 3. shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
curved so more can be seen from
The security light will turn off the driver seat.
once the key has been
programmed.
Manual Mirrors Trailer-Tow Mirrors Power Mirrors

Vehicles with manual mirrors can be
adjusted by moving the mirror up
and down or left to right to see a
little of the side of the vehicle, and
have a clear view behind the
vehicle.
Using hood-mounted air deflectors
and add-on convex mirror
attachments could decrease
mirror performance. If the vehicle has towing mirrors,
they can be adjusted for a clearer
view of the objects behind you.
With Power Folding Mirrors
Manually pull out the mirror head to
extend it for better visibility when To adjust the mirrors:
towing a trailer. 1. Press (A) or (B) to select the
The lower portion of the mirror is driver or passenger side mirror.
convex. A convex mirror's surface is 2. Press the arrows on the control
curved to see more from the driver pad to move the mirror up,
seat. The convex mirror can be down, right, or left.
adjusted manually to the driver
preferred position for better vision. 3. Adjust the outside mirror so that
the side of the vehicle and the
The mirror may have a turn signal area behind are seen.
arrow that flashes in the direction of
the turn or lane change. 4. Press either (A) or (B) again to
deselect the mirror.
3. Adjust the outside mirror so that Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
the side of the vehicle and the
If the vehicle has the Side Blind
area behind are seen.
Zone Alert (SBZA) system. See Side
Keep the selector switch in the Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on
center position when not adjusting page 9‑56 for more information.
either outside mirror.
Turn Signal Indicator
Exterior Automatic Dimming
The vehicle may also have a turn
Mirror signal indicator on the mirror. An
If the vehicle has the exterior arrow on the mirror flashes in the
automatic dimming mirror, the driver direction of the turn or lane change.
outside mirror automatically adjusts
With Manual Folding Mirrors for the glare of headlamps behind.
To adjust the mirrors: This feature is controlled by the on
and off setting on the inside
1. Move the selector switch located automatic dimming rearview mirror.
above the four-way control pad See Automatic Dimming Rearview
to the left or right to choose Mirror on page 2‑22 for more
either the driver side or information.
passenger side mirror.
2. Press one of the four arrows
located on the control pad to
move the mirror in the desired
direction.
Folding Mirrors Resetting the Power Folding Heated Mirrors

Mirrors
Power Folding For vehicles with heated mirrors:
Reset the power folding mirrors if:
.
1 (Rear Window Defogger):
The mirrors are accidentally Press to heat the mirrors.
obstructed while folding.
See “Rear Window Defogger” under
. They are accidentally manually Dual Automatic Climate Control
folded/unfolded. System on page 8‑4 or Climate
. The mirrors will not stay in the Control Systems on page 8‑1 for
unfolded position. more information.
. The mirrors vibrate at normal
driving speeds. Automatic Dimming
Fold and unfold the mirrors one time
Mirror
using the mirror controls to reset If the vehicle has the automatic
them to their normal position. dimming mirror, the driver outside
1. Press (A) to fold the mirrors out A popping noise may be heard mirror automatically adjusts for the
to the driving position. during the resetting of the power glare of the headlamps from behind.
2. Press (B) to fold the mirrors in to folding mirrors. This sound is normal This feature is controlled by the on
the folded position. after a manual folding operation. and off setting on the inside
rearview mirror. See Automatic
Manual Folding Dimming Rearview Mirror on
Fold the mirrors inward to prevent page 2‑22 for more information.
damage when going through an
automatic car wash. To fold, pull the
mirror toward the vehicle. Push the
mirror outward, to return to its
original position.
Park Tilt Mirrors Interior Mirrors Automatic Dimming

If the vehicle has the memory Rearview Mirror
package, the exterior mirrors tilt to a Manual Rearview Mirror The vehicle may have an automatic
preselected position when the To adjust the inside rearview mirror, dimming inside rearview mirror.
vehicle is in R (Reverse). This hold the rearview mirror in the
feature lets the driver view the curb To adjust the inside rearview mirror,
center and move it to view the area hold the rearview mirror in the
when parallel parking. The mirrors behind the vehicle.
return to the original position when center and move it to view the area
the vehicle is shifted out of For vehicles with a manual rearview behind the vehicle.
R (Reverse), or the ignition is turned mirror, push the tab forward for The automatic dimming rearview
off or to OFF/LOCK. daytime use and pull it for nighttime mirror will automatically reduce the
use to avoid glare from the glare from the headlamps from
This feature can be programed headlamps from behind.
through the Driver Information behind. The dimming feature comes
Center (DIC). See Vehicle Vehicles with OnStar® have three on when the vehicle is started.
Personalization (With DIC Buttons) control buttons at the bottom of the O (On/Off): Press to turn the
on page 5‑47 for more information. mirror. See a dealer for more dimming feature on or off.
information about OnStar and how
to subscribe to it. See OnStar The vehicle may also have a Rear
Overview on page 14‑1. Vision Camera (RVC). See Rear
Vision Camera (RVC) on page 9‑59
for more information.
If the vehicle has a RVC, the O
button for turning the dimming
feature on or off will not be
available.
Vehicles with OnStar have three Windows

additional control buttons for the
OnStar system. See a dealer for
more information about OnStar and { WARNING
how to subscribe to it. See OnStar
Overview on page 14‑1. Leaving children, helpless adults,
or pets in a vehicle with the
Cleaning the Mirror windows closed is dangerous.
Do not spray glass cleaner directly They can be overcome by the
on the mirror. Use a soft towel extreme heat and suffer
dampened with water. permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a
child, a helpless adult, or a pet
alone in a vehicle, especially with The vehicle aerodynamics are
designed to improve fuel economy
the windows closed in warm or
performance. This may result in a
hot weather.
pulsing sound when a window is
partially open. To reduce the sound,
open another window or the sunroof
(if equipped).
Power Windows Express Down Windows

Windows that have the
{ WARNING express‐down feature allow the
windows to be lowered without
Leaving children in a vehicle with holding the switch. Press the
the keys is dangerous for many window switch fully and release it to
reasons. Children or others could activate the express‐down feature.
be badly injured or even killed. The express mode can be canceled
They could operate the power at any time by briefly pressing,
windows or other controls or even or pulling the switch.
make the vehicle move. The
windows will function and they
could be seriously injured or killed Power Folding Mirrors Shown,
if caught in the path of a closing Other Models Similar
window. Do not leave keys in a The driver door has switches that
vehicle with children. control all windows, the passengers
door switch only control that
When there are children in the window. The power windows work
rear seat use the window lockout when the ignition is in ON/RUN or
button to prevent unintentional ACC/ACCESSORY, or in Retained
operation of the windows. Accessory Power (RAP). See
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 9‑27 for more information.
Press the switch to lower the
window. Pull the switch up to
raise it.
Window Lockout Sun Visors Roof

Sunroof
Pull the sun visor down to block

glare. Detach the sun visor from the
Power Folding Mirrors Shown, center mount to pivot to the side
Other Models Similar window, or to extend along the rod,
if available.
This feature prevents the rear
passenger windows from operating, A. Open or Close
except from the driver position. B. Vent
. Press o to activate the rear On vehicles with a sunroof, the
window locks. An indicator light sunroof only operates when the
will illuminate when the feature ignition is in the ACC/ACCESSORY
is on. or ON/RUN, or when Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
. Press o again to deactivate the See Retained Accessory Power
rear window locks. (RAP) on page 9‑27
Vent: From the closed position, When the sunroof is opened, an air
press the rear of switch (B) to vent deflector will automatically raise.
the sunroof. The air deflector will retract when
Open/Close: To open the sunroof, the sunroof is closed.
press and hold switch (A) until the The sunroof also has a sunshade
sunroof reaches the desired which can be pulled forward to block
position. Press and hold the front of sun rays. The sunshade must be
switch (A) to close it. opened and closed manually.
Express-Open/Express-Close: If an object is in the path of the Dirt and debris may collect on the
To express-open the sunroof, fully sunroof while it is closing, the sunroof seal or in the track. This
press and release the rear of anti-pinch feature will detect the could cause an issue with sunroof
switch (A) until the sunroof object and stop the sunroof. operation or noise. It could also
reaches the desired position. To plug the water drainage system.
express-close the sunroof, fully Periodically open the sunroof and
press and release the front of remove any obstacles or loose
switch (A). Press the switch again to debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and
stop it. roof sealing area using a clean
cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not
remove grease from the sunroof.
Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Safety Belt Use During

Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-46
Replacing Airbag System
Restraints Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-29 Child Restraints

Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Head Restraints Infants and Young
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-30 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Front Seats Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-51
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Airbag System Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-53
Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 Lower Anchors and Tethers
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4 Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-32 for Children (LATCH
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 When Should an Airbag System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35 Replacing LATCH System
Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 What Makes an Airbag Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-62
Heated and Ventilated Front Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36 Securing Child Restraints
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 How Does an Airbag (Rear Seat Position) . . . . . . . . 3-63
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 Securing Child Restraints
Rear Seats What Will You See after an (Center Front Seat
Heated Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 Position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Passenger Sensing Securing Child Restraints
Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39 (Right Front Seat
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
Safety Belts Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Adding Equipment to the
How to Wear Safety Belts Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-44
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
{ WARNING
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not
drive until the head restraints for
all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that the The height of the head restraint can
top of the restraint is at the same be adjusted. Pull the head restraint
height as the top of the occupant's up to raise it. Try to move the head
head. This position reduces the restraint to make sure that it is
chance of a neck injury in a crash. locked in place.
Front Seats To lower the head restraint, press
the button, located on the top of the
The front seats have adjustable seatback, and push the head
head restraints in the outboard restraint down. Try to move the
seating positions. head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is
locked in place.
The front seat outboard head
restraints are not designed to be
removed.
Rear Seats Front Seats

The vehicle's second-row seats
have head restraints in the outboard Seat Adjustment
seating positions that cannot be
adjusted.
{ WARNING
The vehicle's third-row seats,
if equipped, have adjustable You can lose control of the
headrests in the outboard seating vehicle if you try to adjust a driver
positions. seat while the vehicle is moving.
The height of the headrest can be The sudden movement could
adjusted. Pull the headrest up to startle and confuse you, or make
raise it. To lower the headrest, push you push a pedal when you do
To adjust the seat:
down on the headrest. not want to. Adjust the driver seat
only when the vehicle is not 1. Lift the bar under the front edge
Rear seat head restraints and moving. of the seat cushion to unlock
headrests are not designed to be the seat.
removed.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the bar.
3. Try to move the seat back and
forth to be sure the seat is
locked in place.

. If available, raise or lower the
Center Seat Power Seat Adjustment front or rear part of the seat
If equipped, the center front cushion by moving the front or
seatback doubles as an armrest and rear of the control up or down.
cupholder/storage area for the driver . If available, raise or lower the
and passenger when the center
entire seat by moving the entire
front seat is not used. Do not use it
control up or down.
as a seating position when the
seatback is folded down. To adjust the seatback, see “Power
Reclining Seatbacks” under
Reclining Seatbacks on page 3‑6.
To adjust a power seat, if equipped:

. Move the seat forward or
rearward by sliding the control
forward or rearward.

. On vehicles with four-way
Lumbar Adjustment Power Lumbar
lumbar, press and hold the front
Manual Lumbar or rear of the control to increase
or decrease lumbar support. To
raise or lower the height of the
support, press and hold the top
or bottom of the control.
To adjust the power lumbar support,

if equipped:
If equipped, increase or decrease
manual lumbar support by turning
. On vehicles with two-way
the knob forward or rearward. lumbar, press and hold the top
or bottom of the control to
increase or decrease lumbar
support.
Reclining Seatbacks Manual Reclining Seatbacks
{ WARNING { WARNING
Sitting in a reclined position when If either seatback is not locked, it
the vehicle is in motion can be could move forward in a sudden
dangerous. Even when buckled stop or crash. That could cause
up, the safety belts cannot do injury to the person sitting there.
their job. Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
The shoulder belt will not be locked.
against your body. Instead, it will
be in front of you. In a crash, you Do not have a seatback reclined if
could go into it, receiving neck or the vehicle is moving.
other injuries.
The lap belt could go up over
your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious
internal injuries.
For proper protection when the
vehicle is in motion, have the
seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the
safety belt properly.
To return the seatback to the upright Power Reclining Seatbacks

position:
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
seatback, and the seatback will
return to the upright position.
To adjust a manual seatback:

1. Lift the lever.
To recline a power seatback,
The seatback will automatically if equipped:
fold forward.
. Tilt the top of the control
2. To recline, move the seatback rearward to recline.
rearward to the desired position,
then release the lever to lock the
. Tilt the top of the control forward
seatback in place. to raise.
Memory Seats Storing Memory Positions To recall, press and release “1” or
To save into memory: “2.” The vehicle must be in P (Park).
A single beep will sound. The seat,
1. Adjust the driver seat, seatback outside mirrors, and adjustable
recliner, both outside mirrors, throttle and brake pedals will move
and the throttle and brake to the position previously stored for
pedals, if equipped. the identified driver.
See Power Mirrors on page 2‑19 Memory Remote Recall
and Adjustable Throttle and
Brake Pedal on page 9‑22. The memory feature can recall the
driver seat, outside mirrors, and
Not all mirrors and adjustable pedals, if equipped, to stored
throttle and brake pedals will positions when entering the vehicle.
have the ability to save and
recall their positions. To activate, unlock the driver
door with the Remote Keyless
On vehicles with the memory 2. Press and hold “1” until Entry (RKE) transmitter. The driver
feature, the controls on the driver two beeps sound. seat, outside mirrors, and adjustable
door are used to program and recall
3. Repeat for a second driver pedals, if equipped, will move to the
memory settings for the driver seat,
position using “2.” memory position associated with the
outside mirrors, and the adjustable
transmitter used to unlock the
throttle and brake pedals,
vehicle.
if equipped.
This feature can be turned on or off Easy Exit Driver Seat A single beep sounds. The driver
using the vehicle personalization This feature can move the seat seat moves back approximately
menu. See Vehicle Personalization rearward to allow extra room to exit 8 cm (3 in). To move the seat back
(With DIC Buttons) on page 5‑47. the vehicle. farther, press B again until the
To stop recall movement, press one seat is all the way back.
of the power seat controls, memory
B (Easy Exit Driver Seat): Press
to recall the easy exit seat position. If something has blocked the driver
buttons, or power mirror buttons, The vehicle must be in P (Park). seat while recalling the exit position,
or the adjustable pedal switch. the recall may stop. Remove the
If the easy exit seat feature is obstruction; then press and hold the
If something has blocked the driver programmed on in the vehicle
seat and/or the adjustable pedals power seat control rearward for
personalization menu, automatic two seconds. Try recalling the exit
while recalling a memory position, seat movement occurs when the
the recall may stop. Remove the position again. If the exit position is
ignition key is removed. still not recalling, see your dealer for
obstruction; then press and hold the
appropriate manual control for the service.
memory item that is not recalling for See Vehicle Personalization (With
two seconds. Try recalling the DIC Buttons) on page 5‑47.
memory position again by pressing
the appropriate memory button.
If the memory position is still not
recalling, see your dealer for
service.
Heated and Ventilated Press the button once for the

highest setting. With each press of
Front Seats the button, the seat will change to
the next lower setting, and then to
{ WARNING the off setting. The lights indicate
three for the highest setting and one
If you cannot feel temperature for the lowest.
change or pain to the skin, the
seat heater may cause burns The passenger seat may take
longer to heat up.
even at low temperatures. To
reduce the risk of burns, people On vehicles with heated seats, the
with such a condition should use heated seats are canceled
care when using the seat heater, 10 seconds after the ignition is
Heated and Cooled Seat Buttons
especially for long periods of turned off.
Shown, Heated Seat Buttons
time. Do not place anything on Similar On vehicles with heated and cooled
the seat that insulates against seats, the heated and cooled seats
heat, such as a blanket, cushion, If available, the buttons are on the are canceled when the ignition is
cover, or similar item. This may front doors. To operate, the ignition turned off.
cause the seat heater to must be in ON/RUN.
To use this feature after restarting
overheat. An overheated seat H (Cooled Seat): If available, the vehicle, press the desired button
heater may cause a burn or may press to cool the seat. again.
damage the seat. I (Heated Seatback): Press to
heat the seatback only.
J (Heated Seat and Seatback):
Press to heat the seat and
seatback.
Remote Start Heated Seats Rear Seats

When it is cold outside, the heated
seats may turn on automatically Heated Rear Seats
during a remote vehicle start. The
heated seats will be canceled when
the ignition is turned on. Press the { WARNING
desired button to use the heated If you cannot feel temperature
seats after the vehicle is started. change or pain to the skin, the
The lights on the heated seat seat heater may cause burns
buttons do not turn on during a even at low temperatures. See
remote start. the Warning under Heated and
The temperature performance of an Ventilated Front Seats on
If available, the buttons are on the
unoccupied seat may be reduced. page 3‑10.
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) panel on the
This is normal. rear of the center console.
See Remote Vehicle Start on
Press M or L to heat the left
page 2‑6.
outboard or right outboard seat
cushion. An indicator on the RSA
display appears when this feature
is on.
Press the button once for the To recline the seatback: To return the seatback to the upright
highest setting. With each press of position:
the button, the heated seat changes 1. Lift the lever fully without
to the next lower setting, and then applying pressure to the
the off setting. Indicator bars next to seatback, and the seatback will
the symbol show the setting: three return to the upright position.
for high, two for medium, and one
for low.
The heated seats are canceled
{ WARNING
when the ignition is turned off. If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
Second Row Seats stop or crash. That could cause
The second row seats can be folded injury to the person sitting there.
for additional cargo space or folded Always push and pull on the
and tumbled for easy entry and exit 1. Lift the lever on the outboard seatbacks to be sure they are
to the third row seat, if equipped. side of the seat. locked.
The seat has either the manual fold 2. Move the seatback to the
and tumble feature or the automatic desired position, and then 2. Push and pull on the seatback to
seat release fold and tumble release the lever to lock the make sure it is locked.
feature. seatback in place.
Reclining Seatbacks 3. Push and pull on the seatback to
(Bucket Seats Only) make sure it is locked.
On vehicles with second row bucket
seats, the seatbacks can be
reclined.
Manual Fold and Tumble

Feature
Folding and Tumbling the Seat
To fold and tumble the seat:
1. Make sure that there is nothing
under, in front of, or on the seat.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with
the safety belts still fastened may
cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the
safety belts and return them to
their normal stowed position 2. Lift the lever, on the outboard The seatback will fold forward to
before folding a rear seat. side of the seat, to release the create a flat load floor.
seatback. If the seatback cannot fold flat,
try moving the front seat forward
and/or put the front seatback in
the upright position.
Folding and Tumbling the Seat

from the Third Row Seat
{ WARNING
Using the third row seating
position while the second row is
folded, or folded and tumbled,
could cause injury in a sudden
stop or crash. Be sure to return
the seat to the passenger seating
position. Push and pull on the
3. Lift the lever again to release the seat to make sure it is locked into 60/40 Split-Bench Seat Shown,
rear of the seat from the floor. place. Bucket Seat Similar
The seat will tumble forward. 2. Lift the lever, on the bottom rear
To fold and tumble the seat from the of the second row seat on the
third row seat, if equipped: inboard side, to release the
seatback. The seatback will fold
1. Make sure that there is nothing
forward.
under, in front of, or on the seat.
3. Lift the same lever again to
release the rear of the seat from
the floor. The seat will tumble
forward.
their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
Automatic Fold and Tumble Folding and Tumbling the Second

Feature Row Seat from the Third Row Seat
or Outside the Vehicle
The transmission must be in
P (Park) for this feature to work.
{ WARNING
{ WARNING Using the third row seating
position while the second row is
Automatically folding and folded, or folded and tumbled,
tumbling the seat when someone could cause injury in a sudden
is sitting in the seat, could cause stop or crash. Be sure to return
injury to the person sitting there. the seat to the passenger seating
Always make sure there is no one position. Push and pull on the Driver Side Rear Panel Button
sitting in the seat before pressing seat to make sure it is locked into Shown
the automatic seat release button. place. 2. Press the automatic seat release
button on the panel behind the
To fold and tumble the seat from the rear doors.
third row seat, if equipped: The seatback automatically folds
1. Make sure that there is nothing flat and the seat tumbles
under, in front of, or on the seat. forward. There will be a slight
delay between the folding of the
seatback and the tumbling of
the seat.
Returning the Seat to the 3. For the 60/40 split-bench seat,

Sitting Position make sure the safety belt in the
center seating position is not
To return the seat to the sitting caught between the two seats
position from the tumbled position: and is not twisted.
1. Pull the seat down until it latches
to the floor. The seatback cannot Third Row Seats
be raised if the seat is not
latched to the floor. If the vehicle has a third row seat,
the seatback can be folded, and the
entire seat can be tumbled or
{ WARNING removed from the vehicle.
If either seatback is not locked, it Folding the Seatback 3. Lift the release lever “1,” on the
could move forward in a sudden bottom rear of the seatback on
To fold the seatback:
stop or crash. That could cause the outboard side of the seat,
injury to the person sitting there. 1. Open the liftgate to access the and the seatback folds forward.
Always push and pull on the controls for the seat.
seatbacks to be sure they are 2. Remove all items on the seat
locked. cushion.
2. Lift the seatback and push it the safety belts still fastened may
rearward. Push and pull on the cause damage to the seat or the
seatback to make sure it is safety belts. Always unbuckle the
locked. safety belts and return them to
Returning the Seatback to the Tumbling the Third Row Seat

Upright Position To tumble the seat:
To return the seatback to the upright 1. Open the liftgate to access the
position: controls for the seat.
1. Open the liftgate to access the 2. Make sure the headrests are
controls for the seat. completely lowered and there is
2. Raise the seatback to the nothing under, in front of, or on
upright position. the seat.
3. Fold the seatbacks forward
{ WARNING using lever “1” and the
instructions listed previously
If either seatback is not locked, it under “Folding the Seatback.” 4. Unlatch the seat from the floor
could move forward in a sudden The seat cannot be unlatched by lifting lever “2” next to the
stop or crash. That could cause from the floor unless the carrying handle on the rear of
injury to the person sitting there. seatback is folded. the seat, near the bottom.
Always push and pull on the 5. Lift the rear of the seat up from
seatbacks to be sure they are the floor.
locked.
6. Tilt the seat fully forward to lock
it into place.
7. Push and pull on the seat to
Put the seat in this position only
when necessary for additional cargo
space.
Returning the Third Row Seat

from a Tumbled Position { WARNING
To return the seat to the normal If either seatback is not locked, it
seating position: could move forward in a sudden
1. Open the liftgate to access the stop or crash. That could cause
controls for the seat. injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
2. Make sure there is nothing that seatbacks to be sure they are
could become trapped under locked.
the seat.
3. Release the seat from the
tumbled position by lifting lever
make sure it is locked. 3. Unlatch the seat from the floor
“2” next to the carrying handle at
the bottom rear of the seat. Removing the Third Row Seat by pulling the handle at the rear
of the seat “3 Removal Only”
4. Pull the seat down until it latches To remove the seat: toward the rear of the vehicle.
to the floor. The seatback cannot
be raised to the upright position 1. Open the liftgate to access the 4. Roll the seat out of the vehicle.
unless the seat is latched to the controls for the seat. There is a track in the floor to
floor. 2. Fold the seatbacks forward guide the seat wheels out of the
using lever “1” and the vehicle.
5. Raise the seatback to the
upright position. instructions listed previously
under “Folding the Seatback.”
The seat cannot be unlatched
from the floor unless the
seatback is folded.
Installing the Third Row Seat 4. Push and pull on the seat to
To install the seat:
{ WARNING make sure it is locked into place.
The seatback cannot be raised
1. Open the liftgate to access the A seat that is not locked into to the upright position unless the
rear of the vehicle. place properly can move around seat is latched to the floor.
in a collision or sudden stop.
2. Slide the front outboard seat People in the vehicle could be 5. Raise the seatback to the
wheels into the track on the floor injured. Be sure to lock the seat upright position.
and roll the seat forward. The
into place properly when 6. Push and pull on the seatback to
front latches should lock into
installing it. make sure it is locked.
place. If the latches do not lock,
try tilting the rear of the seat 7. Make sure the safety belts are
upward slightly. returned to the original position
over the seatbacks.
3. Lower the rear of the seat and
push down on the seat to
engage the rear floor latches.
Safety Belts Why Safety Belts Work

WARNING (Continued)
This section of the manual
describes how to use safety belts It is extremely dangerous to ride
properly. It also describes some in a cargo area, inside or outside
things not to do with safety belts. of a vehicle. In a collision,
passengers riding in these areas
{ WARNING are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow
Do not let anyone ride where a passengers to ride in any area of
safety belt cannot be worn the vehicle that is not equipped
properly. In a crash, if you or your with seats and safety belts.
passenger(s) are not wearing Always wear a safety belt, and
safety belts, injuries can be much check that all passenger(s) are
worse than if you are wearing restrained properly too. When riding in a vehicle, you travel
safety belts. You can be seriously as fast as the vehicle does. If the
injured or killed by hitting things vehicle stops suddenly, you keep
inside the vehicle harder or by This vehicle has indicators as a
reminder to buckle the safety belts. going until something stops you.
being ejected from the vehicle. In It could be the windshield, the
addition, anyone who is not See Safety Belt Reminders on
page 5‑17. instrument panel, or the safety belts!
buckled up can strike other
passengers in the vehicle.
(Continued)
When you wear a safety belt, you Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why How to Wear Safety Belts
and the vehicle slow down together. should I have to wear safety
There is more time to stop because belts?
Properly
you stop over a longer distance and, A: Airbags are supplemental This section is only for people of
when worn properly, your strongest systems only; so they work with adult size.
bones take the forces from the safety belts — not instead of There are special things to know
safety belts. That is why wearing them. Whether or not an airbag about safety belts and children. And
safety belts makes such good is provided, all occupants still there are different rules for smaller
sense. have to buckle up to get the children and infants. If a child will be
Questions and Answers About most protection. riding in the vehicle, see Older
Safety Belts Also, in nearly all states and in Children on page 3‑47 or Infants
all Canadian provinces, the law and Young Children on page 3‑49.
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle Follow those rules for everyone's
requires wearing safety belts.
after a crash if I am wearing a protection.
safety belt?
It is very important for all occupants
A: You could be — whether you are to buckle up. Statistics show that
wearing a safety belt or not. unbelted people are hurt more often
Your chance of being conscious in crashes than those who are
during and after a crash, so you wearing safety belts.
can unbuckle and get out, is
much greater if you are belted.
There are important things to know would apply force on your Lap-Shoulder Belt
about wearing a safety belt properly. abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. All seating positions in the vehicle
have a lap-shoulder belt except for
. Wear the shoulder belt over the the center front passenger position,
shoulder and across the chest. if equipped, which has a lap belt.
These parts of the body are best See Lap Belt on page 3‑28 for more
able to take belt restraining information.
forces. The shoulder belt locks if
there is a sudden stop or crash. The lap‐shoulder belts for the first
and second row seating positions
are equipped with free‐falling latch
{ WARNING plates. If the vehicle has a third row,
You can be seriously injured, the lap‐shoulder belts have either
or even killed, by not wearing free‐falling or cinching latch plates.
your safety belt properly.
. Sit up straight and always keep
. Never allow the lap or
your feet on the floor in front
of you. shoulder belt to become
loose or twisted.
. Always use the correct buckle
for your seating position.
. Never wear the shoulder belt
under both arms or behind
. Wear the lap part of the belt low your back.
and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs. In a crash,
. Never route the lap or
this applies force to the strong shoulder belt over an
pelvic bones and you would be armrest.
less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt
Use the following pictures to The lap-shoulder belt may lock if

determine the latch plate style: you pull the belt across you very
quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a
passenger belt with a free‐falling
latch plate is pulled out all the
way, the child restraint locking
feature may be engaged. If this
happens, let the belt go back all
Cinching Latch Plate the way and start again.
The following instructions explain Engaging the child restraint
Free-Falling Latch Plate how to wear a lap-shoulder belt locking feature in the right front
properly. seating position may affect the
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is passenger sensing system,
adjustable, so you can sit up if equipped. See Passenger
straight. To see how, see “Seats” Sensing System on page 3‑39
in the Index. for more information.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull

the belt across you. Do not let it
get twisted.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt

height adjuster, move it to the
height that is right for you. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”
in this section for instructions on
use and important safety
information.
If the belt stops before it reaches 3. Push the latch plate into the
the buckle, for lap‐shoulder belts buckle until it clicks. If you find
with cinching latch plates, tilt the that the latch plate will not go
latch plate and keep pulling the fully into the buckle, see if you
safety belt until it can be are using the correct buckle.
buckled. Pull up on the latch plate to
make sure it is secure. If the belt
is not long enough, see Safety
Belt Extender on page 3‑29. 5. To make the lap part tight, pull
up on the shoulder belt.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt It may be necessary to pull
could be quickly unbuckled if stitching on the safety belt
necessary. through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller
occupants.
To unlatch the belt, push the button Safety Belt Pretensioners

on the buckle. The belt should
This vehicle has safety belt
return to its stowed position.
pretensioners for front outboard
Before a door is closed, be sure the occupants. Although the safety belt
safety belt is out of the way. If a pretensioners cannot be seen, they
door is slammed against a safety are part of the safety belt assembly.
belt, damage can occur to both the They can help tighten the safety
belt and the vehicle. belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal, near
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster frontal, or rear crash if the threshold
The vehicle has a shoulder belt conditions for pretensioner
height adjuster for the driver and activation are met. And, if the
right front passenger positions. Squeeze the buttons (A) on the vehicle has side impact airbags,
Adjust the height so the shoulder sides of the height adjuster and safety belt pretensioners can help
portion of the belt is on the shoulder move the height adjuster to the tighten the safety belts in a side
and not falling off of it. The belt desired position. crash or a rollover event.
should be close to, but not The adjuster can be moved up just Pretensioners work only once. If the
contacting, the neck. Improper by pushing up on the shoulder belt pretensioners activate in a crash,
shoulder belt height adjustment guide. the pretensioners and probably
could reduce the effectiveness of other parts of the vehicle's safety
After the adjuster is set to the
the safety belt in a crash. See How belt system will need to be replaced.
desired position, try to move it down
to Wear Safety Belts Properly on See Replacing Safety Belt System
without squeezing the buttons to
page 3‑21. Parts after a Crash on page 3‑30.
make sure it has locked into
position.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort

Guides
This vehicle may have rear shoulder
belt comfort guides. If not, they are
available through your dealer. The
guides may provide added safety
belt comfort for older children who
have outgrown booster seats and
for some adults. When installed and
properly adjusted, the comfort guide
positions the belt away from the
neck and head.
Here is how to install a comfort 2. Place the guide over the belt,
There is one guide, if equipped, for guide to the safety belt: and insert the two edges of the
each outside passenger position in
1. Remove the guide from its belt into the slots of the guide.
the second row seat.
storage clip on the interior body.
{ WARNING
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
3. Be sure that the belt is not 4. Buckle, position, and release
twisted and it lies flat. The the safety belt as described
elastic cord must be under the previously in this section. Make
belt and the guide on top. sure the shoulder portion of the
belt is on the shoulder and not
falling off of it. The belt should
be close to, but not contacting,
the neck.
To remove and store the comfort
guide, squeeze the belt edges
together so that the safety belt can
be removed from the guide. Slide
the guide onto its storage clip on the
interior body.
Safety Belt Use During The best way to protect the fetus is
to protect the mother. When a safety
Pregnancy belt is worn properly, it is more likely
Safety belts work for everyone, that the fetus will not be hurt in a
including pregnant women. Like all crash. For pregnant women, as for
occupants, they are more likely to anyone, the key to making safety
be seriously injured if they do not belts effective is wearing them
wear safety belts. properly.
Lap Belt
This part is only for the lap belt. To
learn how to wear a lap-shoulder
belt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt on To make the belt longer, tilt the latch
page 3‑22. plate and pull it along the belt.
The vehicle may have a center Buckle, position and release it the
seating position. When you sit in the same way as the lap part of a
center front seating position, you lap-shoulder belt.
have a lap safety belt, which has no
retractor.
A pregnant woman should wear a

lap-shoulder belt, and the lap
portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding,
throughout the pregnancy.
Safety Belt Extender from doing its job. See your dealer
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten safety belts may not protect you in a
around you, you should use it. crash. They can rip apart under
But if a safety belt is not long impact forces. If a belt is torn or
enough, your dealer will order you frayed, get a new one right away.
an extender. When you go in to Make sure the safety belt reminder
order it, take the heaviest coat you light is working. See Safety Belt
will wear, so the extender will be Reminders on page 5‑17.
long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone Keep safety belts clean and dry.
else use it, and use it only for the See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑29.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free seat it is made to fit. The extender
has been designed for adults. Never Safety Belt Care
end as shown until the belt is snug.
use it for securing child seats. To Keep belts clean and dry.
If the belt is not long enough, see wear it, attach it to the regular safety
Safety Belt Extender on page 3‑29. belt. For more information, see the
Make sure the release button on the instruction sheet that comes with { WARNING
buckle is positioned so you would the extender. Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
be able to unbuckle the safety belt It may severely weaken them. In
quickly if necessary. Safety System Check a crash, they might not be able to
If you find that the latch plate will Now and then, check that the safety provide adequate protection.
not go fully into the buckle, see if belt reminder light, safety belts, Clean safety belts only with mild
you are using the correct buckle. Be buckles, latch plates, retractors, and soap and lukewarm water.
sure that the latch plate clicks when anchorages are all working properly.
inserted into the buckle. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts
that might keep a safety belt system
Replacing Safety Belt After a minor crash, replacement of Airbag System

safety belts may not be necessary.
System Parts after a But the safety belt assemblies that The vehicle has the following
Crash were used during any crash may airbags:
have been stressed or damaged. . A frontal airbag for the driver.
{ WARNING See your dealer to have the safety
belt assemblies inspected or . A frontal airbag for the right front
A crash can damage the safety replaced. passenger.
belt system in the vehicle. New parts and repairs may be . A roof-rail airbag for the driver
A damaged safety belt system necessary even if the safety belt and passenger directly behind
may not properly protect the system was not being used at the the driver.
person using it, resulting in time of the crash. . A roof-rail airbag for the right
serious injury or even death in a front passenger and the person
Have the safety belt pretensioners
crash. To help make sure the seated directly behind that
checked if the vehicle has been in a
safety belt systems are working passenger.
crash, or if the airbag readiness light
properly after a crash, have them stays on after you start the vehicle
inspected and any necessary The vehicle may have the following
or while you are driving. See Airbag airbags:
replacements made as soon as Readiness Light on page 5‑18.
possible. . A seat‐mounted side impact
airbag for the driver.
. A seat‐mounted side impact
airbag for the right front
passenger.
. If the vehicle has a third row
seat, it will have a third row
roof-rail airbag.
All of the airbags in the vehicle will Here are the most important things
have the word AIRBAG embossed to know about the airbag system: { WARNING
in the trim or on an attached label
Because airbags inflate with great
near the deployment opening. { WARNING force and faster than the blink of
For frontal airbags, the word an eye, anyone who is up
AIRBAG will appear on the middle You can be severely injured or
killed in a crash if you are not against, or very close to any
part of the steering wheel for the airbag when it inflates can be
driver and on the instrument panel wearing your safety belt — even if
you have airbags. Airbags are seriously injured or killed. Do not
for the right front passenger.
designed to work with safety sit unnecessarily close to any
With seat‐mounted side impact airbag, as you would be if sitting
belts, but do not replace them.
airbags, the word AIRBAG will on the edge of the seat or leaning
Also, airbags are not designed to
appear on the side of the seatback forward. Safety belts help keep
closest to the door. deploy in every crash. In some
crashes safety belts are your only you in position before and during
With roof-rail airbags, the word restraint. See When Should an a crash. Always wear a safety
AIRBAG will appear along the Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑35. belt, even with airbags. The driver
headliner or trim. should sit as far back as possible
Wearing your safety belt during a while still maintaining control of
Airbags are designed to supplement crash helps reduce your chance
the protection provided by safety the vehicle.
of hitting things inside the vehicle
belts. Even though today's airbags Occupants should not lean on or
or being ejected from it. Airbags
are also designed to help reduce sleep against the door or side
the risk of injury from the force of an are “supplemental restraints” to
the safety belts. Everyone in your windows in seating positions with
inflating bag, all airbags must inflate seat-mounted side impact airbags
very quickly to do their job. vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is and/or roof-rail airbags.
an airbag for that person.
Where Are the Airbags?

{ WARNING
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag
when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus There is an airbag readiness light
lap-shoulder belts offer protection on the instrument panel cluster,
for adults and older children, but which shows the airbag symbol.
not for young children and infants.
The system checks the airbag
Neither the vehicle safety belt
electrical system for malfunctions.
system nor its airbag system is
The light tells you if there is an
designed for them. Young electrical problem. See Airbag
children and infants need the Readiness Light on page 5‑18 for
protection that a child restraint more information.
system can provide. Always The driver frontal airbag is in the
secure children properly in the middle of the steering wheel.
vehicle. To read how, see Older
Children on page 3‑47 or Infants
and Young Children on
page 3‑49.
The right front passenger frontal Driver Side Shown, Passenger Driver Side Shown, Passenger
airbag is in the instrument panel on Side Similar Side Similar
the passenger's side. If the vehicle has seat‐mounted side The roof-rail airbags for the driver,
impact airbags for the driver and right front passenger, and second
right front passenger, they are in the row outboard passengers are in the
side of the seatbacks closest to ceiling above the side windows.
the door.
{ WARNING WARNING (Continued)

If something is between an Do not use seat accessories that
occupant and an airbag, the block the inflation path of a
airbag might not inflate properly seat-mounted side impact airbag.
or it might force the object into
Never secure anything to the roof
that person causing severe injury
of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags
or even death. The path of an
by routing a rope or tie‐down
inflating airbag must be kept
through any door or window
clear. Do not put anything
opening. If you do, the path of an
between an occupant and an
inflating roof-rail airbag will be
Driver Side Shown, Passenger airbag, and do not attach or put
blocked.
Side Similar anything on the steering wheel
hub or on or near any other
If the vehicle has a third row airbag covering.
passenger seat, the roof-rail airbags
are located in the ceiling above the (Continued)
rear windows for the outboard
passenger positions in the third row.
When Should an Airbag Frontal airbags may inflate at Frontal airbags are not intended to
different crash speeds. For inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
Inflate? example: impacts, or in many side impacts.
Frontal airbags are designed to . If the vehicle hits a stationary In addition, the vehicle has
inflate in moderate to severe frontal object, the airbags could inflate dual-stage frontal airbags.
or near-frontal crashes to help at a different crash speed than if Dual-stage airbags adjust the
reduce the potential for severe the vehicle hits a moving object. restraint according to crash severity.
injuries mainly to the driver's or right The vehicle has electronic frontal
front passenger's head and chest. . If the vehicle hits an object that
deforms, the airbags could sensors, which help the sensing
However, they are only designed to system distinguish between a
inflate if the impact exceeds a inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits an object moderate frontal impact and a more
predetermined deployment severe frontal impact. For moderate
threshold. Deployment thresholds does not deform.
frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags
are used to predict how severe a . If the vehicle hits a narrow object inflate at a level less than full
crash is likely to be in time for the (like a pole), the airbags could deployment. For more severe frontal
airbags to inflate and help restrain inflate at a different crash speed impacts, full deployment occurs.
the occupants. than if the vehicle hits a wide
object (like a wall). The vehicle has a seat position
Whether the frontal airbags will or sensor. Vehicles with dual stage
should deploy is not based on how . If the vehicle goes into an object airbags also have seat position
fast the vehicle is traveling. at an angle, the airbags could sensors which enable the sensing
It depends largely on what you hit, inflate at a different crash speed system to monitor the position of the
the direction of the impact, and how than if the vehicle goes straight driver seat and may or may not
quickly the vehicle slows down. into the object. monitor the position of the front
Thresholds can also vary with passenger seat.
specific vehicle design.
The seat position sensor provides Roof-rail airbags are not intended What Makes an Airbag
information that is used to determine to inflate in rear impacts. A
if the airbags should deploy at a seat‐mounted side impact airbag is
Inflate?
reduced level or at full deployment. intended to deploy on the side of the In a deployment event, the sensing
The vehicle may or may not have vehicle that is struck. Both roof-rail system sends an electrical signal
seat‐mounted side impact airbags. airbags will deploy when either side triggering a release of gas from the
The vehicle has roof-rail airbags. of the vehicle is struck or if the inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
See Airbag System on page 3‑30. sensing system predicts that the airbag causing the bag to break out
Seat‐mounted side impact airbags vehicle is about to roll over, or in a of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
and roof-rail airbags are intended to severe frontal impact. the airbag, and related hardware are
inflate in moderate to severe side In any particular crash, no one can all part of the airbag module.
crashes. In addition, these roof-rail say whether an airbag should have Frontal airbag modules are located
airbags are intended to inflate inflated simply because of the inside the steering wheel and
during a rollover or in a severe damage to a vehicle or because of instrument panel. For vehicles with
frontal impact. Seat‐mounted side what the repair costs were. For seat‐mounted side impact airbags,
impact airbags and roof-rail airbags frontal airbags, inflation is there are airbags modules in the
will inflate if the crash severity is determined by what the vehicle hits, side of the front seatbacks closest
above the system's designed the angle of the impact, and how to the door. For vehicles with
threshold level. The threshold level quickly the vehicle slows down. For roof-rail airbags, there are airbag
can vary with specific vehicle seat‐mounted side impact and modules in the ceiling of the vehicle,
design. roof-rail airbags, deployment is near the side windows that have
determined by the location and occupant seating positions.
severity of the side impact. In a
rollover event, roof-rail airbag
deployment is determined by the
direction of the roll.
How Does an Airbag Rollover capable roof-rail airbags What Will You See after
are designed to help contain the
Restrain? head and chest of occupants in the
an Airbag Inflates?
In moderate to severe frontal or outboard seating positions in the After the frontal airbags and
near frontal collisions, even belted first, second, and third rows, seat-mounted side impact airbags
occupants can contact the steering if equipped with a third row seat. inflate, they quickly deflate, so
wheel or the instrument panel. In The rollover capable roof-rail quickly that some people may not
moderate to severe side collisions, airbags are designed to help reduce even realize an airbag inflated.
even belted occupants can contact the risk of full or partial ejection in Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
the inside of the vehicle. rollover events, although no system partially inflated for some time after
can prevent all such ejections. they deploy. Some components of
Airbags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Frontal But airbags would not help in many the airbag module may be hot for
airbags distribute the force of the types of collisions, primarily several minutes. For location of the
impact more evenly over the because the occupant's motion is airbag modules, see What Makes
occupant's upper body, stopping not toward those airbags. See When an Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑36.
the occupant more gradually. Should an Airbag Inflate? on
Seat‐mounted side impact and page 3‑35 for more information.
roof-rail airbags distribute the force Airbags should never be regarded
of the impact more evenly over the as anything more than a supplement
occupant's upper body. to safety belts.
The parts of the airbag that come off the interior lamps and hazard
into contact with you may be warm, { WARNING warning flashers by using the
but not too hot to touch. There may controls for those features.
be some smoke and dust coming When an airbag inflates, there
may be dust in the air. This dust
from the vents in the deflated
airbags. Airbag inflation does not could cause breathing problems { WARNING
prevent the driver from seeing out of for people with a history of A crash severe enough to inflate
the windshield or being able to steer asthma or other breathing trouble. the airbags may have also
the vehicle, nor does it prevent To avoid this, everyone in the damaged important functions in
people from leaving the vehicle. vehicle should get out as soon as the vehicle, such as the fuel
it is safe to do so. If you have system, brake and steering
breathing problems but cannot systems, etc. Even if the vehicle
get out of the vehicle after an appears to be drivable after a
airbag inflates, then get fresh air moderate crash, there may be
by opening a window or a door. concealed damage that could
If you experience breathing make it difficult to safely operate
problems following an airbag the vehicle.
deployment, you should seek
medical attention. Use caution if you should attempt
to restart the engine after a crash
has occurred.
The vehicle may have a feature that
may automatically unlock the doors,
turn on the interior lamps and
hazard warning flashers, and shut
off the fuel system after the airbags
inflate. You can lock the doors, turn
In many crashes severe enough to

. Let only qualified technicians
inflate the airbag, windshields are work on the airbag systems.
broken by vehicle deformation. Improper service can mean that
Additional windshield breakage may an airbag system will not work
also occur from the right front properly. See your dealer for
passenger airbag. service.
. Airbags are designed to inflate United States
only once. After an airbag
Passenger Sensing
inflates, you will need some new System
parts for the airbag system. If the vehicle has the passenger
If you do not get them, the airbag status indicator pictured in
airbag system will not be there the following illustration, then the
to help protect you in another vehicle has a passenger sensing
crash. A new system will include system for the right front passenger
airbag modules and possibly Canada and Mexico
position. The passenger airbag
other parts. The service manual status indicator, if equipped, is The words ON and OFF, or the
for your vehicle covers the need visible on the overhead console symbols for on and off, will be
to replace other parts. when the vehicle is started. visible during the system check.
. The vehicle has a crash sensing If you are using remote start,
In addition, if the vehicle has a if equipped, to start the vehicle from
and diagnostic module which passenger sensing system for the
records information after a a distance, you may not see the
right front passenger position, the system check. When the system
crash. See Vehicle Data label on the vehicle's sun visors
Recording and Privacy on check is complete, either the word
refers to “ADVANCED AIRBAGS”. ON or OFF, or the symbol for on or
page 13‑20 and Event Data
Recorders on page 13‑20. off, will be visible. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on
page 5‑18.
The passenger sensing system will We recommend that children be

turn off the right front passenger secured in a rear seat, including: an WARNING (Continued)
frontal airbag under certain infant or a child riding in a
conditions. The driver airbag, rear-facing child restraint; a child passenger airbag inflates and the
seat‐mounted side impact airbags riding in a forward-facing child seat; passenger seat is in a forward
(if equipped) and the roof-rail an older child riding in a booster position.
airbags are not affected by the seat; and children, who are large Even if the passenger sensing
passenger sensing system. enough, using safety belts. system has turned off the right
The passenger sensing system A label on the sun visor says, front passenger frontal airbag, no
works with sensors that are part of “Never put a rear-facing child seat in system is fail-safe. No one can
the right front passenger seat and the front.” This is because the risk to guarantee that an airbag will not
safety belt. The sensors are the rear-facing child is so great, deploy under some unusual
designed to detect the presence of if the airbag deploys. circumstance, even though the
a properly-seated occupant and airbag is turned off.
determine if the right front
passenger frontal airbag should be
{ WARNING Secure rear-facing child
enabled (may inflate) or not. restraints in a rear seat, even if
A child in a rear-facing child
the airbag is off. If you secure a
According to accident statistics, restraint can be seriously
forward-facing child restraint in
children are safer when properly injured or killed if the right front
the right front seat, always move
secured in a rear seat in the correct passenger airbag inflates.
the front passenger seat as far
child restraint for their weight This is because the back of the
back as it will go. It is better to
and size. rear-facing child restraint would
secure the child restraint in a
be very close to the inflating
rear seat.
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
(Continued)
The passenger sensing system is The passenger sensing system is

designed to turn off the right front designed to turn on (may inflate) the { WARNING
passenger frontal airbag if: right front passenger frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a If the airbag readiness light ever
. The right front passenger seat is comes on and stays on, it means
unoccupied. person of adult size is sitting
properly in the right front that something may be wrong
. The system determines an infant passenger seat. with the airbag system. To help
is present in a child restraint. avoid injury to yourself or others,
When the passenger sensing have the vehicle serviced right
. A right front passenger takes system has allowed the airbag to be
his/her weight off of the seat for away. See Airbag Readiness
enabled, the on indicator will light
a period of time. Light on page 5‑18 for more
and stay lit as a reminder that the
airbag is active. information, including important
. There is a critical problem with safety information.
the airbag system or the For some children, including
passenger sensing system. children in child restraints, and for
very small adults, the passenger If the On Indicator is Lit for a
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front sensing system may or may not turn Child Restraint
passenger frontal airbag, the off off the right front passenger frontal If a child restraint has been installed
indicator will light and stay lit as a airbag, depending upon the and the on indicator is lit:
reminder that the airbag is off. See person's seating posture and body
build. Everyone in the vehicle who 1. Turn the vehicle off.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 5‑18. has outgrown child restraints 2. Remove the child restraint from
should wear a safety belt the vehicle.
properly — whether or not there is
an airbag for that person. 3. Remove any additional items
from the seat such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
4. Reinstall the child restraint 6. Restart the vehicle. properly in the seat. If this happens,
following the directions provided The passenger sensing system use the following steps to allow the
by the child restraint may or may not turn off the system to detect that person and
manufacturer and refer to airbag for a child in a child enable the right front passenger
Securing Child Restraints (Rear restraint depending upon the frontal airbag:
Seat Position) on page 3‑63 or child’s seating posture and body 1. Turn the vehicle off.
Securing Child Restraints (Right build. It is better to secure the
Front Seat Position) on 2. Remove any additional material
child restraint in a rear seat. from the seat, such as blankets,
page 3‑66 or Securing Child
Restraints (Center Front Seat If the Off Indicator is Lit for an cushions, seat covers, seat
Position) on page 3‑66. Adult-Size Occupant heaters, or seat massagers.
5. If, after reinstalling the child 3. Place the seatback in the fully
restraint and restarting the upright position.
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, 4. Have the person sit upright in
turn the vehicle off. Then slightly the seat, centered on the seat
recline the vehicle seatback and cushion, with legs comfortably
adjust the seat cushion, extended.
if adjustable, to make sure that
the vehicle seatback is not 5. Restart the vehicle and have the
pushing the child restraint into person remain in this position for
the seat cushion. two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
Also make sure the child
restraint is not trapped under the
vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head If a person of adult size is sitting in
restraint. See Head Restraints the right front passenger seat, but
on page 3‑2. the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting
Additional Factors Affecting A thick layer of additional material,

System Operation such as a blanket or cushion, { WARNING
or aftermarket equipment such as
Safety belts help keep the seat covers, seat heaters, and seat Stowing of articles under the
passenger in position on the seat massagers, can affect how well the passenger seat or between the
during vehicle maneuvers and passenger sensing system passenger seat cushion and
braking, which helps the passenger operates. We recommend that you seatback may interfere with the
sensing system maintain the not use seat covers or other proper operation of the passenger
passenger airbag status. See aftermarket equipment except when sensing system.
“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” approved by GM for your specific
in the Index for additional vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
information about the importance the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
of proper restraint use. page 3‑44 for more information
If the shoulder portion of the belt is about modifications that can affect
pulled out all the way, the child how the system operates.
restraint locking feature will be The on indicator may be lit if an
engaged. This may unintentionally object, such as a briefcase,
cause the passenger sensing handbag, grocery bag, laptop,
system to turn the airbag off for or other electronic device, is put on
some adult‐size occupants. If this an unoccupied seat. If this is not
happens, let the belt go back all the desired, remove the object from
way and start again. the seat.
Servicing the WARNING (Continued)

sensors, side impact sensors,
or airbag wiring can affect the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle operation of the airbag system.
Airbags affect how the vehicle proper service procedures, and
make sure the person performing In addition, the vehicle may have
should be serviced. There are parts a passenger sensing system for
of the airbag system in several work for you is qualified to do so.
the right front passenger's
places around the vehicle. Your position, which includes sensors
dealer and the service manual have Adding Equipment to the that are part of the passenger's
information about servicing the seat. The passenger sensing
vehicle and the airbag system. To Airbag-Equipped Vehicle system may not operate properly
purchase a service manual, see Q: Is there anything I might add if the original seat trim is
Service Publications Ordering to or change about the vehicle replaced with non-GM covers,
Information on page 13‑18. that could keep the airbags upholstery or trim, or with GM
from working properly? covers, upholstery or trim
{ WARNING A: Yes. If you add things that designed for a different vehicle.
change your vehicle's frame, Any object, such as an
For up to 10 seconds after the aftermarket seat heater or a
bumper system, height, front end
vehicle is turned off and the comfort enhancing pad or
or side sheet metal, they may
battery is disconnected, an airbag keep the airbag system from device, installed under or on top
can still inflate during improper working properly. Changing or of the seat fabric, could also
service. You can be injured if you moving any parts of the front interfere with the operation of
are close to an airbag when it seats, safety belts, the airbag the passenger sensing system.
inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. sensing and diagnostic module, This could either prevent proper
They are probably part of the steering wheel, instrument deployment of the passenger
airbag system. Be sure to follow panel, roof-rail airbag modules, airbag(s) or prevent the
ceiling headliner or pillar garnish passenger sensing system from
(Continued) properly turning off the
trim, overhead console, front
passenger airbag(s). See Q: What if I added a snow plow? Q: Because I have a disability,
Passenger Sensing System on Will it keep the airbags from I have to get my vehicle
page 3‑39. working properly? modified. How can I find out
If you have any questions A: We have designed our airbag whether this will affect my
about this, you should contact systems to work properly under airbag system?
Customer Assistance before you a wide range of conditions, A: If you have questions, call
modify your vehicle. The phone including snow plowing with Customer Assistance. The
numbers and addresses for vehicles that have the optional phone numbers and addresses
Customer Assistance are in Snow Plow Prep Package for Customer Assistance are in
Step Two of the Customer (RPO VYU). But do not change Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this or defeat the snow plow's Satisfaction Procedure in this
manual. See Customer “tripping mechanism.” If you do, manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure (U.S. and it can damage your snow plow Satisfaction Procedure (U.S. and
Canada) on page 13‑1 or and your vehicle, and it may Canada) on page 13‑1 or
Customer Satisfaction cause an airbag inflation. Customer Satisfaction
Procedure (Mexico) on Procedure (Mexico) on
page 13‑3. page 13‑3.
If the vehicle has rollover In addition, your dealer and the
roof-rail airbags, see Different service manual have information
Size Tires and Wheels on about the location of the airbag
page 10‑68 for additional sensors, sensing and diagnostic
important information. module and airbag wiring.
Airbag System Check Replacing Airbag System If an airbag inflates, you will need to
replace airbag system parts. See
The airbag system does not need Parts after a Crash your dealer for service.
regularly scheduled maintenance or
If the airbag readiness light stays on
replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See
{ WARNING after the vehicle is started or comes
Airbag Readiness Light on A crash can damage the on when you are driving, the airbag
page 5‑18. airbag systems in the vehicle. system may not work properly. Have
A damaged airbag system the vehicle serviced right away. See
Notice: If an airbag covering is Airbag Readiness Light on
damaged, opened, or broken, the may not work properly and
page 5‑18.
airbag may not work properly. Do may not protect you and your
not open or break the airbag passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
coverings. If there are any in serious injury or even death.
opened or broken airbag covers, To help make sure the airbag
have the airbag covering and/or systems are working properly
airbag module replaced. For the after a crash, have them
location of the airbags, see inspected and any necessary
Where Are the Airbags? on replacements made as soon as
page 3‑32. See your dealer for possible.
service.

. Can proper safety belt fit be
Child Restraints The manufacturer's instructions that
come with the booster seat state the maintained for the length of the
weight and height limitations for that trip? If yes, continue. If no,
Older Children booster. Use a booster seat with a return to the booster seat.
lap-shoulder belt until the child Q: What is the proper way to
passes the fit test below: wear safety belts?
. Sit all the way back on the seat. A: An older child should wear a
Do the knees bend at the seat lap-shoulder belt and get the
edge? If yes, continue. If no, additional restraint a shoulder
return to the booster seat. belt can provide. The shoulder
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. belt should not cross the face or
Does the shoulder belt rest on neck. The lap belt should fit
the shoulder? If yes, continue. snugly below the hips, just
If no, try using the rear safety touching the top of the thighs.
belt comfort guide. See “Rear This applies belt force to the
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” child's pelvic bones in a crash.
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on It should never be worn over the
Older children who have outgrown abdomen, which could cause
booster seats should wear the severe or even fatal internal
If the shoulder belt still does not
vehicle safety belts. injuries in a crash.
rest on the shoulder, then return
to the booster seat. Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
. Does the lap belt fit low and Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
snug on the hips, touching the page 3‑22.
thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
According to accident statistics,

children and infants are safer when WARNING (Continued)
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint belt. The belt force would then be
system secured in a rear seating applied right on the abdomen.
position. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should
In a crash, children who are not go over the shoulder and across
buckled up can strike other people the chest.
who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older
children need to use safety belts
properly.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Never allow a child to wear the
Never allow more than one child
safety belt with the shoulder belt
to wear the same safety belt. The
behind their back. A child can be
safety belt cannot properly spread
seriously injured by not wearing
the impact forces. In a crash, they
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a
can be crushed together and
crash, the child would not be
seriously injured. A safety belt
restrained by the shoulder belt.
must be used by only one person
The child could move too far
at a time.
forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child
might also slide under the lap
(Continued)
Infants and Young Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offer

WARNING (Continued)
protection for adults and older
Children children, but not for young children
Everyone in a vehicle needs and infants. Neither the vehicle's arms. An infant should be
protection! This includes infants and safety belt system nor its airbag secured in an appropriate
all other children. Neither the system is designed for them. Every restraint.
distance traveled nor the age and time infants and young children ride
size of the traveler changes the in vehicles, they should have the
need, for everyone, to use safety protection provided by appropriate
restraints. In fact, the law in every child restraints.
state in the United States and in Children who are not restrained
every Canadian province says properly can strike other people,
children up to some age must be or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
restrained while in a vehicle.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Never hold an infant or a child
Children can be seriously injured while riding in a vehicle. Due to
or strangled if a shoulder belt is crash forces, an infant or a child
wrapped around their neck and will become so heavy it is not
the safety belt continues to possible to hold it during a crash.
tighten. Never leave children For example, in a crash at only
unattended in a vehicle and never 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
allow children to play with the infant will suddenly become a
safety belts. 110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
(Continued)
sure it is designed to be used in

{ WARNING a motor vehicle. If it is, the
restraint will have a label saying
Children who are up against, that it meets federal motor
or very close to, any airbag when vehicle safety standards.
it inflates can be seriously injured
The restraint manufacturer's
or killed. Never put a rear-facing
instructions that come with the
child restraint in the right front
restraint state the weight and
seat. Secure a rear-facing child height limitations for a particular
restraint in a rear seat. It is also child restraint. In addition, there
better to secure a forward-facing are many kinds of restraints
child restraint in a rear seat. If you available for children with
must secure a forward-facing Q: What are the different types of special needs.
child restraint in the right front add-on child restraints?
seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it
A: Add-on child restraints, which { WARNING
are purchased by the vehicle
will go. To reduce the risk of neck and
owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular head injury during a crash, infants
restraint should take into need complete support. In a
consideration not only the child's crash, if an infant is in a
weight, height, and age but also rear-facing child restraint, the
whether or not the restraint will crash forces can be distributed
be compatible with the motor across the strongest part of an
vehicle in which it will be used. infant's body, the back and
For most basic types of child shoulders. Infants should always
restraints, there are many be secured in rear-facing child
different models available. When restraints.
purchasing a child restraint, be
Child Restraint Systems

{ WARNING
A young child's hip bones are still
so small that the vehicle's regular
safety belt may not remain low on
the hip bones, as it should.
Instead, it may settle up around
the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a
body area that is unprotected by
any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal Forward-Facing Child Seat
injuries. To reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries during a Rear-Facing Infant Seat A forward-facing child seat provides
crash, young children should restraint for the child's body with the
A rear-facing infant seat provides harness.
always be secured in appropriate restraint with the seating surface
child restraints. against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
Securing an Add-On Child Children can be endangered in a

Restraint in the Vehicle crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
{ WARNING When securing an add-on child
restraint, refer to the instructions
A child can be seriously injured or that come with the restraint which
killed in a crash if the child may be on the restraint itself or in a
restraint is not properly secured in booklet, or both, and to this manual.
the vehicle. Secure the child The child restraint instructions are
restraint properly in the vehicle important, so if they are not
using the vehicle safety belt or available, obtain a replacement
LATCH system, following the copy from the manufacturer.
Booster Seats instructions that came with that Keep in mind that an unsecured
A booster seat is a child restraint child restraint and the instructions child restraint can move around in a
designed to improve the fit of the in this manual. collision or sudden stop and injure
vehicle's safety belt system. people in the vehicle. Be sure to
A booster seat can also help a child To help reduce the chance of injury, properly secure any child restraint in
to see out the window. the child restraint must be secured the vehicle— even when no child is
in the vehicle. Child restraint in it.
systems must be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by
the LATCH system. See Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3‑55.
In some areas of the United States Securing the Child Within the Where to Put the
and Canada, Certified Child Child Restraint
Passenger Safety Technicians
Restraint
(CPSTs) are available to inspect
and demonstrate how to correctly
{ WARNING According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
use and install child restraints. In A child can be seriously injured or properly restrained in a child
the U.S., refer to the National killed in a crash if the child is not restraint system or infant restraint
Highway Traffic Safety properly secured in the child system secured in a rear seating
Administration (NHTSA) website to restraint. Secure the child position.
locate the nearest child safety seat
properly following the instructions We recommend that children and
inspection station. For CPST
that came with that child restraint. child restraints be secured in a rear
availability in Canada, check with
seat, including: an infant or a child
Transport Canada or the Provincial
riding in a rear-facing child restraint;
Ministry of Transportation office.
a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat; an older child riding in a
booster seat; and children, who are
large enough, using safety belts.
A label on your sun visor says,

“Never put a rear-facing child seat in WARNING (Continued) { WARNING
the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, Even if the passenger sensing A child in a child restraint in the
if the airbag deploys. system, if equipped, has turned center front seat can be badly
off the right front passenger injured or killed by the frontal
frontal airbag, no system is airbags if they inflate. Never
{ WARNING fail-safe. No one can guarantee secure a child restraint in the
A child in a rear-facing child that an airbag will not deploy center front seat. It is always
restraint can be seriously injured under some unusual better to secure a child restraint in
or killed if the right front circumstance, even though a rear seat.
passenger airbag inflates. This is it is turned off.
because the back of the Secure rear-facing child Do not use child restraints in the
rear-facing child restraint would restraints in a rear seat, even if center front seat position.
be very close to the inflating the airbag is off. If you secure a When securing a child restraint in a
airbag. A child in a forward-facing forward-facing child restraint in rear seating position, study the
child restraint can be seriously the right front seat, always move instructions that came with your
injured or killed if the right front the front passenger seat as far child restraint to make sure it is
passenger airbag inflates and the back as it will go. It is better to compatible with this vehicle.
passenger seat is in a forward secure the child restraint in a
position. Child restraints and booster seats
rear seat. vary considerably in size, and some
The vehicle may have a See Passenger Sensing System may fit in certain seating positions
passenger sensing system which on page 3‑39 for additional better than others. Always make
is designed to turn off the right information. sure the child restraint is properly
front passenger frontal airbag secured.
under certain conditions.
(Continued)
Depending on where you place the Lower Anchors and When installing a child restraint with
child restraint and the size of the a top tether, you must also use
child restraint, you may not be able
Tethers for Children either the lower anchors or the
to access adjacent safety belt (LATCH System) safety belts to properly secure the
assemblies or LATCH anchors for The LATCH system holds a child child restraint. A child restraint must
additional passengers or child restraint during driving or in a crash. never be attached using only the top
restraints. Adjacent seating This system is designed to make tether and anchor.
positions should not be used if the installation of a child restraint easier. In order to use the LATCH system in
child restraint prevents access to or The LATCH system uses anchors in your vehicle, you need a child
interferes with the routing of the the vehicle and attachments on the restraint that has LATCH
safety belt. child restraint that are made for use attachments. The child restraint
Wherever a child restraint is with the LATCH system. manufacturer will provide you with
installed, be sure to secure the child Make sure that a LATCH-compatible instructions on how to use the child
restraint properly. child restraint is properly installed restraint and its attachments. The
Keep in mind that an unsecured using the anchors, or use the following explains how to attach a
child restraint can move around in a vehicle's safety belts to secure the child restraint with these
collision or sudden stop and injure restraint, following the instructions attachments in your vehicle.
people in the vehicle. Be sure to that came with that restraint, and Not all vehicle seating positions or
properly secure any child restraint in also the instructions in this manual. child restraints have lower anchors
your vehicle — even when no child and attachments or top tether
is in it. anchors and attachments.
Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchor Your child restraint may have a
single tether (A) or a dual
tether (C). Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the top
tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints with top
tethers are designed for use with or
without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars A top tether (A, C) anchors the forward-facing child restraints have
built into the vehicle. There are two top of the child restraint to the a top tether, and that the tether be
lower anchors for each LATCH vehicle. A top tether anchor is built attached. Be sure to read and follow
seating position that will into the vehicle. The top tether the instructions for your child
accommodate a child restraint attachment (B) on the child restraint restraint.
with lower attachments (B). connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in
a crash.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether

Anchor Locations
Second Row — Bucket Third Row Seat

H (Lower Anchor): Seating I (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
Second Row — 60/40 positions with two lower anchors. positions with top tether anchors.
I (Top Tether Anchor): There is one top tether anchor that
H (Lower Anchor): Seating Seating
can be used for either the third row
positions with two lower anchors. positions with top tether anchors.
center or driver side seating position
I (Top Tether Anchor): Seating For models with second row bucket but not both at the same time.
positions with top tether anchors. seats, both rear seating positions
have exposed metal anchors in the For models with a third row seat,
For models with 60/40 second row crease between the seatback and see the information following for
seating, the rear right side the seat cushion. installing a child restraint with a top
passenger and center seating tether in the third row. Never install
positions have exposed metal two top tethers using the same top
anchors in the crease between the tether anchor.
seatback and the seat cushion.
To assist in locating the top tether

anchors, the top tether anchor
symbol appears near the anchors.
Second Row Seat — Bucket Second Row Seat — 60/40

For models with bucket second row For models with 60/40 second row
seating, the top tether anchors are seating, the top tether anchors are
at the bottom rear of the seat at the bottom rear of the seat
cushion for each seating position in cushion for each seating position in
the second row. Be sure to use an the second row. Be sure to use an
anchor on the same side of the anchor on the same side of the
vehicle as the seating position vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be where the child restraint will be
placed. placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in a

position without a top tether anchor WARNING (Continued)
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if child could be seriously injured or
the instructions that come with the killed. Install a LATCH-type child
child restraint say that the top tether restraint properly using the
must be attached. anchors, or use the vehicle safety
belts to secure the restraint,
According to accident statistics, following the instructions that
children and infants are safer when
came with the child restraint and
properly restrained in a child
the instructions in this manual.
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
Third Row Seat position. See Where to Put the
For vehicles with a third row seat, Restraint on page 3‑53 for
additional information.
{ WARNING
there is one top tether anchor at the
bottom rear of the seat cushion that Do not attach more than one child
Securing a Child Restraint
can be used for either the third row restraint to a single anchor.
Designed for the LATCH Attaching more than one child
center or driver side seating
System restraint to a single anchor could
position. Never install two top
tethers using the same top tether cause the anchor or attachment
anchor. { WARNING to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others
If a LATCH-type child restraint is
could be injured. To reduce the
not attached to anchors, the child
risk of serious or fatal injuries
restraint will not be able to protect
during a crash, attach only one
the child correctly. In a crash, the
child restraint per anchor.
(Continued)
Do not fold the empty rear seat 1.2. Put the child restraint on
{ WARNING with a safety belt buckled. This the seat.
could damage the safety belt or 1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
Children can be seriously injured the seat. Unbuckle and return the
or strangled if a shoulder belt is attachments on the child
safety belt to its stowed position, restraint to the lower
wrapped around their neck and before folding the seat.
the safety belt continues to anchors.
tighten. Buckle any unused safety 1. Attach and tighten the lower 2. If the child restraint manufacturer
belts behind the child restraint so attachments to the lower recommends that the top tether
anchors. If the child restraint be attached, attach and tighten
children cannot reach them. Pull
does not have lower the top tether to the top tether
the shoulder belt all the way out
attachments or the desired anchor, if equipped. Refer to the
of the retractor to set the lock, seating position does not have
if the vehicle has one, after the child restraint instructions and
lower anchors, secure the child the following steps:
child restraint has been installed. restraint with the top tether and
the safety belts. Refer to your 2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
Notice: Do not let the LATCH child restraint manufacturer
attachments rub against the instructions and the instructions
vehicle’s safety belts. This may in this manual.
damage these parts. If necessary, 1.1. Find the lower anchors for
move buckled safety belts to the desired seating
avoid rubbing the LATCH position.
attachments.
2.2. Route, attach, and tighten

the top tether according to
your child restraint
instructions and the
following instructions:
. If the position you are using . If the position you are using
does not have a headrest has an adjustable headrest
or head restraint and you or head restraint and you
are using a dual tether, are using a single tether,
route the tether over the raise the headrest or head
seatback. restraint and route the
. If the position you are using tether under the headrest or
does not have a headrest head restraint and in
or head restraint and you between the headrest or
are using a single tether, head restraint posts.
route the tether over the
seatback.
Replacing LATCH System

Parts After a Crash
{ WARNING
A crash can damage the LATCH
system in the vehicle. A damaged
LATCH system may not properly
. If the position you are using secure the child restraint,
has a fixed or an adjustable resulting in serious injury or even
headrest or head restraint death in a crash. To help make
and you are using a dual sure the LATCH system is
. If the position you are using
tether, route the tether working properly after a crash,
has a fixed headrest or
around the headrest or see your dealer to have the
head restraint and you are
using a single tether, route head restraint. system inspected and any
the tether around the 3. Before placing a child in the necessary replacements made as
inboard or outboard side of child restraint, make sure it is soon as possible.
the headrest or head securely held in place. To check,
restraint. grasp the child restraint at the If the vehicle has the LATCH system
LATCH path and attempt to and it was being used during a
move it side‐to‐side and crash, new LATCH system parts
back‐and‐forth. There should may be needed.
be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of
movement, for proper New parts and repairs may be
installation. necessary even if the LATCH
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
Securing Child Restraints In Canada, the law requires that Use the following pictures to
forward-facing child restraints have determine the latch plate style:
(Rear Seat Position) a top tether, and that the tether be
When securing a child restraint in a attached.
rear seating position, study the If the child restraint does not have
instructions that came with the child the LATCH system, you will be
restraint to make sure it is using the safety belt to secure the
compatible with this vehicle. child restraint in this position. Be
If the child restraint has the LATCH sure to follow the instructions that
system, see Lower Anchors and came with the child restraint. Secure
Tethers for Children (LATCH the child in the child restraint when
System) on page 3‑55 for how and and as the instructions say.
where to install the child restraint If more than one child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint is needs to be installed in the rear
secured in the vehicle using a seat, be sure to read Where to Put Free‐Falling Latch Plate
safety belt and it uses a top tether, the Restraint on page 3‑53.
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on The vehicle's lap‐shoulder belts for
page 3‑55 for top tether anchor the first and second row seating
locations. positions are equipped with
free‐falling latch plates. If the
Do not secure a child seat in a vehicle has a third row, the
position without a top tether anchor lap‐shoulder belts have either
if a national or local law requires free‐falling or cinching latch plates.
that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
Cinching Latch Plate For third row seating positions, 3. Push the latch plate into the
1. Put the child restraint on with cinching latch plates, tilt the buckle until it clicks.
the seat. latch plate to adjust the belt if Position the release button on
needed. the buckle so that the safety belt
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of could be quickly unbuckled if
the vehicle's safety belt through necessary.
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
6. If the child restraint has a top

tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑55 for more
information.
7. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
4. For passenger seating positions 5. To tighten the belt, push down safety belt path and attempt to
with a lap‐shoulder belt and a on the child restraint, pull the move it side‐to‐side and
free‐falling latch plate, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to back‐and‐forth. When the child
rest of the shoulder belt all the tighten the lap portion of the belt restraint is properly installed,
way out of the retractor to set and feed the shoulder belt back there should be no more than
the lock. When installing a child into the retractor. When installing 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
restraint using a lap‐shoulder a forward-facing child restraint, it To remove the child restraint,
belt and a cinching latch plate, may be helpful to use your knee unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
skip Step 4 and proceed to to push down on the child let it return to the stowed position.
Step 5. restraint as you tighten the belt. If the top tether is attached to a top
Try to pull the belt out of the tether anchor, disconnect it.
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 4 and 5.
Securing Child Restraints Securing Child Restraints

(Center Front Seat (Right Front Seat
{ WARNING
Position) Position) A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured
This vehicle has airbags. A rear or killed if the right front
{ WARNING seat is a safer place to secure a passenger airbag inflates. This is
forward-facing child restraint. See because the back of the
A child in a child restraint in the Where to Put the Restraint on
center front seat can be badly rear-facing child restraint would
page 3‑53.
injured or killed by the frontal be very close to the inflating
airbags if they inflate. Never In addition, the vehicle may have a airbag. A child in a forward-facing
secure a child restraint in the passenger sensing system which is child restraint can be seriously
designed to turn off the right front injured or killed if the right front
center front seat. It is always
passenger frontal airbag under passenger airbag inflates and the
better to secure a child restraint in
certain conditions. See Passenger passenger seat is in a forward
a rear seat. Sensing System on page 3‑39 and position.
Do not use child restraints in the on page 5‑18 for more information, The vehicle may have a
center front seat position. including important safety passenger sensing system which
information. is designed to turn off the right
A label on the sun visor says, front passenger frontal airbag
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in under certain conditions.
the front.” This is because the risk to Even if the passenger sensing
the rear-facing child is so great if the system, if equipped, has turned
airbag deploys. off the right front passenger
frontal airbag, no system is
(Continued)
If the child restraint has the LATCH In Canada, the law requires that
WARNING (Continued) system, see Lower Anchors and forward-facing child restraints have
Tethers for Children (LATCH a top tether, and that the tether be
fail-safe. No one can guarantee System) on page 3‑55 for how and attached.
that an airbag will not deploy where to install the child restraint
under some unusual You will be using the lap-shoulder
using LATCH. If a child restraint is belt to secure the child restraint in
circumstance, even though secured using a safety belt and it
it is turned off. this position. Follow the instructions
uses a top tether, see Lower that came with the child restraint.
Secure rear-facing child Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3‑55 for 1. Move the seat as far back as it
restraints in a rear seat, even if
top tether anchor locations. will go before securing the
the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint.
forward-facing child restraint in Do not secure a child seat in a
the right front seat, always move position without a top tether anchor 2. Put the child restraint on
the front passenger seat as far if a national or local law requires the seat.
back as it will go. It is better to that the top tether be anchored, or if 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
secure the child restraint in a the instructions that come with the the lap and shoulder portions of
rear seat. child restraint say that the top strap the vehicle's safety belt through
must be anchored. or around the restraint. The child
See Passenger Sensing System
restraint instructions will show
on page 3‑39 for additional
you how.
information.
4. Push the latch plate into the 5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 6. To tighten the belt, push down
buckle until it clicks. out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the
Position the release button on lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to
the buckle so that the safety belt set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt,
could be quickly unbuckled if not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back
necessary. into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint, it
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 5 and 6.
7. Before placing a child in the If a child restraint has been installed

child restraint, make sure it is and the on indicator is lit, see “If the
securely held in place. To check, On Indicator is Lit for a Child
grasp the child restraint at the Restraint” under Passenger Sensing
safety belt path and attempt to System on page 3‑39 for more
move it side‐to‐side and information.
back‐and‐forth. When the child To remove the child restraint,
restraint is properly installed, unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
there should be no more than let it return to the stowed position.
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
If the vehicle is equipped with the
passenger sensing system, and
when the passenger sensing system
has turned off the right front
passenger frontal airbag, the off
indicator in the passenger airbag
status indicator should light and stay
lit when you start the vehicle. See
on page 5‑18.
2 NOTES
Storage 4-1
Storage Storage
Compartments
Storage Compartments
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Glove Box
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Lift up on the glove box lever to
Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 open it.
Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2 Cupholders
Additional Storage Features For vehicles with cupholders located
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 in the front and rear of the floor
Roof Rack System console or in the fold down armrest, Pull downward on the lid to access
adjust the front cupholders by the rear floor console cupholders.
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
moving the insert forward or
rearward. There could also be cupholders
located in the second and third row
seat armrest areas.
Armrest Storage
For vehicles with a rear seat
armrest, pull the loop at the top of
the armrest down to access the
cupholders.
4-2 Storage
Rear Storage Additional Storage To return the cover to the retracted

position:
For vehicles with a rear storage Features 1. Pull up on the cover handle to
area, it is located in the rear cargo
area of the vehicle on the release the cover posts from the
driver side.
Cargo Cover retaining sockets.
2. Let the cover move forward to
Turn the knobs and pull the storage
door to access. The door can be
{ WARNING the full retracted position.
removed. An unsecured cargo cover could To remove the cover from a regular
strike people in a sudden stop or wheelbase model:
Center Console Storage turn, or in a crash. Store the 1. Let the cover go all the way into
For vehicles with a console cargo cover securely or remove it the holder.
compartment, it is located between from the vehicle.
2. Then, grasping the driver side
the bucket seats. cover end cap, push the cover
Press the button and lift the lid to To use the cargo cover, if equipped: end cap toward the passenger
access the console compartment. 1. Pull the cover handle toward the side of the vehicle.
A cupholder located in the rear of rear of the vehicle. 3. Swing the cover rearward and
the console, swings down for the 2. Latch the cover posts into the take it out of the vehicle.
rear seat passenger to use. retaining sockets on the cargo
area trim panels.
Storage 4-3
To put the cover in the vehicle: Roof Rack System Notice: Loading cargo on the
1. Make sure the cover slot in the roof rack that weighs more than
91 kg (200 lbs) or hangs over the
holder faces rearward with the
round surface facing down.
{ WARNING rear or sides of the vehicle may
damage the vehicle. Load cargo
2. Then, hold the cover at an angle If something is carried on top of so that it rests evenly between
and place the cover end cap into the vehicle that is longer or wider the crossrails, making sure to
the slot in the passenger side than the roof rack — like paneling, fasten cargo securely.
trim panel. plywood, or a mattress — the
wind can catch it while the vehicle To prevent damage or loss of cargo
3. Move the other end of the cover when driving, check to make sure
forward and hold it next to the is being driven. The item being
crossrails and cargo are securely
driver side trim panel slot. carried could be violently torn off,
fastened. Loading cargo on the roof
and this could cause a collision
4. Press the end caps in, to allow rack will make the vehicle’s center
and damage the vehicle. Never of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,
the cover to fit into the trim slot. carry something longer or wider sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden
5. Pull lightly on the cover holder to than the roof rack on top of the braking or abrupt maneuvers,
make sure it is secure. vehicle unless using a GM otherwise it may result in loss of
On extended wheelbase models certified accessory carrier. control. If driving for a long distance,
there are two cover positions. on rough roads, or at high speeds,
The slots furthest forward allow For vehicles with a roof rack, the occasionally stop the vehicle to
the cover to be used if the third rack can be used to load items. make sure the cargo remains in its
seat is removed or folded down. For roof racks that do not have place.
The cover can be installed and crossrails included, GM Certified
removed from either side. crossrails can be purchased as an
accessory. See your dealer for
4-4 Storage
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle

. To carry long items, move the
capacity when loading the vehicle. crossrails as far apart as
For more information on vehicle possible. Tie the load to the
capacity and loading, see Vehicle crossrails and the siderails or
Load Limits on page 9‑16. siderail supports. Also tie the
load to the bumpers, but do not
. If small heavy objects are placed tie the load so tightly that the
on the roof, cut a piece of 9 mm crossrails or siderails are
or 3/8 inch plywood to fit inside damaged.
the crossrails and siderails to
spread the load. Tie the plywood
. After moving a crossrail, be sure
to the siderail supports. it is securely locked into the
siderail.
. Tie the load and secure it to
the crossrails or the siderail A Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
supports. Use the crossrails only (CHMSL) is located above the rear
to keep the load from sliding. To window glass.
move a crossrail, lift the release Make sure items loaded on the roof
lever up, on both sides of the of the vehicle do not block or
rail. Then slide the crossrail to damage the CHMSL.
the desired position balancing
the force side to side. Press the
release lever down on both
sides of the rail, down to tighten
it. Try to slide the crossrail back
and forth slightly to make sure it
is tight.
Instruments and Controls 5-1
Instruments and Engine Coolant Temperature

Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Vehicle Messages
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Controls Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-17
Battery Voltage and Charging
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-18 Brake System Messages . . . . 5-37
Controls Passenger Airbag Status Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Engine Cooling System
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-3 Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-20 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Malfunction Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-40
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-5 Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-40
Rear Window Wiper/ Brake System Warning Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-41
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-41
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Antilock Brake System (ABS) Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Object Detection System
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . 5-24 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-24 Ride Control System
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Traction Control System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Indicators (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-25 Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-44
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Anti-theft Alarm System
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-26 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-26 Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-45
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-27 Vehicle Reminder
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-27 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-27 Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-47
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Engine Oil Pressure
Information Displays
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Driver Information
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
5-2 Instruments and Controls
Vehicle Personalization Controls To adjust the steering wheel:

Vehicle Personalization 1. Hold the steering wheel and pull
(With DIC Buttons) . . . . . . . . 5-47
Steering Wheel the lever.
Universal Remote System Adjustment 2. Move the steering wheel up
Universal Remote System . . . 5-56 or down.
Universal Remote System
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56 3. Release the lever to lock the
Universal Remote System wheel in place.
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61 Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
The tilt lever is located on the lower

left side of the steering column.
Steering Wheel Controls Radio Navigating Folders on an iPod or

To select preset or favorite radio USB Device (Vehicles without a
stations: Navigation System):
1. Press and hold w or c / x
Press and release w or c / x to
go to the next or previous radio while listening to a song until the
station stored as a preset or contents of the current folder
favorite. display on the radio display.
CD/DVD 2. Press and hold c / x to go

back to the previous folder list.
To select tracks on a CD/DVD:
3. Press and release w or c / x
Press and release w or c / x to to scroll up or down the list.
go to the next or previous track.
. To select a folder, press
Selecting Tracks on an iPod or and hold w , or press ¨
If equipped, some audio controls
USB Device (Vehicles without a
can be adjusted at the steering when the folder is
Navigation System)
wheel. highlighted.
w (Next): Press to go to the next 1. Press and hold w or c / x . To go back further in the
favorite radio station, track on a CD, while listening to a song until the folder list, press and hold
or folder on an iPod® or USB contents of the current folder c / x.
device. display on the radio display.
c / x (Previous/End): Press to 2. Press and release w or c / x
go to the previous favorite radio to scroll up or down the list, then
station, track on a CD, or folder on press and hold w , or press ¨ to
an iPod® or USB device. Press to play the highlighted track.
reject an incoming call, or end a
current call.
Navigating an iPod or USB Device 3. Press and release ¨ to move up ¨ (Seek): Press to go to the next
on the Main Audio Screen one track within the selected radio station while in AM,
(Vehicles with a Navigation category. FM, or XM™.
System)
b / g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press For vehicles with or without a
1. Press and release w or c / x to silence the vehicle speakers only. navigation system:
to select the next or previous Press again to turn the sound on.
track within the selected Press ¨ to go to the next track or
For vehicles with Bluetooth or chapter while sourced to the CD or
category.
OnStar systems, press and hold for DVD slot.
2. Press and hold w or c / x to longer than two seconds to interact
move quickly through the tracks. with those systems. See Bluetooth Press ¨ to select a track or a folder
on page 7‑48 and OnStar Overview when navigating folders on an iPod
3. Press and release ¨ to move up on page 14‑1 for more information. or USB device.
one track within the selected SRCE (Source/Voice For vehicles with a navigation
category. Recognition): Press to switch system:
Navigating an iPod or USB Device between the radio and CD, and for
equipped vehicles, the DVD, front 1. Press and hold ¨ until a beep is
on the Music Navigator Screen
(Vehicles with a Navigation auxiliary, and rear auxiliary. heard, to place the radio into
System) SCAN mode. A station will play
For vehicles with the navigation for five seconds before moving
1. Press and release w or c / x system, press and hold this button to the next station.
to select the next or previous for longer than one second to
initiate voice recognition. See “Voice 2. To stop the SCAN function,
track within the selected
Recognition” in the Navigation press ¨ again.
category.
System manual for more
2. Press and hold w or c / x to information.
move quickly through the tracks
within the selected category.
While listening to a CD/DVD, press 8 (Mist): For a single wipe, turn Windshield Washer
and hold ¨ to quickly move forward to 8 , then release. For several
through the tracks. Release to stop wipes, hold the band on 8 longer. { WARNING
on the desired track.
9 (Off): Turns the windshield In freezing weather, do not use
+e: Press to increase volume. wipers off. the washer until the windshield is
−e: Press to decrease volume. 6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes): warmed. Otherwise the washer
Turn the band up for more frequent fluid can form ice on the
windshield, blocking your vision.
Horn wipes or down for less frequent
wipes.
To sound the horn, press the center
pad on the steering wheel. 6 (Low Speed): Slow wipes. L (Washer Fluid): Push this
paddle to spray washer fluid on the
? (High Speed): Fast wipes. windshield. The wipers clear the
Windshield Wiper/Washer Clear ice and snow from the wiper window and then either stop or
blades before using them. If frozen return to the preset speed.
to the windshield, carefully loosen or
thaw them. Damaged wiper blades
should be replaced. See Wiper
Blade Replacement on page 10‑34.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the
wiper motor. A circuit breaker will
The front wiper control is located on stop the motor until it cools down.
the turn and lane‐change lever. Turn
the band with the wiper symbol to
control the windshield wipers.
Rear Window Compass To adjust for compass variance, use

the following procedure:
Wiper/Washer The vehicle may have a compass in
the Driver Information Center (DIC). Compass Variance (Zone)
The rear wiper control is located on
Procedure
the turn and lane‐change lever. Compass Zone
1. Do not set the compass zone
To turn the rear wiper on, slide the The zone is set to zone eight upon when the vehicle is moving. Only
lever to a wiper position. leaving the factory. Your dealer will set it when the vehicle is in
9 (Off): Turns the wiper off. set the correct zone for your P (Park).
location.
5 (Rear Wiper Delay): Turns on Press the vehicle information
the rear wiper delay. Under certain circumstances,
button until PRESS V TO
such as during a long-distance,
Z (Rear Wiper): Turns on the rear cross-country trip or moving to a CHANGE COMPASS ZONE
wiper. new state or province, it will be displays. Or, if the vehicle does
not have DIC buttons, press the
= (Rear Wiper Wash): Press this necessary to compensate for
trip odometer reset stem until
button on the end of the lever to compass variance by resetting the
zone through the DIC if the zone is CHANGE COMPASS ZONE
spray washer fluid on the rear
not set correctly. displays.
window. The wipers will clear the
rear window and either stop or Compass variance is the difference
return to your preset speed. For between the earth's magnetic north
more washer cycles, press and hold and true geographic north. If the
the button. compass is not set to the zone
The rear window wiper/washer will where you live, the compass may
not operate if the liftgate or liftglass give false readings. The compass
is open or ajar. If the liftgate or must be set to the variance zone in
liftglass is opened while the rear which the vehicle is traveling.
wiper is on, the wiper returns to the
parked position and stops.
4. Press the trip/fuel button until If CAL should ever appear in the
the vehicle heading, for DIC display, the compass should be
example, N for North, is calibrated.
displayed in the DIC. Or, if the If the DIC display does not show a
vehicle does not have DIC heading, for example, N for North,
buttons, press and hold the trip or the heading does not change
odometer reset stem for after making turns, there may be a
two seconds to select the next strong magnetic field interfering with
available variance zone. Repeat the compass. Such interference
this step until the appropriate may be caused by a magnetic CB or
variance zone is displayed. cell phone antenna mount, a
5. If calibration is necessary, magnetic emergency light, magnetic
2. Find the vehicle's current calibrate the compass. See note pad holder, or any other
location and variance zone “Compass Calibration magnetic item. Turn off the vehicle,
number on the map. Procedure” following. move the magnetic item, then turn
on the vehicle and calibrate the
Zones 1 through 15 are Compass Calibration compass.
available. The compass can be manually
3. Press the set/reset button to calibrated. Only calibrate the
scroll through and select the compass in a magnetically clean
appropriate variance zone. and safe location, such as an open
parking lot, where driving the
vehicle in circles is not a danger.
It is suggested to calibrate away
from tall buildings, utility wires,
manhole covers, or other industrial
structures, if possible.
To calibrate the compass, use the 3. Press the set/reset button to Clock
following procedure: start the compass calibration. Or,
if the vehicle does not have DIC To set the time and date:
Compass Calibration Procedure buttons, press and hold the trip 1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/
1. Before calibrating the compass, odometer reset stem for ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, then
make sure the compass zone is two seconds to start the press the O button to turn the
set to the variance zone in which compass calibration.
radio on.
the vehicle is located. See 4. The DIC will display
“Compass Variance (Zone) CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN 2. Press the H button to display
Procedure” earlier in this CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle in HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour,
section. tight circles at less than 8 km/h minute, month, day, and year).
Do not operate any switches (5 mph) to complete the 3. Press the softkey located under
such as window, sunroof, calibration. The DIC will display any one of the tabs to change
climate controls, or seats during CALIBRATION COMPLETE that setting.
the calibration procedure. for a few seconds when the
calibration is complete. The DIC 4. To increase the time or date, do
2. Press the vehicle information one of the following:
display will then return to the
button until PRESS V TO previous menu. . Press the softkey below the
CALIBRATE COMPASS selected tab.
displays. Or, if the vehicle does
not have DIC buttons, press the . Press the ¨ SEEK button.
trip odometer reset stem until
CALIBRATE COMPASS
. Press the \ FWD button.
displays. . Turn the f knob clockwise.
5. To decrease the time or date, do Power Outlets

one of the following: { WARNING
The accessory power outlets can be
. Press the © SEEK button. used to plug in electrical equipment, Power is always supplied to the
such as a cell phone or MP3 player. outlets. Do not leave electrical
. Press the s REV button. equipment plugged in when the
There are two under the climate
. Turn the f knob controls, one inside the center floor vehicle is not in use because the
counterclockwise. console, one on the rear of the vehicle could catch fire and cause
center floor console and one injury or death.
To change the time default setting
accessory power outlet in the rear
from 12 hour to 24 hour or to change
cargo area on the passenger side. Notice: Leaving electrical
the date default setting from month/
day/year to day/month/year: Remove the cover to access and equipment plugged in for an
replace when not in use. extended period of time while
1. Press the H button and then the the vehicle is off will drain the
softkey located below the The accessory power outlets are battery. Always unplug electrical
forward arrow tab. 12H, 24H, the powered, even with the ignition off. equipment when not in use and
date MM/DD (month and day), Continuing to use accessory power do not plug in equipment that
and DD/MM/ (day and month) outlets while the ignition is in LOCK/ exceeds the maximum 20 ampere
displays. OFF may cause the vehicle's rating.
battery to run down.
2. Press the softkey located below Certain accessory plugs may not be
the desired option. compatible with the accessory
power outlet and could overload
3. Press the H button again to adapter or vehicle fuses. If a
apply the desired option, or let problem is experienced, see your
the screen time out. dealer.
When adding electrical equipment, Power Outlet 110 Volt An indicator light on the outlet turns
be sure to follow the proper Alternative Current on to show it is in use. The light
installation instructions included comes on when the ignition is in
with the equipment. Do not use The vehicle may have a power ON/RUN and equipment requiring
equipment exceeding the outlet that can be used to plug in less than 150 watts is plugged into
maximum amperage rating of electrical equipment that uses a the outlet, and no system fault is
20 amperes. See Add-On Electrical maximum limit of 150 watts. detected.
Equipment on page 9‑90. If equipment is connected using
Notice: Hanging heavy more than 150 watts or a system
equipment from the power outlet fault is detected, a protection circuit
can cause damage not covered shuts off the power supply and the
by the vehicle warranty. The indicator light turns off. To reset the
power outlets are designed for circuit, unplug the item and plug it
accessory power plugs only, such back in or turn the Remote
as cell phone charge cords. Accessory Power (RAP) off and
then back on. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 9‑27.
The power outlet is located on the

rear of the center console.
The power outlet is not designed for Warning Lights, Gauges can indicate when there
and may not work properly, if the could be a problem with a vehicle
following are plugged in: Gauges, and function. Often gauges and warning
lights work together to indicate a
. Equipment with high initial peak Indicators problem with the vehicle.
wattage such as:
compressor-driven refrigerators Warning lights and gauges can When one of the warning lights
and electric power tools. signal that something is wrong comes on and stays on while
before it becomes serious enough driving, or when one of the gauges
. Other equipment requiring an to cause an expensive repair or
extremely stable power supply shows there may be a problem,
replacement. Paying attention to the check the section that explains what
such as: warning lights and gauges could
microcomputer-controlled to do. Follow this manual's advice.
prevent injury. Waiting to do repairs can be costly
electric blankets, touch sensor
lamps, etc. Warning lights come on when there and even dangerous.
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Some warning lights come
on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
Instrument Cluster
English 6‐Speed Shown, Metric and 2500 Series Similar

If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the Press the reset button, located on Fuel Gauge
hybrid supplement for more the instrument panel cluster next to
information. the trip odometer display, to toggle
between the trip odometer and the
Speedometer regular odometer. Holding the reset
button for approximately one second
The speedometer shows the while the trip odometer is displayed
vehicle's speed in either kilometers resets it.
per hour (km/h) or miles per
hour (mph). To display the odometer reading
with the ignition off, press the reset
Odometer button.
The odometer shows how far the Tachometer

vehicle has been driven, in either
kilometers or miles. The tachometer displays the engine Metric
speed in revolutions per
Trip Odometer minute (rpm).
The trip odometer can show how far If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
the vehicle has been driven since hybrid supplement for more
the trip odometer was last set information.
to zero.
When the fuel tank is low, the FUEL Engine Oil Pressure
LEVEL LOW message appears in
the Driver Information Center (DIC).
Gauge
See Fuel System Messages on
Here are some situations owners
may experience with the fuel gauge.
None of these indicate a problem
with the fuel gauge.
. At the gas station, the fuel pump
shuts off before the gauge
reads full.
English
. It takes a little more or less fuel
The fuel gauge, when the ignition is
to fill up than the fuel gauge
on, shows how much fuel the
indicated. For example, the Metric
vehicle has left in the tank.
gauge may have indicated the
An arrow on the fuel gauge tank was half full, but it actually
indicates the side of the vehicle the took a little more or less than
fuel door is on. half the tank's capacity to fill
The gauge first indicates empty the tank.
before the vehicle is out of fuel, and . The gauge goes back to empty
the vehicle's fuel tank should be when the ignition is turned off.
filled soon.
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
information.
Center (DIC). See Engine Oil Engine Coolant

Messages on page 5‑40 and Engine
Oil on page 10‑7 for more
Temperature Gauge
information.
A reading in the low pressure zone
may be caused by a dangerously
low oil level or some other problem
causing low oil pressure.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil
maintenance can damage the
engine. Driving with the engine
oil low can also damage the
English
engine. The repairs would not be
The oil pressure gauge shows the covered by the vehicle warranty.
engine oil pressure in psi (pounds Check the oil level as soon as
Metric
per square inch) when the engine is possible. Add oil if required, but
running. Canadian vehicles indicate if the oil level is within the
pressure in kPa (kilopascals). operating range and the oil
Oil pressure may vary with engine pressure is still low, have the
speed, outside temperature and oil vehicle serviced. Always follow
viscosity, but readings above the the maintenance schedule for
low pressure zone indicate the changing engine oil.
normal operating range. When the If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
oil pressure reaches the low hybrid supplement for more
pressure zone, the OIL PRESSURE information.
LOW STOP ENGINE message
appears in the Driver Information
See Engine Overheating on When the engine is running, the

page 10‑21. gauge shows the condition of the
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the charging system. The charging
hybrid supplement for more system regulates voltage based on
information. the state of the battery for improved
fuel economy and battery life. The
gauge may transition from a higher
Voltmeter Gauge to lower or a lower to higher
reading, this is normal. Readings
between the low and high warning
zones indicate the normal operating
range. The gauge may also read
English low during the fuel economy mode,
this is normal.
This gauge shows the engine
coolant temperature. Readings in the low warning zone
may occur when a large number of
It also provides an indicator of how electrical accessories are operating
hard the vehicle is working. During a in the vehicle and the engine is left
majority of the operation, the gauge at an idle for an extended period.
reads 100°C (210°F) or less. If you This condition is normal since the
are pulling a load or going up hills, it charging system is not able to
is normal for the temperature to When the engine is not running, but provide full power at engine idle. As
fluctuate and approach the 122°C the ignition is on, this gauge shows engine speeds are increased, this
(250°F) mark. If the gauge reaches the battery's state of charge in condition should correct itself as
the 125°C (260°F) mark, it indicates DC volts. higher engine speeds allow the
that the cooling system is working charging system to create full
beyond its capacity. power. If there is a problem with the
battery charging system, this light
will come on or the SERVICE This cycle may continue several This cycle continues several times if
BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM times if the driver remains or the front passenger remains or
DIC message will display. See becomes unbuckled while the becomes unbuckled while the
Battery Voltage and Charging vehicle is moving. vehicle is moving.
Messages on page 5‑37 and If the driver safety belt is buckled, If the front passenger safety belt is
Charging System Light on neither the light nor the chime buckled, neither the chime nor the
page 5‑20 for more information. comes on. light comes on.
Safety Belt Reminders Passenger Safety Belt The front passenger safety belt
Reminder Light reminder light and chime may turn
Driver Safety Belt Reminder on if an object is put on the seat
Light such as a briefcase, handbag,
grocery bag, laptop, or other
There is a driver safety belt electronic device. To turn off the
reminder light on the instrument reminder light and/or chime, remove
panel cluster. the object from the seat or buckle
the safety belt.
When the vehicle is started, this
light flashes and a chime may come
on to remind front passengers to
fasten their safety belt. Then the
light stays on solid until the belt is
When the vehicle is started, this buckled.
light flashes and a chime may come See Passenger Airbag Status
on to remind the driver to fasten Indicator on page 5‑18.
their safety belt. Then the light stays
on solid until the belt is buckled.
Airbag Readiness Light Passenger Airbag Status

{ WARNING Indicator
The system checks the airbag's
electrical system for possible If the airbag readiness light stays If the vehicle has the airbag status
malfunctions. If the light stays on it on after the vehicle is started or indicator pictured in the following
indicates there is an electrical comes on while driving, it means illustration, then the vehicle has a
problem. The system check includes the airbag system might not be passenger sensing system for the
the airbag sensor(s), passenger working properly. The airbags in right front passenger position. The
sensing system, the pretensioners, the vehicle might not inflate in a passenger airbag status indicator is
the airbag modules, the wiring, and crash, or they could even inflate on the overhead console. See
the crash sensing and diagnostic without a crash. To help avoid Passenger Sensing System on
module. For more information on the injury, have the vehicle serviced page 3‑39 for important safety
airbag system, see Airbag System right away. information.
on page 3‑30.
In addition, if the vehicle has a
If there is a problem with the airbag passenger sensing system for the
system, a Driver Information Center right front passenger position, the
(DIC) message can also come on. label on the vehicle's sun visors
See Airbag System Messages on refers to “ADVANCED AIRBAGS.”
The airbag readiness light comes on

solid for a few seconds when the
engine is started. If the light does
not come on then, have it fixed
immediately.
Then, after several more seconds,

the status indicator will light either { WARNING
ON or OFF, or either the on or off
symbol to let you know the status of If the airbag readiness light ever
the right front passenger frontal comes on and stays on, it means
airbag. that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help
United States If the word ON or the on symbol is avoid injury to yourself or others,
lit on the passenger airbag status have the vehicle serviced right
indicator, it means that the right
away. See Airbag Readiness
front passenger frontal airbag is
Light on page 5‑18 for more
enabled (may inflate).
information, including important
If the word OFF or the off symbol is safety information.
lit on the airbag status indicator, it
Canada and Mexico means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front
When the vehicle is started, the passenger frontal airbag.
passenger airbag status indicator
will light ON and OFF, or the If, after several seconds, both status
symbols for on and off, for indicator lights remain on, or if there
several seconds as a system check. are no lights at all, there may be a
If you are using remote start, problem with the lights or the
if equipped, to start the vehicle from passenger sensing system. See
a distance, you may not see the your dealer for service.
system check.
Charging System Light checked right away. If the vehicle

must be driven a short distance with
the light on, turn off accessories,
such as the radio and air
conditioner.
hybrid supplement for more If the malfunction indicator lamp
information. comes on and stays on while the
This light comes on briefly when the engine is running, this indicates that
ignition key is turned to START, but Malfunction there is an OBD II problem and
service is required.
the engine is not running, as a Indicator Lamp
check to show it is working. Malfunctions often are indicated by
A computer system called OBD II the system before any problem is
If it does not, have the vehicle (On-Board Diagnostics-Second
serviced by your dealer. apparent. Being aware of the light
Generation) monitors the operation can prevent more serious damage
The light should go out once the of the vehicle to ensure emissions to the vehicle. This system assists
engine starts. If it stays on, are at acceptable levels, to produce the service technician in correctly
or comes on while driving, there a cleaner environment. This light diagnosing any malfunction.
could be a problem with the comes on when the vehicle is
charging system. A charging system placed in ON/RUN, as a check to Notice: If the vehicle is
message in the Driver Information show it is working. If it does not, continually driven with this light
Center (DIC) can also appear. See have the vehicle serviced by your on, the emission controls might
Battery Voltage and Charging dealer. See Ignition Positions on not work as well, the vehicle fuel
Messages on page 5‑37 for more page 9‑23. economy might not be as good,
information. This light could indicate and the engine might not run as
that there are problems with a smoothly. This could lead to
generator drive belt, or that there is costly repairs that might not be
an electrical problem. Have it covered by the vehicle warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the To prevent more serious damage to The following may correct an
engine, transmission, exhaust, the vehicle: emission system malfunction:
intake, or fuel system of the . Reduce vehicle speed. . Check that the fuel cap is fully
vehicle or the replacement of the installed. See Filling the Tank on
original tires with other than . Avoid hard accelerations.
page 9‑67. The diagnostic
those of the same Tire . Avoid steep uphill grades. system can determine if the
Performance Criteria (TPC) can fuel cap has been left off or
affect the vehicle's emission
. If towing a trailer, reduce the
amount of cargo being hauled as improperly installed. A loose or
controls and can cause this light missing fuel cap allows fuel to
to come on. Modifications to soon as it is possible.
evaporate into the atmosphere.
these systems could lead to If the light continues to flash, stop A few driving trips with the cap
costly repairs not covered by the and park the vehicle. Turn the properly installed should turn the
vehicle warranty. This could also vehicle off, wait at least 10 seconds, light off.
result in a failure to pass a and restart the engine. If the light is
required Emission Inspection/ still flashing, follow the previous
. Check that good quality fuel is
Maintenance test. See steps and see your dealer for used. Poor fuel quality causes
Accessories and Modifications on service as soon as possible. the engine not to run as
page 10‑3. efficiently as designed and may
Light On Steady: An emission cause stalling after start-up,
This light comes on during a control system malfunction has stalling when the vehicle is
malfunction in one of two ways: been detected on the vehicle. changed into gear, misfiring,
Light Flashing: A misfire condition Diagnosis and service might be hesitation on acceleration,
has been detected. A misfire required. or stumbling on acceleration.
increases vehicle emissions and These conditions might go away
could damage the emission control once the engine is warmed up.
system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
If one or more of these conditions

. The OBD II (On-Board
occurs, change the fuel brand used. Diagnostics) system determines
It will require at least one full tank of that critical emission control
the proper fuel to turn the light off. systems have not been
completely diagnosed. The
See Recommended Fuel on vehicle would be considered not
page 9‑63. ready for inspection. This can
If none of the above have made the The DLC is under the instrument happen if the 12-volt battery has
light turn off, your dealer can check panel to the left of the steering recently been replaced or run
the vehicle. The dealer has the wheel. See your dealer if assistance down. The diagnostic system is
proper test equipment and is needed. designed to evaluate critical
diagnostic tools to fix any The vehicle may not pass emission control systems during
mechanical or electrical problems inspection if: normal driving. This can take
that might have developed. several days of routine driving.
. The malfunction indicator lamp is If this has been done and the
Emissions Inspection and on with the engine running, or if vehicle still does not pass the
Maintenance Programs the light does not come on when inspection for lack of OBD II
the ignition is turned to ON/RUN system readiness, your dealer
Some local governments may have while the engine is off. See your
programs to inspect the on-vehicle can prepare the vehicle for
dealer for assistance in verifying inspection.
emission control equipment. For the proper operation of the
inspection, the emission system test malfunction indicator lamp.
equipment is connected to the
vehicle’s Data Link
Connector (DLC).
Brake System Warning If the light comes on while driving,

pull off the road and stop carefully.
Light The pedal might be harder to push
With the ignition on, the brake or might go closer to the floor. It can
system warning light comes on take longer to stop. If the light is still
when the parking brake is set. If the on, have the vehicle towed for
vehicle is driven with the parking Metric English service. See Towing the Vehicle on
brake engaged, a chime sounds page 10‑93.
when the vehicle speed is greater This light comes on briefly when the
than 8 km/h (5 mph). ignition key is turned to ON/RUN.
If it does not come on then, have it
The vehicle brake system consists information.
fixed so it is ready to warn if there is
of two hydraulic circuits. If one
a problem.
circuit is not working, the remaining Antilock Brake System
circuit can still work to stop the (ABS) Warning Light
vehicle. For normal braking { WARNING
performance, both circuits need to
be working. The brake system might not be
working properly if the brake
If the warning light comes on and a system warning light is on.
chime sounds there could be a Driving with the brake system
brake problem. Have the brake warning light on can lead to a
system inspected right away. crash. If the light is still on after
This light can also come on due to the vehicle has been pulled off For vehicles with the Antilock Brake
low brake fluid. See Brake Fluid on the road and carefully stopped, System (ABS), this light comes on
page 10‑27 for more information. have the vehicle towed for briefly when the engine is started.
service.
If it does not, have the vehicle If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the StabiliTrak® OFF Light
serviced by your dealer. If the hybrid supplement for more
system is working normally the information.
indicator light then goes off.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the Tow/Haul Mode Light
ignition off. If the light comes on
while driving, stop as soon as it is
safely possible and turn the ignition
off. Then start the engine again to This light comes on briefly while
reset the system. If the ABS light starting the engine.
stays on, or comes on again while
driving, the vehicle needs service. If it does not, have the vehicle
If the regular brake system warning serviced by your dealer. If the
For vehicles with the Tow/Haul
light is not on, the vehicle still has system is working normally, the
Mode feature, this light comes on
brakes, but not antilock brakes. indicator light then goes off.
when the Tow/Haul Mode has been
If the regular brake system warning activated. Press and release the Traction
light is also on, the vehicle does not Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak
have antilock brakes and there is a For more information, see Tow/Haul
button to turn off TCS, and a
problem with the regular brakes. Mode on page 9‑36.
message displays in the DIC.
See Brake System Warning Light on
Press and briefly hold the TCS/
page 5‑23.
StabiliTrak button to turn off the
For vehicles with a Driver StabiliTrak system; the StabiliTrak
Information Center (DIC), see Brake Off light comes on and a message
System Messages on page 5‑37 for appears in the Driver Information
all brake‐related DIC messages. Center (DIC).
If the StabiliTrak/TCS system is off, If the light comes on and stays on When the Light Is On Steady
the system does not assist in while driving, and a message This indicates that one or more of
controlling the vehicle. Turn on the displays in the Driver Information the tires are significantly
StabiliTrak/TCS system and the Center (DIC), have the vehicle underinflated.
indicator light turns off. serviced by the dealer. See Ride
Control System Messages on A Driver Information Center (DIC)
See StabiliTrak® System on tire pressure message may also
page 9‑47, and Ride Control System page 5‑43 for more information.
display. See Tire Messages on
Messages on page 5‑43 for more If the light flashes while driving, this page 5‑44. Stop as soon as
information. means that StabiliTrak or TCS is possible, and inflate the tires to the
assisting in controlling the vehicle. pressure value shown on the Tire
Traction Control System See StabiliTrak® System on and Loading Information label. See
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light page 9‑47 for more information. Tire Pressure on page 10‑57.
Tire Pressure Light When the Light Flashes First and
Then Is On Steady
If the light flashes for about a minute
and then stays on, there may be a
problem with the TPMS. If the
problem is not corrected, the light
will come on at every ignition cycle.
The TCS/StabiliTrak light comes on
See Tire Pressure Monitor
briefly when the engine is started.
For vehicles with the Tire Pressure Operation on page 10‑60.
If the light does not come on or Monitor System (TPMS), this light
stays on, have the vehicle serviced comes on briefly when the engine is
by the dealer. If the system is started. It provides information
working normally, the indicator light about tire pressures and the TPMS.
turns off.
Engine Oil Pressure Light If the light comes on and stays on, it light and message should go off.
means that oil is not flowing through If they do not, have the vehicle
the engine properly. The vehicle serviced by your dealer.
could be low on oil and it might
have some other system problem. Security Light
information.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil
maintenance can damage the Low Fuel Warning Light
engine. Driving with the engine
oil low can also damage the
engine. The repairs would not be The security light should come on
covered by the vehicle warranty. briefly as the engine is started. If the
Check the oil level as soon as system is working normally, the
possible. Add oil if required, but indicator light turns off. If it does not
if the oil level is within the come on, have the vehicle serviced
operating range and the oil by your dealer.
pressure is still low, have the This light, under the fuel gauge,
vehicle serviced. Always follow comes on briefly while the engine is If the light stays on and the engine
the maintenance schedule for being started. does not start, there could be a
changing engine oil. This light and a chime come on problem with the theft-deterrent
when the fuel tank is low on fuel. system.
This light comes on briefly while
starting the engine. If it does not, The Driver Information Center also
have the vehicle serviced by your displays a FUEL LEVEL LOW
dealer. If the system is working message. See Fuel System
normally the indicator light then Messages on page 5‑41 for more
goes off. information. When fuel is added this
This light is also used to indicate the Front Fog Lamp Light Cruise Control Light
status of the anti-theft alarm system
when the ignition is turned off. The
light will flash rapidly if the alarm
system is arming and one or more
of the monitored entry points is not
closed. The light will stay on if the
alarm is arming and all entry points
are closed.
The fog lamp light comes on when The cruise control light comes on
For information regarding this light the fog lamps are in use. whenever the cruise control is set.
and the vehicle's security system,
see Anti-theft Alarm System on The light goes out when the fog The light goes out when the cruise
page 2‑15. lamps are turned off. See Fog control is turned off. See Cruise
Lamps on page 6‑6 for more Control on page 9‑52 for more
information. information.
High-Beam On Light
This light comes on when the

high-beam headlamps are in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer on page 6‑2.
Information Displays The DIC has different displays DIC Buttons

which can be accessed by pressing
the DIC buttons located on the
Driver Information instrument panel, next to the
Center (DIC) steering wheel. If the vehicle does
not have DIC buttons, the trip
Your vehicle has a Driver
odometer reset stem can be used to
Information Center (DIC).
access some of the menu items.
The DIC displays information about
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and
your vehicle. It also displays
vehicle system information, and
warning messages if a system
warning messages if a system
problem is detected.
problem is detected.
All messages will appear in the
The DIC also allows some features
DIC display located below the
to be customized. See Vehicle
tachometer in the instrument panel The buttons are the trip/fuel, vehicle
Personalization (With DIC Buttons)
cluster. information, customization, and set/
on page 5‑47 for more information.
The DIC comes on when the ignition reset buttons. The button functions
is on. After a short delay, the DIC are detailed in the following pages.
will display the information that was 3 (Trip/Fuel): Press to display
last displayed before the engine the odometer, trip odometer, fuel
was turned off. range, average economy, fuel used,
timer, instantaneous economy and
Active Fuel Management™
indicator, and transmission
temperature. The compass and
outside air temperature will also be Trip/Fuel Menu Items The trip odometer can be reset to
shown in the display. The (With DIC Buttons) zero by pressing the set/reset
temperature will be shown in °C button while the trip odometer is
or °F depending on the units 3 (Trip/Fuel): Press to scroll displayed. You can also reset the
selected. through the following menu items: trip odometer while it is displayed by
T (Vehicle Information): Press Odometer pressing and holding the trip
to display the oil life, units, side odometer reset stem.
Press the trip/fuel button until
blind zone system on/off, tire ODOMETER displays. This display The trip odometer has a feature
pressure readings for vehicles with shows the distance the vehicle has called the retroactive reset. This can
the Tire Pressure Monitor System been driven in either kilometers (km) be used to set the trip odometer to
(TPMS), trailer brake gain and or miles (mi). Pressing the trip the number of kilometers (miles)
output information for vehicles with odometer reset stem will also driven since the ignition was last
the Integrated Trailer Brake Control display the odometer. turned on. This can be used if the
(ITBC) system, engine hours, trip odometer is not reset at the
compass zone setting, and compass To switch between English and beginning of the trip.
recalibration. metric measurements, see “Units”
later in this section. To use the retroactive reset feature,
U (Customization): Press to press and hold the set/reset button
customize the feature settings on Trip Odometer for at least four seconds. The trip
your vehicle. See Vehicle Press the trip/fuel button until TRIP odometer will display the number of
Personalization (With DIC Buttons) displays. This display shows the kilometers (km) or miles (mi) driven
on page 5‑47 for more information. current distance traveled in either since the ignition was last turned on
V (Set/Reset): Press to set or kilometers (km) or miles (mi) since and the vehicle was moving. Once
reset certain functions and to turn the last reset for the trip odometer. the vehicle begins moving, the trip
off or acknowledge messages on Pressing the trip odometer reset odometer will accumulate mileage.
the DIC. stem will also display the trip
odometer.
For example, if the vehicle was the same amount of fuel is in the the fuel used information, press and
driven 8 km (5 mi) before it is started fuel tank. This is because different hold the set/reset button while FUEL
again, and then the retroactive reset driving conditions produce different USED is displayed.
feature is activated, the display will fuel economies. Generally, freeway
show 8 km (5 mi). As the vehicle driving produces better fuel Speedometer
begins moving, the display will then economy than city driving. Fuel The speedometer shows how fast
increase to 8.2 km (5.1 mi), 8.4 km range cannot be reset. the vehicle is moving in either
(5.2 mi), etc. kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles
Average Economy per hour (mph). The speedometer
Fuel Range Press the trip/fuel button until AVG cannot be reset.
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL ECONOMY displays. This display
RANGE displays. This display shows the approximate average Timer
shows the approximate number of liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) Press the trip/fuel button until
remaining kilometers (km) or or miles per gallon (mpg). This TIMER displays. This display can be
miles (mi) the vehicle can be driven number is calculated based on the used as a timer.
without refueling. The display will number of L/100 km (mpg) recorded To start the timer, press the set/
show LOW if the fuel level is low. since the last time this menu item reset button while TIMER is
The fuel range estimate is based on was reset. To reset AVG displayed. The display will show the
an average of the vehicle's fuel ECONOMY, press and hold the set/ amount of time that has passed
economy over recent driving history reset button. since the timer was last reset, not
and the amount of fuel remaining in Fuel Used including time the ignition is off.
the fuel tank. This estimate will Time will continue to be counted as
change if driving conditions change. Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL long as the ignition is on, even if
For example, if driving in traffic and USED displays. This display shows another display is being shown on
making frequent stops, this display the number of liters (L) or the DIC. The timer will record up to
may read one number, but if the gallons (gal) of fuel used since the 99 hours, 59 minutes and
vehicle is driven on a freeway, the last reset of this menu item. To reset 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which
number may change even though the display will return to zero.
To stop the timer, press the set/reset instantaneous fuel economy in liters Vehicle Information Menu
button briefly while TIMER is per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) or Items (With DIC Buttons)
displayed. miles per gallon (mpg). Unlike
average economy, this screen T (Vehicle Information): Press
To reset the timer to zero, press and to scroll through the following menu
hold the set/reset button while cannot be reset.
items:
TIMER is displayed. An Active Fuel Management
indicator will display on the right Oil Life
Transmission Temperature side of the DIC, while INST ECON Press the vehicle information
Press the trip/fuel button until displays on the left side. Active Fuel button until OIL LIFE REMAINING
TRANS TEMP displays. This Management allows the engine to displays. This display shows an
display shows the temperature of operate on either four or eight estimate of the oil's remaining useful
the automatic transmission fluid in cylinders, depending on your driving life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE
either degrees Celsius (°C) or demands. When Active Fuel REMAINING on the display, that
degrees Fahrenheit (°F). Management is active, V4 will means 99% of the current oil life
display on the DIC. When Active remains. The engine oil life system
Instantaneous Economy and
Fuel Management is inactive, V8 will alert you to change the oil on a
Active Fuel Management™
will display. See Active Fuel schedule consistent with your
Indicator
Management® on page 9‑30 for driving conditions.
If your vehicle has this display, more information.
press the trip/fuel button until INST
ECON V8 displays. This display Blank Display
shows the current fuel economy at a This display shows no information.
particular moment and will change
frequently as driving conditions
change. This display shows the
When the remaining oil life is low, Side Blind Zone Alert the vehicle information will then be
the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON If your vehicle has the Side Blind displayed in the unit of
message will appear on the display. Zone Alert (SBZA) system, this measurement selected.
See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” display allows the system to be
under Engine Oil Messages on Tire Pressure
turned on or off. Once in this
page 5‑40. You should change the display, press the set/reset button to On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
oil as soon as you can. See Engine select between ON or OFF. If you Monitor System (TPMS), the
Oil on page 10‑7. In addition to the choose ON, the system will be pressure for each tire can be viewed
engine oil life system monitoring the turned on. If you choose OFF, the in the DIC. The tire pressure will be
oil life, additional maintenance is system will be turned off. When the shown in either kilopascals (kPa) or
recommended in the Maintenance SBZA system is turned off, the DIC pounds per square inch (psi). Press
Schedule in this manual. See will display the SIDE BLIND ZONE the vehicle information button until
Maintenance Schedule on ALERT SYSTEM OFF message as the DIC displays FRONT
page 11‑3 for more information. a reminder that the system has TIRES kPa (PSI) LEFT ##
Remember, you must reset the OIL been turned off. See Object RIGHT ##. Press the vehicle
LIFE display yourself after each oil Detection System Messages on information button again until the
change. It will not reset itself. Also, page 5‑41 and Side Blind Zone Alert DIC displays REAR TIRES kPa
be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE (SBZA) on page 9‑56 for more (PSI) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.
display accidentally at any time information. If a low tire pressure condition is
other than when the oil has just detected by the system while
been changed. It cannot be reset Units driving, a message advising you to
accurately until the next oil change. Press the vehicle information button add pressure in a specific tire will
To reset the engine oil life system, until UNITS displays. This display appear in the display. See Tire
see Engine Oil Life System on allows you to select between metric Pressure on page 10‑57 and Tire
page 10‑10. or English units of measurement. Messages on page 5‑44 for more
Once in this display, press the set/ information.
reset button to select between
METRIC or units ENGLISH. All of
If the tire pressure display shows See “Integrated Trailer Brake Trip Odometer Reset Stem
dashes instead of a value, there Control System” under Towing Menu Items (With DIC Buttons)
may be a problem with your vehicle. Equipment on page 9‑79 for more
If this consistently occurs, see your information. Use the trip odometer reset stem to
dealer for service. view the odometer and trip
Engine Hours odometer. The Language selection
Trailer Gain and Output Press the vehicle information button and Engine Hours display can also
On vehicles with the Integrated until ENGINE HOURS displays. This be accessed with the trip odometer
Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, display shows the total number of reset stem.
the trailer brake display appears in hours the engine has run. Odometer
the DIC. Press the vehicle
information button until TRAILER Compass Zone Setting Press the trip odometer reset stem
GAIN and OUTPUT display. This display allows for setting the until ODOMETER displays. This
compass zone. See Compass on display shows the distance the
TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer vehicle has been driven in either
gain setting. This setting can be page 5‑6
kilometers (km) or miles (mi).
adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either Compass Recalibration
a trailer connected or disconnected. Trip Odometer
This display allows for calibrating
To adjust this setting, see Press the trip odometer reset stem
the compass. See Compass on
“Integrated Trailer Brake Control until TRIP displays. This display
page 5‑6
System” under Towing Equipment shows the current distance traveled
on page 9‑79 for more information. Blank Display in either kilometers (km) or
OUTPUT shows the power output to This display shows no information. miles (mi) since the last reset for the
the trailer anytime a trailer with trip odometer.
electric brakes is connected. Output The trip odometer can be reset to
is displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashes zero by pressing and holding the trip
may appear in the OUTPUT display. odometer reset stem while the trip
odometer is displayed.
The trip odometer has a feature Language Engine Hours

called the retroactive reset. This can This display allows you to select To display the ENGINE HOURS,
be used to set the trip odometer to the language in which the DIC place the ignition in LOCK/OFF or
the number of kilometers (miles) messages will appear. To select a ACC/ACCESSORY, then press and
driven since the ignition was last language: hold the trip odometer reset stem for
turned on. This can be used if the four seconds while viewing the
trip odometer is not reset at the 1. Press the trip odometer reset
stem until ODOMETER displays. ODOMETER. This display shows
beginning of the trip. the total number of hours the engine
To use the retroactive reset feature, 2. While in the ODOMETER has run.
press and hold the trip odometer display, press and hold the trip
reset stem for at least four seconds. odometer reset stem for Trip Odometer Reset Stem
The trip odometer will display the three seconds until the currently Menu Items (Without DIC
number of kilometers (km) or set language displays. Buttons)
miles (mi) driven since the ignition 3. Continue to press and hold the Language
was last turned on and the vehicle trip odometer reset stem to scroll
was moving. Once the vehicle through all of the available This display allows you to select
begins moving, the trip odometer languages. the language in which the DIC
will accumulate mileage. For messages will appear. To select a
example, if the vehicle was driven The available selections are language:
8 km (5 mi) before it is started again, ENGLISH (default), FRANCAIS
(French), ESPANOL (Spanish), 1. Press the trip odometer reset
and then the retroactive reset stem until ODOMETER displays.
feature is activated, the display will and NO CHANGE.
show 8 km (5 mi). As the vehicle 4. Once the desired language is 2. While in the ODOMETER
begins moving, the display will then displayed, release the trip display, press and hold the trip
increase to 8.2 km (5.1 mi), 8.4 km odometer reset stem to set your odometer reset stem for
(5.2 mi), etc. choice. three seconds until the currently
set language displays.
3. Continue to press and hold the The trip odometer has a feature Transmission Temperature
trip odometer reset stem to scroll called the retroactive reset. This can Press the trip odometer reset stem
through all of the available be used to set the trip odometer to until TRANS TEMP displays. This
languages. the number of kilometers (miles) display shows the temperature of
The available languages are driven since the ignition was last the automatic transmission fluid in
ENGLISH (default), FRANCAIS turned on. This can be used if the either degrees Celsius (°C) or
(French), ESPANOL (Spanish), trip odometer is not reset at the degrees Fahrenheit (°F).
and NO CHANGE. beginning of the trip.
To use the retroactive reset feature, Trailer Gain and Output
4. Once the desired language is
displayed, release the trip press and hold the trip odometer On vehicles with the Integrated
odometer reset stem to set your reset stem for at least four seconds. Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,
choice. The trip odometer will display the the trailer brake display appears in
number of kilometers (km) or the DIC. Press the trip odometer
Trip Odometer miles (mi) driven since the ignition reset stem until TRAILER GAIN and
Press the trip odometer reset stem was last turned on and the vehicle OUTPUT display.
until TRIP displays. This display was moving. Once the vehicle TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer
shows the current distance traveled begins moving, the trip odometer gain setting. This setting can be
in either kilometers (km) or will accumulate mileage. For adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either
miles (mi) since the last reset example, if the vehicle was driven a trailer connected or disconnected.
for the trip odometer. 8 km (5 mi) before it is started again, To adjust this setting, see
and then the retroactive reset “Integrated Trailer Brake Control
The trip odometer can be reset to feature is activated, the display will
zero by pressing and holding the trip System” under Towing Equipment
show 8 km (5 mi). As the vehicle on page 9‑79 for more information.
odometer reset stem while the trip begins moving, the display will then
odometer is displayed. increase to 8.2 km (5.1 mi), 8.4 km
(5.2 mi), etc.
OUTPUT shows the power output to Oil Life Remember, you must reset the OIL
the trailer anytime a trailer with To access this display, the vehicle LIFE display yourself after each oil
electric brakes is connected. Output must be in P (Park). Press the trip change. It will not reset itself. Also,
is displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashes odometer reset stem until OIL LIFE be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE
may appear in the OUTPUT display. REMAINING displays. This display display accidentally at any time
See “Integrated Trailer Brake shows an estimate of the oil's other than when the oil has just
Control System” under Towing remaining useful life. If you see been changed. It cannot be reset
Equipment on page 9‑79 for more 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the accurately until the next oil change.
information. display, that means 99% of the To reset the engine oil life system,
current oil life remains. The engine see Engine Oil Life System on
Speedometer page 10‑10.
oil life system will alert you to
The speedometer shows how fast change the oil on a schedule
the vehicle is moving in either Relearn Tire Positions
consistent with your driving
kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles conditions. Your vehicle may have this display.
per hour (mph). The speedometer To access this display, the vehicle
cannot be reset. When the remaining oil life is low, must be in P (Park). If your vehicle
the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON has the Tire Pressure Monitor
Compass Zone Setting message will appear on the display. System (TPMS), after rotating the
This display allows for setting the See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” tires or after replacing a tire or
compass zone. See Compass on under Engine Oil Messages on sensor, the system must re-learn the
page 5‑6 for more information. page 5‑40. You should change the tire positions. To re-learn the tire
oil as soon as you can. See Engine positions, see Tire Pressure Monitor
Compass Recalibration Oil on page 10‑7. In addition to the System on page 10‑59. See Tire
This display allows for calibrating engine oil life system monitoring the Inspection on page 10‑63, Tire
the compass. See Compass on oil life, additional maintenance is Rotation on page 10‑64 and Tire
page 5‑6 for more information. recommended in the Maintenance Messages on page 5‑44 for more
Schedule in this manual. See information.
Maintenance Schedule on
Vehicle Messages Battery Voltage and instrument panel cluster. See

Charging System Light on
Messages displayed on the DIC Charging Messages page 5‑20. Driving with this problem
indicate the status of the vehicle or BATTERY LOW START could drain the battery. Turn off all
some action may be needed to VEHICLE unnecessary accessories. Have the
correct a condition. Multiple electrical system checked as soon
messages may appear one after When the vehicle’s battery is as possible. See your dealer.
another. severely discharged, this message
will display and four chimes will Brake System Messages
The messages that do not require
sound. Start the vehicle
immediate action can be
immediately. If the vehicle is not SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
acknowledged and cleared by
started and the battery continues to
pressing V (Set/Reset) or the trip This message displays along with
discharge, the climate controls,
odometer reset stem. the brake system warning light if
heated seats, and audio systems
there is a problem with the brake
The messages that require will shut off and the vehicle may
system. See Brake System Warning
immediate action cannot be cleared require a jump start. These systems
Light on page 5‑23. If this message
until that action is performed. will function again after the vehicle
appears, stop as soon as possible
is started.
All messages should be taken and turn off the vehicle. Restart the
seriously and clearing the message SERVICE BATTERY vehicle and check for the message
does not correct the problem. CHARGING SYSTEM on the DIC display. If the message
is still displayed or appears again
The following are the possible On some vehicles, this message when you begin driving, the brake
messages and some information displays if there is a problem with system needs service as soon as
about them. the battery charging system. Under possible. See your dealer.
certain conditions, the charging
system light may also turn on in the
SERVICE BRAKES SOON As soon as it is safe to do so, HOOD OPEN

carefully pull your vehicle over to
This message displays if there is a This message displays and a chime
the side of the road and turn the
problem with the brake system. sounds if the hood is not fully
ignition off. Check the wiring
If this message appears, stop as closed. Stop and turn off the
connection to the trailer and turn the
soon as possible and turn off the vehicle, check the hood for
ignition back on. If this message still
vehicle. Restart the vehicle and obstructions, and close the hood
displays, either your vehicle or the
check for the message on the DIC again. Check to see if the message
trailer needs service. See your
display. If the message is still still appears on the DIC.
dealer.
displayed or appears again when
you begin driving, the brake system See “Integrated Trailer Brake LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN
needs service. See your dealer. Control System” under Towing This message displays and a chime
Equipment on page 9‑79 for more sounds if the driver side rear door is
SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE information. not fully closed and the vehicle is
SYSTEM shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn
On vehicles with the Integrated Door Ajar Messages off the vehicle, check the door for
Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, obstructions, and close the door
this message displays and a chime DRIVER DOOR OPEN again. Check to see if the message
sounds when there is a problem This message displays and a chime still appears on the DIC.
with the ITBC system. sounds if the driver door is not fully
closed and the vehicle is shifted out
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
When this message displays, power
is no longer available to the trailer of P (Park). Stop and turn off the This message displays and a chime
brakes. vehicle, check the door for sounds if the front passenger door
obstructions, and close the door is not fully closed and the vehicle is
again. Check to see if the message shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn
still appears on the DIC. off the vehicle, check the door for
obstructions, and close the door
again. Check to see if the message
still appears on the DIC.
REAR ACCESS OPEN Engine Cooling System coolant temperature returns to

normal, the air conditioning
This message displays and a chime Messages compressor turns back on. You can
sounds if the liftgate or liftglass is
Notice: If you drive the vehicle continue to drive your vehicle.
open while the ignition is in ON/
while the engine is overheating, If this message continues to appear,
RUN. Turn off the vehicle and check
severe engine damage may have the system repaired by your
the liftgate and liftglass. Restart the
occur. If an overheat warning dealer as soon as possible to avoid
vehicle and check for the message
appears on the instrument panel damage to the engine.
on the DIC display.
cluster and/or DIC, stop the
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN vehicle as soon as possible. See ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE
Engine Overheating on ENGINE
This message displays and a chime page 10‑21 for more information.
sounds if the passenger side rear This message displays when the
door is not fully closed and the ENGINE HOT A/C (Air engine coolant temperature is too
vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). Conditioning) TURNED OFF hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
Stop and turn off the vehicle, check idle until it cools down. See Engine
the door for obstructions, and close This message displays when the Coolant Temperature Gauge on
the door again. Check to see if the engine coolant becomes hotter than page 5‑15.
message still appears on the DIC. the normal operating temperature.
See Engine Coolant Temperature See Overheated Engine Protection
Gauge on page 5‑15. To avoid Operating Mode on page 10‑23 for
added strain on a hot engine, information on driving to a safe
the air conditioning compressor place in an emergency.
automatically turns off. When the
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE OIL HOT IDLE This message displays if low oil
ENGINE ENGINE pressure levels occur. Stop the
vehicle as soon as safely possible
This message displays and a chime This message displays when the and do not operate it until the cause
sounds if the engine cooling system engine oil becomes hotter than the of the low oil pressure has been
reaches unsafe temperatures for normal operating temperature. Stop corrected. Check the oil as soon as
operation. Stop and turn off the and allow the vehicle to idle until it possible and have the vehicle
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so cools down. See Engine Coolant serviced by your dealer. See Engine
to avoid severe damage. This Temperature Gauge on page 5‑15. Oil on page 10‑7.
message clears when the engine
has cooled to a safe operating OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP
temperature. ENGINE Engine Power Messages
Notice: If you drive the vehicle ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
Engine Oil Messages while the engine oil pressure is
This message displays and a chime
low, severe engine damage may
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON sounds when the cooling system
occur. If a low oil pressure
temperature gets too hot and the
This message displays when the warning appears on the Driver
engine further enters the engine
engine oil needs to be changed. Information Center (DIC), stop the
coolant protection mode. See
When you change the engine oil, be vehicle as soon as possible. Do
Engine Overheating on page 10‑21
sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE not drive the vehicle until the
for further information.
OIL SOON message. See Engine cause of the low oil pressure is
Oil Life System on page 10‑10 for corrected. See Engine Oil on
information on how to reset the page 10‑7 for more information.
message. See Engine Oil on
page 10‑7 and Maintenance
Schedule on page 11‑3 for more
information.
This message also displays when TIGHTEN GAS CAP Lamp Messages
the engine power is reduced.
This message may display along TURN SIGNAL ON
Reduced engine power can affect
with the check engine light on the
the vehicle's ability to accelerate. This message displays and a chime
instrument panel cluster if the fuel
If this message is on, but there sounds if a turn signal is left on for
cap is not tightened properly. See
is no reduction in performance, 1.2 km (0.75 mi). Move the turn
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
proceed to your destination. The signal/multifunction lever to the off
page 5‑20. Reinstall the fuel cap
performance may be reduced the position.
fully. See Filling the Tank on
next time the vehicle is driven. The
page 9‑67. The diagnostic system
vehicle may be driven at a reduced
speed while this message is on, but
can determine if the fuel cap has Object Detection System
been left off or improperly installed. Messages
acceleration and speed may be
A loose or missing fuel cap allows
reduced. Anytime this message
stays on, the vehicle should be
fuel to evaporate into the PARK ASST BLOCKED SEE
atmosphere. A few driving trips with OWNERS MANUAL
taken to your dealer for service as
the cap properly installed should
soon as possible. This message displays if there is
turn this light and message off.
something interfering with the park
Fuel System Messages Key and Lock Messages assist system. See Ultrasonic
Parking Assist on page 9‑54 for
FUEL LEVEL LOW more information.
REPLACE BATTERY IN
This message displays and a chime REMOTE KEY
sounds if the fuel level is low. Refuel
as soon as possible. See Fuel This message displays if a Remote
Gauge on page 5‑13 and Fuel on Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
page 9‑63 for more information. battery is low. The battery needs to
be replaced in the transmitter. See
“Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2‑3.
PARK ASSIST OFF SERVICE SIDE BLIND ZONE SIDE BLIND ZONE SYSTEM
After the vehicle has been started, ALERT SYSTEM UNAVAILABLE
this message displays to remind the If your vehicle has the Side Blind If your vehicle has the Side Blind
driver that the URPA system has Zone Alert (SBZA) system and this Zone Alert (SBZA) system, this
been turned off. Press the set/reset message displays, both SBZA message displays when the SBZA
button or the trip odometer reset displays will remain on indicating system is disabled because the
stem to acknowledge this message there is a problem with the SBZA sensor is blocked and cannot detect
and clear it from the DIC display. To system. If these displays remain on vehicles in your blind zone. The
turn the URPA system back on, see after continued driving, the system sensor may be blocked by mud, dirt,
Ultrasonic Parking Assist on needs service. See your dealer. See snow, ice, or slush. This message
page 9‑54. Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on may also display during heavy rain
page 9‑56 for more information. or due to road spray. It may also
SERVICE PARK ASSIST come on when driving in isolated
This message displays if there is a SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT areas with no guardrails, trees,
problem with the Ultrasonic Rear SYSTEM OFF or road signs and light traffic. Your
Parking Assist (URPA) system. Do If your vehicle has the Side Blind vehicle does not need service. For
not use this system to help you Zone Alert (SBZA) system, this cleaning instructions, see “Washing
park. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist message displays when the SBZA Your Vehicle” in Exterior Care on
on page 9‑54 for more information. system has been turned off. See page 10‑99. See Side Blind Zone
See your dealer for service. Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on Alert (SBZA) on page 9‑56 for more
page 9‑56 and Driver Information information.
Center (DIC) on page 5‑28 for more
information.
Ride Control System SERVICE TRACTION TRACTION XX

Messages CONTROL STABILITRAK XX
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, this This message displays when the
SERVICE STABILITRAK message displays when there is a traction control and/or StabiliTrak
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak® and problem with the Traction Control systems have been turned on or off.
this message displays, it means System (TCS). When this message Adjust your driving accordingly.
there may be a problem with the displays, the system will not limit To limit wheel spin and realize
StabiliTrak system. If you see this wheel spin. Adjust your driving the full benefits of the stability
message, try to reset the system. accordingly. See your dealer for enhancement system, you should
Stop; turn off the engine for at least service. See StabiliTrak® System on normally leave StabiliTrak on.
15 seconds; then start the engine page 9‑47 for more information. However, you should turn
again. If this message still comes StabiliTrak off if the vehicle gets
on, it means there is a problem. You STABILITRAK INITIALIZING stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow
should see your dealer for service. If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, this and you want to rock the vehicle to
The vehicle is safe to drive, message may come on if the attempt to free it, or if you are
however, you do not have the StabiliTrak system has not fully driving in extreme off-road
benefit of StabiliTrak, so reduce initialized because of road conditions and require more wheel
your speed and drive accordingly. conditions or the incorrect tire size. spin. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck on
When the StabiliTrak system is fully page 9‑15. To turn the StabiliTrak
SERVICE SUSPENSION initialized, the message will turn off. system on or off, see StabiliTrak®
SYSTEM See StabiliTrak® System on System on page 9‑47.
If your vehicle has the Autoride® page 9‑47 for more information.
suspension system, this message If this message continues to be
displays when the Autoride displayed for multiple ignition cycles
suspension system is not operating and on different road surfaces, see
properly. Have your vehicle serviced your dealer for service.
by your dealer.
STABILITRAK OFF may also The message turns off as soon as off the engine. See Immobilizer
display when the stability control the conditions that caused the Operation on page 2‑17 for more
has been automatically disabled. message to be displayed are no information.
There are several conditions that longer present.
can cause this message to appear. Tire Messages
. One condition is overheating, Airbag System Messages
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR
which could occur if StabiliTrak SERVICE AIR BAG
activates continuously for an
SYSTEM
extended period of time. This message displays if there is a On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
problem with the airbag system. Monitor System (TPMS), this
. The message also displays if the
Have your dealer inspect the message displays if a part on the
brake system warning light is on.
system for problems. See Airbag TPMS is not working properly. The
See Brake System Warning
Readiness Light on page 5‑18 and tire pressure light also flashes and
Light on page 5‑23.
Airbag System on page 3‑30 for then remains on during the same
. The message could display if the more information. ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure
stability system takes longer Light on page 5‑25. Several
than usual to complete its Anti-theft Alarm System conditions may cause this message
diagnostic checks due to driving to appear. See Tire Pressure
conditions.
Messages
Monitor Operation on page 10‑60 for
. The message displays if an SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT more information. If the warning
engine or vehicle related SYSTEM comes on and stays on, there may
problem has been detected and be a problem with the TPMS. See
This message displays when there your dealer.
the vehicle needs service. See is a problem with the theft-deterrent
your dealer. system. The vehicle may or may not
restart so you may want to take the
vehicle to your dealer before turning
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE than one tire pressure message at a the vehicle and check for the
time. To read the other messages message on the DIC display. If the
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
that may have been sent at the message is still displayed or
Monitor System (TPMS), this
same time, press the set/reset appears again when you begin
message displays when the TPMS
button or the trip odometer reset driving, the four-wheel-drive system
is re-learning the tire positions on
stem. If a tire pressure message needs service. See your dealer.
your vehicle. The tire positions must
appears on the DIC, stop as soon
be re-learned after rotating the tires TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE
as you can. Have the tire pressures
or after replacing a tire or sensor. ENGINE
checked and set to those shown on
See Tire Inspection on page 10‑63,
the Tire Loading Information label. Notice: Do not drive the vehicle
Tire Rotation on page 10‑64, Tire
See Tires on page 10‑49, Vehicle while the transmission fluid is
Pressure Monitor System on
Load Limits on page 9‑16, and Tire overheating and the transmission
page 10‑59, and Tire Pressure on
Pressure on page 10‑57. The DIC temperature warning is displayed
also shows the tire pressure values. on the instrument panel cluster
TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE See “DIC Operation and Displays and/or DIC, or the transmission
(With DIC Buttons)” earlier in this can be damaged. This could lead
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure section.
Monitor System (TPMS), this to costly repairs that would not
message displays when the be covered by the warranty.
pressure in one or more of the
Transmission Messages This message displays along with a
vehicle's tires needs to be checked. SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE sound if the transmission fluid in the
This message also displays vehicle gets hot. Driving with the
LEFT FRT (left front), RIGHT FRT This message displays if a problem transmission fluid temperature high
(right front), LEFT RR (left rear), occurs with the four-wheel-drive can cause damage to the vehicle.
or RIGHT RR (right rear) to indicate system. If this message appears, Stop the vehicle and let it idle to
the location of the low tire. The low stop as soon as possible and turn allow the transmission to cool. This
tire pressure warning light will also off the vehicle. Make sure the key is message clears and the chime
come on. See Tire Pressure Light in the LOCK/OFF position for at stops when the fluid temperature
on page 5‑25. You can receive more least one minute and then restart reaches a safe level.
Vehicle Reminder When this message displays, power TRAILER CONNECTED

is no longer available to the trailer
Messages brakes.
On vehicles with the Integrated
Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,
CHECK TRAILER WIRING As soon as it is safe to do so, this message displays briefly when
On vehicles with the Integrated carefully pull the vehicle over to the a trailer with electric brakes is first
Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, side of the road and turn the ignition connected to the vehicle.
this message may display and a off. Check the wiring connection to
This message clears itself after
chime may sound when one of the the trailer and turn the ignition back
several seconds. This message also
following conditions exists: on. This message clears if the trailer
clears if you acknowledge it. After
is reconnected. This message also
. A trailer with electric brakes this message clears, the TRAILER
clears if you acknowledge it. If this
becomes disconnected from the GAIN/OUTPUT display appears in
message still displays, either the
vehicle. the DIC.
vehicle or the trailer needs service.
‐ If the disconnect occurs while See your dealer. See “TRAILER GAIN/OUTPUT”
the vehicle is stopped, this under Driver Information Center
See “Integrated Trailer Brake
message clears itself after a (DIC) on page 5‑28 and “Integrated
Control System” under Towing
short time. Trailer Brake Control System” under
Equipment on page 9‑79 for more
Towing Equipment on page 9‑79 for
‐ If the disconnect occurs while information.
more information.
the vehicle is moving, this
message stays on until the
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE
ignition is turned off. WITH CARE
. There is a short in the wiring to This message displays when ice
the electric trailer brakes. conditions are possible.
Washer Fluid Messages Vehicle To change customization

preferences, use the following
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD Personalization procedure.
FLUID
Entering the Feature
This message displays when the Vehicle Personalization Settings Menu
windshield washer fluid is low. Fill (With DIC Buttons)
the windshield washer fluid reservoir 1. Turn the ignition on and place
Your vehicle may have the vehicle in P (Park).
as soon as possible. See Engine
customization capabilities that allow
Compartment Overview on To avoid excessive drain on the
you to program certain features to
page 10‑6 for the location of the battery, it is recommended that
one preferred setting. Customization
windshield washer fluid reservoir. the headlamps are turned off.
features can only be programmed to
Also, see Washer Fluid on
one setting on the vehicle and 2. Press the customization button
cannot be programmed to a to scroll through the available
preferred setting for two different customizable options.
drivers.
Feature Settings Menu Items
All of the customization options may
not be available on your vehicle. The following are customization
Only the options available will be features that allow you to program
displayed on the DIC. settings to the vehicle:
The default settings for the DISPLAY IN ENGLISH
customization features were set This feature will only display if a
when your vehicle left the factory, language other than English has
but may have been changed from been set. This feature allows you to
their default state since then. change the language in which the
The customization preferences are DIC messages appear to English.
automatically recalled.
Press the customization button until NO CHANGE: No change will be Press the customization button until
the PRESS V TO DISPLAY IN made to this feature. The current AUTO DOOR LOCK appears on the
ENGLISH screen appears on the setting will remain. DIC display. Press the set/reset
DIC display. Press the set/reset To select a setting, press the set/ button once to access the settings
button once to display all DIC reset button while the desired for this feature. Then press the
messages in English. setting is displayed on the DIC. customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
DISPLAY LANGUAGE You can also change the language
by pressing the trip odometer reset SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default):
This feature allows you to select the The doors will automatically lock
language in which the DIC stem. See “Language” under DIC
Operation and Displays (Without when the vehicle is shifted out of
messages will appear. P (Park).
DIC Buttons) earlier in this section
Press the customization button until for more information. AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors
the DISPLAY LANGUAGE screen will automatically lock when the
appears on the DIC display. Press AUTO DOOR LOCK vehicle speed is above 8 mph
the set/reset button once to access This feature allows you to select (13 km/h) for 3 seconds.
the settings for this feature. Then when the vehicle's doors will
press the customization button to NO CHANGE: No change will be
automatically lock. See Automatic made to this feature. The current
scroll through the following settings: Door Locks on page 2‑9 for more setting will remain.
ENGLISH (default): All messages information.
will appear in English. To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired
FRANCAIS: All messages will setting is displayed on the DIC.
appear in French.
ESPANOL: All messages will
appear in Spanish.
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors Press the customization button until
This feature allows you to select will unlock when the key is taken REMOTE DOOR LOCK appears on
whether or not to turn off the out of the ignition. the DIC display. Press the set/reset
automatic door unlocking feature. ALL IN PARK (default): All of the button once to access the settings
It also allows you to select which doors will unlock when the vehicle is for this feature. Then press the
doors and when the doors will shifted into P (Park). customization button to scroll
automatically unlock. See Automatic through the following settings:
NO CHANGE: No change will be
Door Locks on page 2‑9 for more made to this feature. The current OFF: There will be no feedback
information. setting will remain. when you press the lock button on
Press the customization button until the RKE transmitter.
To select a setting, press the set/
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on reset button while the desired LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps
the DIC display. Press the set/reset setting is displayed on the DIC. will flash when you press the lock
button once to access the settings button on the RKE transmitter.
for this feature. Then press the REMOTE DOOR LOCK HORN ONLY: The horn will sound
customization button to scroll This feature allows you to select the on the second press of the lock
through the following settings: type of feedback you will receive button on the RKE transmitter.
OFF: None of the doors will when locking the vehicle with the HORN & LIGHTS (default): The
automatically unlock. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) exterior lamps will flash when you
DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the transmitter. You will not receive press the lock button on the RKE
driver door will unlock when the key feedback when locking the vehicle transmitter, and the horn will sound
is taken out of the ignition. with the RKE transmitter if the doors when the lock button is pressed
are open. See Remote Keyless again within five seconds of the
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver Entry (RKE) System Operation on
door will unlock when the vehicle is previous command.
shifted into P (Park) .
NO CHANGE: No change will be Press the customization button until DELAY DOOR LOCK
made to this feature. The current REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appears This feature allows you to select
setting will remain. on the DIC display. Press the set/ whether or not the locking of the
To select a setting, press the set/ reset button once to access the vehicle's doors and liftgate will be
reset button while the desired settings for this feature. Then press delayed. When locking the doors
setting is displayed on the DIC. the customization button to scroll and liftgate with the power door lock
through the following settings: switch and a door or the liftgate is
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps open, this feature will delay locking
This feature allows you to select the will not flash when you press the the doors and liftgate until
type of feedback you will receive unlock button on the RKE five seconds after the last door is
when unlocking the vehicle with the transmitter. closed. You will hear three chimes
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior to signal that the delayed locking
transmitter. You will not receive lamps will flash when you press the feature is in use. The key must be
feedback when unlocking the unlock button on the RKE out of the ignition for this feature to
vehicle with the RKE transmitter if transmitter. work. You can temporarily override
the doors are open. See Remote delayed locking by pressing the
Keyless Entry (RKE) System NO CHANGE: No change will be power door lock switch twice. See
Operation on page 2‑3 for more made to this feature. The current Delayed Locking on page 2‑9 for
information. setting will remain. more information.
setting is displayed on the DIC.
Press the customization button until Press the customization button until APPROACH LIGHTING
DELAY DOOR LOCK appears on EXIT LIGHTING appears on the DIC This feature allows you to select
the DIC display. Press the set/reset display. Press the set/reset button whether or not to have the exterior
button once to access the settings once to access the settings for this lights turn on briefly during low light
for this feature. Then press the feature. Then press the periods after unlocking the vehicle
customization button to scroll customization button to scroll using the Remote Keyless Entry
through the following settings: through the following settings: (RKE) transmitter.
OFF: There will be no delayed OFF: The exterior lamps will not Press the customization button until
locking of the vehicle's doors. turn on. APPROACH LIGHTING appears on
ON (default): The doors will not 30 SECONDS (default): The the DIC display. Press the set/reset
lock until 5 seconds after the last exterior lamps will stay on for button once to access the settings
door or the liftgate is closed. 30 seconds. for this feature. Then press the
NO CHANGE: No change will be 1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will customization button to scroll
made to this feature. The current stay on for 1 minute. through the following settings:
setting will remain. 2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will OFF: The exterior lights will not
To select a setting, press the set/ stay on for 2 minutes. turn on when you unlock the vehicle
reset button while the desired with the RKE transmitter.
NO CHANGE: No change will be
setting is displayed on the DIC. made to this feature. The current ON (default): If it is dark enough
setting will remain. outside, the exterior lights will turn
EXIT LIGHTING on briefly when you unlock the
This feature allows you to select the To select a setting, press the set/ vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
amount of time you want the reset button while the desired
exterior lamps to remain on when it setting is displayed on the DIC.
is dark enough outside. This
happens after the key is turned from
ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.
The lights will remain on for Press the customization button until PARK TILT MIRRORS
20 seconds or until the lock button CHIME VOLUME appears on the If your vehicle has this feature, it
on the RKE transmitter is pressed, DIC display. Press the set/reset allows you to select whether or not
or the vehicle is no longer off. See button once to access the settings the outside mirror(s) will
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) for this feature. Then press the automatically tilt down when the
System Operation on page 2‑3 for customization button to scroll vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
more information. through the following settings: See Park Tilt Mirrors on page 2‑22
NO CHANGE: No change will be NORMAL: The chime volume will for more information.
made to this feature. The current be set to a normal level. Press the customization button until
setting will remain. LOUD: The chime volume will be PARK TILT MIRRORS appears on
To select a setting, press the set/ set to a loud level. the DIC display. Press the set/reset
reset button while the desired NO CHANGE: No change will be button once to access the settings
setting is displayed on the DIC. made to this feature. The current for this feature. Then press the
setting will remain. customization button to scroll
CHIME VOLUME through the following settings:
This feature allows you to select the There is no default for chime
volume. The volume will stay at the OFF (default): Neither outside
volume level of the chime. mirror will be tilted down when the
last known setting.
vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
reset button while the desired DRIVER MIRROR: The driver
setting is displayed on the DIC. outside mirror will be tilted down
when the vehicle is shifted into
R (Reverse).
PASSENGER MIRROR: The Press the customization button until the key back in the ignition and
passenger outside mirror will be EASY EXIT RECALL appears on remove it again, the seat will stay in
tilted down when the vehicle is the DIC display. Press the set/reset the original exit position, unless a
shifted into R (Reverse). button once to access the settings memory recall took place prior to
BOTH MIRRORS: The driver and for this feature. Then press the removing the key again.
passenger outside mirrors will be customization button to scroll NO CHANGE: No change will be
tilted down when the vehicle is through the following settings: made to this feature. The current
shifted into R (Reverse). DOOR BUTTON ONLY: No setting will remain.
NO CHANGE: No change will be automatic seat exit recall will occur. To select a setting, press the set/
made to this feature. The current The recall will only occur after reset button while the desired
setting will remain. pressing the easy exit seat button. setting is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting, press the set/ BUTTON & KEY OUT (default): If
the features are enabled through the EASY EXIT SETUP
setting is displayed on the DIC. EASY EXIT SETUP menu, the If your vehicle has this feature, it
driver seat will move back when the allows you to select which areas will
EASY EXIT RECALL key is removed from the ignition or recall with the automatic easy exit
If your vehicle has this feature, it after pressing the easy exit seat seat feature. It also allows you to
allows you to select your preference button. turn off the automatic easy exit
for the automatic easy exit seat The automatic easy exit seat feature. See Memory Seats on
feature. See Memory Seats on movement will only occur one time page 3‑8 and EASY EXIT RECALL
page 3‑8 for more information. after the key is removed from the earlier for more information.
ignition. If the automatic movement
has already occurred, and you put
Press the customization button until Press the customization button until REMOTE START
EASY EXIT SETUP appears on the MEMORY SEAT RECALL appears If your vehicle has this feature, it
DIC display. Press the set/reset on the DIC display. Press the set/ allows you to turn the remote start
button once to access the settings reset button once to access the off or on. The remote start feature
for this feature. Then press the settings for this feature. Then press allows you to start the engine from
menu up/down button to scroll the customization button to scroll outside of the vehicle using the
through the following settings: through the following settings: Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
OFF: No automatic seat exit will OFF (default): No remote memory transmitter. See Remote Vehicle
recall. seat recall will occur. Start on page 2‑6 for more
SEAT ONLY (Default): The driver ON: The driver seat and, on some information.
seat will recall. vehicles, the outside mirrors will Press the customization button until
NO CHANGE: No change will be automatically move to the stored REMOTE START appears on the
made to this feature. The current driving position when the unlock DIC display. Press the set/reset
setting will remain. button on the Remote Keyless Entry button once to access the settings
(RKE) transmitter is pressed. On for this feature. Then press the
To select a setting, press the set/ some vehicles with the adjustable customization button to scroll
reset button while the desired throttle and brake pedal feature, the through the following settings:
setting is displayed on the DIC. pedals will also automatically move. OFF: The remote start feature will
MEMORY SEAT RECALL NO CHANGE: No change will be be disabled.
If your vehicle has this feature, it made to this feature. The current ON (default): The remote start
allows you to select your preference setting will remain. feature will be enabled.
for the remote memory seat recall To select a setting, press the set/
feature. See Memory Seats on reset button while the desired
page 3‑8 for more information. setting is displayed on the DIC.
NO CHANGE: No change will be DO NOT RESTORE: The Exiting the Feature

made to this feature. The current customization features will not be Settings Menu
setting will remain. set to their factory default settings.
The feature settings menu will be
To select a setting, press the set/ To select a setting, press the set/ exited when any of the following
reset button while the desired reset button while the desired occurs:
setting is displayed on the DIC. setting is displayed on the DIC. . The vehicle is no longer in
FACTORY SETTINGS EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS ON/RUN.
This feature allows you to set all of This feature allows you to exit the . The trip/fuel or vehicle
the customization features back to feature settings menu. information DIC buttons are
their factory default settings. Press the customization button until pressed.
Press the customization button until PRESS V TO EXIT FEATURE . The end of the feature settings
FACTORY SETTINGS appears on SETTINGS appears in the DIC menu is reached and exited.
the DIC display. Press the set/reset display. Press the set/reset button . A 40 second time period has
button once to access the settings once to exit the menu. elapsed with no selection made.
for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll If you do not exit, pressing the
through the following settings: customization button again will
return you to the beginning of the
RESTORE ALL (default): The feature settings menu.
customization features will be set to
their factory default settings.
Universal Remote This system provides a way to the lease ends. See “Erasing
replace up to three remote control Universal Home Remote Buttons” in
System transmitters used to activate this section.
devices such as garage door Park the vehicle outside of the
See Radio Frequency Statement on
openers, security systems, and garage when programming a garage
page 13‑22 for information
home automation devices. door. Be sure that people and
Communications Commission (FCC) Do not use this system with any objects are clear of the garage door
rules and Industry Canada garage door opener that does not or gate that is being programmed.
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310. have the stop and reverse feature.
This includes any garage door Programming Universal Home
Universal Remote System opener model manufactured before Remote — Rolling Code
April 1, 1982. For questions or help programming
Programming
Read the instructions completely the Universal Home Remote
before attempting to program the System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go
transmitter. Because of the steps to www.learcar2u.com.
involved, it may be helpful to have Most garage door openers sold
another person assist with after 1996 are Rolling Code units.
programming the transmitter.
Programming a garage door opener
Be sure to keep the original remote involves time-sensitive actions, so
Vehicles with the Universal Remote control transmitter for use in other read the entire procedure before
System will have these buttons vehicles, as well as for future starting. Otherwise, the device will
located in the headliner. programming. Only the original time out and the procedure will have
remote control transmitter is needed to be repeated.
for Fixed Code programming. The
programmed buttons should be
erased when the vehicle is sold or
3. Immediately return to the

vehicle. Press and hold the
Universal Home Remote button
that will be used to control the
garage door until the garage
door moves. The indicator light,
above the selected button,
To program up to three devices: should slowly blink. This button
1. From inside the vehicle, press may need to be held for up to
the two outside buttons at the 2. In the garage, locate the garage 20 seconds.
same time for one to door opener receiver 4. Immediately, within one second,
two seconds, and immediately (motor-head unit). Find the release the button when the
release them. “Learn” or “Smart” button. It can garage door moves. The
usually be found where the indicator light will blink rapidly
hanging antenna wire is until programming is complete.
attached to the motor-head unit
and may be a colored button. 5. Press and release the same
Press this button. After pressing button again. The garage door
this button, complete the should move, confirming that
following steps in less than programming is successful and
30 seconds. complete.
To program another Rolling Code Programming a garage door opener garage door opener is a Fixed
device such as an additional garage involves time-sensitive actions, so Code unit. If you do not see a
door opener, a security device, read the entire procedure before row of dip switches, return
or home automation device, repeat starting. Otherwise, the device will to the previous section for
Steps 1 through 5, choosing a time out and the procedure will have Programming Universal Home
different function button in Step 3 to be repeated. Remote — Rolling Code.
than what was used for the garage Your hand-held transmitter can
door opener. have between 8 to 12 dip
If these instructions do not work, the switches depending on the
garage door opener is probably a brand of transmitter.
Fixed Code unit. Follow the The garage door opener receiver
programming instructions that follow (motor head unit) could also
for a Fixed Code garage door have a row of dip switches that
opener. can be used when programming
Programming Universal Home the Universal Home Remote.
Remote — Fixed Code If the total number of switches
on the motor head and
For questions or help programming hand-held transmitter are
the Universal Home Remote different, or if the dip switch
System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go To program up to three devices: settings are different, use the dip
to www.learcar2u.com. 1. To verify that the garage door switch settings on the motor
Most garage door openers sold opener is a Fixed Code unit, head unit to program the
before 1996 are Fixed Code units. remove the battery cover on the Universal Home Remote. The
hand-held transmitter supplied motor head dip switch settings
by the manufacturer of the can also be used when the
garage door opener motor. original hand-held transmitter is
If there is a row of dip switches not available.
similar to the graphic above, the
The switch positions on the

. If a switch is set between
hand-held transmitter could be the up and down position,
labeled as follows: write “Middle.”
. A switch in the up position The switch settings written
could be labeled as Up, down in Step 2 now
+, or On. become the button strokes
Example of Eight Dip Switches to be entered into the
. A switch in the down Universal Home Remote in
with Two Positions position could be labeled as Step 4. Be sure to enter the
Down, −, or Off. switch settings written down
. A switch in the middle in Step 2, in order from left
position could be labeled as to right, into the Universal
Middle, 0, or Neutral. Home Remote, when
completing Step 4.
2. Write down the 8 to 12 switch
settings from left to right as 3. From inside your vehicle, first
Example of Eight Dip Switches firmly press all three buttons at
follows:
with Three Positions the same time for about
. When a switch is in the up
The panel of switches might not three seconds. Release the
position, write “Left.”
appear exactly as they do in the buttons to put the Universal
examples above, but they . When a switch is in the Home Remote into
should be similar. down position, write “Right.” programming mode.
4. The indicator lights will blink 6. Press and hold the button that
slowly. Enter each switch setting will be used to control the
from Step 2 into your vehicle's garage door until the garage
Universal Home Remote. door moves. The indicator light
You will have two and above the selected button
one-half minutes to complete should slowly blink. This button
Step 4. Now press one button on may need to be held for up to
the Universal Home Remote for 55 seconds.
each switch setting as follows: 7. Immediately release the button
. If you wrote “Left,” press when the garage door moves.
the left button (A) in the The indicator light will blink
vehicle. rapidly until programming is
A. Left Button (Up, +, or On) complete.
. If you wrote “Right,” press
B. Middle Button the right button (C) in the 8. Press and release the same
(Middle, 0, or Neutral) vehicle. button again. The garage door
C. Right Button . If you wrote “Middle,” press should move, confirming that
(Down, −, or Off) the middle button (B) in the programming is successful and
vehicle. complete.
5. After entering all of the switch To program another Fixed Code

positions, once again firmly device such as an additional garage
press and release all three door opener, a security device,
buttons at the same time. The or home automation device, repeat
indicator lights will turn on. Steps 1-8, choosing a different
button in Step 6 than what was used
for the garage door opener.
Universal Remote System Erasing Universal Home For help or information on the
Remote Buttons Universal Home Remote System,
Operation call the customer assistance phone
Press and hold the appropriate The programmed buttons should be number under Customer Assistance
button for at least half of a second. erased when the vehicle is sold or Offices (U.S. and Canada) on
The indicator light will come on the lease ends. page 13‑5 or Customer Assistance
while the signal is being transmitted. To erase either Rolling Code or Offices (Mexico) on page 13‑6.
Fixed Code settings on the
Reprogramming Universal Universal Home Remote device:
Home Remote Buttons
1. Press and hold the two outside
Any of the three buttons can be buttons at the same time for
reprogrammed by repeating the approximately 20 seconds, until
instructions. the indicator lights, located
directly above the buttons, begin
to blink rapidly.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to
blink, release both buttons. The
codes from all buttons will be
erased.
2 NOTES
Lighting 6-1
Lighting Interior Lighting

Instrument Panel Illumination
Exterior Lighting
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Exterior Lamp Controls
Exterior Lighting
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1
Exterior Lamps Off Lighting Features
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Battery Load Management . . . . 6-9
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Battery Power Protection . . . . 6-10
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Automatic Headlamp
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
The exterior lamps control is located
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-5
on the instrument panel to the left of
Turn and Lane-Change
the steering wheel.
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 It controls the following systems:
Auxiliary . Headlamps
Roof-Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . 6-7
. Taillamps
. Parking Lamps
. License Plate Lamps
. Instrument Panel Lights
6-2 Lighting
The exterior lamps control has four ; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the turning off to prevent the battery
positions: parking lamps together with the from being drained. Turn the
O (Off): Turns off the automatic following: headlamp control to off and then
headlamps and Daytime Running back to the headlamp on position to
. Instrument Panel Lights make the headlamps stay on for an
Lamps (DRL). Turn the headlamp
control to the off position again to
. Taillamps additional 10 minutes.
turn the automatic headlamps or . License Plate Lamps
DRL back on. Exterior Lamps Off
2 (Headlamps): Turns on the
Reminder
For vehicles first sold in Canada, headlamps together with the
the off position will only work when following lamps listed below. A reminder chime will sound when
the vehicle is shifted into P (Park). the headlamps or parking lamps are
. Parking Lamps
AUTO (Automatic): Automatically manually turned on and the ignition
. Instrument Panel Lights is off and a door is open. To disable
turns on the headlamps at normal
brightness, together with the . Taillamps the chime, turn the light off.
following: . License Plate Lamps
.
Headlamp High/
Parking Lamps When the headlamps are turned on Low-Beam Changer
. Instrument Panel Lights while the vehicle is on, the
headlamps will turn off automatically 5 3 (Headlamp High/Low Beam
. Taillamps Changer): To change the
10 minutes after the ignition is
. License Plate Lamps turned off. When the headlamps are headlamps from low to high beam,
turned on while the vehicle is off, push the lever toward the instrument
the headlamps will stay on for panel. To return to low-beam
10 minutes before automatically headlamps, pull the multifunction
lever toward you. Then release it.
Lighting 6-3
If the headlamps are in the

. The transmission is not in Park.
automatic position or on low beam, . The light sensor determines it is
the high-beam headlamps will turn daytime.
on. They will stay on as long as you
hold the lever toward you. The When the DRL system is on, only
high-beam indicator on the the DRL lamps are on. The
instrument panel cluster will come taillamps, sidemarker, instrument
When the high beams are on, this panel lights, and other lamps will not
indicator light on the instrument on. Release the lever to return to
normal operation. be on.
panel cluster will also be on.
When it begins to get dark, the
Flash-to-Pass Daytime Running automatic headlamp system
Lamps (DRL) switches from DRL to the
This feature lets you use the headlamps.
high-beam headlamps to signal a Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can
To turn off the DRL lamps, turn the
driver in front of you that you want make it easier for others to see the
exterior lamps control to the OFF
to pass. It works even if the front of your vehicle during the day.
position and then release. For
headlamps are in the automatic Fully functional daytime running
vehicles first sold in Canada, the
position. lamps are required on all vehicles
transmission must be in the P (Park)
To use it, pull the turn signal lever first sold in Canada.
position before the DRL lamps can
toward you, then release it. The DRL system comes on when be turned off.
the following conditions are met:
. The ignition is on.
. The exterior lamps control is
in AUTO.
6-4 Lighting
Automatic Headlamp There is a delay in the transition

between the daytime and nighttime
System operation of the Daytime Running
When it is dark enough outside, the Lamps (DRL) and the automatic
automatic headlamp system turns headlamp systems so that driving
on the headlamps at the normal under bridges or bright overhead
brightness, along with the taillamps, street lights does not affect the
sidemarker, parking lamps, and the system. The DRL and automatic
instrument panel lights. The radio headlamp system are only affected
lights will also be dim. The vehicle has a light sensor when the light sensor detects a
located on the top of the instrument change in lighting lasting longer
To turn off the automatic headlamp
panel which regulates when the than the delay.
system, turn the exterior lamps
switch to the off position and then automatic headlamps turn on. Do If the vehicle is started in a dark
release it. For vehicles first sold in not cover the sensor, otherwise the garage, the automatic headlamp
Canada, the transmission must be headlamps will come on whenever system comes on immediately.
in the P (Park) position before the the ignition is on. Once the vehicle leaves the garage,
automatic headlamp system can be The system may also turn on the it takes approximately one minute
turned off. headlamps when driving through a for the automatic headlamp system
parking garage or heavy overcast to change to DRL if it is bright
weather. This is normal. enough outside. During that delay,
the instrument panel cluster may not
be as bright as usual. Make sure the
instrument panel brightness control
is in the full bright position. See
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control on page 6‑7.
Lighting 6-5
To idle the vehicle with the Hazard Warning Flashers Turn and Lane-Change
automatic headlamp system off, turn
the control to the off position.
Signals
The headlamps will also stay on
after you exit the vehicle. This
feature can be programmed using
the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See Vehicle Personalization (With
DIC Buttons) on page 5‑47.
If the vehicle is not equipped with
DIC buttons, exit lighting is
automatic. When it is dark enough
outside, the exterior lamps remain An arrow on the instrument panel
on for 30 seconds after the ignition cluster flashes in the direction of the
is moved from ON/RUN to turn or lane change.
LOCK/OFF. | (Hazard Warning Flashers):
Press this button located on top of Move the lever all the way up or
For vehicles without a radio, the the steering column, to make the down to signal a turn.
instrument panel light remains on for front and rear turn signal lamps
30 seconds with the driver door flash on and off. This warns others
closed. For vehicles with a radio, that you are having trouble. Press
the instrument panel light remains again to turn the flashers off.
on for 10 minutes with the driver
door closed. See Retained When the hazard warning flashers
Accessory Power (RAP) on are on, the vehicle's turn signals will
page 9‑27. not work.
The regular headlamp system can
be turned on when needed.
6-6 Lighting
Raise or lower the lever for less Turn Signal On Chime The ignition must be in the ON/RUN
than one second until the arrow If the turn signal is left on for more position for the fog lamps to
starts to flash to signal a lane than 1.2 km (0.75 mi), a chime will come on.
change. This causes the turn sound at each flash of the turn # (Fog Lamps): Press to turn the
signals to automatically flash signal and the message TURN fog lamps on or off. A light will come
three times. It will flash six times if SIGNAL ON will also appear in the on in the instrument panel cluster.
tow-haul mode is active. Holding the Driver Information Control (DIC). To
turn signal lever for more than When the fog lamps are turned on,
turn the chime and message off, the parking lamps automatically
one second will cause the turn move the turn signal lever to the off
signals to flash until you release the turn on.
position.
lever. When the headlamps are changed
The lever returns to its starting Fog Lamps to high beam, the fog lamps also go
position whenever it is released. off. When the high-beam headlamps
are turned off, the fog lamps will
If after signaling a turn or a lane come on again.
change the arrows flash rapidly or
do not come on, a signal bulb could Some localities have laws that
be burned out. require the headlamps to be on with
the fog lamps.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb
is not burned out, check the fuse.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 10‑41.
For vehicles with fog lamps, the
control is located next to the exterior
lamps control on the instrument
panel, to the left of the steering
column.
Lighting 6-7
Auxiliary The emergency roof lamp circuit is Interior Lighting

fused at 30 amps, so the total
Roof-Mounted Lamp current draw of the attached lamps
If the vehicle has this feature, this should be less than this value. The Instrument Panel
button includes wiring provisions for attachment points for the roof lamp Illumination Control
a dealer or a qualified service center circuits are two blunt cut wires
to install an auxiliary roof lamp. located above the overhead
console, a dark green switched
power wire and a black ground wire.
For more information on roof mount
emergency lamp installation, please
visit the GM Upfitter website at
www.gmupfitter.com or contact your
dealer.
If the vehicle has this button, the
vehicle may have the snow plow D (Instrument Panel
This button is located on the prep package. For further Brightness): This feature controls
overhead console. information, see Adding a Snow the brightness of the instrument
Plow or Similar Equipment on panel lights and is located next to
When the wiring is connected to an page 9‑90. the exterior lamps control.
auxiliary roof‐mounted lamp,
pressing the bottom of the button Push the knob to extend out and
will activate the lamp and illuminate then it can be turned.
an indicator light at the bottom of Turn the knob clockwise or
this button. Pressing the top of the counterclockwise to brighten or dim
button will turn off the roof‐mounted the instrument panel lights. Turning
lamp and indicator. the knob to the farthest clockwise
position turns on the dome lamps.
6-8 Lighting
Dome Lamps Reading Lamps

The dome lamps are located in the For vehicles with reading lamps
overhead console. they are located on the overhead
They come on when any door is console.
opened and turn off after all the To turn on the reading lamps, press
doors are closed. the button located next to each
Turn the instrument panel lamp. To turn them off, press the
brightness knob located below the button again.
dome lamp override button, k (Dome Off): Press the button The vehicle may also have reading
clockwise to the farthest position to in and the dome lamps remain off lamps in other locations. To turn the
manually turn on the dome lamps. when a door is opened. Press the lamps on or off, press the button
The dome lamps remain on until the button again to return it to the located next to the lamp.
knob is turned counterclockwise. extended position so that the dome The lamps are fixed and cannot be
Dome Lamp Override lamps come on when a door is adjusted.
opened.
The dome lamp override button is
located next to the exterior lamps
control.
Lighting 6-9
Lighting Features Battery Load The battery can be discharged at

idle if the electrical loads are very
Management high. This is true for all vehicles.
Entry Lighting The vehicle has Electric Power This is because the generator
The vehicle has an illuminated entry Management (EPM) that estimates (alternator) may not be spinning fast
feature. the battery's temperature and state enough at idle to produce all the
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage power that is needed for very high
When the doors are opened, the electrical loads.
for best performance and extended
dome lamps will come on if the
life of the battery. A high electrical load occurs when
dome override button is in the
extended position. If the dome When the battery's state of charge several of the following are on, such
override button is pressed in, the is low, the voltage is raised slightly as: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps will not come on. to quickly bring the charge back up. lamps, rear window defogger,
When the state of charge is high, climate control fan at high speed,
Exit Lighting the voltage is lowered slightly to heated seats, engine cooling fans,
prevent overcharging. If the vehicle trailer loads, and loads plugged into
The interior lamps come on when has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage accessory power outlets.
the key is removed from the ignition. display on the Driver Information
They turn off automatically in Center (DIC), you may see the
20 seconds. The lights do not come voltage move up or down. This is
on if the dome override button is normal. If there is a problem, an
pressed in. alert will be displayed.
6-10 Lighting
EPM works to prevent excessive Battery Power Protection

discharge of the battery. It does this
by balancing the generator's output This feature shuts off the dome, and
and the vehicle's electrical needs. reading lamps if they are left on for
It can increase engine idle speed to more than 10 minutes when the
generate more power, whenever ignition is off. This will keep the
needed. It can temporarily reduce battery from running down.
the power demands of some
accessories.
Normally, these actions occur in
steps or levels, without being
noticeable. In rare cases at the
highest levels of corrective action,
this action may be noticeable to the
driver. If so, a Driver Information
Center (DIC) message might be
displayed, such as BATTERY LOW
START VEHICLE . If this message
displays, it is recommended that the
driver reduce the electrical loads as
much as possible and restart the
vehicle. See Battery Voltage and
Charging Messages on page 5‑37.
Infotainment System 7-1
Infotainment Rear Seat Infotainment

Rear Seat Entertainment
Introduction
System (RSE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) Infotainment
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46 Read the following pages to
Introduction become familiar with the audio
Phone system's features.
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Trademarks and License { WARNING
Radio Agreements
Trademarks and License Taking your eyes off the road for
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 extended periods could cause a
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
crash resulting in injury or death
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
to you or others. Do not give
Rear Side Window
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 extended attention to infotainment
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-14 tasks while driving.
Audio Players This system provides access to

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
many audio and non audio listings.
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
7-2 Infotainment System
To minimize taking your eyes off the Notice: Contact your dealer Navigation/Radio System
road while driving, do the following before adding any equipment.
For vehicles with a navigation radio
while the vehicle is parked: Adding audio or communication system, see the separate Navigation
. Become familiar with the equipment could interfere with System manual.
operation and controls of the the operation of the engine, radio,
audio system. or other systems, and could Theft-Deterrent Feature
. Set up the tone, speaker damage them. Follow federal
rules covering mobile radio and TheftLock® is designed to
adjustments, and preset radio discourage theft of the vehicle's
stations. telephone equipment.
radio by learning a portion of the
For more information, see Defensive The vehicle has Retained Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Driving on page 9‑3. Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, The radio does not operate if it is
the audio system can be played stolen or moved to a different
This vehicle's audio system may be even after the ignition is turned off. vehicle.
equipped with a noise reduction See Retained Accessory Power
system which can work improperly if (RAP) on page 9‑27 for more
the audio amplifier, engine information.
calibrations, exhaust system,
microphones, radio, or speakers are
modified or replaced. This could
result in more noticeable engine
noise at certain speeds.
Operation
Radio with CD (MP3) Shown, Radio with USB and CD (MP3) Similar
System on page 7‑35 for more

information on the vehicle's RSE
system.
The DVD player is the top slot on
the radio faceplate. The player is
capable of reading the DTS
programmed DVD Audio or DVD
Video media, (DTS and DTS Digital
Surround are registered trademarks
of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.).
Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the
double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
Using the Radio
O (Power/Volume): Press to turn
Radio with USB, CD, and DVD (MP3) the system on and off.
The vehicle has one of these radios are explained later in this section Turn clockwise or counterclockwise
as its audio system. under, “Adjusting the Speakers to increase or decrease the volume.
(Balance/Fade).”
Radios with CD and DVD
Vehicles with a USB, CD, and DVD
Vehicles with a USB, CD, and DVD radio may have a Rear Seat
radio have a Bose® Surround Entertainment (RSE) system. See
Sound System. Some of its features Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
4 (Information) (If Available): To activate SCV: Noise Compensation

Press to switch the display between 1. Set the radio volume to the Technology: Vehicles with the LTZ
the radio station frequency and the desired level. package and a Bose Audio System
time. While the ignition is off, press include the Bose AudioPilot® noise
this button to display the time. Press 2. Press the MENU button to compensation technology. When
to display additional text information display the radio setup menu. turned on, AudioPilot continuously
related to the current FM-RDS or 3. Press the softkey under the adjusts the audio system
XM station; or CD, MP3, or WMA AUTO VOLUM (automatic equalization, to compensate for
song. If information is available volume) tab on the radio display. background noise, so that music
during XM, CD, MP3, or WMA always sounds the same at the set
4. Press the softkey under the volume level.
playback, the song title information
desired Speed Compensated
displays on the top line of the This feature is most effective at
Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
display and artist information lower radio volume settings where
or High) to select the level of
displays on the bottom line. When background noise can affect how
radio volume compensation.
information is not available, “NO well the music is heard. At higher
The display times out after
INFO” displays. volume settings, where the music is
approximately 10 seconds. Each
Speed Compensated Volume higher setting allows for more much louder than the background
(SCV): Radios with Speed radio volume compensation at noise, there might be little or no
Compensated Volume (SCV) faster vehicle speeds. adjustments by AudioPilot.
automatically adjusts the radio
volume to compensate for road and
wind noise as the vehicle's speed
changes while driving, so that the
volume level stays consistent.
To activate: control tab by doing one of the To quickly adjust all tone and
1. Set the radio volume to the following: speaker controls to the middle
desired level. . Pressing the f knob. position, press the f knob for more
than two seconds until a beep
2. Press the MENU button to . Press the softkey under the sounds.
display the radio setup menu. desired tab.
EQ (Equalization): Press this
3. Press the softkey under the 3. Adjust the setting by doing one button to choose bass and treble
AUTO VOLUM (automatic of the following: equalization settings designed for
volume) tab on the radio display. different types of music. Selecting
. Turn the f knob clockwise
4. Press the softkey under the ON MANUAL or changing bass or
tab. The display times out after or counterclockwise. treble, returns the EQ to the manual
approximately 10 seconds. . Press the ¨ SEEK, or bass and treble settings.
For additional information on © SEEK button. Unique EQ settings can be saved
AudioPilot, please visit for each source.
www.bose.com/audiopilot. . Press the \ FWD, or
If the radio has a Bose audio
Setting the Tone (Bass/ s REV button. system, the EQ settings are either
Midrange/Treble) If a station's frequency is weak or if MANUAL or TALK.
there is static, decrease the treble. Digital Signal Processing (DSP):
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange,
or Treble): To adjust the bass, To quickly adjust bass, midrange, Press the EQ button to change the
midrange, or treble: or treble to the middle position, DSP settings (only available on
press the softkey positioned under Bose systems with the LTZ option
1. Press the f knob until the tone the BASS, MID, or TREB tab for package). DSP settings provide a
control tabs display. more than two seconds. A beep choice of different listening
sounds and the level adjusts to the experiences.
2. Highlight the desired tone
middle position.
The following DSP settings are Adjusting the Speakers To quickly adjust all speaker and
available: (Balance/Fade) tone controls to the middle position,
. Normal — Select this setting to BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To press the f knob for more than
adjust the audio for normal adjust the balance or fade: 2 seconds.
mode. This provides the best If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is
sound quality for all seating 1. Press the f knob until the turned on, the radio disables FADE
positions. speaker control tabs display. and mutes the rear speakers.
. Driver — Select this setting to 2. Highlight the desired speaker
adjust the audio for the driver to control tab by doing one of the Radio Messages
receive the best possible sound following: Calibration Error: The audio
quality. system has been calibrated
. Pressing the f knob. for the vehicle from the factory.
. Rear — Select this setting to . Press the softkey under the If Calibration Error displays, it
adjust the audio for the rear seat
desired tab. means that the radio has not been
passengers to receive the best
configured properly for the vehicle
possible sound quality. 3. Adjust the setting by doing one
and it must be returned to your
. Surround of the following:
dealer for service.
(Centerpoint®) — Select this . Turn the f knob clockwise Locked or Loc: One of these
setting to enable Bose or counterclockwise. messages will display when the
Centerpoint. Centerpoint signal
TheftLock® system has locked up
processing produces a surround . Press the ¨ SEEK, or
the radio. Take the vehicle to your
sound listening experience from © SEEK button. dealer for service.
a CD or XM stereo digital audio
source. Centerpoint delivers five . Press the \ FWD, or If any error occurs repeatedly or if
independent audio channels s REV button. an error cannot be corrected,
from conventional two channel contact your dealer.
stereo recordings. (Not available
for AM or FM.)
Radio 4 (Information) (RDS Features): ¨ SEEK: Press to seek the next

For vehicles with RDS features, radio station. Press and hold for a
AM-FM Radio press 4 to display additional text few seconds until a beep sounds to
information related to the current scan for radio stations in ascending
Radio Data System (RDS) FM-RDS station. If information is order, press the ¨ SEEK button
For radios with the Radio Data available, the song title information again to stop scanning radio
System (RDS) feature, it only works displays on the top line of the stations. The radio only seeks and
with FM stations that broadcast display and artist information scans stations with a strong signal
RDS information. This system relies displays on the bottom line. When that are in the selected band.
upon receiving specific information information is not available, s REV: Press to manually tune to
from these stations and only works “NO INFO” displays. a radio station in descending order.
when the information is available. Finding a Station
While the radio is tuned to an \ FWD: Press to manually tune to
FM-RDS station, the station name BAND: Press to switch between a radio station in ascending order.
or call letters displays. In rare AM, FM, or XM™, if equipped. FAV (Favorites): Press to select
cases, a radio station could f (Tune): Turn to manually select different favorite pages for stored
broadcast incorrect information that radio stations. radio stations.
causes the radio features to work
improperly. If this happens, contact © SEEK: Press to seek the Storing Radio Stations
the radio station. previous radio station. Press and Drivers are encouraged to store
hold for a few seconds until a radio station while the vehicle is
beep sounds to scan for radio parked, see Defensive Driving on
stations in descending order, press page 9‑3. Tune to stored radio
the © SEEK button again to stop stations using the presets, favorites
scanning radio stations. The radio button, and steering wheel controls,
only seeks and scans stations with if the vehicle has this feature.
a strong signal that are in the
selected band.
Up to 36 stations can be The number of favorites pages can Satellite Radio

programmed as favorites using the be setup using the MENU button. To
sixbutton. Press the FAV button to setup the number of favorites XM™ Satellite Radio Service
go through up to six pages of pages: XM is a satellite radio service based
favorites, each having six favorite 1. Press the MENU button. in the 48 contiguous United States
stations available per page. Each and 10 Canadian provinces. XM
page of favorites can contain any 2. Press the softkey located below
Satellite Radio has a wide variety of
combination of AM, FM, or XM, the FAV 1-6 tab.
programming and commercial-free
if equipped, stations. 3. Select the number of favorites music, coast to coast, and in
Storing a Radio Station as a pages by pressing the softkey digital-quality sound. A service fee
Favorite located below the displayed is required to receive the XM
page numbers. service. If the service needs to be
To store a station as a favorite: reactivated, the radio will display
4. Press the FAV button, or let the
1. Tune to a radio station. menu time out, to return to the “No Subscription Please Renew on
2. Press the FAV button to display original main radio screen channel XM1.” For more
the page where the station will showing the radio station information, contact XM at
be stored. frequency tabs and to begin the www.xmradio.com or
process of programming 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.,
3. Press and hold one of the and www.xmradio.ca or
favorites.
six softkeys until a beep sounds. 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 to
store additional radio stations.
4 (Information) (XM Satellite Radio FAV (Favorites): Press to select To go to the previous or next XM
Service): For vehicles with XM, different favorites pages for stored station in the selected category,
press 4 to display additional text radio stations. do one of the following:
information related to the current CAT (Category): The CAT button is . Turn the f knob.
XM channel. If information is used to find XM channels when the
available, the song title information radio is in the XM mode.
. Press the softkey below the
displays on the top line of the right or left arrows in the
display and artist information
Finding a Category (CAT) category tab.
displays on the bottom line. When Station . Press © SEEK or ¨ SEEK.
information is not available, To find XM channels in a category:
“NO INFO” displays. 3. To exit the category search
1. Press the CAT button to display mode, press the FAV button or
Finding a Channel the category tabs. Continue BAND button to display the
pressing the CAT button until the favorites again.
BAND: Press to switch between desired category name displays.
AM, FM, or XM™, if equipped. Adding and Removing Categories
. Radios with CD and DVD
f (Tune):Turn to manually select can also navigate the Categories cannot be added or
an XM channel. category list by pressing the removed while the vehicle is moving
© SEEK: Press to go to the \ FWD or the s REV faster than 8 km/h (5 mph).
previous XM channel. buttons. To add or remove a category:
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next 2. Press either of the two softkeys 1. Press the MENU button.
XM channel. below the desired category tab
to immediately tune to the first 2. Press the softkey located below
s REV: Press to go to the
XM station in that category. the XM CAT tab.
previous XM category.
3. Turn the f knob to display the
\ FWD: Press to go to the next
category to add or remove.
XM category.
4. Press the softkey located under Storing an XM Channel as a 4. Press the FAV button, or let the
the Add or Remove tab. Favorite menu time out, to return to the
To restore all removed To store a station as a favorite: original main radio screen
categories, press the softkey showing the radio station
1. Tune to an XM channel. frequency tabs and to begin the
under the Restore All tab.
2. Press the FAV button to display process of programming
5. Repeat the steps to remove the page where the station will favorites.
more categories. be stored. XM Radio Messages
Storing XM Channels 3. Press and hold one of the six XL (Explicit Language
Drivers are encouraged to store XM softkeys until a beep sounds. Channels): These channels,
channels while the vehicle is 4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 to or any others, can be blocked at a
parked; see Defensive Driving on store additional radio stations. customer's request, by calling
page 9‑3. Tune to stored radio 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and
stations using the presets, favorites The number of favorites pages can
be set up using the MENU button. 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
button, and steering wheel controls,
if the vehicle has this feature. To set up the number of favorites XM Updating: The encryption code
pages: in the receiver is being updated, and
Up to 36 stations can be no action is required. This process
programmed as favorites using the 1. Press the MENU button.
should take no longer than
six softkeys below the radio station 2. Press the softkey located below 30 seconds.
frequency tabs and by using the the FAV 1-6 tab.
FAV button. Press the FAV button to No XM Signal: The system is
3. Select the number of favorites functioning correctly, but the vehicle
go through up to six pages of pages by pressing the softkey
favorites, each having six favorite is in a location that is blocking the
located below the displayed XM signal. When the vehicle is
stations available per page. Each
page numbers. moved into an open area, the signal
page of favorites can contain any
combination of AM, FM, or XM, should return.
if equipped, stations.
Loading XM: The audio system is No CAT Info: No category XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver
acquiring and processing audio and information is available at this time in the vehicle could have previously
text data. No action is needed. This on this channel. The system is been in another vehicle. For security
message should disappear shortly. working properly. purposes, XM receivers cannot be
Channel Off Air: This channel is No Information: No text or swapped between vehicles. If this
not currently in service. Tune in to informational messages are message is received after having
another channel. available at this time on this the vehicle serviced, check with
channel. The system is working your dealer.
Channel Unauth: This channel is
blocked or cannot be received with properly. XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,
your XM subscription package. No Subscription Please Renew: this message alternates with the XM
The XM subscription needs to be Radio eight‐digit radio ID label. This
Channel Unavail: This previously label is needed to activate the
assigned channel is no longer reactivated. Contact XM at
www.xmradio.com or call service.
assigned. Tune to another station.
If this station was one of the 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and Unknown: If this message is
presets, choose another station for www.xmradio.ca or call received when tuned to channel 0,
that preset button. 1-877-438-9677 in Canada. there could be a receiver fault.
CAT Not Found: There are no Consult with your dealer.
No Artist Info: No artist
information is available at this time channels available for the selected Check Antenna: If this message
on this channel. The system is category. The system is working does not clear within a short period
working properly. properly. of time, the receiver or antenna
could have a fault. Consult with your
No Title Info: No song title dealer.
information is available at this time
on this channel. The system is
working properly.
Check XM Receivr: If this AM XM™ Satellite Radio Service

message does not clear within a
The range for most AM stations is XM Satellite Radio Service gives
short period of time, the receiver
greater than for FM, especially at digital radio reception from coast to
could have a fault. Consult with your
night. The longer range can cause coast in the 48 contiguous United
dealer.
station frequencies to interfere States, and in Canada. Just as with
XM Not Available: If this message with each other. For better radio FM, tall buildings or hills can
does not clear within a short period reception, most AM radio stations interfere with satellite radio signals,
of time, the receiver could have a boost the power levels during the causing the sound to fade in and
fault. Consult with your dealer. day, and then reduce these levels out. In addition, traveling or standing
during the night. Static can also under heavy foliage, bridges,
Radio Reception occur when things like storms and garages, or tunnels may cause loss
power lines interfere with radio of the XM signal for a period of time.
Frequency interference and static
reception. When this happens, try
can occur during normal radio Cellular Phone Usage
reducing the treble on the radio.
reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience Cellular phone usage may cause
FM Stereo interference with the vehicle's radio.
accessories, and external electronic
devices are plugged into the FM signals only reach about This interference may occur when
accessory power outlet. If there is 16 to 65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although making or receiving phone calls,
interference or static, unplug the the radio has a built-in electronic charging the phone's battery,
item from the accessory power circuit that automatically works to or simply having the phone on. This
outlet. reduce interference, some static interference causes an increased
can occur, especially around tall level of static while listening to the
buildings or hills, causing the sound radio. If static is received while
to fade in and out. listening to the radio, unplug the
cellular phone and turn it off.
Rear Side Window Notice: Do not apply aftermarket Audio Players

glass tinting with metallic film.
Antenna The metallic film in some tinting
The AM-FM antenna is located in materials will interfere with or CD Player
the passenger rear side windows. distort the incoming radio Care of the CD Player
Make sure the inside surfaces of the reception. Any damage caused to
rear side windows are not scratched the antenna due to metallic tinting Do not add any label to a CD.
and that the lines on the glass are materials will not be covered by It could get caught in the CD. If a
not damaged. If the inside surfaces the warranty. CD is recorded on a personal
are damaged, they could interfere computer and a description label is
with radio reception. Satellite Radio Antenna needed, try labeling the top of the
recorded CD with a marking pen.
If a cellular telephone antenna The XM Satellite Radio antenna is
needs to be attached to the glass, located on the roof of the vehicle. The use of CD lens cleaners for
make sure that the grid lines for the Keep the antenna clear of CDs is not advised, due to the risk
AM-FM antenna are not damaged. obstructions for clear radio of contaminating the lens of the CD
There is enough space between the reception. optics with lubricants internal to the
grid lines to attach a cellular CD player mechanism.
telephone antenna without If the vehicle has a sunroof, the
interfering with radio reception. performance of the XM system
(if equipped) may be affected if the
Notice: Using a razor blade or sunroof is open.
sharp object to clear the inside of
the rear side windows may affect
radio reception or damage the
rear side window antenna.
Repairs would not be covered by
the warranty. Do not clear the
inside of the rear side windows
with sharp objects.
Notice: If a label is added to a Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in their Ejecting a CD

CD, more than one CD is inserted original cases or other protective
into the slot at a time, or an cases and away from direct sunlight
Z EJECT: Press and release to
eject the disc. Remove the CD
attempt is made to play scratched and dust. The CD player scans the
when Remove Disc displays.
or damaged CDs, the CD player bottom surface of the disc. If the
If the disc is not removed, after
could be damaged. While using surface of a CD is damaged, such
several seconds, the disc is
the CD player, use only CDs in as cracked, broken, or scratched,
automatically pulled back into the
good condition without any label, the CD does not play properly or not
player.
load one CD at a time, and keep at all. Do not touch the bottom side
the CD player and the loading slot of a CD while handling it; this could Playing a CD
free of foreign materials, liquids, damage the surface. Pick up CDs
and debris. by grasping the outer edges or the If the ignition or radio is turned off,
edge of the hole and the outer edge. with a CD in the player, it stays in
If an error displays, see “CD Player the player. When the ignition or
Messages” later in this section. If the surface of a CD is soiled, radio is turned on, the CD starts
clean it with a soft, lint free cloth or playing where it stopped, if it was
Care of CDs dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, the last selected audio source. The
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality neutral detergent solution mixed CD is controlled by the buttons on
can be reduced due to CD-R or with water. Make sure the wiping the radio faceplate or by the RSA
CD-RW quality, the method of process starts from the center to unit. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
recording, the quality of the music the edge. System on page 7‑46 for more
that has been recorded, and the information.
way the CD-R or CD-RW has been
Inserting a CD
When a CD is inserted, the CD
handled. Handle them carefully. Insert a CD partway into the slot,
symbol displays on the left side of
label side up. The player pulls it in
the radio display. As each new track
and the CD should begin playing.
starts to play, the track number
displays.
The CD player can play the smaller f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on RDM (Random): Press to listen to
8 cm (3 inch) single CDs with an the CD that is currently playing. tracks in random, rather than
adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the sequential order. To use random:
smaller CDs are loaded in the same © SEEK: Press to go to the start of
the current track, if more than 1. Press the softkey positioned
manner. under the RDM tab until Random
ten seconds on the CD have played.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to Current Disc displays.
cycle through CD or Auxiliary when Press to go to the previous track if
less than ten seconds on the CD 2. Press the softkey again to turn
listening to the radio. The CD icon off random play.
and a message showing the disc have played.
and/or track number displays when Press and hold, or press multiple MP3 Supported Files
a CD is in the player. Press again times to continue moving backward The Radio with CD (MP3) and the
and the system automatically through the tracks on the CD. Radio with USB and CD (MP3),
searches for an auxiliary input
device, see, Auxiliary Devices on
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next have the capability of playing an
track. MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc.
page 7‑31 for more information. If a
portable audio player is not Press and hold, or press multiple Format
connected, “No Input Device Found” times to continue moving forward
through the tracks on the CD. Radios that have the capability of
displays.
playing MP3s can play .mp3 or .wma
4 (Information): Press to display s REV (Fast Reverse): Press files that were recorded onto a
additional text information related to and hold to reverse playback quickly CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can
the current song. If information is within a track. be recorded with the following fixed
available, the song title information \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps,
displays on the top line of the and hold to advance playback 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,
display and artist information quickly within a track. 128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps,
displays on the bottom line. When 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or
information is not available, a variable bit rate.
“NO INFO” displays.
Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode Root Directory Tracks are played in the following
Discs The root directory is treated as a order:
The radio can play discs that folder. Files are stored in the root . Play begins from the first track in
contain both uncompressed CD directory when the disc or storage the first playlist and continues
audio and MP3 files. If both device does not contain folders. sequentially through all tracks in
formats are on the disc, the radio Files accessed from the root each playlist. When the last
reads all MP3 files first, then the directory of a CD display as track of the last playlist has
uncompressed CD audio files. F1 ROOT. played, play continues from the
first track of the first playlist.
CD‐R or CD‐RW Supported File Empty Folder
and Folder Structure . Play begins from the first track in
Folders that do not contain files are the first folder and continues
The radio supports: skipped, and the player advances to sequentially through all tracks in
. Up to 50 folders. the next folder that contains files. each folder. When the last track
. Up to eight folders in depth. Order of Play of the last folder has played,
play continues from the first
. Up to 50 playlists. Compressed audio files are
track of the first folder.
accessed in the following order:
. Up to 255 files. File System and Naming
. Playlists (Px).
. Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl The song name that displays is the
extension.
. Files stored in the root directory.
song name that is contained in the
. Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda
. Files stored in folders in the root ID3 tag. If the song name is not
file extension. directory. present in the ID3 tag, then the
radio displays the file name without
the extension (such as .mp3) as the
track name.
Track names longer than using file folders can be played. ¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next
32 characters or four pages are If a CD-R or CD-RW contains more track. Press and hold or press
shortened. The display does not than the maximum of 50 folders, multiple times to continue moving
show parts of words on the last 15 playlists, and 512 folders and forward through tracks.
page of text and the extension of files, the player allows access and
the filename is not displayed. navigates up to the maximum, but s REV (Reverse): Press and hold
all items over the maximum are not to reverse playback quickly. Sound
Preprogrammed Playlists accessible. is heard at a reduced volume and
CDs that have preprogrammed the elapsed time of the file displays.
playlists that were created using Playing an MP3 Release s REV to resume playing.
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or 4 (Information): Press to display \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press
Real Jukebox™ software can be additional text information related to and hold to advance playback
accessed, however, there is no the current song. If information is quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced
playlist editing capability using the available, the song title information volume and the elapsed time of the
radio. These playlists are treated displays on the top line of the
as special folders containing file displays. Release \ FWD to
display and artist information
compressed audio song files. displays on the bottom line. When resume playing. The elapsed time of
information is not available, the file displays.
Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls
file extension and are stored on a “NO INFO” displays. S c (Previous Folder): Press
USB device may be supported by f (Tune): Turn to select MP3 files the softkey below the S c tab to
the radio with a USB port. on the CD currently playing. go to the first track in the previous
folder.
Playlists can be changed by using © SEEK: Press to go to the start of
the softkeys below the S c and the track, if more than ten seconds c T (Next Folder): Press the
c T tabs, the f knob, the have played. Press and hold or softkey below the c T tab to go to
© SEEK button or the ¨ SEEK press multiple times to continue the first track in the next folder.
button. An MP3 CD-R or CD-RW moving backward through tracks.
that has been recorded without
RDM (Random): Press to listen to To listen to files by another artist, alphabetical order on the CD and
tracks in random, rather than press the softkey located below begins playing MP3 files from that
sequential order. To use random: either arrow tab. The disc goes to album.
1. Press the softkey positioned the next or previous artist in To exit music navigator mode, press
under the RDM tab until Random alphabetical order. Continue the softkey below the Back tab to
Current Disc displays. pressing either softkey below the return to normal MP3 playback.
arrow tab until the desired artist
2. Press the softkey again to turn displays. CD Player Messages
off random play.
To change from playback by artist to CHECK DISC: If this message
h (Music Navigator): Press the playback by album: displays and/or the CD ejects, it
softkey below the h tab to have 1. Press the softkey located below could be for one of the following
the files played in order by artist or the Sort By tab. reasons:
album. The player scans the disc to . It is very hot. When the
sort the files by artist and album ID3 2. Press one of the softkeys below
the album tab from the sort temperature returns to normal,
tag information. It can take several the CD should play.
minutes to scan the disc depending screen.
on the number of files on the disc. 3. Press the softkey below the
. The road is very rough. When
The radio may begin playing while it back tab to return to the main the road becomes smoother, the
is scanning in the background. music navigator screen. CD should play.
. The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,
When the scan is finished, the disc The album name displays on the
begins playing files in order by second line between the arrows and or upside down.
artist. The current artist playing is songs from the current album . The air is very humid. If so, wait
shown on the second line of the begins to play. Once all songs from about an hour and try again.
display. Once all songs by that artist that album have played, the player
are played, the player moves to the moves to the next album in
next artist in alphabetical order and
begins playing files by that artist.

. There could have been a The use of CD/DVD lens cleaners is Store CD-Rs or CD-RWs in their
problem while burning the CD. not advised, due to the risk of original cases or other protective
. The label could be caught in the contaminating the lens of the optics cases and away from direct sunlight
CD player. with lubricants internal to the CD and dust. The CD or DVD player
and DVD player mechanism. scans the bottom surface of the
If the CD is not playing correctly, for disc. If the surface of a disc is
any other reason, try a known Notice: If a label is added to a
CD, more than one CD is inserted damaged, such as cracked, broken,
good CD. or scratched, the disc does not play
into the slot at a time, or an
If any error occurs repeatedly or if attempt is made to play scratched properly or not at all. Do not touch
an error cannot be corrected, or damaged CDs, the CD player the bottom side of a disc while
contact your dealer. If the radio could be damaged. While using handling it; this could damage the
displays an error message, write it the CD player, use only CDs in surface. Pick up discs by grasping
down and provide it to your dealer good condition without any label, the outer edges or the edge of the
when reporting the problem. load one CD at a time, and keep hole and the outer edge.
the CD player and the loading slot If the surface of a disc is soiled,
CD/DVD Player free of foreign materials, liquids, clean it with a soft, lint‐free cloth or
and debris. dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild,
Care of the CD and DVD Player
If an error displays, see “CD neutral detergent solution mixed
Do not add any label to a disc. with water. Make sure the wiping
Messages” later in this section.
It could get caught in the CD or process starts from the center to
DVD player. If a disc is recorded Care of CDs and DVDs the edge.
on a personal computer and a
description label is needed, try If playing a CD-R or CD-RW, the
labeling the top of the recorded disc sound quality can be reduced due to
with a marking pen. CD-R or CD-RW quality, the method
of recording, the quality of the music
that has been recorded, and the
way the CD-R or CD-RW has been
handled. Handle them carefully.
Audio Output Input Jack” in Auxiliary Devices on Ejecting a Disc

page 7‑31, or “Audio/Video (A/V)
Only one audio source can be heard
Jacks” under Rear Seat
Z CD (Eject): Press and release
through the speakers at one time. to eject the disc that is currently
Entertainment (RSE) System on
An audio source is defined as DVD playing. The CD ejects from the
slot, CD slot, XM, FM‐AM, front bottom slot. A beep sounds and
auxiliary jack, USB port, or rear In some vehicles, depending on Ejecting Disc displays. Once the
auxiliary jack. audio options, the rear speakers disc is ejected, Remove Disc
can be muted when the RSA power displays. The disc can be removed.
Press the O button to turn the radio is turned on. See Rear Seat Audio If the disc is not removed, after
on. The radio can be heard through (RSA) System on page 7‑46 for several seconds the disc
all of the vehicle speakers. more information. automatically pulls back into the
Front seat passengers can listen player.
Inserting a Disc
to the radio (AM, FM, or XM if Z DVD (Eject): Press and
equipped) by pressing the BAND Insert a disc partway into either slot, release to eject the disc that is
button or the DVD/CD AUX button to label side up. The player pulls it in currently playing in the top slot.
select CD slot, DVD slot, front and the disc should begin playing. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc
auxiliary input, USB port, or rear (Loading a disc into the system, displays.
auxiliary input (if available). depending on media type and
format, ranges from 5 to 20 seconds If loading and reading of a disc
If a playback device is plugged into for a CD, and up to 30 seconds for a cannot be completed, due to
the radio’s front auxiliary input jack, DVD to begin playing.) unknown format, etc., and the disc
USB port, or the rear auxiliary jack, fails to eject, press and hold for
the front seat passengers are able more than five seconds to force the
to listen to playback from this disc to eject.
source through the vehicle
speakers. See “Using the Auxiliary
Playing a CD (in Either the The CD player can play the smaller (if available). See “Using the
DVD or CD Slot) 8 cm (3 in) single CDs with an Auxiliary Input Jack” in Auxiliary
adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the Devices on page 7‑31 or “Audio/
If the ignition or radio is turned off smaller CDs are loaded in the same Video (A/V) Jacks” under Rear Seat
with a CD in the player, it stays in manner. Entertainment (RSE) System on
the player. When the ignition or page 7‑35 for more information.
radio is turned on, the CD starts DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to
playing where it stopped, if it was cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary If a disc is inserted into the top DVD
the last selected audio source. The when listening to the radio. The slot, the rear seat operator can turn
CD is controlled by the buttons on DVD/CD text tab and a message on the video screen and use the
the radio faceplate or by the RSA showing the track or chapter remote control to navigate the CD
unit. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA) number will display when a disc is in (tracks only) through the remote
System on page 7‑46 for more either slot. Press the DVD/CD AUX control.
information. The DVD/CD decks button again and the system 4 (Information): Press to display
(the upper slot is the DVD deck and automatically searches for an additional text information related to
the lower slot is the CD deck) of the auxiliary input device; see Auxiliary the current song. If information is
radio are compatible with most Devices on page 7‑31 for more available, the song title information
audio CDs, CD-Rs, CD-RWs, information. If a portable audio displays on the top line of the
and MP3s. player is not connected, “No Aux display and artist information
Input Device” displays. If a disc is in displays on the bottom line. When
When a CD is inserted, the text tab both the DVD slot and the CD slot,
DVD or CD symbol displays on the information is not available, “NO
the DVD/CD AUX button cycles INFO” displays.
left side of the radio display. As between the two sources and does
each new track starts to play, the not indicate “No Aux Input Device.” f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on
track number displays. If a front auxiliary device is the disc that is currently playing.
connected, the DVD/CD AUX button
cycles through all available options,
such as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front
Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of RDM (Random): Press to listen to The CD player reads both
the current track, if more than tracks in random, rather than uncompressed audio and MP3/
five seconds on the CD have sequential order. To use random: WMA files on a mixed mode disc.
played. 1. Press the softkey under the Uncompressd audio is played
RDM tab until Random Current before MP3/WMA files. Press the
Press to go to the previous track if CAT (category) button to toggle
less than five seconds on the CD Disc displays.
between uncompressed audio and
have played. 2. Press the softkey again to turn MP3/WMA files.
Press and hold, or press multiple off random play.
CD‐R or CD‐RW Supported File
times, to continue moving backward MP3 and WMA Supported Files and Folder Structure
through the tracks on the CD.
Format The DVD player supports:
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next
track. The radio can play .mp3 or .wma . Up to 255 folders.
Press and hold, or press multiple files that were recorded onto a . Up to eight folders in depth.
times, to continue moving forward CD-R or CD-RW disc.
. Up to 15 playlists.
through the tracks on the CD. Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode
Discs
. Up to 40 sessions.
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press
and hold to reverse playback quickly The radio plays discs that contain
. Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl
within a track. both uncompressed CD audio and extension.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press MP3/WMA files depending on which . Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda
and hold to advance playback slot the disc is loaded into. file extension.
quickly within a track. The DVD player only reads
uncompressed audio and ignores
MP3/WMA files on a mixed
mode disc.
The CD player supports: No Folder Tracks are played in the following

. Up to 512 files and folders. When the disc contains only order:
. Up to 8 folders in depth. compressed files, the files are . Play begins from the first track in
located under the root folder. The the first playlist and continues
. Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl next and previous folder function sequentially through all tracks in
extension. does not function on a disc that was each playlist. When the last
. Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda recorded without folders or playlists. track of the last playlist has
file extension. When displaying the name of the played, play continues from the
folder, the radio displays ROOT. first track of the first playlist.
Root Directory
When the disc contains only . Play begins from the first track in
The root directory of the disc is playlists and compressed audio the first folder and continues
treated as a folder. If the root files, but no folders, all files are sequentially through all tracks in
directory has compressed audio located under the root folder. The each folder. When the last track
files, the directory displays as folder down and the folder up of the last folder has played,
F1 ROOT on the radio. buttons search playlists first and play continues from the first
If a disc contains both then go to the root folder. When the track of the first folder.
uncompressed CD audio and MP3/ radio displays the name of the When play enters a new folder, the
WMA files, a folder under the root folder, the radio displays ROOT. display does not automatically show
directory called CD accesses all of Order of Play the new folder name unless the
the CD audio tracks on the disc. folder mode has been chosen as
Compressed audio files are the default display. The new track
Empty Folder accessed in the following order: name displays.
Folders that do not contain files are . Playlists (Px).
skipped, and the player advances to
the next folder that contains files.
. Files stored in the root directory.
. Files stored in folders in the root
directory.
File System and Naming Playing an MP3 or WMA \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press
The song name that displays is the (in Either the DVD or CD Slot) and hold to advance playback
song name that is contained in the If a disc is inserted into the top DVD quickly.
ID3 tag. If the song name is not slot, the rear seat operator can turn S c (Previous Folder): Press
present in the ID3 tag, then the on the video screen and use the the softkey below the S c tab to
radio displays the file name without remote control to navigate the CD go to the first track in the previous
the extension (such as .mp3) as the (tracks only). folder.
track name.
f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMA c T (Next Folder): Press the
Track names longer than files.
32 characters or 4 pages are softkey below the c T tab to go to
shortened. Parts of words on the © SEEK: Press to go to the start of the first track in the next folder.
last page of text and the extension the track, if more than five seconds
have played. Press and hold or RDM (Random): Press to listen to
of the file name do not display. tracks in random, rather than
press multiple times, if less than
Preprogrammed Playlists five seconds have played, to sequential order.
Preprogrammed playlists that were continue moving backward through To use random:
created using WinAmp™, tracks.
1. Press the softkey under the
MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ ¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next RDM tab until Random Current
software can be accessed; however, track. Disc displays
they cannot be edited using the
Press and hold, or press multiple 2. Press the same softkey again to
radio. These playlists are treated as
times, to continue moving forward turn off random play.
special folders containing
through tracks.
compressed audio song files. h (Music Navigator): Press the
Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold softkey below the h tab to play
to reverse playback quickly. files in order by artist or album.
file extension and are stored on a
USB device may be supported by
the radio with a USB port.
The player scans the disc to sort the To change from playback by artist to Using the DVD Player
files by artist and album ID3 tag playback by album:
The DVD player can be controlled
information. It can take several 1. Press the softkey below the Sort by the buttons on the remote
minutes to scan the disc depending By tab. control, the RSA system, or by the
on the number of files on the disc.
2. Press one of the softkeys below buttons on the radio faceplate. See
The radio may begin playing while it
the Album tab from the sort “Remote Control” under Rear Seat
is scanning in the background.
screen. Entertainment (RSE) System on
When the scan is finished, the disc page 7‑35 and Rear Seat Audio
begins playing files in order by 3. Press the softkey below the (RSA) System on page 7‑46 for
artist. The current artist playing is Back tab to return to the main more information.
shown on the second line of the music navigator screen.
The DVD player is only compatible
display. Once all songs by that artist The album name displays on the with DVDs of the appropriate region
are played, the player moves to the second line between the arrows, code printed on the jacket of
next artist in alphabetical order and and songs from the current album most DVDs.
begins playing files by that artist. begin to play. Once all songs from
that album have played, the player The DVD slot of the radio is
To listen to files by another artist,
moves to the next album in compatible with most audio CDs
press the softkey located below
alphabetical order on the CD and and CD-R/RW, DVD-Video,
either arrow tab. The disc goes to
begins playing MP3 files from that DVD-Audio, DVD-R/RW, and DVD
the next or previous artist in
album. +R/RW media, along with MP3 and
alphabetical order. Continue
WMA formats.
pressing either softkey below the To exit music navigator mode, press
arrow tab until the artist displays. the softkey below the Back tab to If an error message displays on the
return to normal MP3 playback. video screen or the radio, see “DVD
Display Error Messages” under
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
System on page 7‑35, and “CD/DVD
Player Messages” later in this
section for more information.
Inserting a Disc If loading and reading of a disc cycles through all available options,
cannot be completed, due to such as: DVD slot, CD slot, front
Insert a disc partway into the top
unknown format, etc., and the disc auxiliary, and rear auxiliary
slot, label side up. The player pulls
fails to eject, press and hold for (if available). See “Using the
it in and the disc should begin
more than five seconds to force the Auxiliary Input Jack” in Auxiliary
playing. “Loading Disc” shows on
disc to eject. Devices on page 7‑31 or “Audio/
the radio display. At the same time,
Video (A/V) Jacks” under Rear Seat
the radio displays a softkey menu of Playing a DVD Entertainment (RSE) System on
option(s). Some discs automatically
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to page 7‑35 for more information.
play the movie while others default
to the softkey menu display, cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary If a disc is inserted into the top DVD
which requires the Play, Enter, when listening to the radio. The slot, the rear seat operator can turn
or Navigation softkeys to be DVD/CD text tab and a message on the video screen and use the
pressed, either by softkey or by the showing the track or chapter remote control to navigate the CD
rear seat passenger using the number will display when a disc is in (tracks only) through the remote
remote control. either slot. Press the DVD/CD AUX control.
button again and the system
Loading a disc into the system, automatically searches for an O (Power): Press to turn the
depending on media type and auxiliary input device; see Auxiliary radio on or off. Turn clockwise or
format, ranges from 5 to 20 seconds Devices on page 7‑31 for more counterclockwise to increase or
for a CD, and up to 30 seconds for information. If a portable audio decrease the volume. Press and
a DVD. player is not connected, “No Aux hold for more than two seconds to
Input Device” displays. If a disc is in turn off the entire radio and Rear
Ejecting a Disc Seat Entertainment (RSE) system
both the DVD slot and the CD slot,
Z DVD (Eject): Press and the DVD/CD AUX button cycles and to start the Parental Control
release to eject the disc currently between the two sources and does feature. Parental Control prevents
playing in the top slot. A beep not indicate “No Aux Input Device.” the rear seat occupant from
sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. If a front auxiliary device is operating the Rear Seat Audio
connected, the DVD/CD AUX button (RSA) system or remote control.
A lock symbol displays next to the s REV (Fast Reverse): Press to r / j (Play/Pause): Press either
clock display. The Parental Control quickly reverse the CD or DVD at the Play or Pause tab displayed on
feature remains on until the knob is five times the normal speed. To stop the radio, to toggle between pausing
pressed and held for more than fast reversing, press again. This or restarting playback of a DVD.
two seconds again, or until the button might not work when the If the forward arrow is showing on
driver turns the ignition off and exits DVD is playing the copyright the display, the system is in pause
the vehicle. information or the previews. mode. If the Pause tab is showing
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press to on the display, the system is in
a CD or DVD. fast forward the CD or DVD at playback mode. If the DVD screen
is off, press the play button to turn
© SEEK: Press to return to the start five times the normal speed. To stop
the screen on.
of the current track or chapter. fast forwarding, press again. This
Press again to go to the previous button might not work when the Some DVDs begin playing after the
track or chapter. This button might DVD is playing the copyright previews have finished, although
not work when the DVD is playing information or the previews. there could be a delay of up to
the copyright information or the 30 seconds. If the DVD does
Using Softkeys to Play a DVD-V not begin playing the movie
previews. (Video) automatically, press the softkey
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radio located under the play/pause
track or chapter. This button might display menu shows several tab symbol tag displayed on the radio.
not work when the DVD is playing options for playback. Press the If the DVD still does not play, refer
the copyright information or the softkey located under any tab option to the on-screen instructions,
previews. during DVD-V playback. if available.
c (Stop): Press to stop playing,
rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD.
r (Enter): Press to select the The video screen automatically q Group r : Press to cycle
choices that are highlighted in turns on when the DVD-V is through musical groupings on the
any menu. inserted into the DVD slot, and does DVD-A disc.
not automatically power on when
y (Menu): Press to access the the DVD-A is inserted into the DVD Nav (Navigate): Press to display
DVD menu. The DVD menu is slot. It must be manually turned on directional arrows for navigating
different on every DVD. Use the by the rear seat occupant through through the menus.
softkeys located under the the remote control power button. e (Audio Stream): Press to cycle
navigation arrows to navigate the through audio stream formats
cursor through the DVD menu. After Using Softkeys to Play a DVD-A
located on the DVD-A disc. The
making a selection press this (Audio)
video screen shows the audio
button. This button only operates Once a DVD-A is inserted, the radio stream changing.
when using a DVD. display menu shows several tab
The rear seat passenger can
Nav (Navigate): Press to display options for playback. Press the
navigate the DVD-V and DVD-A
directional arrows for navigating softkey located under any tab option
menus and controls through the
through the menus. during DVD-A playback.
remote control. See “Remote
q (Return): Press to exit the r / j (Play/Pause): Press either Control” under Rear Seat
current active menu and return to the play or pause icon displayed on Entertainment (RSE) System on
the previous menu. This button the radio, to toggle between pausing page 7‑35 for more information. The
operates only when a DVD is or restarting playback of a DVD. video screen automatically turns on
playing and a menu is active. If the forward arrow is showing on when the DVD-V is inserted
the display, the system is in pause into the DVD slot, and does not
The rear seat passenger can
mode. If the pause tab is showing automatically power on when the
navigate the DVD-V and DVD-A
on the display, the system is in DVD-A is inserted into the DVD slot.
menus and controls through the
playback mode. It must be manually turned on by
remote control. See “Remote
Control” under Rear Seat the rear seat occupant through the
Entertainment (RSE) System on remote control power button.
Stopping and Resuming CD/DVD Player Messages

. The road is very rough. When
Playback the road becomes smoother, the
Disc Format Error: This message disc should play.
To stop playing a DVD without displays if the disc is inserted with
turning off the system, press the the disc label wrong side up, or if
. The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,
c button on the remote control, the disc is damaged. or upside down.
or press the softkey located under Disc Region Error: This message
. The air is very humid. If so, wait
the c or the r / j tabs displayed displays if the disc is not from a about an hour and try again.
on the radio. If the radio is sourced correct region. . There was a problem while
to something other than DVD-V, burning the disc.
No Disc Inserted: This message
press the DVD/CD AUX button to
displays if no disc is present when . The label is caught in the CD/
make DVD-V the active source.
the Z or DVD/CD AUX button is DVD player.
To resume DVD playback, press the pressed on the radio. If the disc is not playing correctly, for
r / j button on the remote control, any other reason, try a known
or press the softkey located under Optical Error: This message
displays if the disc was inserted good disc.
the r / j tab on the radio. The DVD
upside down. If any error occurs repeatedly or if
should resume play from where it
last stopped if the disc has not been Disk Read Error: This message an error cannot be corrected,
ejected and the stop button has not displays if a disc was inserted with contact your dealer. If the radio
been pressed twice on the remote an invalid or unknown format. displays an error message, write it
control. If the disc has been ejected down and provide it to your dealer
Player Error: This message when reporting the problem.
or the stop button has been pressed displays if there are disc load or
twice on the remote control, the disc disc eject problems.
resumes playing at the beginning of
the disc.
. It is very hot. When the
temperature returns to normal,
the disc should play.
Auxiliary Devices For optimal sound quality, increase DVD/CD AUX (CD/Auxiliary):
the portable audio device's volume Press to cycle through DVD, CD,
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack to the loudest level. or Auxiliary when listening to the
Radios with an auxiliary input jack It is always best to power the radio. The DVD/CD text tab and a
located on the lower right side of the portable audio device through its message showing track or chapter
faceplate can connect to an external own battery while playing. number displays when a disc is in
audio device such as an iPod®, either slot. Press again and the
MP3 player, CD player, for use as
O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise system automatically searches for
or counterclockwise to increase or an auxiliary input device, such as a
another source for audio listening. decrease the volume of the portable
This input jack is not an audio portable audio player. If a portable
player. Additional volume audio player is not connected, “No
output; do not plug headphones into
adjustments might have to be made Aux Input Device” displays. If a disc
the front auxiliary input jack.
from the portable device if the is in both the DVD slot and the CD
Drivers are encouraged to set up volume is not loud or soft enough. slot the DVD/CD AUX button cycles
any auxiliary device while the BAND: Press to listen to the radio between the two sources and not
vehicle is in P (Park). See indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If a
when a portable audio device is
Defensive Driving on page 9‑3 for front auxiliary device is connected,
playing. The portable audio device
more information on driver continues playing. the DVD/CD AUX button cycles
distraction. through all available options, such
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front
To use a portable audio player,
play a CD when a portable audio Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary
connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to device is playing. Press again and
the radio's front auxiliary input jack. (if available). See “Using the
the system begins playing audio Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” in this
When a device is connected, press
from the connected portable audio section, or “Audio/Video (A/V)
the radio CD/AUX button to begin
player. If a portable audio player is Jacks” under, Rear Seat
playing audio from the device over not connected, “No Input Device
the vehicle speakers. Entertainment (RSE) System on
Found” displays. page 7‑35 for more information.
Using the USB Port Make sure the iPod has the latest
. FAT16
firmware from Apple® for proper . FAT32
Radios with a USB port can control
operation. iPod firmware can
a USB storage device or an iPod Connecting a USB Storage
be updated using the latest
using the radio buttons and knobs.
iTunes® application. See Device or iPod
USB Support www.apple.com/itunes. The USB Port can be used to
The USB connector is located on For help with identifying your iPod, control an iPod or a USB storage
the instrument panel or in the center go to www.apple.com/support. device.
console, and uses the USB 2.0 Radios that have a USB port can To connect a USB storage device,
standard. play .mp3 and .wma files that are connect the device to the USB port
USB Supported Devices stored on a USB storage device as located in the center console or on
well as AAC files that are stored on the instrument panel.
. USB Flash Drives an iPod. To connect an iPod, connect one
. Portable USB Hard Drives end of the USB cable that came
USB Supported File and Folder
. Fifth generation or later iPod Structure with the iPod to the iPod’s dock
connector and connect the other
. iPod nanos The radio supports: end to the USB port located in the
. iPod touch . Up to 700 folders. center console or on the instrument
. iPod classic . Up to 8 folders in depth. panel. If the vehicle is on and the
USB connection works, “OK to
Not all iPods and USB Drives are . Up to 65,535 files. disconnect” and a GM logo may
compatible with the USB port. appear on the iPod and iPod
. Folder and file names up to
64 bytes. appears on the radio display. The
iPod music appears on the radio’s
. Files with an .mp3 or .wma file display and begins playing.
extension.
. AAC files stored on an iPod.
The iPod charges while it is © SEEK: Press to go to the start of Using Softkeys to Control a
connected to the vehicle if the the track, if more than ten seconds USB Storage Device or iPod
vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY have played. Press and hold or
or ON/RUN position. When the The five softkeys below the radio
press multiple times to continue display are used to control the
vehicle is turned off, the iPod moving backward through tracks.
automatically powers off and will not functions listed below.
charge or draw power from the ¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next To use the softkeys:
vehicle's battery. track. Press and hold or press
multiple times to continue moving 1. Press the first or fifth softkey
If you have an older iPod model that forward through tracks. below the radio display to
is not supported, it can still be used display the functions listed
by connecting it to the Auxiliary s REV (Reverse): Press and hold below, or press the softkey
Input Jack using a standard 3.5 mm to reverse playback quickly. Sound below the function if it is
(1/8 in) stereo cable. See “Using the is heard at a reduced volume. currently displayed.
Auxiliary Input Jack” earlier for more Release s REV to resume playing.
2. Press the softkey below the tab
information. The elapsed time of the file
with the function on it to use that
displays.
Using the Radio to Control a function.
USB Storage Device or iPod \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press
j (Pause): Press the softkey below
and hold to advance playback
The radio can control a USB quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced
j to pause the track. The tab
storage device or an iPod using the appears raised when pause is being
volume. Release \ FWD to
radio buttons and knobs and display used. Press the softkey below j
resume playing. The elapsed time of
song information on the radio’s again to resume playback.
the file displays.
display. Back: Press the softkey below the
f (Tune): Turn to select files.
4 (Information): Press to display
back tab to go back to the main
additional information about the
display screen on an iPod, or the
selected track.
root directory on a USB storage
device.

. Third softkey, 5% through the list
c (Folder View): Press the each time the softkey is pressed.
3. Press f to select the
softkey below c to view the desired menu.
. Fourth softkey, 10% through the
contents of the current folder on the 4. Turn f to scroll through the
USB drive. To browse and select list each time the softkey is
pressed. folders or files in the
files:
selected menu.
. Fifth softkey, end of the list.
1. Press the softkey below c. 5. Press f to select the desired file
h (Music Navigator): Press the
2. Turn f to scroll through the list softkey below h to view and
to be played.
of folders. select a file on an iPod, using the To skip through large lists, the five
3. Press f to select the desired iPod's menu system. Files are softkeys can be used to navigate in
sorted by: the following order:
folder. If there is more then one
folder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 until . Playlists . First softkey, first item in the list.
the desired folder is reached. . . Second softkey, 1% through the
Artists
4. Turn f to scroll through the files list each time the softkey is
. Albums pressed.
in the selected folder. . Genres . Third softkey, 5% through the list
5. Press f to select the desired file . Songs each time the softkey is pressed.
to be played.
. Composers . Fourth softkey, 10% through the
To skip through large lists, the five list each time the softkey is
softkeys can be used to navigate in To select files:
pressed.
the following order: 1. Press the softkey below h. . Fifth softkey, end of the list.
. First softkey, first item in the list.
2. Turn f to scroll through the list
. Second softkey, 1% through the of menus.
list each time the softkey is
pressed.
Repeat Functionality > (Shuffle Off): Press the Rear Seat

To use Repeat: softkey below 2 to turn shuffle
off. This is the default mode when a
Infotainment
Press the softkey below " or ' USB storage device or iPod is first
to select between Repeat All and connected. Rear Seat Entertainment
Repeat Track. (RSE) System
2 (Shuffle All Songs / Shuffle
" (Repeat All): Press the softkey Songs): Press the softkey below The vehicle may have an
below " to repeat all tracks. The = or C to shuffle all songs on Overhead DVD Rear Seat
tab appears lowered when Repeat the USB storage device or iPod. Entertainment (RSE) system. The
All is being used. This is the default RSE system works with the
mode when a USB storage device
C (Shuffle Album): Press the
vehicle's audio system. The DVD
or iPod is first connected. softkey below > to shuffle all player is part of the front radio. The
songs in the current album on RSE system includes a radio with a
' (Repeat Track): Press the an iPod. DVD player, a video display screen,
softkey below ' to repeat one
track. The tab appears raised when
= (Shuffle Folder): Press the and if the vehicle has a third row
softkey below > to shuffle all seat, it could have a second video
Repeat Track is being used. display screen, audio/video jacks,
songs in the current folder on a USB
Shuffle Functionality storage device. two wireless headphones, and a
remote control. See CD/DVD Player
To use Shuffle: on page 7‑20 for more information
Press the softkey below >, 2, on the vehicle's DVD system.
C or = to select between
Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/
Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album,
or Shuffle Folder.
Before Driving features such as: radio, video Headphones

screen, Rear Seat Audio (RSA),
The RSE is designed for rear seat
DVD, and/or CD. While Parental
passengers only. The driver cannot
Control is on, a padlock icon
safely view the video screen while
displays.
driving and should not try to do so.
The radio can be turned back on
In severe or extreme weather
with a single press of the power
conditions, the RSE system might
button, but the RSE system will
not work until the temperature is
remain under Parental Control.
within the operating range. The
operating range for the RSE system To turn Parental Control off, press
is above −20°C (−4°F) or below and hold the radio power button for
60°C (140°F). If the temperature of more than two seconds. The RSE
the vehicle is outside this range, returns from where it was previously
heat or cool the vehicle until the left and the padlock icon disappears
from the radio display. A. Battery cover
temperature is within the operating
range of the RSE system. Parental Control can also be turned B. Channel 1 or 2 switch
Parental Control off by inserting or ejecting any disc, C. Power button
pressing the play icon on the radio D. Volume control
The RSE system may have a DVD display menu, or changing an
Parental Control feature, depending ignition position. E. Power indicator light
on which radio the vehicle has. To
The RSE includes two 2-channel
start Parental Control, press and
wireless headphones that are
hold the radio power button for more
dedicated to this system. Channel 1
than two seconds to stop all system
is dedicated to the video screen,
while Channel 2 is dedicated to
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) selections.
These headphones can be used to Infrared transmitters are located at Notice: Do not store the
listen to the radio, CDs, DVDs, the rear of the overhead console. headphones in heat or direct
MP3s, DVD‐As, or any auxiliary The headphones shut off sunlight. This could damage the
source connected to A/V jacks or automatically to save the battery headphones and repairs will not
the auxiliary input jack, if the vehicle power if the RSE system and RSA be covered by the warranty.
has this feature. The wireless are shut off, or if the headphones Storage in extreme cold can
headphones have a power button, are out of range of the transmitters weaken the batteries. Keep the
channel 1 or 2 switch, and a volume for more than three minutes. If you headphones stored in a cool, dry
control. move too far forward or step out of place.
If the vehicle has a third row video the vehicle, the headphones lose If the foam ear pads attached to the
screen display, it has two additional the audio signal. headphones become worn or
headphones. To adjust the volume on the damaged, the pads can be replaced
Push the power button to turn on headphones, use the volume control separately from the headphone set.
the headphones. An indicator light located on the right side. To purchase replacement ear pads,
located on the headphones comes For optimal audio performance, the call 1‐888‐293‐3332, then prompt
on. If the light comes on, but there headphones must be worn correctly. zero (0), or contact your dealer.
is intermittent sound and/or static on Headphones should be worn with
the headphones, or if the indicator the headband over the top of the
light does not come on, the batteries head for best audio reception. The
might need to be replaced. See symbol L (Left) appears on the
“Battery Replacement” later in this outside bottom edge of the ear cup
section for more information. Switch and should be positioned on the left
the headphones to Off when not ear. The symbol R (Right) appears
in use. on the outside bottom edge of the
ear cup and should be positioned on
the right ear.
Battery Replacement Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks The A/V jacks, located on the rear
To change the batteries on the of the floor console, allow audio or
headphones: video signals to be connected from
an auxiliary device such as a
1. Turn the screw to loosen the camcorder or a video game unit to
battery door located on the left the RSE system.
side of the headphones. Slide Adapter connectors or cables
the battery door open. (not included) may be required to
2. Replace the two batteries in the connect the auxiliary device to the
compartment. Make sure that A/V jacks. Refer to the
they are installed correctly, using manufacturer’s instructions for
the diagram on the inside of the proper usage.
battery compartment. Power for auxiliary devices is not
3. Replace the battery door and supplied by the radio system.
tighten the door screw. Yellow : Video Input
If the headphones are to be stored White : Left Audio Input
for a long period of time, remove the Red : Right Audio Input
batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place. The A/V jacks are color coded to
match typical home entertainment
system equipment.
To use the auxiliary inputs of the How to Change the RSE Video Audio Output
RSE system, connect an external Screen Settings
Audio from the DVD player or
auxiliary device to the color-coded The screen display mode (normal, auxiliary inputs can be heard
A/V jacks and turn both the auxiliary full, and zoom), screen brightness, through the following possible
device and the video screen power and setup menu language can be sources:
on. If the video screen is in the DVD changed from the on screen setup
player mode, pressing the AUX . Wireless headphones
menu. To change any feature:
(auxiliary) button on the remote . Vehicle speakers
control switches the video screen 1. Press the z (display menu)
from the DVD player mode to the button on the remote control.
. Vehicle‐wired headphone jacks
auxiliary device. The audio of the on the RSA system, if the
connected source can be listened to 2. Use the remote control vehicle has this feature.
over the speakers by sourcing the n, q, p, o (navigation)
The RSE system always transmits
radio to the auxiliary device or by arrows and the r (enter) the audio signal to the wireless
sourcing the RSA to the Rear Aux button to use the setup menu. headphones, if there is audio
and listening with the wireless available. See “Headphones” earlier
3. Press the z button again to
headphones on Channel 2 or with in this section for more information.
the wired headphones. See “Using remove the setup menu from the
the Auxiliary Input Jack” under screen. The DVD player is capable of
Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑31 for outputting audio to the wired
more information about changing headphone jacks on the RSA
the source. system, if the vehicle has this
feature. The DVD player can be
selected as an audio source on the
RSA system. See Rear Seat Audio
(RSA) System on page 7‑46 for
more information.
When a device is connected to the If a DVD is playing and the screen Remote Control
A/V jacks, or the radio's auxiliary is raised to its locked position, the
input jack if the vehicle has this screen remains on. This is normal,
feature, the rear seat passengers and the DVD continues to play
are able to hear audio from the through the previous audio source.
auxiliary device through the wireless Use the remote control power button
or wired headphones. The front seat or eject the disc to turn off the
passengers are able to listen to screen.
playback from this device through The overhead console contains the
the vehicle speakers by selecting infrared transmitters for the wireless
AUX as the source on the radio. headphones and the infrared
Video Screen(s) receivers for the remote control.
They are located at the rear of the
The video screen(s) are located in console.
the overhead console.
Notice: Avoid directly touching To use the remote control, aim it at
To use the video screen(s): the video screen, as damage may the transmitter window at the rear of
1. Push the release button located occur. See “Cleaning the Video the RSE overhead console and
on the overhead console. Screens” later in this section for press the desired button. Direct
more information. sunlight or very bright light could
2. Move the screen to the desired affect the ability of the RSE
position. transmitter to receive signals from
When the video screen is not in the remote control. If the remote
use, push it up into its locked control does not seem to be
position. working, the batteries might need to
be replaced. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section.
Objects blocking the line of sight Remote Control Buttons n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation
could also affect the function of the O (Power): Press this button to Arrows): Use the arrow buttons to
remote control. turn the video screen on and off. navigate through a menu.
If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD P (Illumination): Press this button r (Enter): Press this button to
slot, the remote control O (power) to turn the remote control backlight select the choice that is highlighted
button can be used to turn on the on. The backlight automatically in any menu.
video screen display and start the times out after 7 to 10 seconds if no z (Display Menu): Press this
disc. The radio can also turn on the other button is pressed while the button to adjust the brightness,
video screen display. See CD/DVD backlight is on. screen display mode (normal, full,
Player on page 7‑20 for more
information. v (Title): Press this button to or zoom), and display the
return the DVD to the main menu of language menu.
Notice: Storing the remote the DVD. This function could vary q (Return): Press this button to
control in a hot area or in direct for each disc. exit the current active menu and
sunlight can damage it, and the
repairs will not be covered by the
y (Main Menu): Press this button return to the previous menu. This
to access the DVD menu. The DVD button operates only when the
warranty. Storage in extreme cold display menu or a DVD menu is
menu is different on every DVD.
can weaken the batteries. Keep active.
Use the navigation arrows to move
the remote control stored in a
cool, dry place. the cursor around the DVD menu.
After making a selection press the
If the remote control becomes lost enter button. This button only
or damaged, a new universal operates when using a DVD.
remote control can be purchased.
If this happens, make sure the
universal remote control uses a
code set of Toshiba®.
c (Stop): Press this button to stop t (Previous Track/Chapter): [ (Fast Forward): Press this
playing, fast reversing, or fast Press this button to return to the button to fast forward the DVD or
forwarding a DVD. Press this button start of the current track or chapter. CD. To stop fast forwarding a DVD
twice to return to the beginning of Press this button again to go to the video, press the play/pause button.
the DVD. previous track or chapter. This To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio
s (Play/Pause): Press this button might not work when the or CD, release the fast forward
button to start playing a DVD. Press DVD is playing the copyright button. This button might not work
this button while a DVD is playing to information or the previews. while the DVD is playing the
pause it. Press it again to continue u (Next Track/Chapter): Press copyright information or the
playing the DVD. this button to go to the beginning of previews.
While the DVD is playing, the DVD the next chapter or track. This e (Audio): Press this button to
can be played slowly by pressing button might not work while the change audio tracks on DVDs that
the play/pause button then pressing DVD is playing the copyright have this feature when the DVD is
the fast forward button. The DVD information or the previews. playing. The format and content of
continues playing in a slow play r (Fast Reverse): Press this this function vary for each disc.
mode. Also, reverse can be played button to quickly reverse the DVD or { (Subtitles): Press this button to
slowly by pressing the play/pause CD. To stop fast reversing a DVD turn on or off subtitles and to move
button and then pressing the fast video, press the play/pause button. through subtitle options when a
reverse button. To cancel slow play To stop fast reversing a DVD audio DVD is playing. The format and
mode, press the play/pause button. or CD, release the fast reverse content of this function vary for
button. This button might not work each disc.
when the DVD is playing the AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button
copyright information or the to switch the system between the
previews. DVD player and an auxiliary source.
If the vehicle has a third row video 2 (Camera): Press this button to Battery Replacement
screen, the AUX button controls the change camera angles on DVDs To change the remote control
source display on the second row that have this feature while a DVD is batteries:
video screen, and the third row playing. The format and content of
video screen as described in the this function vary for each disc. 1. Slide the rear cover back on the
table below: remote control.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad):
Aux Second Third Row The numeric keypad provides the 2. Replace the two batteries in the
Button Row Screen capability of direct chapter or track compartment. Make sure they
Press Screen number selection. are installed correctly using the
diagram on the inside of the
Default \ (Clear): Press this button within
DVD DVD remote control.
State (No three seconds after entering a
Media Media 3. Replace the battery cover.
Press) numeric selection, to clear all
First Aux Video Aux Video numerical inputs. If the remote control is to be stored
Press Source Source } 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press for a long period of time, remove the
this button to select chapter or track batteries and keep them in a cool,
Second DVD Aux Video dry place.
Press Media Source numbers greater than nine. Press
this button before entering the
Third Aux Video DVD number.
Press Source Media
Return to Return to
Fourth
Default Default
Press
State State
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart

Problem Recommended Action
There is no power. The ignition might not be turned to ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY.
The picture does not fill the screen. There are black Check the display mode settings in the setup menu by
borders on the top and bottom or on both sides, or the pressing the display menu button on the remote control.
picture looks stretched out.
In auxiliary mode, the picture moves or scrolls. Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices.
The remote control does not work. Check to make sure there is no obstruction between the
remote control and the transmitter window.
Check the batteries to make sure they are not dead or
installed incorrectly.
After stopping the player, and pushing Play, sometimes If the stop button was pressed one time, the DVD player
the DVD starts where it left off and sometimes at the resumes playing where the DVD was stopped. If the
beginning. stop button was pressed two times, the DVD player
begins to play from the beginning of the DVD.
The auxiliary source is running, but there is no picture or Check that the RSE video screen is in the auxiliary
sound. source mode.
Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices.
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont'd)

Problem Recommended Action
Sometimes the wireless headphone audio cuts out or Check for obstructions, low batteries, reception range,
buzzes. and interference from cellular telephone towers, or use a
cellular telephone in the vehicle.
Check that the headphones are on correctly using the
L (left) and R (right) on the headphones.
The remote and/or the headphones are lost. See your dealer for assistance.
The DVD is playing, but there is no picture or sound. Check that the RSE video screen is sourced to the DVD
player.
DVD Display Error Messages Disc Region Error: This message It might be necessary to turn off the
displays if the disc is not from a DVD player when operating one of
The DVD display error message
correct region. these devices in or near the vehicle.
depends on the radio that is in the
vehicle. The video screen can No Disc Inserted: This message *Excludes the OnStar® System.
display one of the following: displays if no disc is present when
Z or DVD AUX is pressed on the Cleaning the RSE Overhead
Disc Load/Eject Error: This Console
radio.
message displays when there are
disc load or eject problems. DVD Distortion When cleaning the RSE overhead
console surface, use only a clean
Disc Format Error: This message Video distortion can occur when cloth dampened with clean water.
displays if the disc is inserted with operating cellular phones, scanners,
the disc label wrong side up, or if CB radios, Global Position Systems
the disc is damaged. (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax
machines, or walkie talkies.
Cleaning the Video Screen The radio functionality is controlled

by both the RSA and the front radio.
When cleaning the video screen,
Only one band can be tuned to at
use only a clean cloth dampened
one time. Changing the band on the
with clean water. Use care when
RSA or the front radio will change
directly touching or cleaning the
the band on the other system,
screen, as damage could result.
if they are both sourced to the radio.
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) The RSA functions operate even
when the main radio is off. The front
System audio system will display the
Vehicles with this feature allow the headphone icon when the RSA is
P (Power): Press the P button to
turn the RSA on or off.
rear seat passengers to listen to on, and will disappear from the
and control any of the music display when it is off. Volume: To increase or decrease
sources: radio, CDs, DVDs, or other headphone volume, turn the knobs
Audio can be heard through wired
auxiliary sources. However, the rear located next to the SRCE or PROG
headphones (not included) plugged
seat passengers can only control buttons. The left knob controls the
into the jacks on the RSA. If the
the music sources the front seat left headphones and the right knob
vehicle has this feature, audio can
passengers are not listening to controls the right headphones.
also be heard on Channel 2 of the
(except on some radios where dual wireless headphones.
control is allowed). For example,
rear seat passengers can control The audio system mutes the rear
and listen to a CD through the speakers when the RSA audio is
headphones, while the driver listens active through the headphones.
to the radio through the front
speakers. The rear seat passengers
have control of the volume for each
set of headphones.
SRCE (Source): Press this button While listening to a disc, press the When a CD or DVD audio disc is
to switch between the radio left © seek arrow to go back to the playing, press this button to go to
(AM/FM), XM™ (if equipped), CD, start of the current track or chapter the beginning of the CD or DVD
and if the vehicle has these (if more than ten seconds have audio. This function is inactive, with
features, DVD, front auxiliary, and some radios, if the front seat
played). Press the right ¨ seek
rear auxiliary. passengers are listening to the disc.
arrow to go to the next track or
© ¨ (Seek): When listening to FM, chapter on the disc. This function is When a disc is playing in the CD or
AM, or XM™ (if equipped), press inactive, with some radios, if the DVD changer, press this button to
the left © or right ¨ seek arrow to go front seat passengers are listening select the next disc, if multiple discs
to the previous or to the next station to the disc. are loaded. This function is inactive,
or channel and stay there. This with some radios, if the front seat
When a DVD video menu is being passengers are listening to the disc.
function is inactive, with some
displayed, press the left © or right ¨
radios, if the front seat passengers When a DVD video menu is being
are listening to the radio. seek arrow to perform a cursor up
displayed, press the PROG button
or down on the menu. Hold the
to perform the menu function, enter.
Press and hold the left © or right ¨ left © or right ¨ arrow to perform a
seek arrow until the display flashes, cursor left or right on the menu.
to tune to an individual station. The
display stops flashing after the PROG (Program): Press this
buttons have not been pushed for button to go to the next preset radio
more than two seconds. This station or channel set on the main
function is inactive, with some radio. This function is inactive, with
radios, if the front seat passengers some radios, if the front seat
are listening to the radio. passengers are listening to the
radio.

. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.
Phone The system may not work with
A Bluetooth system can use a
Bluetooth‐capable cell phone with a
all cell phones. See “Pairing” in Hands‐Free Profile to make and
Bluetooth this section for more information. receive phone calls. The system
For vehicles equipped with . If the cell phone has voice can be used while the key is in the
Bluetooth capability, the system can dialing capability, learn to use ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
interact with many cell phones, that feature to access the position. The range of the Bluetooth
allowing: address book or contact list. See system can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft).
“Voice Pass-Thru” in this section Not all phones support all functions,
. Placement and receipt of calls in and not all phones work with the
a hands-free mode. for more information.
in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See
. Sharing of the cell phone’s
. See “Storing and Deleting Phone www.gm.com/bluetooth for more
address book or contact list with Numbers” in this section for information on compatible phones.
the vehicle. more information.
Voice Recognition
To minimize driver distraction,
before driving, and with the vehicle
{ WARNING The Bluetooth system uses voice
parked: recognition to interpret voice
When using a cell phone, it can commands to dial phone numbers
. Become familiar with the be distracting to look too long or and name tags.
features of the cell phone. too often at the screen of the
Organize the phone book and phone or the infotainment For additional information, say
contact lists clearly and delete (navigation) system. Taking your “Help” while you are in a voice
duplicate or rarely used entries. eyes off the road too long or too recognition menu.
If possible, program speed dial often could cause a crash
or other shortcuts. resulting in injury or death. Focus
. Review the controls and your attention on driving.
operation of the infotainment
system.
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to Bluetooth Controls Pairing Information

a minimum. The system may not . A Bluetooth phone with MP3
Use the buttons located on the
recognize voice commands if there capability cannot be paired to
steering wheel to operate the
is too much background noise. the vehicle as a phone and an
in‐vehicle Bluetooth system. See
When to Speak: A short tone Steering Wheel Controls on MP3 player at the same time.
sounds after the system responds page 5‑3 for more information. . Up to five cell phones can be
indicating when it is waiting for a
voice command. Wait until the tone
b / g (Push To Talk): Press to paired to the Bluetooth system.
answer incoming calls, confirm . The pairing process is disabled
and then speak.
system information, and start when the vehicle is moving.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a speech recognition.
calm and natural voice. . Pairing only needs to be
c / x (End): Press to end a call, completed once, unless the
Audio System reject a call, or cancel an operation. pairing information on the cell
When using the in‐vehicle Bluetooth Pairing phone changes or the cell phone
system, sound comes through the is deleted from the system.
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone
vehicle's front audio system . Only one paired cell phone can
must be paired to the Bluetooth
speakers and overrides the audio be connected to the Bluetooth
system and then connected to the
system. Use the audio system system at a time.
vehicle before it can be used. See
volume knob, during a call, to
the cell phone manufacturer's user . If multiple paired cell phones are
change the volume level. The
guide for Bluetooth functions before within range of the system, the
adjusted volume level remains in
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth system connects to the first
memory for later calls. To prevent
phone is not connected, calls will be available paired cell phone in the
missed calls, a minimum volume
made using OnStar Hands‐Free order that they were first paired
level is used if the volume is turned
Calling, if equipped. See OnStar to the system. To connect to a
down too low.
Overview on page 14‑1 for more different paired phone, see
information. “Connecting to a Different
Phone” later in this section.
Pairing a Phone This name will be used to Deleting a Paired Phone

indicate which phones are
1. Press and hold b / g for paired and connected to the
If the phone name you want to
two seconds. delete is unknown, see “Listing All
vehicle. The system responds Paired and Connected Phones.”
2. Say “Bluetooth.” This command with “<phone name> has been
can be skipped. successfully paired” after the 1. Press and hold b / g for
pairing process is complete. two seconds.
3. Say “Pair.” The system responds
with instructions and a four‐digit 6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pair 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
Personal Identification Number additional phones.
3. Say “Delete.” The system asks
(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5. Listing All Paired and Connected which phone to delete.
4. Start the pairing process on the Phones
4. Say the name of the phone you
cell phone that you want to pair. The system can list all cell phones want to delete.
For help with this process, see paired to it. If a paired cell phone is
the cell phone manufacturer's also connected to the vehicle, the Connecting to a Different Phone
user guide. system responds with “is connected” To connect to a different cell phone,
5. Locate the device named “Your after that phone name. the Bluetooth system looks for the
Vehicle” in the list on the cell next available cell phone in the
phone. Follow the instructions 1. Press and hold b / g for order in which all the available cell
on the cell phone to enter the two seconds. phones were paired. Depending on
PIN provided in Step 3. After the 2. Say “Bluetooth.” which cell phone you want to
PIN is successfully entered, the connect to, you may have to use
system prompts you to provide a 3. Say “List.” this command several times.
name for the paired cell phone.
1. Press and hold b / g for
two seconds.
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
3. Say “Change phone.” Delete: This command is used to To hear all of the numbers
. If another cell phone is delete individual name tags. recognized by the system, say
found, the response will be Delete All Name Tags: This “Verify” at any time.
“<Phone name> is now command deletes all stored name 1. Press and hold b / g for
connected.” tags in the Hands‐Free Calling two seconds.
. If another cell phone is not Directory and the OnStar
Turn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory, 2. Say “Digit Store.”
found, the original phone
remains connected. if equipped. 3. Say each digit, one at a time,
Using the “Store” Command that you want to store. After
Storing and Deleting Phone each digit is entered, the system
Numbers 1. Press and hold b / g for repeats back the digit it heard
two seconds. followed by a tone. After the last
The system can store up to
digit has been entered, say
30 phone numbers as name tags in 2. Say “Store.” “Store,” and then follow the
the Hands‐Free Directory that is
3. Say the phone number or group directions given by the system to
shared between the Bluetooth and
of numbers you want to store all save a name tag for this number.
OnStar systems, if equipped.
at once with no pauses, then
The following commands are used follow the directions given by the Using the “Delete” Command
to delete and store phone numbers. system to save a name tag for 1. Press and hold b / g for
Store: This command will store a this number. two seconds.
phone number, or a group of Using the “Digit Store” Command 2. Say “Delete.”
numbers as a name tag.
If an unwanted number is 3. Say the name tag you want to
Digit Store: This command allows recognized by the system, say delete.
a phone number to be stored as a “Clear” at any time to clear the last
name tag by entering the digits one number.
at a time.
Using the “Delete All Name Tags” Making a Call Using the “Digit Dial” Command
Command The digit dial command allows a
Calls can be made using the
This command deletes all stored following commands. phone number to be dialed by
name tags in the Hands‐Free entering the digits one at a time.
Dial or Call: The dial or call
Calling Directory and the OnStar After each digit is entered, the
command can be used
Turn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory, system repeats back the digit it
interchangeably to dial a phone
if equipped. heard followed by a tone.
number or a stored name tag.
To delete all name tags: If an unwanted number is
Digit Dial: This command allows a
recognized by the system, say
1. Press and hold b / g for phone number to be dialed by
“Clear” at any time to clear the last
two seconds. entering the digits one at a time.
number.
2. Say “Delete all name tags.” Re‐dial: This command is used to
To hear all of the numbers
dial the last number used on the cell
Listing Stored Numbers recognized by the system, say
phone.
“Verify” at any time.
The list command will list all stored Using the “Dial” or “Call”
numbers and name tags. Command 1. Press and hold b / g for
two seconds.
Using the “List” Command 1. Press and hold b / g for 2. Say “Digit Dial.”
1. Press and hold b / g for two seconds.
3. Say each digit, one at a time,
two seconds. 2. Say “Dial” or “Call.” that you want to dial. After each
2. Say “Directory.” 3. Say the entire number without digit is entered, the system
3. Say “Hands‐Free Calling.” pausing, or say the name tag. repeats back the digit it heard
followed by a tone. After the last
4. Say “List.” Once connected, the person called
digit has been entered,
will be heard through the audio
say “Dial.”
speakers.
Once connected, the person called Call Waiting 3. Use the dial or call command to
will be heard through the audio dial the number of the third party
Call waiting must be supported on
speakers. to be called.
the cell phone and enabled by the
Using the “Re‐dial” Command wireless service carrier. 4. Once the call is connected,
press b / g to link all callers
1. Press and hold b / g for . Press b / g to answer an
together.
two seconds. incoming call when another call
is active. The original call is Ending a Call
2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.”
placed on hold.
Once connected, the person called Press c / x to end a call.
will be heard through the audio
. Press b / g again to return to
speakers. the original call. Muting a Call
. To ignore the incoming call, no During a call, all sounds from inside
Receiving a Call the vehicle can be muted so that the
action is required.
When an incoming call is received, person on the other end of the call
the audio system mutes and a ring . Press c / x to disconnect the cannot hear them.
tone is heard in the vehicle. current call and switch to the call
on hold.
. To mute a call, press b / g , and
. Press b / g to answer the call. then say “Mute call.”
Three‐Way Calling
. Press c / x to ignore a call. . To cancel mute, press b / g ,
Three‐way calling must be and then say “Un‐mute call.”
supported on the cell phone and
enabled by the wireless service
carrier.
1. While on a call, press b / g.
2. Say “Three‐way call.”
Transferring a Call Transferring Audio to the 3. Say “Voice.” The system

Bluetooth System from a Cell responds “OK, accessing
Audio can be transferred between
Phone <phone name>.”
the Bluetooth system and the cell
phone. During a call with the audio on the The cell phone's normal prompt
The cell phone must be paired and cell phone, press b / g. The audio messages will go through their cycle
transfers to the vehicle. If the audio according to the phone's operating
connected with the Bluetooth
does not transfer to the vehicle, use instructions.
system before a call can be
transferred. The connection process the audio transfer feature on the cell Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
can take up to two minutes after the phone. See your cell phone
(DTMF) Tones
ignition is turned to ON/RUN. manufacturer's user guide for more
information. The Bluetooth system can send
Transferring Audio from the numbers and the numbers stored as
Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone Voice Pass-Thru name tags during a call. You can
During a call with the audio in the Voice pass‐thru allows access to the use this feature when calling a
vehicle: voice recognition commands on the menu‐driven phone system.
cell phone. See your cell phone Account numbers can also be
1. Press b / g. manufacturer's user guide to see if stored for use.
2. Say “Transfer Call.” the cell phone supports this feature. Sending a Number or Name Tag
To access contacts stored in the cell During a Call
phone:
1. Press b / g. The system
1. Press and hold b / g for responds “Ready,” followed by
two seconds. a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth.” This command 2. Say “Dial.”
can be skipped. 3. Say the number or name tag
to send.
Clearing the System Trademarks and

Unless information is deleted out of License Agreements
the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, it
will be retained indefinitely. This
includes all saved name tags in the
phone book and phone pairing
information. For information on how Manufactured under license from
to delete this information, see the Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the
previous section “Deleting a Paired double-D symbol are trademarks of
Phone” and the previous sections Dolby Laboratories.
on deleting name tags. Manufactured under license under
U.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942;
Other Information 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;
The Bluetooth® word mark and 6,487,535 & other U.S. and
logos are owned by the Bluetooth® worldwide patents issued &
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks pending. DTS and the Symbol are
by General Motors is under license. registered trademarks and DTS
Other trademarks and trade names Digital Surround and the DTS logos
are those of their respective owners. are trademarks of DTS Inc. All
Rights Reserved.
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
2 NOTES
Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls Climate Control Systems

The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with
Climate Control Systems this system.
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Rear Climate Control System
(Rear Climate
Control Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Rear Climate Control System
(Rear Climate with Rear Seat
Audio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
A. Fan Control Temperature Control: Move the

B. REAR (Rear Climate Control) thumbwheels up or down to
increase or decrease the
C. Recirculation temperature on the driver side or
D. Air Delivery Mode Control the passenger side of the vehicle for
the dual zone system.
E. Air Conditioning
F. Driver and Passenger
Temperature Controls
G. Rear Window Defogger
8-2 Climate Controls
9 (Fan Control): Turn the left outlets. In this mode, the system automatically in this setting, unless
knob clockwise or counterclockwise automatically selects outside air. the outside temperature is close to
to increase or decrease the fan Recirculation cannot be selected freezing.
speed. Turn the knob all the way when in Floor Mode. Do not drive the vehicle until all the
counterclockwise to turn the front - (Defog): The defog mode is windows are clear.
system off. used to clear the windows of fog or
moisture. Air is directed to the
# (Air Conditioning): Press this
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn button to turn the air conditioning
clockwise or counterclockwise to windshield, floor outlets, and side system on or off. An indicator light
change the airflow direction inside window vents. In this mode, the comes on to show that the air
the vehicle. By positioning the knob system turns off recirculation and conditioning is on. The air
between two modes, a combination runs the air conditioning compressor conditioning can be selected in any
of those modes is selected. unless the outside temperature is mode as long as the fan switch
close to freezing. The recirculation is on.
Select from the following modes: mode cannot be selected while in
H (Vent): Air is directed to the the defog mode. On hot days, open the windows to
instrument panel outlets. let hot inside air escape; then close
0 (Defrost): The defrost mode is them. This helps to reduce the time
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided used to remove fog or frost from the it takes for the vehicle to cool down.
between the instrument panel and windshield more quickly. Air is It also helps the system to operate
floor outlets. Some air is directed directed to the windshield and side more efficiently.
towards the windshield and side window vents, with some directed to
window outlets. Cooler air is the floor vents. In this mode, the The air conditioning system
directed to the upper outlets and system automatically forces outside removes moisture from the air, so a
warmer air to the floor outlets. air into the vehicle. The recirculation small amount of water might drip
mode cannot be selected while in under the vehicle while idling or
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the
the defrost mode. The air after turning off the engine. This is
floor outlets, with some of the air normal.
conditioning compressor runs
directed to the windshield, side
window, and second row floor
h (Recirculation): Press this REAR: Press to turn the rear For vehicles with heated outside
button to turn the recirculation mode heating and air conditioning on. See rearview mirrors, the mirrors will
on or off. An indicator light comes Rear Climate Control System (Rear heat to help clear fog or frost from
on to show that recirculation is on. Climate with Rear Seat Audio) on the surface of the mirror when the
page 8‑11 or Rear Climate Control rear window defog button is
This mode recirculates and helps to System (Rear Climate Control Only) pressed.
quickly cool the air inside the on page 8‑10 for more information.
vehicle. It can be used to help Notice: Do not use anything
prevent outside air and odors from Rear Window Defogger sharp on the inside of the rear
entering the vehicle. window. If you do, you could cut
The rear window defogger uses a or damage the warming grid, and
The recirculation mode cannot be warming grid to remove fog from the the repairs would not be covered
used with floor, defrost, or defogging rear window. by the vehicle warranty. Do not
modes. If recirculation is selected 1 (Rear Window Defogger): attach a temporary vehicle
while in one of those modes, the Press this button to turn the rear license, tape, a decal, or anything
indicator flashes three times and window defogger on or off. The similar to the defogger grid.
turns off. The air conditioning system automatically turns off
compressor will also come on when several minutes after it has been
this mode is activated. While in activated. The defogger can also be
recirculation mode the windows may turned off by turning off the engine.
fog when the weather is cold and Do not drive the vehicle until all the
damp. To clear the fog, select either windows are clear.
the defog or defrost mode and
increase the fan speed. The
recirculation mode can also be
turned off by turning off the engine.
Dual Automatic Climate Control System K. Air Conditioning
The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with L. PASS
this system. The vehicle also has a flow-through ventilation system M. Passenger Temperature Control
described later in this section. O (On/Off): Press to turn the
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the hybrid supplement for more information. climate control system on or off.
Outside air still enters the vehicle,
and is directed to the floor. This
direction can be changed by
pressing the mode button.
Recirculation can be selected once
you have selected vent or bi-level
mode. The temperature can also be
adjusted using either temperature
button. If the air delivery mode or
temperature settings are adjusted
with the system off, the display
illuminates briefly to show the
settings and then returns to off. The
system can be turned back on by
A. Fan Control F. Air Delivery Mode Control pressing either O, D, C, # , the
B. AUTO (Automatic Operation) G. Driver Temperature Control defrost or the AUTO button.
C. Defrost H. Display
D. Recirculation I. Power Button
E. REAR (Rear Climate Control) J. Rear Window Defogger
Driver and Passenger Side When in defrost mode the The air inlet will normally be set
Temperature Control passenger temperature setting to outside air. If it is hot outside,
The driver and passenger side cannot be changed. the air inlet may automatically
temperature buttons are used to switch to recirculate inside air to
Automatic Operation help quickly cool down the
adjust the temperature of the air
coming through the system on the AUTO (Automatic): When vehicle. The light on the button
driver or passenger side of the automatic operation is active the comes on in recirculation.
vehicle. The temperature can be system will control the inside 2. Set the driver and passenger
adjusted even if the system is temperature, the air delivery, and temperature.
turned off. This is possible since the fan speed.
To find your comfort setting, start
outside air always flows through the Use the steps below to place the with a 23°C (74°F) temperature
system as the vehicle is moving entire system in automatic mode: setting and allow about
forward unless it is set to 20 minutes for the system to
1. Press the AUTO button.
recirculation mode. See regulate. Use the driver or
“Recirculation” later in this When AUTO is selected, the
passenger temperature buttons
section. display will change to show the
to adjust the temperature setting
current temperature(s) and
Press the + or − buttons to increase as necessary. If a temperature
AUTO will be lit on the display.
or decrease the cabin temperature. setting of 15°C (60°F) is chosen,
The current delivery mode and
The driver side or passenger side the system remains at the
fan speed will also be displayed
temperature display shows the maximum cooling setting. If a
for approximately 5 seconds.
temperature setting decreasing or temperature setting of 32°C
increasing. When AUTO is selected, the air (90°F) is chosen, the system
conditioning operation and air remains at the maximum heat
The passenger temperature setting
inlet will be automatically setting. Choosing either
can be set to match the driver
controlled. The air conditioning maximum setting will not cause
temperature setting by pressing the
compressor will run when the the vehicle to heat or cool any
PASS button and turning off the
outside temperature is over faster.
PASS indicator.
about 4°C (40°F).
Do not cover the solar sensor H G (Air Delivery Mode Control): 6 (Floor): Air is directed to the
located on the top of the instrument Press these buttons to change the floor outlets, with some to the
panel near the windshield. This direction of the airflow in the vehicle. windshield, side window outlets, and
sensor regulates air temperature Repeatedly press either button until second row floor outlets. In this
based on sun load and also turns the desired mode appears on the mode, the system automatically
on the headlamps. For more display. Pressing either mode button selects outside air.
information on the solar sensor, see while the system is off changes the
“Sensors” later in this section. air delivery mode without turning the
- (Defog): This mode clears the
windows of fog or moisture. Air is
To avoid blowing cold air in cold system on. Pressing either mode directed to the windshield, floor
weather, the system will delay button while in automatic control outlets, and side window vents. In
turning on the fan until warm air is places the mode under manual this mode, the system turns off
available. The length of delay control. recirculation and runs the air
depends on the engine coolant The air delivery mode setting is conditioning compressor unless the
temperature. Pressing the fan displayed and the AUTO light turns outside temperature is close to
switch will override this delay and off. The fan remains under freezing. The recirculation mode
change the fan to a selected speed. automatic control. cannot be selected while in the
Manual Operation H (Vent): Air is directed to the defog mode.
D C (Fan Control): Press these instrument panel outlets.

buttons to increase or decrease the ) (Bi-Level): Air is divided
fan speed. between the instrument panel and
Pressing either fan button while in floor outlets. Some air is directed
automatic control places the fan towards the windshield and side
under manual control. The fan window outlets.
setting remains displayed and the
AUTO light turns off. The air
delivery mode remains under
automatic control.
0 (Defrost): This mode removes If vent, bi-level, or floor mode is On hot days, open the windows long
fog or frost from the windshield selected again, the climate control enough to let hot inside air escape.
more quickly. Air is directed to the system displays the previous This helps to reduce the time it
windshield and side window vents, temperature settings. takes for the vehicle to cool down.
with some directed to the floor Do not drive the vehicle until all the It also helps the system to operate
vents. In this mode, the system windows are clear. more efficiently.
automatically forces outside air into The air conditioning system
the vehicle and runs the air # (Air Conditioning): Press to
removes moisture from the air, so a
conditioning compressor unless the turn the air conditioning (A/C)
compressor on and off. An indicator small amount of water might drip
outside temperature is close to under the vehicle while idling or
freezing. The recirculation mode light comes on to show that the air
conditioning is on. after turning off the engine. This is
cannot be selected while in the normal.
defrost mode. If this button is pressed when
the air conditioning compressor is @ (Recirculation): Press to turn
The passenger temperature control the recirculation mode on or off. An
cannot be activated while in defrost unavailable, the indicator flashes
three times and then turns off. If the indicator light comes on to show
mode. If the PASS button is that the recirculation is on.
pressed, the button indicator flashes air conditioning is on and the
three times and will not work. If the outside temperature drops below a This mode recirculates and helps to
passenger temperature buttons are temperature which is too cool for air quickly cool the air inside the
adjusted, the driver temperature conditioning to be effective, the air vehicle. It can be used to help
indicator changes. The passenger conditioning light turns off to show prevent outside air and odors from
temperature will not be displayed. that the air conditioning mode has entering the vehicle.
been canceled.
The recirculation mode cannot be REAR: For vehicles with the rear Notice: Do not use a razor blade
used with floor, defog, or defrost heat and air conditioning controls. or sharp object to clear the inside
modes. If recirculation is selected Press to turn the rear climate control rear window. Do not adhere
with one of those modes, the system on or off. See Rear Climate anything to the defogger grid
indicator light flashes three times Control System (Rear Climate with lines in the rear glass. These
and then turns off. The air Rear Seat Audio) on page 8‑11 or actions may damage the rear
conditioning compressor also comes Rear Climate Control System (Rear defogger. Repairs would not be
on when this mode is activated. Climate Control Only) on page 8‑10. covered by your warranty.
While in recirculation mode the
windows may fog when the weather Rear Window Defogger Heated Mirrors: Press 1 to help
is cold and damp. To clear the fog, The rear window defogger uses a clear fog or frost from the surface of
select either the defog or defrost warming grid to remove fog from the the outside mirror. See Power
mode and increase the fan speed. rear window. Mirrors on page 2‑19.
The recirculation mode can also be 1 (Rear Window Defogger):
turned off by turning off the ignition. Press to turn the rear window
PASS: Press to set the passenger defogger on or off. It automatically
temperature setting to match the turns off several minutes after it has
driver temperature setting. The been activated. The defogger can
PASS indicator will turn off. When also be turned off by turning off the
the passenger temperature setting engine. Do not drive the vehicle until
is set different than the driver all the windows are clear.
setting, the indicator on the PASS
button illuminates and both the
driver side and passenger side
temperature displays are shown.
Sensors There is also an exterior

temperature sensor located behind
the front grille. This sensor reads
the outside air temperature and
helps maintain the temperature
inside the vehicle. Any cover on the
front of the vehicle could cause a
false reading in the displayed
temperature.
The interior temperature sensors The climate control system uses the
located in the headliner above the information from these sensors to
driver side seat and if equipped, in maintain your comfort setting by
the headliner above the second row adjusting the outlet temperature, fan
seats measure the temperature of speed, and the air delivery mode.
the air inside the vehicle. The system may also supply cooler
The solar sensor, located in the
defrost grille in the middle of the air to the side of the vehicle facing
instrument panel, monitors the solar the sun. The recirculation mode will
heat. Do not cover the solar sensor also be used as needed to maintain
or the system will not work properly. cool outlet temperatures.
Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate Mimic Mode: This mode matches
the rear climate control to the front
Control Only) climate control airflow settings.
For vehicles with this system, the rear controls are three knobs located in It comes on when REAR is pressed
the headliner. The system can also be controlled with the front controls. the first time.
Independent Mode: This mode
directs rear seating airflow
according to the settings of the rear
controls. It comes on when any rear
control is adjusted.
Temperature Control: Turn
clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the airflow
temperature into the
passenger area.
Fan Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the fan speed.
A. Fan Control Climate Control Systems on
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn
B. Temperature Control page 8‑4 or Dual Automatic Climate
clockwise or counterclockwise to
Control System on page 8‑4. The
C. Air Delivery Mode Control change the direction of the airflow.
rear system can also be turned off
REAR: Press the REAR button on by turning the rear fan knob to
the front climate control system to the 9 position.
turn the rear climate control system
on or off. An indicator comes on
when the rear system is on. See
H (Vent): Air is directed through Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate with Rear
the headliner outlets. Seat Audio)
) (Bi-Level): Air is directed
For vehicles with the rear heat and air conditioning controls, they are
through the floor and headliner
integrated with the rear seat audio controls located in the center console.
outlets. The rear system floor
The system can be controlled from the front controls as well as the rear
outlets are located directly behind
controls.
the second row seats. The flow can
be divided between vent and floor
outlets depending upon where the
knob is placed between the settings.
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the
floor outlets. The rear system floor
outlets are located directly behind
the second row seats.
Rear Climate Control with Rear Seat Audio Controls
A. Fan Control REAR: Press the REAR button on

B. Air Delivery Mode Control the front climate control system to
turn the rear climate control system
C. Temperature Control on or off. An indicator comes on
when the rear system is on.
The rear climate control system can Automatic Operation, If Manual Operation
also be turned off by pressing and Equipped D C (Fan Control): Press these
holding the C button. To turn the AUTO: Press the air delivery mode buttons on the rear seat audio
system on from the rear seats, button until this setting is selected to control panel to increase or
press any rear climate control control the inside temperature, air decrease the airflow. Pressing the
button, except the C button. delivery, and fan speed. AUTO fan up button when the system is off
appears in the display when will turn the system on. The air
Mimic Mode: This mode matches
automatic operation is active. delivery mode will remain under
the rear climate control to the front
automatic control.
climate control airflow settings. + or − (Increase/Decrease
It comes on when REAR is pressed Temperature): Press the + + or − (Temperature Control):
the first time. or − buttons to increase or decrease Press these buttons to adjust the
the cabin temperature. The rear temperature of the air flowing into
Independent Mode: This mode
control temperature display will the passenger area. Press the +
directs rear seating airflow
show the temperature setting button for warmer air and press
according to the settings of the
increasing or decreasing. the − button for cooler air.
rear controls.
To turn the system on from the rear, The display only indicates climate N (Air Delivery Mode Control):
control functions when the system is Press the mode button to change
press any rear climate control
in rear independent mode. the direction of the airflow in the
button, except the C button. vehicle. Repeatedly press the
button until the desired mode
appears on the display. Multiple
presses will cycle through the
delivery selections.

. Keep the air path under the front
Air Vents seats clear of objects. This helps
Use the air outlets located in the air to circulate throughout the
center and on the side of the vehicle.
instrument panel to direct the . Adding outside equipment to the
airflow. front of the vehicle, such as
Operation Tips hood-air deflectors, may affect
the performance of the heating
. Keep the hood and front air and air conditioning system.
inlets free of ice, snow, or any Check with your dealer before
other obstruction (such as adding equipment to the outside
leaves). The heater and of the vehicle.
defroster will work far better,
reducing the chance of fogging
the inside of the windows.
. When you enter a vehicle in cold
weather, press the fan up button
to the maximum fan level before
driving. This helps clear the
intake ducts of snow and
moisture, and reduces the
chance of fogging the inside of
the window.
2 NOTES
Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . .

Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-25
9-26
Brakes
Antilock Brake
Operating Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-44
9-46
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Driving Information Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-47
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Parking over Things
That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 Ride Control Systems
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Active Fuel Management® . . . 9-30
Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Engine Exhaust Continuous Damping
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 Control (CDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Running the Vehicle While Automatic Level Control . . . . . 9-51
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Cruise Control
Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Automatic Transmission Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . 9-11 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-32
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35 Object Detection Systems
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 9-12 Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-54
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13 Side Blind Zone
If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-15 Drive Systems Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 Four-Wheel Drive (Two Speed Rear Vision
Automatic Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
Starting and Operating Transfer Case) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-22 Four-Wheel Drive (Single
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Speed Automatic
Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22 Transfer Case) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
9-2 Driving and Operating
Fuel
. Designate a front seat
Driving Information passenger to handle potential
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-63 distractions.
Gasoline Specifications Distracted Driving . Become familiar with vehicle
(U.S. and Canada Only) . . . . 9-64 Distraction comes in many forms features before driving, such as
California Fuel and can take your focus from the programming favorite radio
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64 task of driving. Exercise good stations and adjusting climate
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-64 judgment and do not let other control and seat settings.
Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65 activities divert your attention Program all trip information into
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 9-66 away from the road. Many local any navigation device prior to
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67 governments have enacted laws driving.
Filling a Portable Fuel regarding driver distraction. Become
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69
. Wait until the vehicle is parked
familiar with the local laws in
to retrieve items that have fallen
your area.
Towing to the floor.
General Towing To avoid distracted driving, always . Stop or park the vehicle to tend
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69 keep your eyes on the road, hands
to children.
Driving Characteristics and on the wheel, and mind on the drive.
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70 . Keep pets in an appropriate
. Do not use a phone in
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74 carrier or restraint.
demanding driving situations.
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-79 Use a hands-free method to . Avoid stressful conversations
Trailer Sway place or receive necessary while driving, whether with a
Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-90 phone calls. passenger or on a cell phone.
Conversions and Add-Ons . Watch the road. Do not read,
Add-On Electrical take notes, or look up
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-90 information on phones or other
Adding a Snow Plow or electronic devices.
Similar Equipment . . . . . . . . . . 9-90
Defensive Driving
{ WARNING { WARNING
Defensive driving means “always
Taking your eyes off the road too expect the unexpected.” The first Drinking and then driving is very
long or too often could cause a step in driving defensively is to wear dangerous. Your reflexes,
crash resulting in injury or death. the safety belt. See Safety Belts on perceptions, attentiveness, and
Focus your attention on driving. page 3‑20. judgment can be affected by even
. Assume that other road users a small amount of alcohol. You
Refer to the infotainment section for (pedestrians, bicyclists, and can have a serious — or even
more information on using that other drivers) are going to be fatal — collision if you drive after
system, including pairing and using careless and make mistakes. drinking.
a cell phone. Anticipate what they might do Do not drink and drive or ride with
and be ready. a driver who has been drinking.
If equipped, refer to the navigation
manual for information on that . Allow enough following distance Ride home in a cab; or if you are
system, including pairing and using between you and the driver in with a group, designate a driver
a cell phone. front of you. who will not drink.
. Focus on the task of driving.
Control of a Vehicle
Drunk Driving
Braking, steering, and accelerating
Death and injury associated with are important factors in helping to
drinking and driving is a global control a vehicle while driving.
tragedy.
Braking power brake assist but it will be Curve Tips

used when the brake is applied.
Braking action involves perception . Take curves at a reasonable
Once the power assist is used up, it
time and reaction time. Deciding to speed.
can take longer to stop and the
push the brake pedal is perception brake pedal will be harder to push. . Reduce speed before entering a
time. Actually doing it is curve.
reaction time. Steering . Maintain a reasonable steady
Average driver reaction time is speed through the curve
about three-quarters of a second. In Hydraulic Power Steering
that time, a vehicle moving at
. Wait until the vehicle is out of
Your vehicle has hydraulic
100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m the curve before accelerating
power steering. It may require
(66 ft), which could be a lot of gently into the straightaway.
maintenance. See Power Steering
distance in an emergency. Fluid Power Steering Fluid on Steering in Emergencies
Helpful braking tips to keep in mind page 10‑24. . There are some situations when
include: If power steering assist is lost steering around a problem may
. Keep enough distance between because the engine stops or the be more effective than braking.
you and the vehicle in front power steering system is not
functioning, the vehicle can be
. Holding both sides of the
of you. steering wheel allows you to turn
steered but may required increased
. Avoid needless heavy braking. effort. See your dealer if there is a 180 degrees without removing
problem. a hand.
. Keep pace with traffic.
. Antilock Brake System (ABS)
If the engine ever stops while the
hybrid supplement for more allows steering while braking.
vehicle is being driven, brake
normally but do not pump the information.
brakes. Doing so could make the
pedal harder to push down. If the
engine stops, there will be some
Off-Road Recovery 2. Turn the steering wheel about Defensive drivers avoid most skids
one-eighth of a turn, until the by taking reasonable care suited to
right front tire contacts the existing conditions, and by not
pavement edge. overdriving those conditions. But
3. Then turn the steering wheel to skids are always possible.
go straight down the roadway. If the vehicle starts to slide, follow
these suggestions:
Loss of Control . Ease your foot off the
Skidding accelerator pedal and quickly
steer the way you want the
There are three types of skids that vehicle to go. The vehicle may
correspond to the vehicle's three straighten out. Be ready for a
control systems: second skid if it occurs.
. Braking Skid — wheels are not . Slow down and adjust your
The vehicle's right wheels can drop rolling. driving according to weather
off the edge of a road onto the conditions. Stopping distance
shoulder while driving. Follow
. Steering or Cornering
Skid — too much speed or can be longer and vehicle
these tips: control can be affected when
steering in a curve causes tires
1. Ease off the accelerator and to slip and lose cornering force. traction is reduced by water,
then, if there is nothing in the snow, ice, gravel, or other
way, steer the vehicle so that it
. Acceleration Skid — too much material on the road. Learn to
straddles the edge of the throttle causes the driving recognize warning clues — such
pavement. wheels to spin. as enough water, ice, or packed
snow on the road to make a
mirrored surface — and slow
down when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering, Controlling the vehicle is the key to
. Read all the information about
acceleration, or braking, successful off-road driving. One of four-wheel-drive vehicles in this
including reducing vehicle speed the best ways to control the vehicle manual.
by shifting to a lower gear. Any is to control the speed. . Make sure all underbody
sudden changes could cause shields, if equipped, are properly
the tires to slide.
{ WARNING attached.
Remember: Antilock brakes help . Know the local laws that apply to
avoid only the braking skid. When driving off-road, bouncing
off-road driving.
and quick changes in direction
Off-Road Driving can easily throw you out of To gain more ground clearance if
position. This could cause you to needed, it may be necessary to
Four-wheel-drive vehicles can be remove the front fascia lower
lose control and crash. You and
used for off-road driving. Vehicles air dam.
your passengers should always
without four-wheel drive and
vehicles not equipped with All wear safety belts. Notice: Operating the vehicle for
Terrain (AT) or On-Off Road (OOR) extended periods without the
tires must not be driven off-road front fascia lower air dam
Before Driving Off-Road installed can cause improper air
except on a level, solid surface. To
contact the tire manufacturer for
. Have all necessary maintenance flow to the engine. Re‐attach the
more information about the original and service work completed. front fascia air dam after off-road
equipment tires, see the Limited . Fuel the vehicle, fill fluid levels, driving.
Warranty and Owner Assistance and check inflation pressure in
Information manual. all tires, including the spare,
if equipped.
Loading the Vehicle for For more information about loading Driving on Hills
Off-Road Driving the vehicle, see Vehicle Load Limits
Driving safely on hills requires good
and Tires.
judgment and an understanding of
{ WARNING Environmental Concerns what the vehicle can and cannot do.
. Unsecured cargo on the load . Always use established trails,
floor can be tossed about roads, and areas that have been { WARNING
when driving over rough set aside for public off-road
Many hills are simply too steep
terrain. You or your recreational driving and obey all
posted regulations. for any vehicle. Driving up hills
passengers can be struck by
can cause the vehicle to stall.
flying objects. Secure the . Do not damage shrubs, flowers, Driving down hills can cause loss
cargo properly. trees, or grasses or disturb of control. Driving across hills can
. Keep cargo in the cargo area wildlife. cause a rollover. You could be
as far forward and as low as . Do not park over things that injured or killed. Do not drive on
possible. The heaviest things burn. See Parking Over Things steep hills.
should be on the floor, that Burn.
forward of the rear axle.
Before driving on a hill, assess
. Heavy loads on the roof raise the steepness, traction, and
the vehicle's center of gravity, obstructions. If the terrain ahead
making it more likely to roll cannot be seen, get out of the
over. You can be seriously or vehicle and walk the hill before
fatally injured if the vehicle driving further.
rolls over. Put heavy loads
inside the cargo area, not on
the roof.
When driving on hills:

. Never go downhill forward or . When driving down a hill, keep
backward with either the the vehicle headed straight
. Use a low gear and keep a firm transmission or transfer case in down. Use a low gear because
grip on the steering wheel. N (Neutral). The brakes could the engine will work with the
. Maintain a slow speed. overheat and you could lose brakes to slow the vehicle and
. control. help keep the vehicle under
When possible, drive straight up
control.
or down the hill.
{ WARNING
. Slow down when approaching
the top of the hill. If the vehicle has the two‐speed
{ WARNING
. Use headlamps even during the automatic transfer case, shifting Heavy braking when going down
day to make the vehicle more the transfer case to N (Neutral) a hill can cause your brakes to
visible. can cause your vehicle to roll overheat and fade. This could
even if the transmission is in cause loss of control and you or
{ WARNING P (Park). This is because the
N (Neutral) position on the
others could be injured or killed.
Apply the brakes lightly when
Driving to the top of a hill at high transfer case overrides the descending a hill and use a low
speed can cause an accident. transmission. You or someone gear to keep vehicle speed under
There could be a drop-off, else could be injured. If leaving control.
embankment, cliff, or even the vehicle, set the parking brake
another vehicle. You could be and shift the transmission to If the vehicle stalls on a hill:
seriously injured or killed. As you P (Park). Shift the transfer case to
near the top of a hill, slow down any position but N (Neutral). 1. Apply the brakes to stop the
and stay alert. vehicle, and then apply the
parking brake.
2. Shift into P (Park) and then
restart the engine.

. If driving uphill when the 3. If the vehicle cannot be restarted
. Hidden obstacles can make the
vehicle stalls, shift to after stalling, set the parking steepness of the incline more
R (Reverse), release the brake, shift an automatic severe. If a rock is driven across
parking brake, and back transmission into P (Park), and with the uphill wheels, or if the
straight down. turn the vehicle off. downhill wheels drop into a rut
. Never try to turn the vehicle or depression, the vehicle can tilt
3.1. Leave the vehicle and even more.
around. If the hill is steep seek help.
enough to stall the vehicle, . If an incline must be driven
it is steep enough to cause 3.2. Stay clear of the path the across, and the vehicle starts to
it to roll over. vehicle would take if it slide, turn downhill. This should
rolled downhill. help straighten out the vehicle
. If you cannot make it up the
hill, back straight down
. Avoid turns that take the vehicle and prevent the side slipping.
the hill. across the incline of the hill.
. Never back down a hill in
A hill that can be driven straight
up or down might be too steep to
{ WARNING
N (Neutral) using only the drive across. Driving across an Getting out of the vehicle on the
brake. incline puts more weight on the downhill side when stopped
. The vehicle can roll downhill wheels which could across an incline is dangerous.
backward quickly and you cause a downhill slide or a If the vehicle rolls over, you could
could lose control. rollover. be crushed or killed. Always get
. If driving downhill when the . Surface conditions can be a out on the uphill side of the
vehicle stalls, shift to a problem. Loose gravel, muddy vehicle and stay well clear of the
lower gear, release the spots, or even wet grass can rollover path.
parking brake, and drive cause the tires to slip sideways,
straight down the hill. downhill. If the vehicle slips
sideways, it can hit something
that will trip it – a rock, a rut,
etc. – and roll over.
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, Notice: Do not drive through

or Ice { WARNING standing water if it is deep
enough to cover the wheel hubs,
Use a low gear when driving in Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, axles or exhaust pipe. Deep water
mud – the deeper the mud, the or rivers can be dangerous. Ice can damage the axle and other
lower the gear. Keep the vehicle conditions vary greatly and the vehicle parts.
moving to avoid getting stuck. vehicle could fall through the ice;
you and your passengers could If the standing water is not too deep,
Traction changes when driving on drive slowly through it. At faster
sand. On loose sand, such as on drown. Drive your vehicle on safe
speeds, water splashes on the
beaches or sand dunes, the tires surfaces only.
ignition system and the vehicle can
tend to sink into the sand. This stall. Stalling can also occur if you
affects steering, accelerating, and Driving in Water get the tailpipe under water. While
braking. Drive at a reduced speed the tailpipe is under water, you will
and avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers. { WARNING not be able to start the engine.
When going through water, the
Traction is reduced on hard packed Driving through rushing water can brakes get wet, and it might take
snow and ice and it is easy to lose be dangerous. Deep water can longer to stop. See Driving on Wet
control. Reduce vehicle speed when sweep your vehicle downstream Roads.
driving on hard packed snow and you and your passengers
and ice. could drown. If it is only shallow
water, it can still wash away the
ground from under your tires.
Traction could be lost, and the
vehicle could roll over. Do not
drive through rushing water.
After Off-Road Driving Driving on Wet Roads WARNING (Continued)

Remove any brush or debris that Rain and wet roads can reduce
has collected on the underbody, vehicle traction and affect your Flowing or rushing water creates
or chassis, or under the hood. ability to stop and accelerate. strong forces. Driving through
These accumulations can be a fire Always drive slower in these types flowing water could cause the
hazard. of driving conditions and avoid vehicle to be carried away. If this
After operation in mud or sand, driving through large puddles and happens, you and other vehicle
have the brake linings cleaned and deep‐standing or flowing water. occupants could drown. Do not
checked. These substances can ignore police warnings and be
cause glazing and uneven braking. { WARNING very cautious about trying to drive
Check the body structure, steering, through flowing water.
suspension, wheels, tires, and Wet brakes can cause crashes.
exhaust system for damage and They might not work as well in a
check the fuel lines and cooling quick stop and could cause Hydroplaning
system for any leakage. pulling to one side. You could Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
More frequent maintenance lose control of the vehicle. can build up under the vehicle's
service is required. Refer to the After driving through a large tires so they actually ride on the
Maintenance Schedule for more water. This can happen if the road is
puddle of water or a car/vehicle
information. wet enough and you are going fast
wash, lightly apply the brake enough. When the vehicle is
pedal until the brakes work hydroplaning, it has little or no
normally. contact with the road.
(Continued)
There is no hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to
slow down when the road is wet.
Other Rainy Weather Tips Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads
Besides slowing down, other wet Always be alert and pay attention to Driving on steep hills or through
weather driving tips include: your surroundings while driving. mountains is different than driving
. Allow extra following distance. If you become tired or sleepy, find a on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
safe place to park the vehicle driving in these conditions include:
. Pass with caution. and rest. . Keep the vehicle serviced and in
. Keep windshield wiping Other driving tips include: good shape.
equipment in good shape.
. Keep the vehicle well ventilated. . Check all fluid levels and brakes,
. Keep the windshield washer fluid tires, cooling system, and
reservoir filled.
. Keep the interior
temperature cool. transmission.
. Have good tires with proper . Shift to a lower gear when going
. Keep your eyes moving — scan
tread depth. See Tires on down steep or long hills.
page 10‑49. the road ahead and to the sides.
. Turn off cruise control.
. Check the rearview mirror and
vehicle instruments often.
{ WARNING
If you do not shift down, the
brakes could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would
then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.

. Pay attention to special road Try not to break the fragile traction.
{ WARNING signs (falling rocks area, winding If you accelerate too fast, the drive
roads, long grades, passing or wheels will spin and polish the
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) no-passing zones) and take surface under the tires even more.
or with the ignition off is appropriate action.
dangerous. The brakes will have The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
on page 9‑44 improves vehicle
to do all the work of slowing down Winter Driving stability during hard stops on
and they could get so hot that
they would not work well. You Driving on Snow or Ice slippery roads, but apply the brakes
sooner than when on dry pavement.
would then have poor braking or Drive carefully when there is snow
even none going down a hill. You or ice between the tires and the Allow greater following distance on
could crash. Always have the road, creating less traction or grip. any slippery road and watch for
engine running and the vehicle in Wet ice can occur at about 0°C slippery spots. Icy patches can
gear when going downhill. (32°F) when freezing rain begins to occur on otherwise clear roads in
fall, resulting in even less traction. shaded areas. The surface of a
Avoid driving on wet ice or in curve or an overpass can remain icy
. Stay in your own lane. Do not when the surrounding roads are
freezing rain until roads can be
swing wide or cut across the clear. Avoid sudden steering
treated with salt or sand.
center of the road. Drive at maneuvers and braking while
speeds that let you stay in your Drive with caution, whatever the on ice.
own lane. condition. Accelerate gently so
traction is not lost. Accelerating too Turn off cruise control on slippery
. Be alert on top of hills; surfaces.
quickly causes the wheels to spin
something could be in your
and makes the surface under the
lane (stalled car, accident).
tires slick, so there is even less
traction.
Blizzard Conditions
WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
Being stuck in snow can be a
serious situation. Stay with the If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: For more information about
vehicle unless there is help nearby. carbon monoxide, see Engine
. Clear away snow from around
If possible, use the Roadside Exhaust on page 9‑30.
the base of your vehicle,
Assistance Program (U.S. and
especially any that is blocking
Canada) on page 13‑8 or Roadside
the exhaust pipe. Run the engine for short periods
Assistance Program (Mexico) on
page 13‑10. To get help and keep . Check again from time to only as needed to keep warm, but
everyone in the vehicle safe: time to be sure snow does be careful.
not collect there. To save fuel, run the engine for only
. Turn on the hazard warning
flashers. . Open a window about 5 cm short periods as needed to warm
(2 in) on the side of the the vehicle and then shut the engine
. Tie a red cloth to an outside off and close the window most of
vehicle that is away from the
mirror. the way to save heat. Repeat this
wind to bring in fresh air.
until help arrives but only when you
{ WARNING . Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
feel really uncomfortable from the
cold. Moving about to keep warm
Snow can trap engine exhaust panel. also helps.
under the vehicle. This may . Adjust the climate control If it takes some time for help to
cause exhaust gases to get system to a setting that arrive, now and then when you run
inside. Engine exhaust contains circulates the air inside the the engine, push the accelerator
carbon monoxide (CO) which vehicle and set the fan speed pedal slightly so the engine runs
cannot be seen or smelled. It can to the highest setting. See faster than the idle speed. This
cause unconsciousness and even “Climate Control Systems” in keeps the battery charged to restart
death. the Index. the vehicle and to signal for help
(Continued) (Continued) with the headlamps. Do this as little
as possible to save fuel.
If the Vehicle Is Stuck For information about using tire Release the accelerator pedal while
chains on the vehicle, see Tire shifting, and press lightly on the
Slowly and cautiously spin the Chains on page 10‑72. accelerator pedal when the
wheels to free the vehicle when transmission is in gear. Slowly
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. Rocking the Vehicle to Get spinning the wheels in the forward
If the vehicle has a traction system, it Out and reverse directions causes a
it can often help to free a stuck Turn the steering wheel left and rocking motion that could free the
vehicle. Refer to the vehicle's right to clear the area around the vehicle. If that does not get the
traction system in the Index. If stuck front wheels. For four-wheel-drive vehicle out after a few tries, it might
too severely for the traction system vehicles, shift into Four‐Wheel High need to be towed out. Recovery
to free the vehicle, turn the traction or, if the vehicle has a two‐speed hooks can be used, if the vehicle
system off and use the rocking automatic transfer case, Four‐Wheel has them. If the vehicle does need
method. Low. For vehicles with StabiliTrak®, to be towed out, see Towing the
turn the traction control part of the Vehicle on page 10‑93.
{ WARNING system off. Shift back and forth
between R (Reverse) and a forward
If the vehicle's tires spin at high gear, spinning the wheels as little as
speed, they can explode, and you possible. To prevent transmission
or others could be injured. The wear, wait until the wheels stop
vehicle can overheat, causing an spinning before shifting gears.
engine compartment fire or other
damage. Spin the wheels as little
as possible and avoid going
above 56 km/h (35 mph).
Recovery Hooks Vehicle Load Limits

It is very important to know how
{ WARNING much weight your vehicle can
Never pull on recovery hooks carry. This weight is called the
from the side. The hooks could vehicle capacity weight and
break and you and others could includes the weight of all
be injured. When using recovery occupants, cargo, and all
hooks, always pull the vehicle nonfactory-installed options.
straight out. Two labels on your vehicle show
how much weight it was
designed to carry, the Tire and
Notice: Never use recovery
Loading Information label and
hooks to tow the vehicle. Your
vehicle could be damaged and it the Certification/Tire label.
would not be covered by
warranty.
For vehicles with recovery hooks at
the front of the vehicle, you can use
them if you are stuck off-road and
need to be pulled to some place
where you can continue driving.
Tire and Loading Information positions (A), and the maximum

{ WARNING Label vehicle capacity weight (B) in
Do not load the vehicle any kilograms and pounds.
heavier than the Gross The Tire and Loading
Vehicle Weight Rating Information label also shows the
(GVWR), or either the size of the original equipment
maximum front or rear Gross tires (C) and the recommended
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). cold tire inflation pressures (D).
This can cause systems to For more information on tires
break and change the way the and inflation see Tires on
vehicle handles. This could page 10‑49 andTire Pressure on
cause loss of control and a page 10‑57.
crash. Overloading can also There is also important loading
shorten the life of the vehicle. Label Example information on the vehicle
A vehicle specific Tire and Certification/Tire label. It tells
Loading Information label is you the Gross Vehicle Weight
attached to the center pillar Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
(B-pillar). With the driver door Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for
open, you will find the label the front and rear axles. See
attached below the door lock “Certification/Tire Label” later in
post (striker). The tire and this section.
loading information label shows
the number of occupant seating
Steps for Determining Correct 4. The resulting figure equals 6. If your vehicle will be towing
Load Limit the available amount of cargo a trailer, the load from your
1. Locate the statement “The and luggage load capacity. trailer will be transferred to
combined weight of For example, if the “XXX” your vehicle. Consult this
occupants and cargo should amount equals 1400 lbs and manual to determine how this
never exceed XXX kg or there will be five 150 lb reduces the available cargo
XXX lbs” on your vehicle's passengers in your vehicle, and luggage load capacity of
placard. the amount of available cargo your vehicle. See Trailer
and luggage load capacity is Towing on page 9‑74 for
2. Determine the combined 650 lbs (1400 − 750 important information on
weight of the driver and (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). towing a trailer, towing safety
passengers that will be riding rules and trailering tips.
5. Determine the combined
in your vehicle.
weight of luggage and cargo
3. Subtract the combined being loaded on the vehicle.
weight of the driver and That weight may not safely
passengers from XXX kg or exceed the available cargo
XXX lbs. and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 1 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs) Example 2 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs) Example 3 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)
B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ B. Subtract Occupant Weight @
68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 136 kg 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg
(300 lbs) (750 lbs) (1,000 lbs)
C. Available Occupant and Cargo C. Available Cargo Weight = C. Available Cargo Weight =
Weight = 317 kg (700 lbs) 113 kg (250 lbs) 0 kg (0 lbs)
Refer to your vehicle's tire and vehicle's original tires and the The Certification/Tire label also
loading information label for inflation pressures needed to contains information about your
specific information about your obtain the gross weight capacity Front Axle Reserve Capacity.
vehicle's capacity weight and of your vehicle. This is called And, if you do have a heavy
seating positions. The combined Gross Vehicle Weight Rating load, you should spread it out.
weight of the driver, passengers, (GVWR). The GVWR includes
and cargo should never exceed the weight of the vehicle, all
your vehicle's capacity weight. occupants, fuel, and cargo.
{ WARNING
Certification/Tire Label The Certification/Tire label also Do not load the vehicle any
tells you the maximum weights heavier than the Gross
for the front and rear axles, Vehicle Weight Rating
called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either the
(GAWR). To find out the actual maximum front or rear Gross
loads on your front and rear Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
axles, you need to go to a weigh This can cause systems to
station and weigh your vehicle. break and change the way the
Your dealer can help you with vehicle handles. This could
this. Be sure to spread out your cause loss of control and a
load equally on both sides of the crash. Overloading can also
centerline. shorten the life of the vehicle.
Never exceed the GVWR for
A vehicle specific Certification/ your vehicle, or the GAWR for
Tire label is found on the rear either the front or rear axle.
edge of the driver door. The
label shows the size of your
Notice: Overloading the

vehicle may cause damage. { WARNING WARNING (Continued)
Repairs would not be covered Things you put inside the
. Do not leave an
by the vehicle warranty. Do vehicle can strike and injure unsecured child restraint
not overload the vehicle. people in a sudden stop or in the vehicle.
The label will help you decide turn, or in a crash. . When you carry something
how much cargo and installed . Put things in the cargo inside the vehicle, secure
equipment your truck can carry. area of the vehicle. Try to it whenever you can.
Using heavier suspension spread the weight evenly. . Do not leave a seat folded
components to get added . Never stack heavier down unless you need to.
durability might not change your things, like suitcases,
weight ratings. Ask your dealer inside the vehicle so that There is also important loading
to help you load your vehicle the some of them are above information for off-road driving in
right way. the tops of the seats. this manual. See “Loading Your
If you put things inside your (Continued) Vehicle for Off-Road Driving”
vehicle — like suitcases, tools, under Off-Road Driving on
packages, or anything page 9‑6.
else — they go as fast as the
vehicle goes. If you have to stop
or turn quickly, or if there is a
crash, they will keep going.

. Avoid making hard stops for
Starting and the first 322 km (200 miles) or
Adjustable Throttle and
Operating so. During this time the new Brake Pedal
brake linings are not yet On vehicles with this feature, you
New Vehicle Break-In broken in. Hard stops with can change the position of the
new linings can mean throttle and brake pedals.
Notice: The vehicle does not premature wear and earlier
need an elaborate break-in. But it replacement. Follow this No adjustment to the pedals can be
will perform better in the long run breaking-in guideline every made when the vehicle is in
if you follow these guidelines: time you get new brake R (Reverse) or while using cruise
linings. control.
. Keep the vehicle speed at
88 km/h (55 mph) or less for . Do not tow a trailer during
the first 805 km (500 miles). break-in. See Trailer Towing
. Do not drive at any one on page 9‑74 for the trailer
constant speed, fast or slow, towing capabilities of the
for the first 805 km vehicle and more
(500 miles). Do not make information.
full-throttle starts. Avoid Following break‐in, engine speed The control used to adjust the
downshifting to brake or and load can be gradually pedals is located on the instrument
slow the vehicle. increased. panel below the climate control
system.
Press the bottom of the control to
move the pedals closer. Press the
top of the control to move the
pedals away.
Before you start driving, fully press To shift out of P (Park), the ignition If the vehicle must be shut off in an
the brake pedal to confirm the must be in ON/RUN or ACC/ emergency:
adjustment is right for you. While ACCESSORY and the regular brake 1. Brake using a firm and steady
driving, make only small pedal must be applied. pressure. Do not pump the
adjustments. A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/ brakes repeatedly. This may
The vehicle may have a memory LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is deplete power assist, requiring
function which lets pedal settings be stopped, turn the ignition switch to increased brake pedal force.
saved and recalled. See Memory LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off. 2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).
Seats on page 3‑8. Retained Accessory Power (RAP) This can be done while the
will remain active. See Retained vehicle is moving. After shifting
Ignition Positions Accessory Power (RAP) on to N (Neutral), firmly apply the
page 9‑27. brakes and steer the vehicle to a
This position locks the ignition. safe location.
It also locks the transmission on
automatic transmission vehicles.
The key can be removed in
LOCK/OFF.
Do not turn the engine off when the
vehicle is moving. This will cause a
loss of power assist in the brake
and steering systems and disable
the airbags.
The ignition switch has four different

positions.
3. Come to a complete stop, shift key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this The switch stays in this position
to P (Park), and turn the ignition does not work, then the vehicle when the engine is running. The
to LOCK/OFF. On vehicles with needs service. transmission is also unlocked in this
an automatic transmission, the Notice: Using a tool to force the position on automatic transmission
shift lever must be in P (Park) to key to turn in the ignition could vehicles.
turn the ignition switch to the cause damage to the switch or If you leave the key in the ACC/
LOCK/OFF position. break the key. Use the correct ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position
4. Set the parking brake. See key, make sure it is all the way in, with the engine off, the battery could
Parking Brake on page 9‑46. and turn it only with your hand. be drained. You may not be able to
If the key cannot be turned by start the vehicle if the battery is
{ WARNING hand, see your dealer. allowed to drain for an extended
period of time.
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This
Turning off the vehicle while position lets things like the radio D (START): This is the position that
moving may cause loss of power and the windshield wipers operate starts the engine. When the engine
assist in the brake and steering while the engine is off. Use this starts, release the key. The ignition
systems and disable the airbags. position if the vehicle must be switch returns to ON/RUN for
While driving, only shut the pushed or towed. driving.
vehicle off in an emergency.
C (ON/RUN): This position can be A warning tone will sound when the
used to operate the electrical driver door is opened and the
If the vehicle cannot be pulled over, accessories and to display some ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or
and must be shut off while driving, instrument panel cluster warning LOCK/OFF, and the key is in the
turn the ignition to ACC/ and indicator lights. This position ignition.
ACCESSORY. can also be used for service and
The steering can bind with the diagnostics, and to verify the proper
wheels turned off center. If this operation of the malfunction
happens, move the steering wheel indicator lamp as may be required
from right to left while turning the for emission inspection purposes.
Starting the Engine The vehicle has a When the Low Fuel warning
Computer-Controlled Cranking lamp is on and the FUEL LEVEL
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the System. This feature assists in LOW message is displayed in
hybrid supplement for more starting the engine and protects the Driver Information Center
information. components. If the ignition key is (DIC), the Computer-Controlled
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or turned to the START position, Cranking System is disabled to
N (Neutral). The engine will not start and then released when the prevent possible vehicle
in any other position. To restart the engine begins cranking, the component damage. When this
engine when the vehicle is already engine will continue cranking for happens, hold the ignition switch
moving, use N (Neutral) only. a few seconds or until the in the START position to
vehicle starts. If the engine does continue engine cranking.
Notice: Do not try to shift to not start and the key is held in
P (Park) if the vehicle is moving. Notice: Cranking the engine for
START, cranking will be stopped long periods of time, by returning
If you do, you could damage the after 15 seconds to prevent
transmission. Shift to P (Park) the key to the START position
cranking motor damage. To immediately after cranking has
only when the vehicle is stopped. prevent gear damage, this ended, can overheat and damage
Starting Procedure system also prevents cranking if the cranking motor, and drain the
the engine is already running. battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
1. With your foot off the accelerator Engine cranking can be stopped
pedal, turn the ignition to START. between each try, to let the
by turning the ignition switch to cranking motor cool down.
When the engine starts, let go of the ACC/ACCESSORY or
the key. The idle speed will go LOCK/OFF position.
down as the engine warms. Do
not race the engine immediately
after starting it. Operate the
engine and transmission gently
to allow the oil to warm up and
lubricate all moving parts.
2. If the engine does not start after Notice: If you add electrical parts To Use the Engine Coolant
5-10 seconds, especially in very or accessories, you could change Heater
cold weather (below −18°C or the way the engine operates. Any
0°F), it could be flooded with too resulting damage would not be 1. Turn off the engine.
much gasoline. Try pushing the covered by the vehicle warranty. 2. Open the hood and unwrap the
accelerator pedal all the way to See Add-On Electrical Equipment electrical cord. The cord is
the floor and holding it there as on page 9‑90. secured to the engine
you hold the key in START for compartment fuse block with a
up to a maximum of 15 seconds. Engine Heater clip. Carefully remove the wire
Wait at least 15 seconds tie which secures the electrical
between each try, to allow the The engine coolant heater can cord. Do not cut the
cranking motor to cool down. provide easier starting and better electrical cord.
When the engine starts, let go of fuel economy during engine
warm-up in cold weather conditions 3. Plug the cord into a normal,
the key and accelerator. If the
at or below −18°C (0°F). Vehicles grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
vehicle starts briefly but then
stops again, repeat these steps. with an engine heater should be
This clears the extra gasoline plugged in at least four hours before { WARNING
from the engine. Do not race the starting. An internal thermostat in
engine immediately after starting the plug-end of the cord may exist Plugging the cord into an
it. Operate the engine and which will prevent engine coolant ungrounded outlet could cause an
transmission gently until the oil heater operation at temperatures electrical shock. Also, the wrong
warms up and lubricates all above −18°C (0°F). kind of extension cord could
moving parts. overheat and cause a fire. You
could be seriously injured. Plug
the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
(Continued)

. OnStar System (if equipped)
WARNING (Continued) . Sunroof (if equipped) WARNING (Continued)
If the cord will not reach, use a These features work when fairly level ground, use the steps
heavy-duty three-prong extension the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ that follow. If you have a
cord rated for at least 15 amps. ACCESSORY. Once the key is four-wheel drive transfer case
turned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF, with a N (Neutral) position, and
the windows and sunroof continue the transfer case is in N (Neutral),
4. Before starting the engine, be to work up to 10 minutes until any
sure to unplug and store the the vehicle will be free to roll,
door is opened. The radio continues even if the shift lever is in
cord as it was before to keep it to work for up to 10 minutes or until
away from moving engine parts. P (Park). So, be sure the transfer
the driver door is opened. case is in a drive gear — not in
If you do not, it could be
damaged. N (Neutral). If you are pulling a
Shifting Into Park trailer, see Driving Characteristics
The length of time the heater should
and Towing Tips on page 9‑70.
remain plugged in depends on
several factors. Ask a dealer in the
{ WARNING Always set the parking brake.
area where you will be parking the It can be dangerous to get out of
vehicle for the best advice on this. the vehicle if the shift lever is not 1. Hold the brake pedal down, then
fully in P (Park) with the parking set the parking brake.
Retained Accessory brake firmly set. The vehicle can See Parking Brake on page 9‑46
Power (RAP) roll. If you have left the engine for more information.
The following vehicle accessories running, the vehicle can move 2. Move the shift lever into the
can be used for up to 10 minutes suddenly. You or others could be P (Park) position by pulling the
after the engine is turned off: injured. To be sure the vehicle will shift lever toward you and
not move, even when you are on moving it up as far as it will go.
. Audio System
(Continued) 3. Be sure the transfer case is in a
. Power Windows
drive gear — not in N (Neutral).
4. Turn the ignition key to Torque Lock

LOCK/OFF. WARNING (Continued)
If you are parking on a hill and you
5. Remove the key and take it with And, if you leave the vehicle with do not shift your transmission into
you. If you can leave the vehicle the engine running, it could P (Park) properly, the weight of
with the ignition key in your overheat and even catch fire. You the vehicle may put too much
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park). or others could be injured. Do not force on the parking pawl in the
leave the vehicle with the engine transmission. You may find it difficult
Leaving the Vehicle With the to pull the shift lever out of P (Park).
Engine Running running unless you have to.
This is called torque lock. To
prevent torque lock, set the parking
{ WARNING If you have to leave the vehicle with brake and then shift into P (Park)
the engine running, be sure your properly before you leave the driver
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle is in P (Park) and the seat. To find out how, see Shifting
vehicle with the engine running. parking brake is firmly set before Into Park on page 9‑27.
The vehicle could move suddenly you leave it. After you move the shift
lever into P (Park), hold the regular When you are ready to drive, move
if the shift lever is not fully in
brake pedal down. Then, see if you the shift lever out of P (Park) before
P (Park) with the parking brake
can move the shift lever away from you release the parking brake.
firmly set.
P (Park) without first pulling it toward If torque lock does occur, you may
If you have four-wheel drive and you. If you can, it means that the need to have another vehicle push
the transfer case is in N (Neutral), shift lever was not fully locked into yours a little uphill to take some of
the vehicle will be free to roll, P (Park). the pressure from the parking pawl
even if the shift lever is in in the transmission, then you will be
P (Park). So be sure the transfer able to pull the shift lever out of
case is in a drive gear — not in P (Park).
N (Neutral).
(Continued)
Shifting out of Park To shift out of P (Park) use the Parking over Things
following:
This vehicle is equipped with an That Burn
electronic shift lock release system. 1. Apply the brake pedal.
The shift lock release is
designed to:
2. Move the shift lever to the { WARNING
desired position.
. Prevent ignition key removal Things that can burn could touch
If you still are unable to shift out of
unless the shift lever is in hot exhaust parts under the
P (Park):
P (Park) with the shift lever vehicle and ignite. Do not park
button fully released. 1. Ease the pressure on the shift over papers, leaves, dry grass,
lever. or other things that can burn.
. Prevent movement of the shift
2. While holding down the brake
lever out of P (Park), unless the
ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ pedal, press the shift lever all
ACCESSORY and the regular the way into P (Park).
brake pedal is applied. 3. Move the shift lever to the
The shift lock release is always desired position.
functional except in the case If you are still having a problem
of an uncharged or low voltage shifting, then have the vehicle
(less than 9 volt) battery. serviced soon.
If the vehicle has an uncharged
battery or a battery with low voltage,
try charging or jump starting the
battery. See Jump Starting on
Active Fuel Management® Engine Exhaust WARNING (Continued)

Vehicles with V8 engines may have
Active Fuel Management™. This { WARNING . There are holes or openings
in the vehicle body from
system allows the engine to operate
on either all or half of its cylinders, Engine exhaust contains carbon damage or aftermarket
depending on the driving conditions. monoxide (CO) which cannot be modifications that are not
seen or smelled. Exposure to CO completely sealed.
When less power is required, such
as cruising at a constant vehicle can cause unconsciousness and If unusual fumes are detected or
speed, the system will operate in even death. if it is suspected that exhaust is
the half cylinder mode, allowing the Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: coming into the vehicle:
vehicle to achieve better fuel . Drive it only with the windows
economy. When greater power
. The vehicle idles in areas
with poor ventilation (parking completely down.
demands are required, such as
accelerating from a stop, passing, garages, tunnels, deep snow . Have the vehicle repaired
or merging onto a freeway, the that may block underbody immediately.
system will maintain full-cylinder airflow or tail pipes).
Never park the vehicle with the
operation. . The exhaust smells or engine running in an enclosed
If the vehicle has an Active Fuel sounds strange or different. area such as a garage or a
Management™ indicator, see Driver . The exhaust system leaks building that has no fresh air
Information Center (DIC) on due to corrosion or damage. ventilation.
page 5‑28 for more information on . The vehicle exhaust system
using this display. has been modified, damaged
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
Running the Vehicle

While Parked
{ WARNING { WARNING
It is better not to park with the It can be dangerous to get out of If the vehicle has a four-wheel
engine running. But if you ever have the vehicle if the automatic drive transfer case with a
to, here are some things to know. transmission shift lever is not fully N (Neutral) position, and the
in P (Park) with the parking brake transfer case is in N (Neutral), the
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do vehicle may roll, even if the
{ WARNING not leave the vehicle when the automatic transmission shift lever
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed engine is running unless you is in P (Park). So, be sure the
area with poor ventilation is have to. If you have left the transfer case is in a drive
dangerous. Engine exhaust may engine running, the vehicle can gear — not in N (Neutral). Always
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust move suddenly. You or others set the parking brake.
contains carbon monoxide (CO) could be injured. To be sure the
which cannot be seen or smelled. vehicle will not move, even when Follow the proper steps to be sure
It can cause unconsciousness you are on fairly level ground, the vehicle will not move. See
and even death. Never run the always set the parking brake and Shifting Into Park on page 9‑27.
engine in an enclosed area that move the shift lever to P (Park).
If parking on a hill and pulling a
has no fresh air ventilation. For trailer, see Driving Characteristics
more information, see Engine and Towing Tips on page 9‑70.
Exhaust on page 9‑30.
Automatic There are several different positions

for the shift lever. { WARNING
Transmission It is dangerous to get out of the
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
hybrid supplement for more in P (Park) with the parking brake
information. firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
If the vehicle is has an automatic Do not leave the vehicle when the
transmission, it has an electronic engine is running unless you
shift position indicator within the Heavy Duty 6-Speed Automatic
have to. If you have left the
instrument panel cluster. This Transmission Shown (Light Duty
engine running, the vehicle can
display comes on when the ignition Similar)
move suddenly. You or others
key is turned to the ON/RUN See “Range Selection Mode” under
position. could be injured. To be sure the
Manual Mode on page 9‑35. vehicle will not move, even when
P (Park): This position locks the you are on fairly level ground,
rear wheels. It is the best position to always set the parking brake and
use when starting the engine move the shift lever to P (Park).
because the vehicle cannot move See Shifting Into Park on
easily. When parked on a hill, page 9‑27. If you are pulling a
especially when the vehicle has a trailer, see Driving Characteristics
heavy load, you might notice an and Towing Tips on page 9‑70.
increase in the effort to shift out of
P (Park). See “Torque Lock” under
Shifting Into Park on page 9‑27 for
more information.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or
{ WARNING get out of snow, ice, or sand without N (Neutral) with the engine
damaging the transmission, see If running at high speed may
If the vehicle has a four-wheel the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑15. damage the transmission. The
drive transfer case with a repairs would not be covered by
N (Neutral) position, and the N (Neutral): In this position, the
engine does not connect with the the vehicle warranty. Be sure the
transfer case is in N (Neutral), the engine is not running at high
vehicle will be free to roll — even wheels. To restart the engine when
the vehicle is already moving, use speed when shifting the vehicle.
if the shift lever is in P (Park). Be
N (Neutral) only. Also, use D (Drive): This position is for
sure the transfer case is in a drive
N (Neutral) when the vehicle is normal driving. It provides the best
gear, Two-Wheel Drive High or
being towed. fuel economy. If you need more
Four-Wheel Drive High or power for passing, and you are:
Four-Wheel Drive Low — not in
N (Neutral). See Shifting Into Park { WARNING . Going less than about 55 km/h
on page 9‑27. Always set the (35 mph), push the accelerator
Shifting into a drive gear while the pedal about halfway down.
parking brake. engine is running at high speed is
. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) or
dangerous. Unless your foot is
R (Reverse): Use this gear to firmly on the brake pedal, the more, push the accelerator all
back up. vehicle could move very rapidly. the way down.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) You could lose control and hit By doing this, the vehicle shifts
while the vehicle is moving people or objects. Do not shift down to the next gear and has
forward could damage the into a drive gear while the engine more power.
transmission. The repairs would is running at high speed.
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only
after the vehicle is stopped.
D (Drive) can be used when towing If the shift stabilization feature When temperatures are very cold,
a trailer, carrying a heavy load, determines that a current vehicle shifting could be delayed providing
driving on steep hills, or for off-road speed cannot be maintained, the more stable shifts until the engine
driving. You might want to shift the transmission does not upshift and warms up. Shifts could be more
transmission to a lower gear instead holds the current gear. noticeable with a cold transmission.
selection if the transmission shifts In some cases, this could appear to This difference in shifting is normal.
too often. be a delayed shift, however the M (Manual Mode): This position
Downshifting the transmission in transmission is operating normally. lets drivers select the range of gears
slippery road conditions could result The vehicle's transmission uses appropriate for current driving
in skidding. See “Skidding” under adaptive shift controls. Adaptive conditions. If the vehicle has this
Loss of Control on page 9‑5. shift controls continually compares feature, see “Range Selection
The vehicle has a shift stabilization key shift parameters to Mode” under Manual Mode on
feature that adjusts the transmission pre-programmed ideal shifts stored page 9‑35.
shifting to the current driving in the transmissions computer. The 3 (Third): This position is also used
conditions in order to reduce rapid transmission constantly makes for normal driving. It reduces vehicle
upshifts and downshifts. This shift adjustments to improve vehicle speed more than D (Drive) without
stabilization feature is designed to performance according to how the using the brakes. You might choose
determine, before making an vehicle is being used, such as 3 (Third) instead of D (Drive) when
upshift, if the engine is able to with a heavy load or when the driving on hilly, winding roads, when
maintain vehicle speed by analyzing temperature changes. During this towing a trailer, so there is less
things such as vehicle speed, adaptive shift control process, shifting between gears and when
throttle position, and vehicle load. shifting might feel different as the going down a steep hill.
transmission determines the best
settings.
2 (Second): This position reduces to 1 (First) it provides the lowest Manual Mode
vehicle speed even more than gear appropriate to the vehicle's
3 (Third) without using the brakes. current road speed and continues to Range Selection Mode
You can use 2 (Second) on hills. downshift as the vehicle slows, (Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed
It can help control vehicle speed as eventually downshifting to Transmission)
you go down steep mountain roads, 1 (First) gear.
but then you would also want to use Notice: Spinning the tires or
the brakes off and on. holding the vehicle in one
If you manually select 2 (Second) place on a hill using only the
in an automatic transmission, accelerator pedal may damage
the transmission will start in the transmission. The repair will
second gear. You can use this not be covered by the vehicle
Base Trim Shown (Uplevel Similar)
feature for reducing the speed of the warranty. If you are stuck, do not
rear wheels when you are trying to spin the tires. When stopping on The vehicle may have a Range
start the vehicle from a stop on a hill, use the brakes to hold the Selection Mode. The Range
slippery road surfaces. vehicle in place. Selection Mode helps control the
vehicle's transmission and vehicle
1 (First): This position reduces
speed while driving down hill or
vehicle speed without using the
towing a trailer by letting you select
brakes. You can use it for major/
a desired range of gears.
severe downgrades and off-road
driving where the vehicle would
otherwise accelerate due to
steepness of grade. When you shift
To use this feature, do the following: Grade Braking is not available when torque to the wheels after it detects
1. Move the shift lever to Range Selection Mode is active. wheel slip, preventing the tires from
M (Manual Mode). See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑36. spinning.
2. Press the plus/minus buttons, While using Range Selection Mode,

Cruise Control and the Tow/Haul Tow/Haul Mode
located on the steering column
shift lever, to select the desired Mode can be used.
range of gears for the current Notice: Spinning the tires or
driving conditions. holding the vehicle in one
When M (Manual Mode) is selected place on a hill using only the
a number displays next to the M, accelerator pedal may damage
indicating the current gear. the transmission. The repair will
This number is the highest gear that warranty. If you are stuck, do not The vehicle has a Tow/Haul Mode.
can be used. However, the vehicle spin the tires. When stopping on The selector button is located on the
can automatically shift to lower a hill, use the brakes to hold the end of the column shift lever. You
gears as it adjusts to driving vehicle in place. can use this feature to assist when
conditions. This means that all driving down steep hills or mountain
gears below that number are Low Traction Mode grades, towing, or hauling a heavy
available. When 5 (Fifth) is selected, If the vehicle has the Hydra-Matic® load, or if there is a need to charge
1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gears are 6-Speed Automatic Transmission, it a battery installed in a trailer. See
automatically shifted by the vehicle, has a Low Traction Mode that Towing Equipment on page 9‑79
but 6 (Sixth) cannot be used until assists in vehicle acceleration when and Hill and Mountain Roads on
the plus/minus button located on the road conditions are slippery, such page 9‑12 for more information.
steering column lever is used to as with ice or snow. While the
change to the gear. vehicle is at a stop, select the
second gear range using Range
Selection Mode. This will limit
Grade Braking is only active while Drive Systems

the Tow/Haul Mode is selected and
you are not in the Range Selection
Mode. See “Tow/Haul Mode” listed Four-Wheel Drive
previously and Manual Mode on (Two Speed Automatic
page 9‑35 for more information on Transfer Case)
When Tow/Haul Mode is selected the Range Selection Mode. Grade
Braking assists in maintaining If the vehicle has four-wheel drive,
the tow/haul indicator light will come
desired vehicle speeds when driving you can send the engine's driving
on. See Tow/Haul Mode Light on
on downhill grades by automatically power to all four wheels for extra
page 5‑24.
implementing a shift schedule that traction. Read the following before
The Tow/Haul Mode works with the utilizes the engine and transmission using four-wheel drive.
Autoride® feature, if the vehicle has to slow the vehicle. This reduces Notice: Driving on clean, dry
this, to enhance the ride when wear on the braking system and pavement in Four-Wheel Drive
trailering or with a loaded vehicle. increases control of the vehicle. High or Four-Wheel Drive Low for
See Continuous Damping Control Grade Braking monitors vehicle an extended period of time may
(CDC) on page 9‑51. speed, acceleration, engine torque cause premature wear on the
Grade Braking (Hydra-Matic® and brake pedal usage. Using this vehicle's powertrain. Do not drive
information, it detects when the on clean, dry pavement in
6-Speed Automatic truck is on a downhill grade and the
Transmission) Four-Wheel Drive High or
driver desires to slow the vehicle by Four-Wheel Drive Low for
The Grade Braking shift modes can pressing the brake. extended periods of time.
be activated by pressing the button Also see Towing Equipment on
on the end of the shift control lever. While driving on clean dry pavement
page 9‑79 for more information. and during tight turns, you may
While in Range Selection Mode,
Grade Braking is deactivated experience a vibration in the
allowing the driver to select a steering system.
desired range of gears.
The vehicle has StabiliTrak®. Automatic Transfer Case You can choose among five driving
Shifting into Four-Wheel Drive Low settings:
will turn Traction Control and Indicator lights in the switches show
StabiliTrak off. See StabiliTrak® you which setting you are in. The
System on page 9‑47. indicator lights will come on briefly
Front Axle when you turn on the ignition and
the last chosen setting will stay on.
The front axle engages and If the lights do not come on, you
disengages automatically when you should take the vehicle to your
shift the transfer case. Some delay dealer for service. An indicator light
for the axle to engage or disengage will flash while shifting. It will stay on
is normal. when the shift is completed. If for
some reason the transfer case
cannot make a requested shift, it will
The transfer case knob is located to return to the last chosen setting.
the left of the instrument panel 2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): This
cluster. setting is used for driving in most
Use this dial to shift into and out of street and highway situations. The
four-wheel drive. front axle is not engaged in
two-wheel drive. This setting also
provides the best fuel economy.
AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel You might choose Four-Wheel Drive N (Neutral): Shift the vehicle's
Drive): This setting is ideal for Low if you are driving off-road in transfer case to N (Neutral) only
use when road surface traction deep sand, deep mud, deep snow, when towing the vehicle. See
conditions are variable. When and while climbing or descending Recreational Vehicle Towing on
driving the vehicle in AUTO, the steep hills. page 10‑93 or Towing the Vehicle
front axle is engaged, and the The vehicle has StabiliTrak. Shifting on page 10‑93 for more information.
vehicle's power is sent to the front into Four-Wheel Drive Low will turn If the SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE
and rear wheels automatically Traction Control and StabiliTrak off. message stays on, you should take
based on driving conditions. Driving See StabiliTrak® System on the vehicle to your dealer for
in this mode results in slightly lower page 9‑47. service. See “SERVICE 4 WHEEL
fuel economy than Two-Wheel DRIVE” message under
Drive High.
{ WARNING Transmission Messages on
page 5‑45.
4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Use
the Four-Wheel Drive High position Shifting the transfer case to
Shifting Into Four-Wheel Drive
when you need extra traction, such N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle High or AUTO (Automatic
as on snowy or icy roads or in most to roll even if the transmission is Four-Wheel Drive)
off-road situations. This setting also in P (Park). You or someone else
engages your front axle to help could be seriously injured. Be Turn the knob to the Four-Wheel
drive the vehicle. This is the best sure to set the parking brake Drive High or AUTO position. This
setting to use when plowing snow. before placing the transfer case in can be done at any speed, except
when shifting from Four-Wheel
N (Neutral). See Parking Brake on
4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low): This Drive Low. The indicator light will
page 9‑46.
setting also engages the front axle flash while shifting. It will remain on
and delivers extra torque. You may when the shift is completed.
never need this setting. It sends
maximum power to all four wheels.
Shifting Into Two-Wheel for shifting into Four-Wheel Drive If the knob is turned to the
Drive High Low is to have the vehicle moving Four-Wheel Drive Low position
Turn the knob to the Two-Wheel 1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph). Turn the when the vehicle is in gear and/or
Drive High position. This can be knob to the Four-Wheel Drive Low moving more than 5 km/h (3 mph),
done at any speed, except when position. You must wait for the the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator
shifting from Four-Wheel Drive Low. Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light light will flash for 30 seconds
to stop flashing and remain on and not complete the shift. After
See “Shifting Out of Four-Wheel before shifting the transmission 30 seconds the transfer case
Drive Low” in this section for more into gear. will shift to Four-Wheel Drive
information. High mode. With the vehicle moving
Notice: Shifting the transmission
Shifting Into Four-Wheel into gear before the requested less than 5 km/h (3 mph) and the
Drive Low mode indicator light has stopped transmission in N (Neutral), attempt
flashing could damage the the shift again.
When Four-Wheel Drive Low is
engaged, vehicle speed should be transfer case. To help avoid Shifting Out of Four-Wheel
kept below 72 km/h (45 mph). damaging the vehicle, always wait Drive Low
Extended high-speed operation for the mode indicator lights to
To shift from Four-Wheel Drive Low
in 4L may damage or shorten the life stop flashing before shifting the
to Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO,
of the drivetrain. transmission into gear.
or Two-Wheel Drive High, the
To shift to the Four-Wheel Drive The vehicle may have significant vehicle must be stopped or moving
Low position, the ignition must be in engagement noise and bump when less than 5 km/h (3 mph) with the
ON/RUN and the vehicle must be shifting between Four-Wheel Drive transmission in N (Neutral) and the
stopped or moving less than 5 km/h Low and Four-Wheel Drive High ignition in ON/RUN. The preferred
(3 mph) with the transmission in ranges or from N (Neutral) while the method for shifting out of
N (Neutral). The preferred method engine is running. Four-Wheel Drive Low is to have
your vehicle moving 1.6 to 3.2 km/h
(1 to 2 mph). Turn the knob to the
Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO,
or Two-Wheel Drive High position.
You must wait for the Four-Wheel If the knob is turned to the 4. Put the transmission in
Drive High, AUTO, or Two-Wheel Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO, N (Neutral).
Drive High indicator light to stop or Two-Wheel Drive High switch 5. Shift the transfer case to
flashing and remain on before position when the vehicle is in gear Two-Wheel Drive High.
shifting the transmission into gear. and/or moving more than 5 km/h
(3 mph), the Four-Wheel Drive High, 6. Turn the transfer case dial
Notice: Shifting the transmission clockwise to N (Neutral) until it
into gear before the requested AUTO, or Two-Wheel Drive High
indicator light will flash for stops and hold it there until the
mode indicator light has stopped N (Neutral) light starts blinking.
flashing could damage the 30 seconds but will not complete the
shift. With the vehicle moving less This will take at least
transfer case. To help avoid 10 seconds. Then slowly release
damaging the vehicle, always wait than 5 km/h (3 mph) and the
transmission is in N (Neutral), the dial to the Four‐Wheel Drive
for the mode indicator lights to Low position. The N (Neutral)
stop flashing before shifting the attempt the shift again.
light will come on when the
transmission into gear. Shifting into Neutral transfer case shift to N (Neutral)
The vehicle may have significant To shift the transfer case to is complete.
engagement noise and bump when N (Neutral) do the following: 7. If the engine is running, verify
shifting between Four-Wheel Drive that the transfer case is in
Low and Four-Wheel Drive High 1. Make sure the vehicle is parked
so that it will not roll. N (Neutral) by shifting the
ranges or from N (Neutral) while the transmission to R (Reverse) for
engine is running. 2. Set the parking brake and apply one second, then shift the
the regular brake pedal. See transmission to D (Drive) for
Parking Brake on page 9‑46 for one second.
more information.
8. Turn the ignition to ACC/
3. Start the vehicle or turn the ACCESSORY, which will turn the
ignition to ON/RUN. engine off.
9. Place the transmission shift Notice: Shifting the transmission Four-Wheel Drive
lever in P (Park). into gear before the Four-Wheel
Drive Low indicator light has
(Single Speed Automatic
10. Release the parking brake prior Transfer Case)
to moving the vehicle. stopped flashing could damage
the transfer case. To help avoid If the vehicle has four-wheel drive,
11. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. damaging the vehicle, always wait you can send the engine's driving
Shifting Out of Neutral for the Four-Wheel Drive Low power to all four wheels for extra
indicator light to stop flashing traction. Read the following before
To shift out of N Neutral do the before shifting the transmission using four-wheel drive.
following: into gear.
Notice: Driving on clean, dry
1. Set the parking brake and apply 5. Start the engine and shift the pavement in Four-Wheel Drive
the regular brake pedal. transmission to the desired High for an extended period of
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with position. time may cause premature wear
the engine off, and shift the Excessively shifting the transfer on the vehicle's powertrain. Do
transmission to N (Neutral). case into or out of the different not drive on clean, dry pavement
3. Turn the transfer case dial to modes may cause the transfer case in Four-Wheel Drive High for
the desired transfer case shift to enter the shift protection mode. extended periods of time.
position (Two-Wheel Drive High, This will protect the transfer case While driving on clean dry pavement
Four-Wheel Drive High, from possible damage and will only and during tight turns, you may
or AUTO). allow the transfer case to respond to experience a vibration in the
one shift per 10 seconds. The steering system.
After the transfer case has transfer case may stay in this mode
shifted out of N (Neutral), the for up to three minutes.
N (Neutral) light will go out.
4. Release the parking brake prior
to moving the vehicle.
Front Axle The vehicle has Four-Wheel Drive AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel
with StabiliTrak®. For information on Drive): This setting is ideal for use
The front axle engages and
StabiliTrak, see StabiliTrak® System when road surface traction
disengages automatically when you
on page 9‑47. conditions are variable. When
shift the transfer case. Some delay
You can choose among three driving the vehicle in AUTO, the
for the axle to engage or disengage
driving settings: front axle is engaged, and the
is normal.
vehicle's power is sent to the front
Automatic Transfer Case Indicator lights in the switch show and rear wheels automatically
you which setting you are in. The based on driving conditions. Driving
indicator lights will come on briefly in this mode results in slightly lower
when you turn on the ignition and fuel economy than Two-Wheel
the last chosen setting will stay on. Drive High.
If the lights do not come on, you
should take the vehicle to your 4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Use
dealer for service. An indicator light the Four-Wheel Drive High position
will flash while shifting. It will stay on when you need extra traction, such
when the shift is completed. If for as on snowy or icy roads or in most
some reason the transfer case off-road situations. This setting also
cannot make a requested shift, it will engages the front axle to help drive
return to the last chosen setting. the vehicle. This is the best setting
to use when plowing snow.
2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): This
The transfer case knob is located to setting is used for driving in most
the left of the instrument panel street and highway situations. The
cluster. front axle is not engaged in
two-wheel drive. This setting also
Use this dial to shift into and out of provides the best fuel economy.
four-wheel drive.
Service Four‐Wheel Drive Shifting Into Two-Wheel Brakes

If the SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE Drive High
message stays on, you should take Turn the knob to the Two-Wheel Antilock Brake
the vehicle to your dealer for Drive High position. This can be
service. See “SERVICE 4 WHEEL done at any speed. The indicator System (ABS)
DRIVE” message under light will flash while shifting. It will This vehicle has the Antilock Brake
Transmission Messages on remain on when the shift is System (ABS), an advanced
page 5‑45. completed. electronic braking system that helps
Excessively shifting the transfer prevent a braking skid.
Shifting Into Four-Wheel Drive
High or AUTO (Automatic case into or out of the different When the engine is started and the
Four-Wheel Drive) modes may cause the transfer case vehicle begins to drive away, ABS
to enter the shift protection mode. checks itself. A momentary motor or
Turn the knob to the Four-Wheel This will protect the transfer case clicking noise might be heard while
Drive High or AUTO position. This from possible damage and will only this test is going on, and it might
can be done at any speed. The
allow the transfer case to respond to even be noticed that the brake
indicator light will flash while one shift per 10 seconds. The pedal moves a little. This is normal.
shifting. It will remain on when the transfer case may stay in this mode
shift is completed. for up to three minutes.
ABS can change the brake pressure Using ABS

to each wheel, as required, faster
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
than any driver could. This can help
the brake pedal down firmly and let
the driver steer around the obstacle
ABS work. You might hear the ABS
while braking hard.
pump or motor operating and feel
As the brakes are applied, the the brake pedal pulsate, but this is
If there is a problem with ABS, this computer keeps receiving updates normal.
warning light stays on. See Antilock on wheel speed and controls
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light braking pressure accordingly. Braking in Emergencies
on page 5‑23. ABS allows the driver to steer and
Remember: ABS does not change
If driving safely on a wet road and it the time needed to get a foot up to brake at the same time. In many
becomes necessary to slam on the the brake pedal or always decrease emergencies, steering can help
brakes and continue braking to stopping distance. If you get too more than even the very best
avoid a sudden obstacle, a close to the vehicle in front of you, braking.
computer senses that the wheels there will not be enough time to
are slowing down. If one of the apply the brakes if that vehicle
wheels is about to stop rolling, the suddenly slows or stops. Always
computer will separately work the leave enough room up ahead to
brakes at each wheel. stop, even with ABS.
Parking Brake Notice: Driving with the parking Brake Assist

brake on can overheat the brake
system and cause premature This vehicle has a brake assist
wear or damage to brake system feature designed to assist the driver
parts. Make sure that the parking in stopping or decreasing vehicle
brake is fully released and the speed in emergency driving
brake warning light is off before conditions. This feature uses the
driving. stability system hydraulic brake
control module to supplement the
To release the parking brake, hold power brake system under
the regular brake pedal down, then conditions where the driver has
push down momentarily on the quickly and forcefully applied the
parking brake pedal until you feel brake pedal in an attempt to quickly
the pedal release. Slowly pull your stop or slow down the vehicle. The
foot up off the parking brake pedal. stability system hydraulic brake
If the parking brake is not released control module increases brake
Set the parking brake by holding the
when you begin to drive, the brake pressure at each corner of the
regular brake pedal down, then
system warning light will flash and a vehicle until the ABS activates.
pushing down the parking brake
chime will sound warning you that Minor brake pedal pulsation or
pedal.
the parking brake is still on. pedal movement during this time is
If the ignition is on, the brake normal and the driver should
If you are towing a trailer and are
system warning light will come on. continue to apply the brake pedal as
parking on a hill, see Driving
See Brake System Warning Light on the driving situation dictates. The
Characteristics and Towing Tips on
page 5‑23. brake assist feature will
page 9‑70.
automatically disengage when the
brake pedal is released or brake
pedal pressure is quickly
decreased.
Hill Start Assist (HSA) accelerator pedal is applied within Ride Control Systems
the two‐second window. If the
Non‐hybrid vehicles with StabiliTrak vehicle is equipped with the
have a Hill Start Assist (HSA) Integrated Trailer Brake Control StabiliTrak® System
feature, which may be useful when (ITBC) system, HSA may also apply The vehicle has a vehicle stability
the vehicle is stopped on a grade. the trailer brakes. It will not activate enhancement system called
This feature is designed to prevent if the vehicle is in a drive gear and StabiliTrak. It is an advanced
the vehicle from rolling, either facing downhill or if the vehicle is computer-controlled system that
forward or rearward, during vehicle facing uphill and in R (Reverse). assists the driver with directional
drive off. After the driver completely There may be situations on minor control of the vehicle in difficult
stops and holds the vehicle in a hills (less than 5% grade) with a driving conditions.
complete standstill on a grade, HSA loaded vehicle or while pulling a
will be automatically activated. trailer where HSA will not activate. StabiliTrak activates when the
During the transition period between computer senses a discrepancy
when the driver releases the brake between the intended path and the
pedal and starts to accelerate to direction the vehicle is actually
drive off on a grade, HSA holds the traveling. StabiliTrak selectively
braking pressure for a maximum of applies braking pressure at any one
two seconds to ensure that there is of the vehicle's brakes to assist the
no rolling. The brakes will driver with keeping the vehicle on
automatically release when the the intended path.
StabiliTrak is on automatically If cruise control is being used when

whenever the vehicle is started. To StabiliTrak activates, the cruise
assist with directional control of the control automatically disengages.
vehicle, the system should always The cruise control can be
be left on. Trailer Sway Control re-engaged when road conditions
(TSC) is also on automatically when allow. See Cruise Control on
the vehicle is started. See Trailer page 9‑52. The StabiliTrak light will flash on the
Sway Control (TSC) on page 9‑90 If the system fails to turn on or instrument panel cluster when the
for more information. activate, the StabiliTrak light along system or the TSC feature is both
When the vehicle is started and with a message will be displayed on on and activated.
begins to move, the system the Driver Information Center (DIC). The system may be heard or felt
performs several diagnostic checks If a DIC message appears, make while it is working; this is normal.
to insure there are no problems. sure the StabiliTrak system has not
The system may be heard or felt been turned off using the Traction
while it is working. This is normal Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak
and does not mean there is a button. Then turn the vehicle off,
problem with the vehicle. The wait 15 seconds, and then turn it
system should initialize before the back on again to reset the system.
vehicle reaches 32 km/h (20 mph). If any of the messages still appear
In some cases, it may take on the DIC, the vehicle should be
approximately 3.2 km (2 mi) of taken in for service. For more The TCS/StabiliTrak button is
driving before the system initializes. information on the DIC messages, located on the instrument panel.
see Ride Control System Messages
on page 5‑43.
The traction control part of Traction control and StabiliTrak can It is recommended to leave the
StabiliTrak can be turned off by be turned on by pressing and system on for normal driving
pressing and releasing the TCS/ releasing the TCS/StabiliTrak button conditions, but it may be necessary
StabiliTrak button if both systems if they are not automatically shut off to turn the system off if the vehicle
(traction control and StabiliTrak) for any other reason. This will also is stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow,
were previously on. enable the TSC feature. and you want to “rock” the vehicle to
When the TCS or StabiliTrak system attempt to free it. It may also be
is turned off, the StabiliTrak light necessary to turn off the system
and the appropriate message will be when driving in extreme off-road
displayed on the DIC to warn the conditions where high wheel spin is
driver. The vehicle will still have required. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck
brake-traction control when traction on page 9‑15.
control is off, but will not be able to When the transfer case is in 4LO,
To disable both TCS and use the engine speed management the stability system is automatically
StabiliTrak, press and hold the system. See “Traction Control disabled, the StabiliTrak light comes
TCS/StabiliTrak button until the Operation” next for more on, and the appropriate message
StabiliTrak OFF light illuminates and information. will appear on the DIC. Both traction
the appropriate DIC message control and StabiliTrak are
When the TCS has been turned off,
displays. This will also disable the automatically disabled in this
system noises may still be heard as
TSC feature. condition.
a result of the brake-traction control
coming on.
Traction Control Operation Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle If cruise control is being used when
is allowed to spin excessively the system activates, the StabiliTrak
The TCS is part of the StabiliTrak
while the StabiliTrak®, ABS, brake light will flash and cruise control will
system. Traction control limits wheel
warning lights, and any relevant automatically disengage. Cruise
spin by reducing engine power to
DIC messages are displayed, the control may be reengaged when
the wheels (engine speed
transfer case could be damaged. road conditions allow. See Cruise
management) and by applying
The repairs would not be covered Control on page 9‑52.
brakes to each individual wheel
by the vehicle warranty. Reduce StabiliTrak may also turn off
(brake-traction control) as
engine power and do not spin the automatically if it determines that a
necessary.
wheel(s) excessively while these problem exists with the system.
The TCS is enabled automatically lights and messages are If the problem does not clear itself
when the vehicle is started. It will displayed. after restarting the vehicle, see your
activate and the StabiliTrak light will
The TCS may activate on dry or dealer for service.
flash if it senses that any of the
rough roads or under conditions Non-hybrid vehicles with StabiliTrak
wheels are spinning or beginning to
such as heavy acceleration while have a Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
lose traction while driving. If traction
turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts feature. See Trailer Sway Control
control is turned off, only the
of the transmission. When this (TSC) on page 9‑90.
brake-traction control portion of
happens, a reduction in acceleration
traction control will work. The Non-hybrid vehicles with StabiliTrak
may be noticed, or a noise or
engine speed management will be have a Hill Start Assist (HSA)
vibration may be heard. This is
disabled. In this mode, engine feature. See Hill Start Assist (HSA)
normal.
power is not reduced automatically on page 9‑47.
and the driven wheels can spin
more freely. This can cause the Adding non‐dealer accessories can
brake-traction control to activate affect the vehicle's performance.
constantly. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 10‑3.
Locking Rear Axle independently adjust the damping This type of level control is fully
level to provide the optimum automatic and will provide a better
Vehicles with a locking rear axle can vehicle ride. leveled riding position as well as
give more traction on snow, mud, better handling under a variety of
ice, sand, or gravel. It works like a Autoride also interact with the tow/
haul mode that, when activated, will passenger and loading conditions.
standard axle most of the time, but An air compressor connected to the
when traction is low, this feature will provide additional control of the
shock absorbers. This additional rear shocks will raise or lower the
allow the rear wheel with the most rear of the vehicle to maintain
traction to move the vehicle. control results in better ride and
handling characteristics when the proper vehicle height. The system is
vehicle is loaded or towing a trailer. activated when the ignition key is
Continuous Damping See “Tow/Haul Mode” under Trailer turned to ON/RUN and will
Control (CDC) Towing on page 9‑74 for more automatically adjust vehicle height
information. thereafter. The system may exhaust
This vehicle may have a continuous (lower vehicle height) for up to
damping control system called ten minutes after the ignition key
Autoride®. With this feature, Automatic Level Control has been turned off. You may hear
improved vehicle ride and handling The automatic level control rear the air compressor operating when
is provided under a variety of suspension is available on light‐duty the height is being adjusted.
passenger and loading conditions. vehicles and comes as a part of the If a weight‐distributing hitch is being
Autoride is fully automatic and Continuous Damping Control (CDC) used, it is recommended to allow
uses a computer controller to suspension, if equipped. the shocks to inflate, thereby
continuously monitor vehicle speed, leveling the vehicle prior to adjusting
wheel to body position, lift/dive, and the hitch.
steering position of the vehicle. The
controller then sends signals
to each shock absorber to
Cruise Control If the vehicle has StabiliTrak and the

system begins to limit wheel spin,
+RES (Resume/Accelerate):
Press briefly to make the vehicle
cruise control will automatically resume to a previously set speed,
{ WARNING disengage. See StabiliTrak® System or press and hold to accelerate.
on page 9‑47. When road conditions SET− (Set/Coast): Press to set the
Cruise control can be dangerous allow the cruise control to be safely
where you cannot drive safely at speed and activate cruise control or
used again, it can be turned make the vehicle decelerate.
a steady speed. So, do not use back on.
the cruise control on winding [ (Cancel): Press to disengage
roads or in heavy traffic. cruise control without erasing the
Cruise control can be dangerous set speed from memory.
on slippery roads. On such roads, Setting Cruise Control
fast changes in tire traction can
If the cruise button is on when not in
cause excessive wheel slip, and use, it could get bumped and go into
you could lose control. Do not use cruise when not desired. Keep the
cruise control on slippery roads. cruise control switch off when cruise
is not being used.
With cruise control, a speed of
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more can
be maintained without keeping your
foot on the accelerator. Cruise
control does not work at speeds I (On/Off): Press to turn the
below about 40 km/h (25 mph). system on or off. The indicator light
When the brakes are applied, cruise is on when cruise control is on and
control is turned off. turns off when cruise control is off.
The cruise control light on the Increasing Speed While Using

. To slow down in small amounts,
instrument panel cluster comes on Cruise Control press the SET– button on the
after the cruise control has been set steering wheel briefly. Each time
If the cruise control system is this is done, the vehicle goes
to the desired speed. already activated, about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.
1. Press the I button. . Press and hold the +RES button
Passing Another Vehicle While
2. Get up to the desired speed. on the steering wheel until the
Using Cruise Control
desired speed is reached, then
3. Press the SET− button located release it. Use the accelerator pedal to
on the steering wheel and increase the vehicle speed. When
release it.
. To increase vehicle speed in
you take your foot off the pedal, the
small amounts, press the +RES
4. Take your foot off the vehicle will slow down to the
button. Each time this is done,
accelerator. previous set cruise speed.
the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h
Resuming a Set Speed (1 mph) faster. Using Cruise Control on Hills
If the cruise control is set at a Reducing Speed While Using How well the cruise control works
desired speed and then the brakes Cruise Control on hills depends on the vehicle
are applied, the cruise control is speed, the load, and the steepness
If the cruise control system is
disengaged without erasing the set of the hills. When going up steep
already activated,
speed from memory. hills, pressing the accelerator pedal
. Press and hold the SET– button may be necessary to maintain
Once the vehicle speed reaches on the steering wheel until the vehicle speed.
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more, desired lower speed is reached,
press the +RES button on the then release it.
steering wheel. The vehicle returns
to the previous set speed and stays
there.
While going downhill, the Cruise Ending Cruise Control Object Detection
Grade Braking feature may There are three ways to end cruise
automatically shift to a lower gear to control:
Systems
keep the vehicle's speed down.
It may be necessary to apply the . To disengage cruise control, Ultrasonic Parking Assist
brake or manually shift the step lightly on the brake pedal.
transmission to a lower gear. The If available, the Ultrasonic Rear
vehicle may shift to a higher gear
. Press the [ on the steering Parking Assist (URPA) system uses
when grade braking assistance is wheel. sensors on the rear bumper to
no longer required. Cruise Grade . To turn off the cruise control, assist with parking and avoiding
Braking is not available while in objects while in R (Reverse).
press I on the steering wheel.
Range Selection Mode. See "Range
Selection Mode" under Manual Erasing Speed Memory { WARNING
Mode on page 9‑35. The cruise control set speed is
The URPA system does not
When the brakes are manually erased from memory by pressing
detect pedestrians, bicyclists,
applied the cruise control is the I button or if the ignition is animals, or objects below the
disengaged. turned off. bumper or that are too close or
too far from the vehicle. To
prevent injury, death, or vehicle
damage, even with URPA, always
check the area around the vehicle
and check all mirrors before
backing.
How the System Works Turning the System On and Off PARK ASSIST OFF: This message
occurs if the driver disables the
URPA comes on automatically
system or if the vehicle is driven
when the shift lever is moved into
above 8 km/h (5 mph) in
R (Reverse). A single tone sounds
R (Reverse).
to indicate the system is working.
PARK ASST BLOCKED SEE
URPA operates only at speeds less
OWNERS MANUAL: This
than 8 km/h (5 mph).
message can occur under the
An obstacle is indicated by audible Press this button, located next to following conditions:
beeps. The time between the the radio, to disable URPA. . The ultrasonic sensors are not
beeps gets shorter as the vehicle
The indicator light comes on and clean. Keep the rear bumper
approaches the obstacle.
PARK ASSIST OFF displays on the free of mud, dirt, snow, ice,
A continuous tone is heard when
Driver Information Center (DIC). slush, and frost. The message
the distance is less than
See Object Detection System may not clear until frost or ice
30 cm (12 in).
Messages on page 5‑41. has melted all around and inside
To be detected, objects must be at the sensor.
least 25 cm (10 in) off the ground When the System Does Not
Seem to Work Properly
. A trailer is attached to the
and below liftgate level. Objects
vehicle, or a bicycle or an object
must also be within 2.5 m (8 ft) from The following messages may be hanging out of the liftgate during
the rear bumper. This distance may displayed on the DIC: the current or last drive cycle.
be less during warmer or humid
SERVICE PARK ASSIST: this URPA will return to normal
weather.
message occurs, take the vehicle to operation after it is determined
your dealer for repair. the object is removed. This
could take a few drive cycles.
. A tow bar is attached to the
vehicle.
Other conditions may affect system

performance, such as vibrations { WARNING
from a jackhammer or the
compression of air brakes on SBZA does not detect vehicles
a very large truck. rapidly approaching outside of the
side blind zones, pedestrians,
Side Blind Zone bicyclists, or animals. Failure to
use proper care when changing
Alert (SBZA) lanes may result in injury, death,
If available, the Side Blind Zone or vehicle damage. Always check
Alert system is a lane changing aid for other vehicles and use the
that assists drivers with avoiding turn signals when changing lanes.
crashes that occur with vehicles in
SBZA Detection Zones
the side blind zones.
The SBZA sensor covers a zone of
approximately one lane over from
both sides of the vehicle, 3.5 m
(11 ft). This zone starts at each side
mirror and goes back approximately
5.0 m (16 ft). The height of the
zone is approximately between
0.5 m (1.5 ft) and 2.0 m (6 ft) off the
ground.
Use caution while changing lanes
when towing a trailer, as the SBZA
detection zones do not change
when a trailer is towed.
How the System Works the same side, the display will flash shrubs, and other stationary objects.
The SBZA symbol lights up in the to give you extra warning not to This is normal system operation, the
side mirrors when the system change lanes. vehicle does not need service.
detects a vehicle in the side blind At speeds greater then 32 km/h If the SBZA displays do not light up
zone, indicating it may be unsafe to (20 mph), SBZA displays may come when the system is on and vehicles
change lanes. Before making a lane on when approaching or passing are in the blind zone, the system
change, check the SBZA display, other vehicles. SBZA displays may may need service. Take the vehicle
check all mirrors, glance over your come on when a passed vehicle to your dealer.
shoulder, and use the turn signals. remains in or drops back into the SBZA does not operate when the
detection zone. SBZA can be SBZA sensors in the left or right
disabled through the Driver corners of the rear bumper are
Information Center (DIC). See Driver covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice,
Information Center (DIC) on slush, or in heavy rainstorms. For
page 5‑28. If SBZA is disabled by cleaning instructions, see “Washing
the driver, the SBZA mirror displays the Vehicle” under Exterior Care on
Left Side Mirror Right Side Mirror will not light up. page 10‑99. If the DIC still displays
Display Display the SIDE BLIND ZONE SYSTEM
When the System Does Not Seem
To Work Properly UNAVAILABLE message after
When the vehicle is started, both
cleaning the bumper, see your
outside mirror SBZA displays will Missed alerts can occur under dealer.
briefly come on to indicate the normal circumstances and will
system is operating. When the increase in wet conditions. The
vehicle is moving forward, the left or system does not need to be
right side mirror display will light up serviced. SBZA is designed to
if a vehicle is detected in that blind ignore stationary objects; however,
zone. If the turn signal is activated the system may occasionally light
and a vehicle is also detected on up due to guard rails, signs, trees,
The SBZA displays may remain on SIDE BLIND ZONE SYSTEM FCC Information
if a trailer is attached to the vehicle, UNAVAILABLE: This message
or a bicycle or object is extending indicates that the SBZA system is
out to either side of the vehicle. disabled either because the sensor
When SBZA is disabled for any is blocked and cannot detect
reason other than the driver turning vehicles in your blind zone, or the
rules and Industry Canada
it off, it cannot be turned back on. vehicle is passing through an open
The SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT ON field of view area, such as the
desert, where there is insufficient Frequency of operation:
option will not be selectable if the
data for operation. This message 24.05GHz – 24.25GHz
conditions for normal system
operation are not met. may also activate during heavy rain Field Strength: Not greater than
or due to road spray. The vehicle 2.5V/m peak (0.25V/m average) at a
SBZA Error Messages does not need service. For cleaning, distance of 3m
The following messages may see “Washing the Vehicle” under
Exterior Care on page 10‑99. The manufacturer is not responsible
appear in the DIC: for any radio or TV interference
SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SERVICE SIDE BLIND ZONE caused by unauthorized
SYSTEM OFF: This message ALERT SYSTEM: If this message modifications to this equipment.
indicates that the driver has turned appears, both SBZA displays will Such modifications could void the
the system off. remain on indicating there is a user's authority to operate the
problem with the SBZA system. equipment.
If these displays remain on after
continued driving, the system needs
service. Take the vehicle to your
dealer.
Rear Vision Vehicles without Navigation Vehicles with Navigation

Camera (RVC) System System
If available, the Rear Vision Camera The RVC system displays a view of The RVC system is designed to
(RVC) system displays part of the the area behind the vehicle. When help the driver when backing up by
scene behind the vehicle. the vehicle is on and shifted into displaying a view of the area behind
R (Reverse) the video image the vehicle. When the vehicle is
appears on the inside rearview shifted into R (Reverse), the video
{ WARNING mirror. The video image disappears image appears on the navigation
after the vehicle is shifted out of screen. After a delay, the navigation
The RVC system does not display
R (Reverse). screen displays the last screen after
pedestrians, bicyclists, animals, the vehicle is shifted out of
or any other object located Turning the RVC System On or Off R (Reverse).
outside the camera's field of view, To turn off the RVC system, press
below the bumper, or under the Turning the RVC System On or Off
and hold z , located on the inside
vehicle. Do not back the vehicle To turn the RVC system on or off:
rearview mirror, until the left
using only the RVC screen, such
indicator light turns off. The RVC 1. Shift into P (Park).
as during longer, higher speed display is now disabled.
backing maneuvers, or where 2. Press MENU to enter the
there could be cross-traffic. To turn the RVC system on, press configure menu options. Turn
Perceived distances may be and hold z until the left indicator the Multifunction knob until the
different from actual distances. light comes on. The RVC system Display feature is highlighted
Failure to use proper care before display will appear in the mirror. and press the Multifunction
backing may result in injury, knob. Or press the Display
death, or vehicle damage. Always screen button
check behind and around the 3. Select the Rear Camera Options
vehicle before backing. screen button. The Rear Camera
Options screen displays.
Adjusting the Brightness and Rear Parking Assist Symbols

Contrast of the Screen Unavailable error message may
To adjust the brightness and display. See Ultrasonic Parking
contrast of the screen, press the Assist on page 9‑54.
MENU button while the RVC image The symbols appear near objects
is on the display. Any adjustments detected by the URPA system. The
made will only affect the RVC symbol may cover the object when
screen. viewing the navigation screen.
4. Select the Video screen button. ] (Brightness): Touch the + (plus) To turn the symbols on or off:
When the Video screen button is or – (minus) screen buttons to 1. Make sure that URPA has not
highlighted the RVC increase or decrease the brightness been disabled.
system is on. of the screen.
2. Shift into P (Park).
The delay that is received after _ (Contrast): Touch the + (plus)
or – (minus) screen buttons to 3. Press MENU to enter the
shifting out of R (Reverse) is
increase or decrease the contrast of configure menu options. Turn
approximately 10 seconds. The
the screen. the Multifunction knob until the
delay can be canceled by
Display feature is highlighted
performing one of the following: Symbols and press the Multifunction
. Pressing a hard key on the The navigation system may have a knob. Or press the Display
navigation system. feature that allows for viewing screen button
. Shifting into P (Park). parking assist symbols on the 4. Select the Rear Camera Options
.
navigation screen while using the screen button. The Rear Camera
Reach a vehicle speed of RVC. The Ultrasonic Rear Park
8 km/h (5 mph). Options screen displays.
Assist (URPA) system must not be
disabled to use the caution symbols. 5. Touch the Symbols screen
If URPA has been disabled and the button. The screen button will be
symbols have been turned on, the highlighted when on.
Guidelines RVC Location

The RVC system has a guideline
overlay that can help the driver align
the vehicle when backing into a
parking spot.
To turn the guidelines on or off:
1. Make sure that URPA has not
been disabled.
2. Shift into P (Park).
3. Press MENU to enter the
configure menu options. Turn A. View displayed by the camera
the Multifunction knob until the
Display feature is highlighted
and press the Multifunction The camera is located above the
knob. Or press the Display license plate.
screen button This shows the field of view that the
4. Select the Rear Camera Options camera provides.
screen button. The Rear Camera
Options screen displays.
5. Touch the Guidelines screen
button. The screen button will be A. View displayed by the camera
highlighted when on.
B. Corners of the rear bumper
Displayed images may be further or

. The back of the vehicle is in an The fast flash conditions are
closer than they appear. The area accident, the position and used to protect the video device
displayed is limited and objects mounting angle of the camera from high temperature
which are close to either corner of can change or the camera can conditions. Once conditions
the bumper or under the bumper do be affected. Be sure to have the return to normal the device will
not display. camera and its position and reset and the green indicator will
mounting angle checked at your stop flashing.
When the System Does Not dealer.
Seem To Work Properly During any of these fault conditions,
The RVC system display in the the display will be blank and the
The RVC system might not work rearview mirror may turn off or not indicator will flash while the vehicle
properly or display a clear image if: appear as expected due to one of is in R (Reverse) or until the
. The RVC is turned off. See the following conditions. If this conditions return to normal.
“Turning the RVC System On or occurs the left indicator light on the
mirror will flash. Press and hold z when the left
Off” earlier in this section.
indicator light is flashing to turn off
. It is dark.
. A slow flash may indicate a loss
the video display along with the left
of video signal, or no video
. The sun or the beam of indicator light.
signal present during the reverse
headlamps is shining directly cycle.
into the camera lens. . A fast flash may indicate that the
. Ice, snow, mud, or anything else display has been on for the
builds up on the camera lens. maximum allowable time during
Clean the lens, rinse it with a reverse cycle, or the display
water, and wipe it with a soft has reached an Over
cloth. Temperature limit.
Fuel Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge

and a yellow fuel cap can use either
Use of the recommended fuel unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
is an important part of the proper containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
maintenance of this vehicle. To help See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on
keep the engine clean and maintain page 9‑66. For all other vehicles,
optimum vehicle performance, we use only the unleaded gasoline
recommend the use of gasoline described under Recommended
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Fuel on page 9‑63.
Gasoline.
Look for the TOP TIER label on the Recommended Fuel
fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets Use regular unleaded gasoline with
enhanced detergency standards The eighth digit of the Vehicle a posted octane rating of 87 or
developed by auto companies. A list Identification Number (VIN) shows higher. If the octane rating is less
of marketers providing TOP TIER the code letter or number that than 87, an audible knocking noise,
Detergent Gasoline can be found at identifies the vehicle's engine. The commonly referred to as spark
www.toptiergas.com. VIN is at the top left of the knock, might be heard when driving.
instrument panel. See Vehicle If this occurs, use a gasoline rated
Identification Number (VIN) on at 87 octane or higher as soon as
page 12‑1. possible. If heavy knocking is heard
when using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher, the engine
needs service.
Gasoline Specifications California Fuel Fuels in Foreign

(U.S. and Canada Only) Requirements Countries
At a minimum, gasoline should If the vehicle is certified to meet Never use leaded gasoline or any
meet ASTM specification D 4814 California Emissions Standards, it is other fuel not recommended in the
in the United States or CAN/ designed to operate on fuels that previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. meet California specifications. See caused by use of improper fuel
Some gasolines contain an the underhood emission control would not be covered by the vehicle
octane-enhancing additive called label. If this fuel is not available in warranty.
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese states adopting California Emissions To check the fuel availability, ask an
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend Standards, the vehicle will operate auto club, or contact a major oil
against the use of gasolines satisfactorily on fuels meeting company that does business in the
containing MMT. See Fuel Additives federal specifications, but emission country where you will be driving.
on page 9‑65 for additional control system performance might
information. be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp could turn on and the
vehicle might fail a smog‐check test.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 5‑20. If this occurs, return to
your authorized dealer for diagnosis.
If it is determined that the condition
is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Fuel Additives For customers who do not use TOP Notice: This vehicle was not
TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly, designed for fuel that contains
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines one bottle of GM Fuel System methanol. Do not use fuel
in the United States are now Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel containing methanol. It can
required to contain additives that tank at every engine oil change, can corrode metal parts in the fuel
help prevent engine and fuel system help clean deposits from fuel system and also damage plastic
deposits from forming, allowing the injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel and rubber parts. That damage
emission control system to work System Treatment PLUS is the only would not be covered under the
properly. In most cases, nothing gasoline additive recommended by vehicle warranty.
should have to be added to the fuel. General Motors. It is available at
However, some gasolines contain Some gasolines that are
your dealer. not reformulated for low
only the minimum amount of
additive required to meet U.S. Gasolines containing oxygenates, emissions can contain an
Environmental Protection Agency such as ethers and ethanol, and octane-enhancing additive called
regulations. To help keep fuel reformulated gasolines might be methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
injectors and intake valves clean available in your area. We tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant
and avoid problems due to dirty recommend that you use these where you buy gasoline whether the
injectors or valves, look for gasoline gasolines, if they comply with the fuel contains MMT. We recommend
that is advertised as TOP TIER specifications described earlier. against the use of such gasolines.
Detergent Gasoline. Look for the However, E85 (85% ethanol) and Fuels containing MMT can reduce
TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to other fuels containing more than spark plug life and affect emission
ensure gasoline meets enhanced 15% ethanol must not be used in control system performance. The
detergency standards developed by vehicles that were not designed for malfunction indicator lamp might
the auto companies. A list of those fuels. turn on. If this occurs, return to your
marketers providing TOP TIER dealer for service.
Detergent Gasoline can be found at
www.toptiergas.com.
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) At a minimum, E85 should meet E85 has less energy per liter
ASTM Specification D 5798 or (gallon) than gasoline, so you will
Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge CGSB Specification 3.512. Filling need to refill the fuel tank more
and a yellow fuel cap can use either the tank with fuel mixtures that often when using E85 than when
unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel do not meet ASTM or CGSB you are using gasoline. See Filling
containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). specifications can affect driveability the Tank on page 9‑67.
For all other vehicles, use only the and could cause the malfunction
unleaded gasoline described under Notice: Some additives are not
indicator lamp to come on. As the compatible with E85 fuel and can
Recommended Fuel on page 9‑63. outside temperature approaches harm the vehicle's fuel system.
We encourage the use of E85 in freezing, ethanol fuel distributors Do not add anything to E85.
vehicles that are designed to use it. should supply winter grade ethanol, Damage caused by additives
The ethanol in E85 is a “renewable” the same as with unleaded would not be covered by the
fuel, meaning it is made from gasoline. vehicle warranty.
renewable sources such as corn It is best not to alternate repeatedly
and other crops. Notice: This vehicle was not
between gasoline and E85. If you designed for fuel that contains
Many service stations will not have do switch fuels, it is recommended methanol. Do not use fuel
an 85% ethanol fuel (E85) pump that you add as much fuel as containing methanol. It can
available. The U.S. Department of possible — do not add less than corrode metal parts in the fuel
Energy has an alternative fuels 11 L (3 gal) when refueling. You system and also damage plastic
website (www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/ should drive the vehicle immediately and rubber parts. That damage
locator/stations/) that can help you after refueling for at least 11 km would not be covered under the
find E85 fuel. Those stations that do (7 mi) to allow the vehicle to adapt vehicle warranty.
have E85 should have a label to the change in ethanol
indicating ethanol content. Do not concentration.
use the fuel if the ethanol content is
greater than 85%.
Filling the Tank The tethered fuel cap is located To remove the fuel cap, turn it
behind a hinged fuel door on the slowly counterclockwise. The fuel
driver side of the vehicle. If the cap has a spring in it; if the cap is
{ WARNING vehicle has E85 fuel capability, the released too soon, it will spring back
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel cap will be yellow and state that to the right.
E85 or gasoline can be used. See While refueling, hang the tethered
fuel fire can cause bad injuries.
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on fuel cap from the hook on the
To help avoid injuries to you and
page 9‑66. fuel door.
others, read and follow all the
instructions on the fuel pump
island. Turn off the engine when
refueling. Do not smoke near fuel
or when refueling the vehicle. Do
not use cellular phones. Keep
sparks, flames, and smoking
materials away from fuel. Do not
leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is
against the law in some places.
Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away
from the fuel pump; never let To open the fuel door, push the
children pump fuel. rearward center edge in and release
and it will open.
When replacing the fuel cap, insert

{ WARNING the tether in its hole before { WARNING
tightening the cap. Turn the fuel cap
Fuel can spray out on you if you clockwise until it clicks. It will require If a fire starts while you are
open the fuel cap too quickly. more effort to turn the fuel cap on refueling, do not remove the
If you spill fuel and then the last turn as you tighten it. Make nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
something ignites it, you could be sure the cap is fully installed. The shutting off the pump or by
badly burned. This spray can diagnostic system can determine if notifying the station attendant.
happen if the tank is nearly full, the fuel cap has been left off or Leave the area immediately.
and is more likely in hot weather. improperly installed. This would
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait allow fuel to evaporate into the Notice: If a new fuel cap is
for any hiss noise to stop. Then atmosphere. See Malfunction needed, be sure to get the right
unscrew the cap all the way. Indicator Lamp on page 5‑20. type of cap from your dealer. The
If the vehicle has a Driver wrong type of fuel cap might not
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not Information Center (DIC), the fit properly, might cause the
top off or overfill the tank and wait a TIGHTEN GAS CAP message malfunction indicator lamp to
few seconds after you have finished displays if the fuel cap is not light, and could damage the fuel
pumping before removing the properly installed. tank and emissions system. See
nozzle. Clean fuel from painted Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
surfaces as soon as possible. See page 5‑20.
Exterior Care on page 10‑99.
Filling a Portable Fuel WARNING (Continued) Towing

Container
. Bring the fill nozzle in contact General Towing
{ WARNING with the inside of the fill
opening before operating the
Information
Never fill a portable fuel container nozzle. Contact should be Only use towing equipment that has
while it is in the vehicle. Static maintained until the filling is been designed for the vehicle.
electricity discharge from the complete. Contact your dealer or trailering
container can ignite the fuel dealer for assistance with preparing
. Do not smoke while the vehicle for towing a trailer.
vapor. You can be badly burned pumping fuel.
and the vehicle damaged if this See the following trailer towing
occurs. To help avoid injury to you
. Do not use a cellular phone information in this section:
and others: while pumping fuel. . For information on driving while
. Dispense fuel only into towing a trailer, see “Driving
approved containers. Characteristics and
Towing Tips.”
. Do not fill a container while it
is inside a vehicle, in a . For maximum vehicle and trailer
vehicle's trunk, pickup bed, weights, see “Trailer Towing.”
or on any surface other than . For information on equipment to
the ground. tow a trailer, see “Towing
(Continued) Equipment.”
For information on towing a disabled

. Consider using a sway control. . If the vehicle has the Side Blind
vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on See “Hitches” in Towing Zone Alert (SBZA) system and it
page 10‑93. For information on Equipment on page 9‑79. doesn't seem to be working
towing the vehicle behind another . Do not tow a trailer at all during properly while pulling a trailer,
vehicle such as a motor home, see the first 800 km (500 mi) the new turn the system off. See Side
Recreational Vehicle Towing on vehicle is driven. The engine, Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on
page 10‑93. axle or other parts could be page 9‑56 for more information.
damaged. Important considerations that have
Driving Characteristics . Then, during the first 800 km to do with weight:
and Towing Tips (500 mi) that a trailer is towed, . The weight of the trailer
do not drive over 80 km/h . The weight of the trailer tongue
Pulling a Trailer (50 mph) and do not make starts
Here are some important points: at full throttle. This helps the . The weight on the vehicle's tires
. There are many different laws, engine and other parts of the . And the weight of the trailering
including speed limit restrictions, vehicle wear in at the heavier combination
having to do with trailering. loads.
Make sure the rig will be legal, . Vehicles can tow in D (Drive).
not only where you live but also Shift the transmission to a lower
where you will be driving. gear if the transmission shifts
A good source for this too often under heavy loads
information can be state or and/or hilly conditions.
provincial police.
Driving with a Trailer Before starting, check all trailer hitch

WARNING (Continued) parts and attachments, safety
{ WARNING . Fully open the air outlets on
chains, electrical connectors, lamps,
tires and mirrors. If the trailer has
or under the instrument electric brakes, start the
When towing a trailer, exhaust panel.
gases may collect at the rear of combination moving and then apply
the vehicle and enter if the
. Adjust the Climate Control the trailer brake controller by hand
liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most system to a setting that to be sure the brakes work.
window is open. brings in only outside air and During the trip, check occasionally
set the fan speed to the to be sure that the load is secure
Engine exhaust contains Carbon highest setting. See Climate and the lamps and any trailer
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be Control System in the Index. brakes still work.
seen or smelled. It can cause
For more information about
unconsciousness and even death.
Carbon Monoxide, see Engine Following Distance
To maximize safety when towing Exhaust on page 9‑30. Stay at least twice as far behind the
a trailer: vehicle ahead as you would when
driving the vehicle without a trailer.
. Have the exhaust system Towing a trailer requires a certain
This can help to avoid heavy
inspected for leaks and make amount of experience. The
braking and sudden turns.
necessary repairs before combination you are driving is
starting a trip. longer and not as responsive as the Passing
. Never drive with the liftgate, vehicle itself. Get acquainted with
the handling and braking of the rig More passing distance is needed
trunk/hatch, or rear-most when towing a trailer. The
window open. before setting out for the open road.
combination will not accelerate as
(Continued) quickly and is longer so it is
necessary to go much farther
beyond the passed vehicle before
returning to the lane.
Backing Up If the trailer turn signal bulbs burn When towing at high altitude on
out, the arrows on the instrument steep uphill grades, consider the
Hold the bottom of the steering
panel will still flash for turns. It is following: Engine coolant will boil at
wheel with one hand. Then, to move
important to check occasionally to a lower temperature than at normal
the trailer to the left, move that hand
be sure the trailer bulbs are still altitudes. If the engine is turned off
to the left. To move the trailer to the
working. immediately after towing at high
right, move your hand to the right.
altitude on steep uphill grades, the
Always back up slowly and, Driving on Grades vehicle may show signs similar to
if possible, have someone
Reduce speed and shift to a engine overheating. To avoid this,
guide you.
lower gear before starting down a let the engine run while parked,
Making Turns long or steep downgrade. If the preferably on level ground, with the
transmission is not shifted down, the automatic transmission in P (Park)
Notice: Making very sharp turns for a few minutes before turning the
brakes might get hot and no longer
while trailering could cause the engine off. If the overheat warning
work well.
trailer to come in contact with the comes on, see Engine Overheating
vehicle. The vehicle could be Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift
on page 10‑21.
damaged. Avoid making very the transmission to a lower gear if
sharp turns while trailering. the transmission shifts too often
under heavy loads and/or hilly
When turning with a trailer, make
conditions.
wider turns than normal. Do this so
the trailer will not strike soft The tow/haul mode may be used if
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees the transmission shifts too often.
or other objects. Avoid jerky or See Tow/Haul Mode Light on
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in page 5‑24.
advance.
Parking on Hills 4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then

apply the parking brake and shift WARNING (Continued)
{ WARNING into P (Park).
Always put the shift lever fully in
5. If the vehicle is four-wheel-drive P (Park) with the parking brake
Parking the vehicle on a hill with and has a two-speed transfer firmly set.
the trailer attached can be case, be sure the transfer case
dangerous. If something goes is in a drive gear and not in If the transfer case on a
wrong, the rig could start to move. N (Neutral). four-wheel-drive vehicle is in
People can be injured, and both N (Neutral), the vehicle will be
6. Release the brake pedal.
the vehicle and the trailer can be free to roll, even if the shift lever
damaged. When possible, always is in P (Park). Be sure the transfer
park the rig on a flat surface. { WARNING case is in a drive gear — not in
N (Neutral).
It can be dangerous to get out of
If parking the rig on a hill: the vehicle if the shift lever is not
1. Press the brake pedal, but do fully in P (Park) with the parking
not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn brake firmly set. The vehicle
the wheels into the curb if facing can roll.
downhill or into traffic if facing If the engine has been left
uphill. running, the vehicle can move
2. Have someone place chocks suddenly. You or others could be
under the trailer wheels. injured. To be sure the vehicle will
not move, even when on fairly
3. When the wheel chocks are in
place, release the regular brakes level ground, use the steps that
until the chocks absorb the load. follow.
(Continued)
Leaving After Parking on a Hill Maintenance When Trailer

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal. Towing { WARNING
2. Start the engine. The vehicle needs service more The driver can lose control when
often when pulling a trailer. See pulling a trailer if the correct
3. Shift into a gear. Maintenance Schedule on equipment is not used or the
4. Release the parking brake. page 11‑3. Things that are vehicle is not driven properly. For
especially important in trailer example, if the trailer is too
5. Let up on the brake pedal. operation are automatic heavy, the brakes may not work
6. Drive slowly until the trailer is transmission fluid, engine oil, well — or even at all. The driver
clear of the chocks. axle lubricant, belts, cooling system and passengers could be
and brake system. It is a good idea seriously injured. The vehicle may
7. Stop and have someone pick up
to inspect these before and during also be damaged; the resulting
and store the chocks.
the trip.
repairs would not be covered by
Check periodically to see that all the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer
hitch nuts and bolts are tight. only if all the steps in this section
have been followed. Ask your
Trailer Towing dealer for advice and information
If the vehicle has a hybrid engine, about towing a trailer with the
see the Hybrid supplement for more vehicle.
information.
Do not tow a trailer during break‐in.
See New Vehicle Break-In on
Notice: Pulling a trailer Trailering is different than just Weight of the Trailer
improperly can damage the driving the vehicle by itself.
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
vehicle and result in costly Trailering means changes in
repairs not covered by the vehicle handling, acceleration, braking, It depends on how the rig is used.
warranty. To pull a trailer durability and fuel economy. Speed, altitude, road grades,
correctly, follow the advice in this Successful, safe trailering takes outside temperature, and how much
section and see your dealer for correct equipment, and it has to be the vehicle is used to pull a trailer
important information about used properly. are all important. It can depend on
towing a trailer with the vehicle. any special equipment on the
The following information has many
vehicle, and the amount of tongue
To identify the trailering capacity of time-tested, important trailering tips
weight the vehicle can carry. See
the vehicle, read the information in and safety rules. Many of these are
“Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later
“Weight of the Trailer” that appears important for your safety and that of
in this section for more information.
later in this section. your passengers. So please read
this section carefully before pulling a Trailer weight rating (TWR) is
trailer. calculated assuming the tow vehicle
has only the driver but all required
trailering equipment. Weight of
additional optional equipment,
passengers, and cargo in the tow
vehicle must be subtracted from the
trailer weight rating.
Use the following chart to determine
how much the vehicle can weigh,
based upon the vehicle model and
options.
Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*

1500 Series 2WD Short Wheel Base
5.3L V8 3.08 2 495 kg (5,500 lbs) 4 990 kg (11,000 lbs)
5.3L V8 3.42 2 722 kg (6,000 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)
5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 3.42 3 856 kg (8,500 lbs) 6 350 kg (14,000 lbs)
1500 Series 2WD Long Wheel Base
5.3L V8 3.08 2 313 kg (5,100 lbs) 4 990 kg (11,000 lbs)
5.3L V8 3.42 2 540 kg (5,600 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)
1500 Series 4WD Short Wheel Base
5.3L V8 3.08 2 359 kg (5,200 lbs) 4 990 kg (11,000 lbs)
5.3L V8 3.42 2 586 kg (5,700 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)
5.3L V8 3.08 2 268 kg (5,000 lbs) 4 990 kg (11,000 lbs)
5.3L V8 3.42 2 495 kg (5,500 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)
Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*

6.0L V8 3.73 4 355 kg (9,600 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
6.0L V8 3.73 4 264 kg (9,400 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be
exceeded.
Ask your dealer for trailering Weight of the Trailer Tongue passengers and cargo in the vehicle
information or advice, or write us at reduce the amount of tongue weight
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is
our Customer Assistance Offices, the vehicle can carry, which will also
very important because it is also
See Customer Assistance Offices reduce the trailer weight the vehicle
part of the vehicle weight. The
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5 or can tow. See Vehicle Load Limits on
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
Customer Assistance Offices page 9‑16 for more information
includes the curb weight of the
(Mexico) on page 13‑6. about the vehicle's maximum load
vehicle, any cargo carried in it, and
capacity.
the people who will be riding in the
vehicle as well as trailer tongue
weight. Vehicle options, equipment,
Maximum Tongue
Vehicle Series Hitch Type Weight
1500 Weight Carrying 272 kg (600 lbs)
2500 Weight Carrying 453 kg (1,000 lbs)
1500 Weight Distributing 499 kg (1,100 lbs)
2500 Weight Distributing 680 kg (1,500 lbs)
Do not exceed the maximum the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle

allowable tongue weight for the Weight Rating). See “Total Weight
Trailer tongue weight (A) should be vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch on the Vehicle's Tires” later in this
10 percent to 15 percent of the extension that will position the hitch section for more information.
loaded trailer weight (B) up to the ball closest to the vehicle. This will After loading the trailer, weigh
maximums for vehicle series and help reduce the effect of trailer the trailer and then the tongue,
hitch type. tongue weight on the rear axle. separately, to see if the weights are
Trailering may be limited by the proper. If they are not, adjustments
vehicle's ability to carry tongue might be made by moving some
weight. Tongue weight cannot cause items around in the trailer.
the vehicle to exceed the GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or
Total Weight on the Vehicle's Weight of the Trailering Towing Equipment

Tires Combination
Hitches
Be sure the vehicle's tires are It is important that the combination
inflated to the inflation pressures of the tow vehicle and trailer does The correct hitch equipment helps
found on the Certification label on not exceed any of its weight maintain combination control. Most
the drivers door or see Vehicle Load ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, small-to-medium trailers can be
Limits on page 9‑16 for more Trailer Weight Rating or Tongue towed with a weight carrying hitch
information. Make sure not to Weight. The only way to be sure it is which simply features a coupler
exceed the GVWR limit for the not exceeding any of these ratings latched to the hitch ball. Larger
vehicle, or the RGAWR, with the tow is to weigh the tow vehicle and trailers may require a weight
vehicle and trailer fully loaded for trailer combination, fully loaded for distributing hitch that uses spring
the trip including the weight of the the trip, getting individual weights bars to distribute the trailer tongue
trailer tongue. If using a weight for each of these items. weight among the two vehicle and
distributing hitch, make sure not to trailer axles. See “Weight of the
exceed the RGAWR before applying Trailer Tongue” in Trailer Towing on
the weight distribution spring bars. page 9‑74 for rating limits with
various hitch types.
Consider using sway controls
with any trailer. Ask a trailering
professional about sway controls or
refer to the trailer manufacturer's
recommendations and instructions.
Weight‐Distributing Hitch Safety Chains Trailer Brakes

Adjustment Always attach chains between the A loaded trailer that weighs more
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the than 900 kg (2,000 lbs) needs to
safety chains under the tongue of have its own brake system that is
the trailer to help prevent the tongue adequate for the weight of the
from contacting the road if it trailer. Be sure to read and follow
becomes separated from the hitch. the instructions for the trailer brakes
Instructions about safety chains so they are installed, adjusted and
may be provided by the hitch maintained properly.
manufacturer or by the trailer Since the vehicle is equipped with
manufacturer. If the trailer being StabiliTrak®, the trailer brakes
towed weighs up to 2 271 kg cannot tap into the vehicle's
(5,000 lbs) with a factory-installed hydraulic system.
step bumper, safety chains may be
attached to the attaching points on Trailer Wiring Harness
A. Body to Ground Distance the bumper, otherwise, safety
The vehicle is equipped with the
B. Front of Vehicle chains should be attached to holes
following wiring harnesses for
on the trailer hitch platform. Always
When using a weight-distributing towing a trailer.
leave just enough slack so the
hitch, the spring bars should be combination can turn. Never allow
adjusted so the distance (A) is the safety chains to drag on the ground.
same after coupling the trailer to the
tow vehicle and adjusting the hitch.
Basic Trailer Wiring *The fuses for these two circuits are The seven-wire harness contains
The trailer wiring harness, with a installed in the underhood electrical the following trailer circuits:
seven-pin connector, is located at center, but the wires are not . Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
the rear of the vehicle and is tied to connected. They should be
connected by your dealer or a . Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn
the vehicle's frame. The harness Signal
connector can be plugged into a qualified service center.
seven-pin universal heavy-duty Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Harness
. Brown: Taillamps
trailer connector available through Package . White: Ground
your dealer.
. Light Green: Back-up Lamps
The seven-wire harness contains
the following trailer circuits:
. Red: Battery Feed*
. Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*
. Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn *The fuses for these two circuits are
Signal installed in the underhood electrical
center, but the wires are not
. Brown: Taillamps connected. They should be
. White: Ground connected by your dealer or a
qualified service center.
. Light Green: Back-up Lamps
. Red: Battery Feed*
. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake* The vehicle is equipped with the
seven-wire trailer towing harness.
This harness with a seven-pin
universal trailer connector is
attached to a bracket on the hitch
platform.
If charging a remote (non-vehicle) It should be installed by your dealer

battery, press the tow/haul mode or a qualified service center.
button located at the end of the shift If the vehicle is equipped with an
lever. This will boost the vehicle ITBC, the blunt cuts exist, but are
system voltage and properly charge not connected further in the
the battery. If the trailer is too light harness. If an aftermarket trailer
for tow/haul mode, turn on the brake controller is installed, the This indicator light on the instrument
headlamps as a second way to ITBC must be disconnected. Do not panel cluster comes on when the
boost the vehicle system and power both ITBC and aftermarket tow/haul mode is on.
charge the battery. controllers to control the trailer Tow/Haul is a feature that assists
Electric Brake Control Wiring brakes at the same time. when pulling a heavy trailer or a
Provisions Tow/Haul Mode large or heavy load. See Tow/Haul
These wiring provisions are Mode on page 9‑36 for more
included with the vehicle as part of information.
the trailer wiring package. These Tow/Haul is designed to be most
provisions are for an electric brake effective when the vehicle and
controller. The instrument panel trailer combined weight is at least
contains blunt cut wires near the 75 percent of the vehicle's Gross
data link connector for the trailer Combined Weight Rating (GCWR).
brake controller. The harness See “Weight of the Trailer” earlier in
contains the following wires: Pressing this button at the end of the section. Tow/Haul is most useful
the shift lever turns on and off the under the following driving
. Dark Blue: Brake Signal to tow/haul mode.
Trailer Connector conditions:
. Red/Black: Battery
. When pulling a heavy trailer or a
large or heavy load through
. Light Blue/White: Brake Switch rolling terrain.
. White: Ground

. When pulling a heavy trailer or a Integrated Trailer Brake The ITBC system is integrated with
large or heavy load in stop and Control System the vehicle’s brake, anti‐lock brake
go traffic. and StabiliTrak systems. In trailering
. When pulling a heavy trailer or a conditions that cause the vehicle’s
large or heavy load in busy anti‐lock brake or StabiliTrak
parking lots where improved low systems to activate, power sent
speed control of the vehicle is to the trailer's brakes will be
desired. automatically adjusted to minimize
trailer wheel lock-up. This does not
Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul imply that the trailer has the
when lightly loaded or with no trailer The vehicle may have an Integrated StabiliTrak system.
at all will not cause damage. Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system
However, there is no benefit to the for electric trailer brakes. Non-hybrid vehicles with StabiliTrak
selection of Tow/Haul when the have a Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
This symbol is located on the Trailer feature. See Trailer Sway Control
vehicle is unloaded. Such a Brake Control Panel on vehicles
selection when unloaded may (TSC) on page 9‑90.
with an Integrated Trailer Brake
result in unpleasant engine and Control System. The power output Non-hybrid vehicles with StabiliTrak
transmission driving characteristics to the trailer brakes is based on the have a Hill Start Assist (HSA)
and reduced fuel economy. Tow/ amount of brake pressure being feature. See Hill Start Assist (HSA)
Haul is recommended only when applied by the vehicle’s brake on page 9‑47.
pulling a heavy trailer or a large or system. This available power output
heavy load. to the trailer brakes can be adjusted
to a wide range of trailering
situations.
If the vehicle’s brake, anti‐lock When trailering, make sure of the

brake or StabiliTrak systems are not { WARNING following:
functioning properly, the ITBC . The ITBC system is used only
system may not be fully functional Connecting a trailer that is not
compatible with the ITBC system with trailers that are equipped
or may not function at all. Make sure with electric brakes.
all of these systems are fully may result in reduced or complete
operational to ensure full loss of trailer braking. There may . All applicable local and federal
functionality of the ITBC system. be an increase in stopping laws and regulations are
distance or trailer instability which followed.
The ITBC system is powered
could result in personal injury or . All electrical and mechanical
through the vehicle's electrical
damage to the vehicle, trailer, connections to the trailer are
system. Turning the ignition off will
also turn off the ITBC system. The or other property. An aftermarket made correctly.
ITBC system is fully functional only controller may be available for
use with trailers with surge, air,
. The trailer’s brakes are in proper
when the ignition is in ON or working condition.
in RUN. or electric‐over‐hydraulic trailer
brake systems. To determine the . The trailer and vehicle are
The ITBC system can only be used type of brakes on the trailer and properly loaded for the towing
with trailers with electric brakes. the availability of controllers, condition.
check with your trailer The ITBC system is a factory
manufacturer or dealer. installed item. Out‐of‐factory
installation of this system should not
be attempted. GM is not responsible
for warranty or performance of the
system resulting from out‐of‐factory
installation.
Trailer Brake Control Panel The ITBC system has a control The Trailer Brake Display Page can
panel located on the instrument be displayed by performing any of
panel to the left of the steering the following actions:
column. The control panel allows . Scrolling through the DIC menu
adjustment to the amount of output, pages using the odometer trip
referred to as trailer gain, available stem or the DIC Vehicle
to the electric trailer brakes and Information button (if equipped).
allows manual application the trailer
brakes. The Trailer Brake Control . Pressing a Trailer Gain
Panel is used along with the Trailer button – If the Trailer Brake
Brake Display Page on the DIC to Display Page is not currently
adjust and display power output to displayed, pressing a Trailer
the trailer brakes. Gain button will first recall the
current Trailer Gain setting. After
Trailer Brake DIC Display Page the Trailer Brake Display Page is
A. Manual Trailer Brake Apply
The ITBC system displays displayed, each press and
Lever
messages into the vehicle’s Driver release of the gain buttons will
B. Trailer Gain Adjustment Buttons Information Center (DIC). See then cause the Trailer Gain
Driver Information Center (DIC) on setting to change.
page 5‑28 for more information. . Activating the Manual Trailer
The display page indicates Trailer Brake Apply lever
Gain setting, power output to the . Connecting a trailer equipped
electric trailer brakes, trailer with electric trailer brakes
connection and system operational
status.
All DIC warning and service 0.0 (zero) gain is the factory default The Trailer Output will indicate
messages must first be setting. To properly adjust trailer “- - - - - -“on the Trailer Brake
acknowledged by the driver by gain, see the Trailer Gain Display Page whenever the
pressing the odometer trip stem or Adjustment Procedure later following occur:
the DIC Vehicle Information button in this section. . No trailer is connected.
(if equipped) before the Trailer TRAILER OUTPUT – This is
Brake Display Page can be . A trailer without electric brakes
displayed any time a trailer with is connected (no DIC message
displayed and Trailer Gain can be electric brakes is connected. Output
adjusted. is displayed).
to the electric brakes is based on
TRAILER GAIN – This setting is the amount of vehicle braking . A trailer with electric brakes
displayed anytime the Trailer Brake present and relative to the Trailer has become disconnected
Display Page is active. This setting Gain setting. Output is displayed (a CHECK TRAILER WIRING
can be adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 from 0 to 10 bars for each gain message will also be displayed
with either a trailer connected or setting. on the DIC).
disconnected. To adjust the Trailer Non-hybrid vehicles with Trailer . There is a fault present in the
Gain, press one of the Trailer Gain Sway Control (TSC) or Hill Start wiring to the electric trailer
adjustment buttons located on the Assist (HSA), output to the electric brakes (a CHECK TRAILER
Trailer Brake Control Panel. Press trailer brakes may be displayed WIRING message will also be
and hold a gain button to cause the when the systems are active. See displayed on the DIC).
Trailer Gain to continuously adjust. Trailer Sway Control (TSC) on
To turn the output to the trailer off,
. There is a fault in the ITBC
page 9‑90 and Hill Start Assist system (a SERVICE TRAILER
adjust the Trailer Gain setting to (HSA) on page 9‑47.
0.0 (zero). BRAKE SYSTEM message will
also be displayed in the DIC).
Manual Trailer Brake Apply Trailer Gain Adjustment Procedure Use the following procedure to
The Manual Trailer Brake Apply Trailer Gain should be set for a correctly adjust Trailer Gain for each
Lever is located on the Trailer Brake specific trailering condition and towing condition:
Control Panel and is used to must be adjusted any time vehicle 1. Make sure the trailer brakes are
apply the trailer’s electric brakes loading, trailer loading or road in proper working condition.
independent of the vehicle’s brakes. surface conditions change. 2. Connect a properly loaded trailer
This lever is used in the Trailer Gain Setting the Trailer Gain properly is to the vehicle and make all
Adjustment Procedure to properly needed for the best trailer stopping necessary mechanical and
adjust the power output to the trailer performance. A trailer that is electrical connections. See
brakes. Sliding the lever to the left over-gained may result in locked Vehicle Load Limits on
will apply only the trailer brakes. trailer brakes. A trailer that is page 9‑16 for more information.
The power output to the trailer is under-gained may result in not
indicated in the Trailer Brake 3. After the electrical connection is
enough trailer braking. Both of these made to a trailer equipped with
Display Page in the DIC. If the conditions may result in poorer
vehicle’s service brakes are applied electric brakes:
stopping and stability of the vehicle
while using the Manual Trailer Brake and trailer. . A TRAILER CONNECTED
Apply Lever, the trailer output power message will be briefly
will be the greater of the two. displayed on the DIC
The trailer and the vehicle's brake display.
lamps will come on when either . The Trailer Brake Display
vehicle braking or manual trailer Page will appear on the
brakes are applied. DIC showing TRAILER
GAIN and TRAILER
OUTPUT.

. In the Trailer Output display 6. Adjust the Trailer Gain to just message will automatically turn off
on the DIC, “- - - - - -“will below the point of trailer wheel in about ten seconds. The driver
disappear if there is no lock-up, indicated by trailer can also acknowledge this message
error present. Connecting a wheel squeal or tire smoke when before it automatically turns off.
trailer without electric a trailer wheel locks.
brakes will not clear the six CHECK TRAILER WIRING – This
dashed lines. Trailer wheel lock-up may not message will be displayed if:
occur if towing a heavily loaded 1. The ITBC system first
4. Adjust the Trailer Gain by using trailer. In this case, adjust the
the gain adjustment (+ / -) determines connection to a
Trailer Gain to the highest trailer with electric brakes and
buttons on the Trailer Brake allowable setting for the towing
Control Panel. then the trailer harness becomes
condition. disconnected from the vehicle.
5. Drive the vehicle with the trailer 7. Re-adjust Trailer Gain any time
attached on a level road surface If the disconnect occurs while
vehicle loading, trailer loading or the vehicle is stationary, this
representative of the towing road surface conditions change
condition and free of traffic at message will automatically turn
or if trailer wheel lock-up is off in about thirty seconds. This
about 32 to 40 km/h (20 to noticed at any time while towing
25 mph) and fully apply the message will also turn off if the
Manual Trailer Brake Apply Other ITBC Related DIC Messages driver acknowledges this
lever. message off or if the trailer
In addition to displaying TRAILER harness is re-connected.
Adjusting trailer gain at speeds GAIN and TRAILER OUTPUT
lower than 32 to 40 km/h (20 to through the DIC, trailer connection If the disconnect occurs while
25 mph) may result in an and ITBC system status is displayed the vehicle is moving, this
incorrect gain setting. in the DIC. message will continue until the
ignition is turned off. This
TRAILER CONNECTED – This message will also turn off if the
message will be briefly displayed driver acknowledges this
when a trailer with electric brakes is message off or if the trailer
first connected to the vehicle. This harness is re-connected.
2. There is an electrical fault in the 4. If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING If either the CHECK TRAILER
wiring to the electric trailer message re-appears, the WIRING or SERVICE TRAILER
brakes. This message will electrical fault is on the BRAKE SYSTEM message is
continue as long as there is an vehicle side. displayed while driving the vehicle,
electrical fault in the trailer If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING power is no longer available to the
wiring. This message will message only re-appears when trailer brakes. When traffic
also turn off if the driver connecting the trailer wiring conditions allow, carefully pull the
acknowledges this message off. harness to the vehicle, the vehicle over to the side of the road
To determine if the electrical fault is electrical fault is on the and turn the ignition off. Check the
on the vehicle side or trailer side of trailer side. wiring connection to the trailer and
the trailer wiring harness turn the ignition back on. If either of
SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE these messages continues, either
connection, do the following: SYSTEM – This message will be the vehicle or trailer needs service.
1. Disconnect the trailer wiring displayed when there is a problem
harness from the vehicle. with the ITBC system. If this An authorized GM dealer may be
message persists over multiple able to diagnose and repair
2. Turn the ignition OFF. problems with the trailer. However,
ignition cycles there is problem with
3. Wait ten seconds, then turn the the ITBC system. Take the vehicle any diagnosis and repair of the
ignition back to RUN. to an authorized GM dealer to have trailer is not covered under the
the ITBC system diagnosed and vehicle warranty. Please contact
repaired. your trailer dealer for assistance
with trailer repairs and trailer
warranty information.
Trailer Sway Conversions and Adding a Snow Plow or

Control (TSC) Add-Ons Similar Equipment
Non-hybrid vehicles with StabiliTrak Before installing a snow plow on the
have a Trailer Sway Control (TSC) Add-On Electrical vehicle, here are some things you
feature. If the vehicle is towing a need to know:
trailer and the system detects that
Equipment
Notice: If the vehicle does not
the trailer is swaying, the vehicle Notice: Do not add anything
have the snow plow prep
brakes are applied without the driver electrical to the vehicle unless
package, adding a plow can
pressing the brake pedal. If the you check with your dealer first.
damage the vehicle, and the
vehicle is equipped with the Some electrical equipment can
repairs would not be covered by
Integrated Trailer Brake Control damage the vehicle and the
warranty. Unless the vehicle was
(ITBC) system, StabiliTrak may also damage would not be covered by
built to carry a snow plow, do not
apply the trailer brakes. The TCS/ the vehicle's warranty. Some
add one to the vehicle. If the
StabiliTrak warning light will flash on add-on electrical equipment can
vehicle has the snow plow prep
the instrument panel cluster to notify keep other components from
package, called RPO VYU, then
the driver to reduce speed. If the working as they should.
the payload the vehicle can carry
trailer continues to sway, StabiliTrak Add-on equipment can drain the will be reduced when a snow
will reduce engine torque to help vehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if the plow is installed. The vehicle can
slow the vehicle. See StabiliTrak® vehicle is not operating. be damaged if either the front or
System on page 9‑47 for more rear axle ratings or the Gross
information. The vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to add anything Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Adding non‐dealer accessories can electrical to the vehicle, see are exceeded.
affect the vehicle performance. See Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Accessories and Modifications on Vehicle on page 3‑44 and Adding
page 10‑3 for more information. Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑44.
Some vehicles are built with a Say, for example, you have a 318 kg
. Follow the snow plow
special snow plow prep package, (700 lb) snow plow. The total weight manufacturer's
called RPO VYU. If the vehicle has of all occupants and cargo inside recommendations regarding
this option, you can add a plow to it, the cab should not exceed 135 kg rear ballast. Rear ballast may be
provided certain weights, such as (300 lb). This means that you may required to ensure a proper front
the weights on the vehicle's axles only be able to carry one passenger. and rear weight distribution ratio,
and the Gross Vehicle Weight But, even this may be too much if even though the actual weight at
Rating (GVWR), are not exceeded. there is other equipment already the front axle may be less than
adding to the weight of the vehicle. the front axle rating.
The plow the vehicle can carry
depends on many things, such as: Here are some guidelines for safely
. The snow plow manufacturer
carrying a snow plow on the vehicle: or installer can assist in
. The options the vehicle came determining the amount of rear
with, and the weight of those . Make sure the weight on the ballast required, to help make
options. front and rear axles does not sure the snowplow/vehicle
. The weight and number of exceed the axle rating for each. combination does not exceed
passengers intended to be . For the front axle, if more cargo the GVW rating, the front and
carried. or passengers must be carried, rear axle ratings, and the front
appropriate counter ballast must and rear weight distribution ratio.
. The weight of items added to the
vehicle. be installed rear of the rear axle. . The total vehicle must not
Counter ballast must be properly exceed the GVW rating.
. The total weight of any secured so it will not move
additional cargo intended to be during driving.
carried.
Front axle reserve capacity is the In order to calculate the amount of

difference between the front Gross weight any front accessory, such as
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) and the a snow plow, is adding to the front
front axle weight of the vehicle with axle, use the following formula:
full fuel and passengers. Basically, it
is the amount of weight that can be
added to the front axle before
reaching the front GAWR.
The front axle reserve capacity for
the vehicle can be found in the
lower right corner of the
Certification/Tire label, as shown.
United States
(W x (A + W.B.)) /W.B.= Weight the

accessory is adding to the
front axle.
Where:
W = Weight of added accessory
A = Distance that the accessory
is in front of the front axle
W.B. = Vehicle Wheelbase
Canada
For example, adding a 318 kg GAWR, rear GAWR, and the Gross
(700 lb) snow plow actually adds Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) WARNING (Continued)
more than 318 kg (700 lb) to the must never be exceeded.
front axle. Using the formula, if the weight is less than the gross
vehicle weight rating (GVWR).
snow plow is 122 cm (4 ft) in front of
the front axle and the wheel base is
{ WARNING Maintaining a proper front and
305 cm (10 ft), then: On some vehicles that have rear weight distribution ratio is
W = 318 kg (700 lb) certain front mounted equipment, necessary to provide proper
A = 122 cm (4 ft) such as a snow plow, it may be braking performance.
W.B. = 305 cm (10 ft) possible to load the front axle to
(W x (A + W.B.))/W.B. = the front gross axle weight rating Total vehicle reserve capacity is the
(318 x (122 + 305))/305 = (GAWR) but not have enough difference between the GVWR and
445 kg (980 lb) weight on the rear axle to have the weight of the vehicle with full
proper braking performance. If the fuel and passengers. It is the
So, if the vehicle's front axle reserve
brakes cannot work properly, you amount of weight that can be added
capacity is more than 980 lbs
could have a crash. To help the to the vehicle before reaching
(445 kg), the snow plow could be
brakes work properly when a theGVWR. Keep in mind that
added without exceeding the
snow plow is installed, always reserve capacity numbers are
front GAWR.
follow the snow plow intended as a guide when selecting
Heavier equipment can be added on the amount of equipment or cargo
manufacturer or installer's
the front of the vehicle if it is the vehicle can carry. If you are
recommendation for rear ballast
compensated for by carrying fewer unsure of the vehicle's front, rear,
passengers, less cargo, or by to ensure a proper front and rear
or total weight, go to a weigh station
positioning cargo toward the rear. weight distribution ratio, even
and weigh the vehicle. Your dealer
This has the effect of reducing the though the actual front weight can also help you with this.
load on the front. However, the front may be less than the front
GAWR, and the total vehicle
(Continued)
The total vehicle reserve capacity Emergency Roof Lamp

for the vehicle can be found Provisions
in the lower right corner of the
Certification/Tire label as shown Vehicles with the RPO VYU snow
previously. plow prep package also have an
emergency roof lamp provision
See your dealer for additional package, RPO TRW. Wiring for the
advice and information about using emergency roof lamp is provided
a snow plow on the vehicle. Also, above the overhead console. See
see Vehicle Load Limits on Auxiliary Roof-Mounted Lamp on
page 9‑16. page 6‑7 for switch location.
Vehicle Care 10-1
Engine Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Vehicle Care Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-24
Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Stoplamps, and Back-Up
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-39
General Information Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-39
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
California Proposition Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Electrical System
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Electrical System
California Perchlorate Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-32 Fuses and Circuit
Accessories and Automatic Transmission Shift Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Lock Control Function Engine Compartment Fuse
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Vehicle Checks Instrument Panel Fuse
Doing Your Own Ignition Transmission Lock
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Park Brake and P (Park) Wheels and Tires
Engine Compartment Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-33 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Wiper Blade Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-50
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34 Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10 Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-35 Tire Terminology and
Automatic Transmission Headlamp Aiming Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-14 Tire Pressure Monitor
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Bulb Replacement System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Tire Pressure Monitor
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-21 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Overheated Engine Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Protection Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
10-2 Vehicle Care
When It Is Time for New General Information Genuine GM parts have one of
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65 these marks:
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 For service and parts needs, visit
Different Size Tires and your dealer. You will receive
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68 genuine GM parts and GM-trained
Uniform Tire Quality and supported service people.
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-71
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Secondary Latch System . . . 10-85
Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-88
Jump Starting
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
Towing
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-93
Recreational Vehicle
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93
Appearance Care
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-102
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-105
Vehicle Care 10-3
California Proposition California Perchlorate Accessories and

65 Warning Materials Requirements Modifications
Most motor vehicles, including this Certain types of automotive Adding non‐dealer accessories or
one, contain and/or emit chemicals applications, such as airbag making modifications to the vehicle
known to the State of California to initiators, safety belt pretensioners, can affect vehicle performance and
cause cancer and birth defects or and lithium batteries contained in safety, including such things as
other reproductive harm. Engine Remote Keyless Entry transmitters, airbags, braking, stability, ride and
exhaust, many parts and systems, may contain perchlorate materials. handling, emissions systems,
many fluids, and some component Special handling may be necessary. aerodynamics, durability, and
wear by-products contain and/or For additional information, see electronic systems like antilock
emit these chemicals. www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ brakes, traction control, and stability
perchlorate. control. These accessories or
modifications could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty.
10-4 Vehicle Care
Damage to vehicle components Vehicle Checks If doing some of your own service
resulting from modifications or the work, use the proper service
installation or use of non‐GM manual. It tells you much more
certified parts, including control Doing Your Own about how to service the vehicle
module or software modifications, is Service Work than this manual can. To order the
not covered under the terms of the proper service manual, see Service
vehicle warranty and may affect Publications Ordering Information
remaining warranty coverage for on page 13‑18.
information.
affected parts. This vehicle has an airbag system.
GM Accessories are designed to
complement and function with other
{ WARNING Before attempting to do your own
service work, see Airbag System
systems on the vehicle. See your It can be dangerous to work on Check on page 3‑46.
dealer to accessorize the vehicle your vehicle if you do not have Keep a record with all parts receipts
using genuine GM Accessories the proper knowledge, service and list the mileage and the date of
installed by a dealer technician. manual, tools, or parts. Always any service work performed. See
Also, see Adding Equipment to the follow owner manual procedures Maintenance Records on
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on and consult the service manual page 11‑15.
page 3‑44. for your vehicle before doing any
service work.
Vehicle Care 10-5
Hood 3. Push the secondary hood

release to the right.
To open the hood:
4. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure
all the filler caps are on properly.
Then bring the hood from full
open to within 152 mm (6 in)
from the closed position, pause,
then push the front center of the
1. Pull the handle with this symbol hood with a swift, firm motion to
on it. It is located inside the fully close the hood.
vehicle to the lower left of the
steering wheel. 2. Then go to the front of the
vehicle and locate the secondary
hood release, near the center of
the grille.
10-6 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview
5.3L V8 Engine Shown, 6.0L V8 Engine Similar

Vehicle Care 10-7
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on I. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of Engine Oil

page 10‑14. View). See Cooling System on
page 10‑16. To ensure proper engine
B. Coolant Surge Tank and performance and long life, careful
Pressure Cap. See Cooling J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. attention must be paid to engine oil.
System on page 10‑16. See Power Steering Fluid on Following these simple, but
C. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. page 10‑24. important steps will help protect
See Jump Starting on K. Brake Master Cylinder your investment:
page 10‑89. Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” . Always use engine oil approved
D. Battery on page 10‑28. under Brake Fluid on to the proper specification and of
page 10‑27. the proper viscosity grade. See
E. Remote Negative (−) Terminal
L. Engine Compartment Fuse “Selecting the Right Engine Oil”
(Out of View). See Jump in this section.
Starting on page 10‑89. Block on page 10‑41.
M. Windshield Washer Fluid . Check the engine oil level
F. Automatic Transmission
Reservoir. See “Adding Washer regularly and maintain the
Dipstick (Out of View). See proper oil level. See “Checking
“Checking the Fluid Level” Fluid” under Washer Fluid on
page 10‑25. Engine Oil” and “When to Add
under Automatic Transmission Engine Oil” in this section.
Fluid on page 10‑11. If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
hybrid supplement for more . Change the engine oil at the
G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When appropriate time. See Engine Oil
to Add Engine Oil” under information.
Life System on page 10‑10.
Engine Oil on page 10‑7.
. Always dispose of engine oil
H. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of
properly. See “What to Do with
View). See “Checking Engine Used Oil” in this section.
Oil” under Engine Oil on
page 10‑7.
10-8 Vehicle Care
Checking Engine Oil When to Add Engine Oil Notice: Do not add too much oil.
Oil levels above or below the
It is a good idea to check the engine
acceptable operating range
oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
shown on the dipstick are harmful
get an accurate reading, the vehicle
to the engine. If you find that you
must be on level ground. The
have an oil level above the
engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow
operating range, i.e., the engine
loop. See Engine Compartment
has so much oil that the oil level
Overview on page 10‑6 for the
gets above the cross-hatched
location of the engine oil dipstick. If the oil is below the cross-hatched area that shows the proper
Obtaining an accurate oil level area at the tip of the dipstick, add operating range, the engine could
reading is essential: 1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil be damaged. You should drain
and then recheck the level. See out the excess oil or limit driving
1. If the engine has been running “Selecting the Right Engine Oil” in
recently, turn off the engine and of the vehicle and seek a service
this section for an explanation of professional to remove the
allow several minutes for the oil what kind of oil to use. For engine
to drain back into the oil pan. excess amount of oil.
oil crankcase capacity, see
Checking the oil level too soon Capacities and Specifications on See Engine Compartment Overview
after engine shutoff will not page 12‑2. on page 10‑6 for the location of the
provide an accurate oil level engine oil fill cap.
reading.
Add enough oil to put the level
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it somewhere in the proper operating
with a paper towel or cloth, then range. Push the dipstick all the way
push it back in all the way. back in when through.
Remove it again, keeping the tip
down, and check the level.
Vehicle Care 10-9
Selecting the Right Engine Oil If in an area of extreme cold, where

the temperature falls below −20°F
Selecting the right engine oil
(−29°C), an SAE 0W‐30 oil should
depends on both the proper oil
be used. An oil of this viscosity
specification and viscosity grade.
grade will provide easier cold
See Recommended Fluids and
starting for the engine at extremely
Lubricants on page 11‑12.
Notice: Failure to use the low temperatures. When selecting
Specification recommended engine oil or an oil of the appropriate viscosity
equivalent can result in engine grade, always select an oil that
Use and ask for licensed engine oils
damage not covered by the meets the dexos1 specification or
with the dexos1™ approved
vehicle warranty. Check with your equivalent. See “Specification” for
certification mark. Engine oils
dealer or service provider on more information.
meeting the requirements for the
vehicle should have the dexos1 whether the oil is approved to the Engine Oil Additives/Engine
approved certification mark. This dexos1 specification. Oil Flushes
certification mark indicates that the Viscosity Grade
oil has been approved to the dexos1 Do not add anything to the oil. The
specification. SAE 5W‐30 is the best viscosity recommended oils with the dexos
grade for the vehicle. Do not use specification and displaying the
other viscosity grade oils such as dexos certification mark are all that
SAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W‐50. is needed for good performance and
engine protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not
recommended and could cause
engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
10-10 Vehicle Care
What to Do with Used Oil Engine Oil Life System best conditions, the oil life system
might indicate that an oil change is
Used engine oil contains certain When to Change Engine Oil not necessary for up to a year. The
elements that can be unhealthy for
This vehicle has a computer system engine oil and filter must be
your skin and could even cause
that indicates when to change the changed at least once a year and,
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
engine oil and filter. This is based at this time, the system must be
your skin for very long. Clean your
on a combination of factors which reset. For vehicles without the
skin and nails with soap and water,
include engine revolutions, engine CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or
temperature, and miles driven. message, an oil change is
properly dispose of clothing or rags
Based on driving conditions, the needed when the OIL LIFE
containing used engine oil. See the
mileage at which an oil change is REMAINING percentage is near
manufacturer's warnings about the
indicated can vary considerably. For 0%. Your dealer has trained service
use and disposal of oil products.
the oil life system to work properly, people who will perform this work
Used oil can be a threat to the and reset the system. It is also
the system must be reset every time
environment. If you change your the oil is changed. important to check the oil regularly
own oil, be sure to drain all the oil over the course of an oil drain
from the filter before disposal. Never On some vehicles, when the system interval and keep it at the proper
dispose of oil by putting it in the has calculated that oil life has been level.
trash or pouring it on the ground, diminished, a CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON message comes on to If the system is ever reset
into sewers, or into streams or
indicate that an oil change is accidentally, the oil must be
bodies of water. Recycle it by taking
necessary. See Engine Oil changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)
it to a place that collects used oil.
Messages on page 5‑40. Change since the last oil change.
the oil as soon as possible within Remember to reset the oil life
the next 1 000 km (600 mi). It is system whenever the oil is changed.
possible that, if driving under the
Vehicle Care 10-11
How to Reset the Engine Oil On all vehicles, the Engine Oil Life Automatic Transmission
Life System System can be reset as follows:
Fluid
Reset the system whenever the 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
engine oil is changed so that the the engine off. When to Check and Change
system can calculate the next 2. Fully press the accelerator pedal
Automatic Transmission Fluid
engine oil change. Always reset the slowly three times within It is usually not necessary to
engine oil life to 100% after every oil five seconds. check the transmission fluid level.
change. It will not reset itself. To The only reason for fluid loss is a
reset the system on most vehicles: 3. Display the OIL LIFE
transmission leak or overheated
REMAINING on the DIC. If the
1. Display the OIL LIFE transmission. If a small leak is
display shows 100%, the system
REMAINING on the DIC. If the suspected, then use the following
is reset. See Driver Information
vehicle does not have DIC checking procedures to check the
Center (DIC) on page 5‑28.
buttons, the vehicle must be in fluid level. However, if there is a
P (Park) to access this display. If the vehicle has a CHANGE large leak, then it may be necessary
See Driver Information Center ENGINE OIL SOON message and it to have the vehicle towed to a
(DIC) on page 5‑28. comes back on when the vehicle is dealer and have it repaired before
started and/or the OIL LIFE driving the vehicle further.
2. Press and hold the SET/RESET REMAINING is near 0%, the engine
button on the DIC, or the trip Notice: Use of the incorrect
oil life system has not been reset.
odometer reset stem if the automatic transmission fluid may
Repeat the procedure.
vehicle does not have DIC damage the vehicle, and the
buttons, for more than damages may not be covered by
five seconds. The oil life will the vehicle warranty. Always use
change to 100%. the automatic transmission fluid
listed in Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 11‑12.
10-12 Vehicle Care
Change the fluid and filter at the Before checking the fluid level, 6. Using the TRANS TEMP
scheduled maintenance intervals prepare the vehicle as follows: reading, determine and perform
listed in Maintenance Schedule on 1. Start the engine and park the the appropriate check
page 11‑3. Be sure to use the vehicle on a level surface. Keep procedure. If the TRANS TEMP
transmission fluid listed in the engine running. reading is not within the required
Recommended Fluids and temperature ranges, allow the
Lubricants on page 11‑12. 2. Apply the parking brake and vehicle to cool, or operate the
place the shift lever in P (Park). vehicle until the appropriate
How to Check Automatic transmission fluid temperature is
3. With your foot on the brake
Transmission Fluid reached.
pedal, move the shift lever
Notice: Too much or too through each gear range, Cold Check Procedure
little fluid can damage the pausing for about three seconds
transmission. Too much can in each range. Then, move the Use this procedure only as a
mean that some of the fluid could shift lever back to P (Park). reference to determine if the
come out and fall on hot engine transmission has enough fluid to be
4. Allow the engine to idle operated safely until a hot check
parts or exhaust system parts,
(500 – 800 rpm) for at least procedure can be made. The hot
starting a fire. Too little fluid
1 minute. Slowly release the check procedure is the most
could cause the transmission to
brake pedal. accurate method to check the fluid
overheat. Be sure to get an
accurate reading if checking the 5. Keep the engine running and level. Perform the hot check
transmission fluid. press the Trip/Fuel button or trip procedure at the first opportunity.
odometer reset stem until Use this cold check procedure to
TRANS TEMP (Transmission check fluid level when the
Temperature) displays on the transmission temperature is
Driver Information Center (DIC). between 27°C and 32°C
(80°F and 90°F).
Vehicle Care 10-13
Hot Check Procedure

Use this procedure to check the
transmission fluid level when the
transmission fluid temperature is
between 71°C and 93°C
(160°F and 200°F).
1. Locate the transmission dipstick
at the rear of the engine 5. If the fluid level is below the The hot check is the most accurate
compartment, on the passenger COLD check band, add only method to check the fluid level. The
side of the vehicle. enough fluid as necessary to hot check should be performed at
bring the level into the COLD the first opportunity in order to verify
See Engine Compartment band. It does not take much the cold check. The fluid level rises
Overview on page 10‑6 for more fluid, generally less than 0.5 L as fluid temperature increases,
information. (1 pt). Do not overfill. so it is important to ensure the
2. Flip the handle up, then pull out 6. Perform a hot check at transmission temperature is within
the dipstick and wipe it with a the first opportunity after the range.
clean rag or paper towel. transmission reaches a normal
3. Install the dipstick by pushing it operating temperature between
back in all the way; wait 71°C to 93°C (160°F to 200°F).
three seconds, and then pull it 7. If the fluid level is in the
back out again. acceptable range, push the
4. Check both sides of the dipstick dipstick back in all the way, then
and read the lower level. Repeat flip the handle down to lock the
the check procedure to verify the dipstick in place.
reading.
10-14 Vehicle Care
Consistency of Readings
Always check the fluid level at least
twice using the procedure described
previously. Consistency (repeatable
readings) is important to maintaining
proper fluid level. If readings are still
1. Locate the transmission dipstick
5. Safe operating level is within the inconsistent, contact the dealer.
at the rear of the engine
compartment, on the passenger HOT cross hatch band on the
side of the vehicle. dipstick. If the fluid level is not Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
within the HOT band, and the
See Engine Compartment transmission temperature is See Engine Compartment Overview
Overview on page 10‑6 for more between 71°C and 93°C on page 10‑6 for the location of the
information. (160°F and 200°F), add or drain engine air cleaner/filter.
2. Flip the handle up, then pull out fluid as necessary to bring the Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
the dipstick and wipe it with a level into the HOT band. If the scheduled maintenance intervals
clean rag or paper towel. fluid level is low, add only and replace it at the first oil change
enough fluid to bring the level after each 80 000 km (50,000 mi)
3. Install the dipstick by pushing it into the HOT band. It does not interval. See Maintenance Schedule
back in all the way; wait take much fluid, generally less on page 11‑3 for more information.
three seconds, and then pull it than 0.5 L (1 pt). Do not overfill. If driving on dusty/dirty conditions,
back out again. inspect the filter at each engine oil
6. If the fluid level is in the
4. Check both sides of the dipstick acceptable range, push the change.
and read the lower level. Repeat dipstick back in all the way, then
the check procedure to verify the flip the handle down to lock the
reading. dipstick in place.
Vehicle Care 10-15
How to Inspect the Engine Air

Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
remove the engine air cleaner/filter
from the vehicle by following
Steps 1 through 6. When the engine
air cleaner/filter is removed, lightly
shake it to release loose dust and
dirt. If the engine air cleaner/filter
remains covered with dirt, a new 3. Remove the engine air cleaner/
filter is required. Never use filter from the housing. Care
compressed air to clean the filter. should be taken to dislodge as
2. Loosen the four screws on the little dirt as possible.
Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner/ cover of the housing and lift up 4. Clean the engine air cleaner/
Filter the cover. filter sealing surfaces and the
1. Locate the air cleaner/filter housing.
assembly. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 10‑6.
10-16 Vehicle Care
5. Inspect or replace the engine air

cleaner/filter. { WARNING
6. Reinstall the cover and tighten Heater and radiator hoses, and
the screws. other engine parts, can be very
hot. Do not touch them. If you do,
{ WARNING you can be burned.
Operating the engine with the air Do not run the engine if there is a
cleaner/filter off can cause you or leak. If you run the engine, it
5.3L V8 Engine Shown, could lose all coolant. That could
others to be burned. The air 6.0L V8 Engine Similar
cleaner not only cleans the air; it cause an engine fire, and you
helps to stop flames if the engine A. Coolant Surge Tank could be burned. Get any leak
backfires. Use caution when B. Coolant Surge Tank fixed before you drive the vehicle.
working on the engine and do not Pressure Cap
drive with the air cleaner/filter off. C. Engine Cooling Fan(s) Notice: Using coolant other than
(Out of View) DEX-COOL® can cause premature
engine, heater core, or radiator
Cooling System corrosion. In addition, the engine
{ WARNING coolant could require changing
hybrid supplement for more An electric engine cooling fan sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 mi)
information. or 24 months, whichever occurs
under the hood can start up even
first. Any repairs would not be
The cooling system allows the when the engine is not running
covered by the vehicle warranty.
engine to maintain the correct and can cause injury. Keep Always use DEX-COOL
working temperature. hands, clothing, and tools away (silicate-free) coolant in the
from any underhood electric fan. vehicle.
Vehicle Care 10-17
Engine Coolant What to Use Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,

drinkable water and DEX-COOL
The cooling system in the vehicle
is filled with DEX-COOL engine { WARNING coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added.
coolant. This coolant is designed to This mixture:
Adding only plain water or some
remain in the vehicle for 5 years or
other liquid to the cooling system . Gives freezing protection down
240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever
occurs first. can be dangerous. Plain water to −37°C (−34°F), outside
and other liquids, can boil before temperature.
The following explains the cooling the proper coolant mixture will.
system and how to check and add
. Gives boiling protection up to
The coolant warning system is set 129°C (265°F), engine
coolant when it is low. If there is a for the proper coolant mixture.
problem with engine overheating, temperature.
With plain water or the wrong
see Engine Overheating on mixture, the engine could get too
. Protects against rust and
page 10‑21. corrosion.
hot but you would not get the
overheat warning. The engine . Will not damage aluminum parts.
could catch fire and you or . Helps keep the proper engine
others could be burned. Use a temperature.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL coolant. Notice: If an improper coolant
mixture is used, the engine could
overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be
Too much water in the mixture
can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and other
parts.
10-18 Vehicle Care
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or Checking Coolant

additives are used in the vehicle
The vehicle must be on a level
cooling system, the vehicle could
surface when checking the coolant
be damaged. Use only the proper
level.
mixture of the engine coolant
listed in this manual for the Check to see if coolant is visible in
cooling system. See the coolant surge tank. If the coolant
Recommended Fluids and inside the coolant surge tank is
Lubricants on page 11‑12 for boiling, do not do anything else until
more information. it cools down. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not at or
Never dispose of engine coolant by
above the FULL COLD mark, add a
putting it in the trash, pouring it on
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
the ground, or into sewers, streams, The coolant surge tank is located in
water and DEX-COOL coolant at the
or bodies of water. Have the coolant the engine compartment on the
coolant surge tank, but be sure the
changed by an authorized service passenger side of the vehicle. See
cooling system is cool before this
center, familiar with legal Engine Compartment Overview on
is done.
requirements regarding used page 10‑6 for more information on
coolant disposal. This will help location.
protect the environment and your
health. The coolant level should be at or
above the FULL COLD mark. If it is
not, the vehicle may have a leak in
the cooling system.
Vehicle Care 10-19
How to Add Coolant to the If no coolant is visible in the surge

Surge Tank { WARNING tank, add coolant as follows:
An electric engine cooling fan
{ WARNING under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running
You can be burned if you spill
and can cause injury. Keep
coolant on hot engine parts.
hands, clothing, and tools away
Coolant contains ethylene glycol
from any underhood electric fan.
and it will burn if the engine parts
are hot enough. Do not spill 1. Remove the coolant surge tank
pressure cap when the cooling
coolant on a hot engine.
system, including the coolant
{ WARNING surge tank pressure cap and
Notice: This vehicle has a Steam and scalding liquids from a upper radiator hose, is no
specific coolant fill procedure. longer hot.
hot cooling system can blow out
Failure to follow this procedure
and burn you badly. They are Turn the pressure cap slowly
could cause the engine to
under pressure, and if you turn counterclockwise about one full
overheat and be severely
the surge tank pressure turn. If a hiss is heard, wait for
damaged.
cap — even a little — they can that to stop. A hiss means there
come out at high speed. Never is still some pressure left.
turn the cap when the cooling 2. Keep turning the pressure cap
system, including the surge tank slowly and remove it.
pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the
cooling system and surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever
have to turn the pressure cap.
10-20 Vehicle Care
5. Replace the pressure cap. Be

sure the pressure cap is
hand-tight and fully seated.
6. Verify coolant level after engine
is shut off and the coolant is
cold. If necessary, repeat coolant
fill procedure Steps 1 through 6.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not
tightly installed, coolant loss and
possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly
and tightly secured.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with 4. With the coolant surge tank
the proper mixture to the FULL pressure cap off, start the
COLD mark. engine and let it run until the
upper radiator hose can be felt
getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level
inside the coolant surge tank
may be lower. If the level is
lower, add more of the proper
mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the FULL
COLD mark.
Vehicle Care 10-21
Engine Overheating If the decision is made not to lift the Notice: Engine damage from
hood when this warning appears, running the engine without
The vehicle has several indicators but instead get service help right coolant is not covered by the
to warn of engine overheating. away. See Roadside Assistance vehicle warranty. See Overheated
There is a coolant temperature Program (U.S. and Canada) on Engine Protection Operating
gauge on your vehicle's instrument page 13‑8 or Roadside Assistance Mode on page 10‑23 for
panel. See Engine Coolant Program (Mexico) on page 13‑10. information on driving to a safe
Temperature Gauge on page 5‑15. If the decision is made to lift the place in an emergency.
In addition, ENGINE OVERHEATED hood, make sure the vehicle is Notice: If the engine catches fire
STOP ENGINE, ENGINE parked on a level surface. while driving with no coolant, the
OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE, and Then check to see if the engine vehicle can be badly damaged.
an ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED cooling fans are running. If the The costly repairs would not be
message comes on in the Driver engine is overheating, both fans covered by the vehicle warranty.
Information Center (DIC) on the should be running. If they are not, See Overheated Engine
instrument panel. See Engine do not continue to run the engine Protection Operating Mode on
Cooling System Messages on and have the vehicle serviced. page 10‑23 for information on
page 5‑39 and Engine Power driving to a safe place in an
Messages on page 5‑40. emergency.
10-22 Vehicle Care
If Steam Is Coming from the If an engine overheat warning is

Engine Compartment WARNING (Continued) displayed but no steam can be seen
or heard, the problem may not be
See Overheated Engine too serious. Sometimes the engine
{ WARNING Protection Operating Mode on can get a little too hot when the
page 10‑23 for information on vehicle:
Steam from an overheated engine
driving to a safe place in an
can burn you badly, even if you . Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
emergency.
just open the hood. Stay away . Stops after high-speed driving.
from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Turn it off If No Steam Is Coming from . Idles for long periods in traffic.
and get everyone away from the the Engine Compartment . Tows a trailer. See Trailer
vehicle until it cools down. Wait The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP Towing on page 9‑74.
until there is no sign of steam or ENGINE or the ENGINE If the overheat warning is displayed
coolant before you open OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE with no sign of steam:
the hood. message, along with a low coolant
condition, can indicate a serious 1. Turn the air conditioning off.
If you keep driving when the
vehicles engine is overheated, problem. 2. Turn the heater on to the highest
the liquids in it can catch fire. You temperature and to the highest
or others could be badly burned. fan speed. Open the windows as
Stop the engine if it overheats, necessary.
and get out of the vehicle until the 3. In heavy traffic, let the engine
engine is cool. idle in N (Neutral) while stopped.
(Continued) If it is safe to do so, pull off the
road, shift to P (Park) or
N (Neutral) and let the
engine idle.
Vehicle Care 10-23
If the temperature overheat gauge Overheated Engine Engine Fan

is no longer in the overheat zone or
an overheat warning no longer
Protection If the vehicle has a clutched engine
displays, the vehicle can be driven. Operating Mode cooling fan, when the clutch is
Continue to drive the vehicle slowly engaged, the fan spins faster to
If an overheated engine condition provide more air to cool the engine.
for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe exists and the ENGINE POWER IS
vehicle distance from the vehicle in In most everyday driving conditions,
REDUCED message is displayed, the fan is spinning slower and the
front. If the warning does not come an overheat protection mode which
back on, continue to drive normally. clutch is not fully engaged. This
alternates firing groups of cylinders improves fuel economy and reduces
If the warning continues, pull over, helps prevent engine damage. In fan noise. Under heavy vehicle
stop, and park the vehicle this mode, a loss in power and loading, trailer towing, and/or high
right away. engine performance will be noticed. outside temperatures, the fan speed
This operating mode allows the increases as the clutch more fully
If there is no sign of steam, idle the
vehicle to be driven to a safe place engages, so an increase in fan
engine for three minutes while
in an emergency. Driving extended noise may be heard. This is normal
parked. If the warning is still
distances and/or towing a trailer in and should not be mistaken as the
displayed, turn off the engine until it
the overheat protection mode transmission slipping or making
cools down. Also, see “Overheated
should be avoided. extra shifts. It is merely the cooling
Engine Protection Operating Mode”
later in this section. Notice: After driving in the system functioning properly. The fan
overheated engine protection will slow down when additional
operating mode, to avoid engine cooling is not required and the
damage, allow the engine to cool clutch disengages.
before attempting any repair. The This fan noise may also be heard
engine oil will be severely when starting the engine. It will go
degraded. Repair the cause of away as the fan clutch partially
coolant loss, change the oil and disengages.
reset the oil life system. See
Engine Oil on page 10‑7.
10-24 Vehicle Care
If the vehicle has electric cooling Power Steering Fluid How to Check Power Steering
fans, the fans may be heard Fluid
spinning at low speed during most If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
everyday driving. The fans may turn hybrid supplement for more Notice: Extremely small amounts
off if no cooling is required. Under information. of contamination can cause
heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing, steering system damage and
high outside temperatures, cause it to not work properly. Do
or operation of the air conditioning not allow contaminants to contact
system, the fans may change to the fluid side of the reservoir cap/
high speed and an increase in fan dipstick or to enter the reservoir.
noise may be heard. This is normal To check the power steering fluid:
and indicates that the cooling
1. Turn the key off and let the
system is functioning properly. The See Engine Compartment Overview engine compartment cool down.
fans will change to low speed when on page 10‑6 for reservoir location.
additional cooling is no longer 2. Wipe the cap and the top of the
required. When to Check Power Steering reservoir clean.
Fluid 3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the
It is not necessary to regularly dipstick with a clean rag.
check power steering fluid unless
4. Replace the cap and completely
there is a leak suspected in the
tighten it.
system or an unusual noise is
heard. A fluid loss in this system 5. Remove the cap again and look
could indicate a problem. Have the at the fluid level on the dipstick.
system inspected and repaired. The level should be at the FULL
COLD mark. If necessary, add only
enough fluid to bring the level up to
the mark.
Vehicle Care 10-25
What to Use Adding Washer Fluid Notice

To determine what kind of fluid to The vehicle has a low washer . When using concentrated
use, see Recommended Fluids and fluid message on the DIC that washer fluid, follow the
Lubricants on page 11‑12. Always comes on when the washer fluid is manufacturer's instructions
use the proper fluid. low. The message is displayed for for adding water.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid 15 seconds at the start of each . Do not mix water with
may damage the vehicle and the ignition cycle. When the WASHER ready-to-use washer fluid.
damages may not be covered by FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message Water can cause the solution
the vehicle's warranty. Always displays, washer fluid will need to to freeze and damage the
use the correct fluid listed in be added to the windshield washer washer fluid tank and other
Recommended Fluids and fluid reservoir. parts of the washer system.
Lubricants on page 11‑12. . Fill the washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is
Washer Fluid very cold. This allows for
fluid expansion if freezing
What to Use occurs, which could
When windshield washer fluid needs damage the tank if it is
to be added, be sure to read the completely full.
manufacturer's instructions before Open the cap with the washer
symbol on it. Add washer fluid until . Do not use engine coolant
use. Use a fluid that has sufficient (antifreeze) in the windshield
protection against freezing in an the tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on washer. It can damage the
area where the temperature may fall windshield washer system
below freezing. page 10‑6 for reservoir location.
and paint.
10-26 Vehicle Care
Brakes Some driving conditions or climates Brake Adjustment

can cause a brake squeal when the
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc Every time the brakes are applied,
brakes are first applied or lightly
brake pads have built-in wear with or without the vehicle moving,
applied. This does not mean
indicators that make a high-pitched the brakes adjust for wear.
something is wrong with the brakes.
warning sound when the brake pads Replacing Brake System Parts
are worn and new pads are needed. Properly torqued wheel nuts are
The sound can come and go or be necessary to help prevent brake The braking system on a vehicle is
heard all the time the vehicle is pulsation. When tires are rotated, complex. Its many parts have to be
moving, except when applying the inspect brake pads for wear and of top quality and work well together
brake pedal firmly. evenly tighten wheel nuts in the if the vehicle is to have really good
proper sequence to torque braking. The vehicle was designed
specifications in Capacities and
{ WARNING Specifications on page 12‑2.
and tested with top-quality brake
parts. When parts of the braking
The brake wear warning sound Brake linings should always be system are replaced, be sure to get
means that soon the brakes will replaced as complete axle sets. new, approved replacement parts.
not work well. That could lead to If this is not done, the brakes might
a crash. When the brake wear
Brake Pedal Travel not work properly. For example,
warning sound is heard, have the See your dealer if the brake pedal installing disc brake pads that are
does not return to normal height, wrong for the vehicle, can change
vehicle serviced.
or if there is a rapid increase in the balance between the front and
pedal travel. This could be a sign rear brakes — for the worse. The
Notice: Continuing to drive with that brake service might be braking performance expected can
worn-out brake pads could result required. change in many other ways if the
in costly brake repair. wrong replacement brake parts are
installed.
Vehicle Care 10-27
Brake Fluid Do not top off the brake fluid. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
Adding fluid does not correct a leak. to determine when to check the
If fluid is added when the linings are brake fluid. See Maintenance
worn, there will be too much fluid Schedule on page 11‑3.
when new brake linings are
installed. Add or remove brake fluid, Checking Brake Fluid
as necessary, only when work is Check brake fluid by looking at the
done on the brake hydraulic system. brake fluid reservoir. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
The brake master cylinder reservoir
is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. See { WARNING page 10‑6.
Engine Compartment Overview on If too much brake fluid is added, it
page 10‑6 for the location of the
can spill on the engine and burn,
reservoir.
if the engine is hot enough. You
There are only two reasons why the or others could be burned, and
brake fluid level in the reservoir the vehicle could be damaged.
might go down: Add brake fluid only when work is
. The brake fluid level goes down done on the brake hydraulic
because of normal brake lining system. See “Checking Brake
wear. When new linings are Fluid” in this section.
installed, the fluid level goes
back up.
When the brake fluid falls to a low
. A fluid leak in the brake level, the brake warning light comes
hydraulic system can also cause on. See Brake System Warning The fluid level should be above
a low fluid level. Have the brake Light on page 5‑23. MIN. If it is not, have the brake
hydraulic system fixed, since a hydraulic system checked to see if
leak means that sooner or later there is a leak.
the brakes will not work well.
10-28 Vehicle Care
After work is done on the brake Notice Battery

hydraulic system, make sure the . Using the wrong fluid can
level is above the MIN but not over If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
badly damage brake hybrid supplement for more
the MAX mark. hydraulic system parts. For information.
What to Add example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as Refer to the replacement number on
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid engine oil, in the brake the original battery label when a
from a sealed container. See hydraulic system can new battery is needed. See Engine
Recommended Fluids and damage brake hydraulic Compartment Overview on
Lubricants on page 11‑12. system parts so badly that page 10‑6 for battery location.
Always clean the brake fluid they will have to be replaced.
reservoir cap and the area around Do not let someone put in { WARNING
the cap before removing it. This the wrong kind of fluid.
helps keep dirt from entering the Battery posts, terminals, and
. If brake fluid is spilled on the
reservoir. related accessories contain lead
vehicle's painted surfaces,
and lead compounds, chemicals
the paint finish can be
{ WARNING damaged. Be careful not to known to the State of California to
cause cancer and reproductive
spill brake fluid on the
With the wrong kind of fluid in the vehicle. If you do, wash it off harm. Wash hands after handling.
brake hydraulic system, the immediately.
brakes might not work well. This
could cause a crash. Always use
the proper brake fluid.
Vehicle Care 10-29
Vehicle Storage Four-Wheel Drive To get an accurate reading, the

vehicle should be on a level
{ WARNING Transfer Case surface.
When to Check Lubricant If the level is below the bottom of
Batteries have acid that can burn the fill plug hole, some lubricant will
you and gas that can explode. Refer to Maintenance Schedule on
need to be added. Add enough
You can be badly hurt if you are page 11‑3 to determine when to
lubricant to raise the level to the
not careful. See Jump Starting on check the lubricant.
bottom of the fill plug hole. Use care
page 10‑89 for tips on working How to Check Lubricant not to overtighten the plug.
around a battery without
When to Change Lubricant
getting hurt.
Refer to Maintenance Schedule on
page 11‑3 to determine how often to
Infrequent Usage: Remove the change the lubricant.
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery to keep the battery from What to Use
running down. Refer to Recommended Fluids and
Extended Storage: Remove the Lubricants on page 11‑12 to
black, negative (−) cable from the determine what kind of lubricant
battery or use a battery trickle to use.
charger.
Active Transfer Case
A. Fill Plug
B. Drain Plug
10-30 Vehicle Care
Front Axle
When to Check and Change
Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly
check front axle fluid unless a leak
is suspected, or an unusual noise is
heard. A fluid loss could indicate a
problem. Have it inspected and
repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the 1500 Series All Except 1500 Series
vehicle should be on a level
A. Fill Plug A. Fill Plug
surface.
B. Drain Plug B. Drain Plug
. When the differential is cold, add
enough lubricant to raise the
level from 0 mm (0 in) to 3.2 mm
(1/8 in) below the fill plug hole.
. When the differential is at
operating temperature (warm),
add enough lubricant to raise the
level to the bottom of the fill
plug hole.
Vehicle Care 10-31
What to Use out along the axle tubes and has

Refer to Recommended Fluids and not drained back to the sump area.
Lubricants on page 11‑12 to Therefore, a reading taken
determine what kind of lubricant five minutes after the vehicle has
to use. been driven will appear to have a
lower fluid level than a vehicle that
has been stationary for an hour or
Rear Axle two. Remember that the rear axle
When to Check Lubricant assembly must be supported to get
a true reading.
It is not necessary to regularly
check rear axle fluid unless there is How to Check Lubricant
a leak suspected, or an unusual
noise is heard. A fluid loss could 2500 Series
indicate a problem. Have it To get an accurate reading, the
inspected and repaired. vehicle should be on a level
All axle assemblies are filled by surface.
volume of fluid during production. . For the 1500 series, the proper
They are not filled to reach a certain level is from 1.0 mm to 19.0 mm
level. When checking the fluid level (0.04 in to 0.75 in) below the
on any axle, variations in the bottom of the fill plug hole,
readings can be caused by factory located on the rear axle. Add
fill differences between the minimum only enough fluid to reach the
and the maximum fluid volume. proper level.
Also, if a vehicle has just been 1500 Series
driven before checking the fluid
level, it may appear lower than
normal because fluid has traveled
10-32 Vehicle Care

. For the 2500 series, the proper
level is from 0 mm to 13 mm
2. Firmly apply both the parking Automatic Transmission
brake and the regular brake.
(0 in to 1/2 in) below the bottom See Parking Brake on
Shift Lock Control
of the fill plug hole, located at page 9‑46. Function Check
the front of the axle. Add only
Do not use the accelerator
enough fluid to reach the proper
level. pedal, and be ready to turn off { WARNING
the engine immediately if it
starts. When you are doing this
Starter Switch Check inspection, the vehicle could
3. Try to start the engine in each move suddenly. If the vehicle
{ WARNING gear. The vehicle should start
only in P (Park) or N (Neutral).
moves, you or others could be
injured.
When you are doing this If the vehicle starts in any other
inspection, the vehicle could position, contact your dealer for
move suddenly. If the vehicle service. 1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
moves, you or others could be
around the vehicle. It should be
injured.
parked on a level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
1. Before starting this check, be See Parking Brake on
sure there is enough room page 9‑46.
around the vehicle.
Be ready to apply the regular
brake immediately if the vehicle
begins to move.
Vehicle Care 10-33
3. With the engine off, turn the Park Brake and P (Park) Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
ignition on, but do not start the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
engine. Without applying the
Mechanism Check your foot on the regular brake, set
regular brake, try to move the the parking brake.
shift lever out of P (Park) with { WARNING . To check the parking brake's
normal effort. If the shift lever holding ability: With the engine
moves out of P (Park), contact When you are doing this check,
the vehicle could begin to move. running and the transmission in
your dealer for service. N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
You or others could be injured
pressure from the regular brake
Ignition Transmission and property could be damaged.
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
Make sure there is room in front
Lock Check of the vehicle in case it begins to
held by the parking brake only.
While parked, and with the parking roll. Be ready to apply the regular . To check the P (Park)
brake set, try to turn the ignition to brake at once should the vehicle mechanism's holding ability:
LOCK/OFF in each shift lever begin to move. With the engine running, shift to
position. P (Park). Then release the
parking brake followed by the
. The ignition should turn to
regular brake.
LOCK/OFF only when the shift
lever is in P (Park). Contact your dealer if service is
required.
. The ignition key should come
out only in LOCK/OFF.
Contact your dealer if service is
required.
10-34 Vehicle Care
Wiper Blade Replacement Rear Wiper Blade Replacement

Windshield wiper blades should be 1. Lift the wiper blade assembly up
inspected for wear or cracking. See and out of the park rest position.
Maintenance Schedule on
page 11‑3.
Replacement blades come in
3. Install the new blade onto the
different types and are removed in
arm connector and make sure
different ways.
the grooved areas are fully set in
Front Wiper Blade the locked position.
Replacement For the proper type and size, see 2. Pull the wiper blade assembly
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm Maintenance Replacement Parts on away from the backglass. The
connector away from the page 11‑14. backglass wiper blade will not
windshield. lock in a vertical position, so
care should be used when
pulling it away from the vehicle.
3. Turn the wiper blade assembly,
and pull it off of the wiper arm.
Hold the wiper arm in position
and push the blade away from
the wiper arm.
2. Squeeze the grooved areas on
each side of the blade, and turn
the blade assembly away from
the arm connector.
Vehicle Care 10-35
Headlamp Aiming The vehicle should:

. Be placed so the headlamps
The vehicle has a visual optical
are 7.6 m (25 ft) from a
headlamp aiming system. The aim
light‐colored wall.
of the headlamps has been preset
. Have all four tires on a level
at the factory and should need no
further adjustment. surface which is level all the way
4. Replace the wiper blade. to the wall.
However, if the vehicle is damaged
5. Return the wiper blade assembly in a crash, the aim of the headlamps . Be placed so it is perpendicular
to the park rest position. may be affected and adjustment to the wall.
may be necessary. . Not have any snow, ice, or mud
Glass Replacement on it.
If oncoming vehicles flash their high
If the windshield or front side glass beams at you, this may mean the . Be fully assembled and all other
must be replaced, see your dealer vertical aim of the headlamps needs work stopped while headlamp
to determine the correct to be adjusted. aiming is being performed.
replacement glass.
It is recommended that the vehicle . Be loaded with a full tank of fuel
be taken to your dealer for service if and one person or 75 kg
the headlamps need to be adjusted. (160 lbs) sitting on the
It is possible, however, to re-aim the driver seat.
headlamps as described.
. Have the tires properly inflated.
. Have the spare tire in its proper
location in the vehicle.
10-36 Vehicle Care
Headlamp aiming is done with the 3. Record the distance from the Notice: Do not cover a headlamp
vehicle's low-beam headlamps. The ground to the aim dot on the to improve beam cut-off when
high-beam headlamps will be low‐beam headlamp. aiming. Covering a headlamp may
correctly aimed if the low-beam cause excessive heat build-up
headlamps are aimed properly. which may cause damage to the
To adjust the vertical aim: headlamp.
1. Open the hood. See Hood on 6. Turn on the low-beam

page 10‑5 headlamps and place a piece of
cardboard or equivalent in front
of the headlamp not being
adjusted. This allows only the
beam of light from the headlamp
being adjusted to be seen on the
4. At a wall, measure from the flat surface.
ground upward (A) to the
recorded distance from
Step 3 and mark it.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B)
on the wall the width of the
vehicle at the height of the mark
in Step 4.
2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of

the low‐beam headlamp.
Vehicle Care 10-37
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement
bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
page 10‑39.
For any bulb‐changing procedure
not listed in this section, contact
your dealer.
9. Make sure that the light from the Halogen Bulbs

headlamp is positioned at the
bottom edge of the horizontal
7. Locate the vertical headlamp tape line. The lamp on the { WARNING
aiming screws, which are under left (A) shows the correct
Halogen bulbs have pressurized
the hood near each headlamp headlamp aim. The lamp on the
right (B) shows the incorrect gas inside and can burst if you
assembly. drop or scratch the bulb. You or
headlamp aim.
The adjustment screw can be others could be injured. Be sure
turned with an E8 Torx® socket. 10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for to read and follow the instructions
the opposite headlamp. on the bulb package.
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw
until the headlamp beam is
aimed to the horizontal
tape line. Turn it clockwise or
counterclockwise to raise or
lower the angle of the beam.
10-38 Vehicle Care
Taillamps, Turn Signal, To replace one of these bulbs: 4. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise to remove it
Stoplamps, and Back-Up 1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate
from the taillamp assembly.
Lamps on page 2‑10.
5. Pull the old bulb straight out
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the from the bulb socket.
hybrid supplement for the bulb
6. Press a new bulb into the bulb
changing procedure.
socket and install the socket into
the taillamp assembly by turning
it clockwise.
7. Reinstall the taillamp assembly.
When reinstalling, make sure to
line up the pins on the taillamp
assembly with the vehicle. If
this is not done, the taillamp
assembly will not be able to be
installed correctly.
2. Remove the two screws from the
taillamp assembly.
3. Pull the taillamp assembly
A. Stoplamp/Taillamp rearward disengaging the two
outer pins on the taillamp
B. Back-up Lamp assembly from the vehicle.
C. Taillamp/Turn Signal Lamp
D. Side Marker Lamp
Vehicle Care 10-39
License Plate Lamp 2. Twist and pull the license plate Replacement Bulbs
lamp assembly forward through
the molding opening. If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
3. Remove the bulb socket from information.
the lamp assembly by turning it
counterclockwise. Bulb
Exterior Lamp
4. Pull the bulb straight out of the Number
socket and install the new bulb. Back-up Lamp 7441
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to License Plate Lamp W5WLL
reinstall the license plate lamp.
Rear Turn Signal
Lamp, Taillamp, and 3057K
Stoplamp
1. Remove the two screws holding Side Marker Lamp 194
each of the license plate lamps
to the molding that is part of the For replacement bulbs not listed
liftgate. here, contact your dealer.
10-40 Vehicle Care
Electrical System Replace a bad fuse with a new one Windshield Wipers
of the identical size and rating.
If the wiper motor overheats due to
Electrical System If there is a problem on the road and heavy snow or ice, the windshield
a fuse needs to be replaced, the wipers will stop until the motor cools
Overload same amperage fuse can be and will then restart.
The vehicle has fuses and circuit borrowed. Choose some feature of
Although the circuit is protected
breakers to protect against an the vehicle that is not needed to use
from electrical overload, overload
electrical system overload. and replace it as soon as possible.
due to heavy snow or ice may
When the current electrical load is Headlamp Wiring cause wiper linkage damage.
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens Always clear ice and heavy snow
and closes, protecting the circuit An electrical overload may cause from the windshield before using the
until the current load returns to the lamps to go on and off, or in windshield wipers.
normal or the problem is fixed. This some cases to remain off. Have the
headlamp wiring checked right away If the overload is caused by an
greatly reduces the chance of circuit
if the lamps go on and off or electrical problem and not snow or
overload and fire caused by
remain off. ice, be sure to get it fixed.
electrical problems.
Fuses and circuit breakers protect
power devices in the vehicle.
Vehicle Care 10-41
Fuses and Circuit Engine Compartment If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
Breakers Fuse Block information.
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the Notice: Spilling liquid on any
hybrid supplement for more electrical component on the
information. vehicle may damage it. Always
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are keep the covers on any electrical
protected from short circuits by a component.
combination of fuses, circuit To remove fuses, hold the end of
breakers and fusible thermal links. the fuse between your thumb and
This greatly reduces the chance of The Engine Compartment Fuse
Block is located in the engine index finger and pull straight out.
fires caused by electrical problems.
compartment, on the driver side of
Look at the silver-colored band the vehicle. Lift the cover for access
inside the fuse. If the band is broken to the fuse/relay block.
or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure
you replace a bad fuse with a new
one of the identical size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the
road and don't have a spare fuse,
you can borrow one that has the
same amperage. Just pick some
feature of your vehicle that you can
get along without– like the radio or
accessory power outlet– and use its
fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
10-42 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Care 10-43
The vehicle may not be equipped Fuses Usage Fuses Usage

with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown. Trailer Back-up Fuel System Control
10 21
Fuses Usage Lamps Module
Right Trailer Stop/ Driver Side 22 Headlamp Washer

1 11
Turn Lamp Low-Beam Headlamp
Rear Windshield
23
Electronic Stability Engine Control Washer
12
Suspension Control, Module (Battery)
Fuel Injectors, Ignition
2 24
Automatic Level Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils (Left Side)
13
Control Exhaust Coils (Right Side)
25 Trailer Parking Lamps
Left Trailer Stop/ Transmission Control
3 14 Driver Side Parking
Turn Lamp Module (Battery) 26
Lamps
4 Engine Controls Vehicle Back-up
15 Passenger Side
Lamps 27
Engine Control Parking Lamps
5 Module, Throttle Passenger Side
16 28 Fog Lamps
Control Low-Beam Headlamp
29 Horn
Trailer Brake Air Conditioning
6 17
Controller Compressor Passenger Side
30
High-Beam Headlamp
7 Front Washer 18 Oxygen Sensors
Daytime Running
8 Oxygen Sensors Transmission Controls
19 31 Lamps (DRL)
Antilock Brakes (Ignition)
(If Equipped)
9
System 2 20 Fuel Pump
Driver Side
32
High-Beam Headlamp
10-44 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Fuses Usage

Daytime Running 44 Liftgate Release Climate Controls
33 55
Lamps 2 (If Equipped) (Ignition)
Airbag System
45
34 Sunroof (Battery) Engine Control
56 Module, Secondary
Key Ignition System, Instrument Panel
46 Fuel Pump (Ignition)
35 Theft Deterrent Cluster
System
47 Not Used J-Case
36 Windshield Wiper Usage
Auxiliary Climate Fuses
48
SEO B2 Upfitter Control (Ignition) 57 Cooling Fan 1
37
Usage (Battery)
Center High-Mounted Automatic Level
49 58
Electric Adjustable Stoplamp (CHMSL) Control Compressor
38
Pedals
50 Rear Defogger Heavy Duty Antilock
Climate Controls 59
39 51 Heated Mirrors Braking System
(Battery)
SEO B1 Upfitter 60 Cooling Fan 2
Airbag System 52
40 Usage (Battery) Antilock Brake
(Ignition) 61
Accessory Power System 1
41 Amplifier
53 Outlet, Cigarette 62 Starter
42 Audio System Lighter (If Equipped)
Stud 2 (Trailer
Miscellaneous Automatic Level 63
Brakes)
43 (Ignition), Cruise 54 Control Compressor
Control Relay Left Bussed Electrical
64
Center 1
Vehicle Care 10-45
J-Case Relays Usage Instrument Panel Fuse

Usage
Fuses
FAN Block
Cooling Fan Control
Electric Running CNTRL
65
Boards
HDLP
Low-Beam Headlamp
66 Not Used LO/HID
67 Transfer Case FOG
Front Fog Lamps
LAMP
Stud 1 (Trailer
68 Connector Battery A/C Air Conditioning
Power) CMPRSR Compressor
Mid-Bussed Electrical STRTR Starter
69
Center 1
PWR/TRN Powertrain
Climate Control
70 FUEL
Blower Fuel Pump
PMP The instrument panel fuse block
Power Liftgate access door is located on the driver
71 PRK
Module Parking Lamps
LAMP side edge of the instrument panel.
Left Bussed Electrical Pull off the cover to access the fuse
72 REAR
Center 2 Rear Defogger block.
DEFOG
Relays Usage RUN/

Switched Power
CRNK
Cooling Fan High
FAN HI
Speed
Cooling Fan Low
FAN LO
Speed
10-46 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage
Driver Side Turn
6
Signal, Stoplamp
Instrument Panel
7
Back Lighting
Passenger Side Turn
8
Signal, Stoplamp
Passenger Door
9
Module, Driver Unlock
Power Door Lock 2
10
(Unlock Feature)
Power Door Lock 2
11
(Lock Feature)
Stoplamps, Center
12 High‐Mounted
The vehicle may not be equipped Fuses Usage Stoplamp
with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown. Steering Wheel 13 Rear Climate Controls
3
Controls Backlight 14 Power Mirror
Fuses Usage
4 Driver Door Module
1 Rear Seats
Dome Lamps, Driver
Rear Accessory 5
2 Side Turn Signal
Power Outlet
Vehicle Care 10-47
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Harness

Connector Usage
Body Control 23 Rear Wiper
15
Module (BCM) Driver Door
24 Cooled Seats
LT DR Harness
Accessory Power
16 Driver Seat Module, Connection
Outlets
25 Remote Keyless Entry
BODY Harness Connector
17 Interior Lamps System
BODY Harness Connector
Power Door Lock 1 Driver Power Door
18 26
(Unlock Feature) Lock (Unlock Feature)
Rear Seat
19 Circuit
Entertainment Usage
Breaker
Ultrasonic Rear
20 Parking Assist, Power Driver Side Power
Liftgate LT DR Window Circuit
Breaker
Power Door Lock 1
21
(Lock Feature)
Driver Information
22
Center (DIC)
10-48 Vehicle Care
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Top View Harness

Block Connector Usage
The center instrument panel fuse HEADLINER Headliner Harness
block is located underneath the 2 Connector 2
instrument panel, to the left of the
steering column. HEADLINER Headliner Harness
1 Connector 1
Special Equipment
SEO/
Option Upfitter
UPFITTER
Harness Connector
Circuit
Breaker Usage
Passenger Side
Harness CB1 Power Window Circuit
Connector Usage Breaker
Body Harness Passenger Seat
BODY 2 CB2
Connector 2 Circuit Breaker
Body Harness Driver Seat Circuit
BODY 1 CB3
Connector 1 Breaker
Body Harness CB4 Rear Sliding Window
BODY 3
Connector 3
HEADLINER Headliner Harness
3 Connector 3
Vehicle Care 10-49
Wheels and Tires WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)

Tires . Underinflated tires pose the . Replace any tires that have
same danger as overloaded been damaged by impacts
Every new GM vehicle has tires. The resulting crash with potholes, curbs, etc.
high-quality tires made by a could cause serious injury.
leading tire manufacturer. See Check all tires frequently to
. Improperly repaired tires can
the warranty manual for maintain the recommended cause a crash. Only the
dealer or an authorized tire
information regarding the tire pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when the service center should repair,
warranty and where to get replace, dismount, and mount
service. For additional tires are cold.
the tires.
information refer to the tire . Overinflated tires are more
manufacturer. likely to be cut, punctured,
. Do not spin the tires in
or broken by a sudden excess of 56 km/h (35 mph)
on slippery surfaces such as
{ WARNING impact— such as when
hitting a pothole. Keep tires at snow, mud, ice, etc.
the recommended pressure. Excessive spinning may
. Poorly maintained and
cause the tires to explode.
improperly used tires are . Worn or old tires can cause a
dangerous. crash. If the tread is badly
. Overloading the tires can worn, replace them.
cause overheating as a result (Continued)
of too much flexing. There
could be a blowout and a
serious crash. See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑16.
(Continued)
10-50 Vehicle Care
20‐Inch Tires Keep tires set to the correct

If the vehicle has 20‐inch inflation pressure and, when
P275/55R20 size tires, they are possible, avoid contact with
classified as touring tires and curbs, potholes, and other
are designed for on road use. road hazards.
The low‐profile, wide tread
design is not recommended for Tire Sidewall Labeling
off‐road driving. See Off-Road Useful information about a tire is
Driving on page 9‑6, for molded into the sidewall. The
additional information. examples show a typical
Notice: Low‐profile tires are passenger and light truck tire
sidewall. Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire
more susceptible to damage
from road hazards or curb (A) Tire Size: The tire size
impact than standard profile code is a combination of letters
tires. Tire and/or wheel and numbers used to define a
assembly damage can occur particular tire's width, height,
when coming into contact aspect ratio, construction type,
with road hazards like, and service description. See the
potholes, or sharp edged “Tire Size” illustration later in this
objects, or when sliding into a section for more detail.
curb. The warranty does not
cover this type of damage.
Vehicle Care 10-51
(B) TPC Spec (Tire manufactured. The TIN is

Performance Criteria molded onto both sides of the
Specification): Original tire, although only one side may
equipment tires designed to have the date of manufacture.
GM's specific tire performance (E) Tire Ply Material : The type
criteria have a TPC specification of cord and number of plies in
code molded onto the sidewall. the sidewall and under the tread.
GM's TPC specifications meet or
exceed all federal safety (F) Uniform Tire Quality
guidelines. Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to
(C) DOT (Department of grade tires based on three
Transportation): The Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
performance factors: treadwear,
Department of Transportation traction, and temperature (A) Tire Size: The tire size
(DOT) code indicates that the resistance. For more code is a combination of letters
tire is in compliance with information, see Uniform Tire and numbers used to define a
the U.S. Department of Quality Grading on page 10‑69. particular tire's width, height,
Transportation Motor Vehicle aspect ratio, construction type,
Safety Standards. (G) Maximum Cold Inflation and service description. See the
Load Limit: Maximum load “Tire Size” illustration later in this
(D) Tire Identification Number that can be carried and the
(TIN): The letters and numbers section for more detail.
maximum pressure needed to
following the DOT code are the support that load. For
Tire Identification Number information on recommended
(TIN). The TIN shows the tire pressure see Tire Pressure
manufacturer and plant code, on page 10‑57 and Vehicle Load
tire size, and date the tire was Limits on page 9‑16.
10-52 Vehicle Care
(B) TPC Spec (Tire (D) DOT (Department of (F) Tire Ply Material : The type
Performance Criteria Transportation): The of cord and number of plies in
Specification): Original Department of Transportation the sidewall and under the tread.
equipment tires designed to (DOT) code indicates that the (G) Single Tire Maximum
GM's specific tire performance tire is in compliance with Load: Maximum load that can
criteria have a TPC specification the U.S. Department of be carried and the maximum
code molded onto the sidewall. Transportation Motor Vehicle pressure needed to support that
GM's TPC specifications meet or Safety Standards. load when used as a single. For
exceed all federal safety (E) Tire Identification Number information on recommended
guidelines. (TIN): The letters and numbers tire pressure see Tire Pressure
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: following the DOT code are on page 10‑57 and Vehicle Load
Maximum load that can be the Tire Identification Number Limits on page 9‑16.
carried and the maximum (TIN). The TIN shows the
pressure needed to support that manufacturer and plant code,
load when used in a dual tire size, and date the tire was
configuration. For information on manufactured. The TIN is
recommended tire pressure see molded onto both sides of the
Tire Pressure on page 10‑57 tire, although only one side may
and Vehicle Load Limits on have the date of manufacture.
page 9‑16.
Vehicle Care 10-53
Tire Designations (C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit (F) Service Description: These
number that indicates the tire characters represent the load
Tire Size height‐to‐width measurements. index and speed rating of the
The examples show a typical For example, if the tire size tire. The load index represents
passenger vehicle and light aspect ratio is 75, as shown in the load carrying capacity a tire
truck tire size. item C of the tire illustration, it is certified to carry. The speed
would mean that the tire's rating is the maximum speed a
sidewall is 75 percent as high as tire is certified to carry a load.
it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A
letter code is used to indicate
the type of ply construction in
Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire the tire. The letter R means
(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire: radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or bias Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire
The United States version of a
metric tire sizing system. The ply construction; and the letter B (A) Light Truck (LT‐Metric)
letter P as the first character in means belted‐bias ply Tire: The United States version
the tire size means a passenger construction. of a metric tire sizing system.
vehicle tire engineered to (E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of The letters LT as the first two
standards set by the U.S. Tire the wheel in inches. characters in the tire size mean
and Rim Association. a light truck tire engineered to
standards set by the U.S. Tire
(B) Tire Width: The three‐digit
and Rim Association.
number indicates the tire section
width in millimeters from
sidewall to sidewall.
10-54 Vehicle Care
(B) Tire Width: The three‐digit (E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of Accessory Weight: The
number indicates the tire section the wheel in inches. combined weight of optional
width in millimeters from (F) Load Range: Load Range. accessories. Some examples of
sidewall to sidewall. optional accessories are
(G) Service Description: The automatic transmission, power
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit service description indicates the
number that indicates the tire steering, power brakes, power
load index and speed rating of a windows, power seats, and air
height‐to‐width measurements. tire. If two numbers are given as
For example, if the tire size conditioning.
in the example, 120/116, then
aspect ratio is 75, as shown this represents the load index for Aspect Ratio: The relationship
in item C of the light truck single versus dual wheel usage of a tire's height to its width.
(LT‐Metric) tire illustration, it (single/dual). The speed rating is Belt: A rubber coated layer of
would mean that the tire's the maximum speed a tire is cords that is located between
sidewall is 75 percent as high as certified to carry a load. the plies and the tread. Cords
it is wide. may be made from steel or other
(D) Construction Code: A Tire Terminology and reinforcing materials.
letter code is used to indicate Definitions Bead: The tire bead contains
the type of ply construction in steel wires wrapped by steel
the tire. The letter R means Air Pressure: The amount of
air inside the tire pressing cords that hold the tire onto
radial ply construction; the the rim.
letter D means diagonal or bias outward on each square inch of
ply construction; and the letter B the tire. Air pressure is Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire
means belted‐bias ply expressed in kPa (kilopascal) in which the plies are laid at
construction. or psi (pounds per square inch). alternate angles less than
90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.
Vehicle Care 10-55
Cold Tire Pressure: The identify the tire manufacturer, Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: A
amount of air pressure in a tire, production plant, brand, and tire used on light duty trucks and
measured in kPa (kilopascal) date of production. some multipurpose passenger
or psi (pounds per square inch) GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight vehicles.
before a tire has built up heat Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits Load Index: An assigned
from driving. See Tire Pressure on page 9‑16. number ranging from 1 to 279
on page 10‑57. that corresponds to the load
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
Curb Weight: The weight of a Rating for the front axle. See carrying capacity of a tire.
motor vehicle with standard and Vehicle Load Limits on Maximum Inflation Pressure:
optional equipment including the page 9‑16. The maximum air pressure to
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, which a cold tire can be inflated.
and coolant, but without GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the rear axle. See The maximum air pressure is
passengers and cargo. molded onto the sidewall.
Vehicle Load Limits on
DOT Markings: A code molded page 9‑16. Maximum Load Rating: The
into the sidewall of a tire load rating for a tire at the
signifying that the tire is in Intended Outboard Sidewall :
The side of an asymmetrical tire, maximum permissible inflation
compliance with the U.S. pressure for that tire.
Department of Transportation that must always face outward
(DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety when mounted on a vehicle. Maximum Loaded Vehicle
Standards. The DOT code Kilopascal (kPa): The metric Weight: The sum of curb
includes the Tire Identification unit for air pressure. weight, accessory weight,
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric vehicle capacity weight, and
designator which can also production options weight.
10-56 Vehicle Care
Normal Occupant Weight: The Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A Sidewall: The portion of a tire
number of occupants a vehicle tire used on passenger cars and between the tread and the bead.
is designed to seat multiplied by some light duty trucks and Speed Rating: An
68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle multipurpose vehicles. alphanumeric code assigned
Load Limits on page 9‑16. Recommended Inflation to a tire indicating the maximum
Occupant Distribution : Pressure: Vehicle speed at which a tire can
Designated seating positions. manufacturer's recommended operate.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The tire inflation pressure as shown Traction: The friction between
side of an asymmetrical tire that on the tire placard. See Tire the tire and the road surface.
has a particular side that faces Pressure on page 10‑57 and The amount of grip provided.
outward when mounted on a Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑16. Tread: The portion of a tire that
vehicle. The side of the tire that comes into contact with
contains a whitewall, bears Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic the road.
white lettering, or bears tire in which the ply cords that
manufacturer, brand, and/or extend to the beads are laid at Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
model name molding that is 90 degrees to the centerline of bands, sometimes called wear
higher or deeper than the same the tread. bars, that show across the tread
moldings on the other sidewall of a tire when only 1.6 mm
Rim: A metal support for a tire (1/16 in) of tread remains. See
of the tire. and upon which the tire beads When It Is Time for New Tires
are seated. on page 10‑65.
Vehicle Care 10-57
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Vehicle Placard: A label Notice: Neither tire
Grading Standards): A tire permanently attached to a underinflation nor
information system that vehicle showing the vehicle overinflation is good.
provides consumers with capacity weight and the original Underinflated tires, or tires
ratings for a tire's traction, equipment tire size and that do not have enough air,
temperature, and treadwear. recommended inflation pressure. can result in:
Ratings are determined by See “Tire and Loading . Tire overloading and
tire manufacturers using Information Label” under Vehicle overheating which could
government testing procedures. Load Limits on page 9‑16. lead to a blowout.
The ratings are molded into the
sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Pressure . Premature or
Tire Quality Grading on irregular wear.
page 10‑69. hybrid supplement for more . Poor handling.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The information. . Reduced fuel economy.
number of designated seating Tires need the correct amount of
positions multiplied by Overinflated tires, or tires that
air pressure to operate have too much air, can
68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated effectively.
cargo load. See Vehicle Load result in:
Limits on page 9‑16. . Unusual wear.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the . Poor handling.
Tire: Load on an individual tire . Rough ride.
due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and . Needless damage from
cargo weight. road hazards.
10-58 Vehicle Care
The Tire and Loading When to Check Remove the valve cap from the
Information label on the vehicle Check the tires once a month tire valve stem. Press the tire
indicates the original equipment or more. gauge firmly onto the valve to
tires and the correct cold tire get a pressure measurement.
inflation pressures. The Do not forget the spare tire. See If the cold tire inflation pressure
recommended pressure is the Full-Size Spare Tire on matches the recommended
minimum air pressure needed to page 10‑88 for additional pressure on the Tire and
support the vehicle's maximum information. Loading Information label, no
load carrying capacity. How to Check further adjustment is necessary.
For additional information If the inflation pressure is low,
Use a good quality pocket-type add air until the recommended
regarding how much weight the gauge to check tire pressure.
vehicle can carry, and an pressure is reached. If the
Proper tire inflation cannot be inflation pressure is high, press
example of the Tire and Loading determined by looking at the tire.
Information label, see Vehicle on the metal stem in the center
Check the tire inflation pressure of the tire valve to release air.
Load Limits on page 9‑16. How when the tires are cold meaning
the vehicle is loaded affects the vehicle has not been driven Recheck the tire pressure with
vehicle handling and ride for at least three hours or no the tire gauge
comfort. Never load the vehicle more than 1.6 km (1 mi). Return the valve caps on the
with more weight than it was valve stems to prevent leaks
designed to carry. and keep out dirt and moisture.
Vehicle Care 10-59
Tire Pressure Monitor As an added safety feature, your Your vehicle has also been
vehicle has been equipped with a equipped with a TPMS malfunction
System tire pressure monitoring system indicator to indicate when the
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire system is not operating properly.
(TPMS) uses radio and sensor pressure telltale when one or more The TPMS malfunction indicator is
technology to check tire pressure of your tires is significantly combined with the low tire pressure
levels. The TPMS sensors monitor under‐inflated. telltale. When the system detects a
the air pressure in your tires and Accordingly, when the low tire malfunction, the telltale will flash for
transmit tire pressure readings to a pressure telltale illuminates, you approximately one minute and then
receiver located in the vehicle. should stop and check your tires as remain continuously illuminated.
soon as possible, and inflate them This sequence will continue upon
Each tire, including the spare
to the proper pressure. Driving on a subsequent vehicle start‐ups as
(if provided), should be checked
significantly under‐inflated tire long as the malfunction exists.
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended causes the tire to overheat and can When the malfunction indicator is
by the vehicle manufacturer on the lead to tire failure. Under‐inflation illuminated, the system may not be
vehicle placard or tire inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire able to detect or signal low tire
pressure label. (If your vehicle has tread life, and may affect the pressure as intended. TPMS
tires of a different size than the size vehicle's handling and stopping malfunctions may occur for a variety
indicated on the vehicle placard or ability. of reasons, including the installation
tire inflation pressure label, you Please note that the TPMS is of replacement or alternate tires or
should determine the proper tire not a substitute for proper tire wheels on the vehicle that prevent
inflation pressure for those tires.) maintenance, and it is the driver's the TPMS from functioning properly.
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under‐inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
10-60 Vehicle Care
Always check the TPMS malfunction Tire Pressure Monitor

telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
Operation
ensure that the replacement or If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
alternate tires and wheels allow the hybrid supplement for more
TPMS to continue to function information.
properly. When a low tire pressure condition
This vehicle may have a Tire
See Tire Pressure Monitor Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). is detected, the TPMS illuminates
Operation on page 10‑60 for The TPMS is designed to warn the the low tire pressure warning light
additional information. driver when a low tire pressure located on the instrument cluster.
condition exists. TPMS sensors are If the warning light comes on, stop
Federal Communications mounted onto each tire and wheel as soon as possible and inflate the
Commission (FCC) Rules and assembly, excluding the spare tire tires to the recommended pressure
with Industry Canada and wheel assembly. The TPMS shown on the tire loading
Standards sensors monitor the air pressure in information label. See Vehicle Load
the tires and transmit the tire Limits on page 9‑16.
page 13‑22 for information pressure readings to a receiver
regarding Part 15 of the Federal located in the vehicle.
Rules and with Industry Canada
Vehicle Care 10-61
A message to check the pressure in A Tire and Loading Information label TPMS Malfunction Light and
a specific tire displays in the Driver shows the size of the original Message
Information Center (DIC). The low equipment tires and the correct
tire pressure warning light and the inflation pressure for the tires when The TPMS will not function properly
DIC warning message come on at they are cold. See Vehicle Load if one or more of the TPMS sensors
each ignition cycle until the tires are Limits on page 9‑16, for an example are missing or inoperable. When the
inflated to the correct inflation of the Tire and Loading Information system detects a malfunction, the
pressure. Using the DIC, tire label and its location. Also see Tire low tire warning light flashes for
pressure levels can be viewed. For Pressure on page 10‑57. about one minute and then stays on
additional information and details for the remainder of the ignition
The TPMS can warn about a cycle. A DIC warning message also
about the DIC operation and low tire pressure condition but it
displays see Driver Information displays. The malfunction light and
does not replace normal tire DIC warning message come on at
Center (DIC) on page 5‑28 and Tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection
Messages on page 5‑44. each ignition cycle until the problem
on page 10‑63, Tire Rotation on is corrected. Some of the conditions
The low tire pressure warning light page 10‑64 and Tires on that can cause these to come
may come on in cool weather when page 10‑49. on are:
the vehicle is first started, and then Notice: Tire sealant materials are
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This
. One of the road tires has been
not all the same. A non-approved replaced with the spare tire. The
could be an early indicator that the tire sealant could damage the
air pressure is getting low and spare tire does not have a
TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor TPMS sensor. The malfunction
needs to be inflated to the proper damage caused by using an
pressure. light and DIC message should
incorrect tire sealant is not go off after the road tire is
covered by the vehicle warranty. replaced and the sensor
Always use only the matching process is performed
GM-approved tire sealant successfully. See "TPMS Sensor
available through your dealer or Matching Process" later in this
included in the vehicle. section.
10-62 Vehicle Care

. The TPMS sensor matching . Operating electronic devices or The malfunction light and the DIC
process was not done or not being near facilities using radio message should go off at the next
completed successfully after wave frequencies similar to the ignition cycle. The sensors are
rotating the tires. The TPMS could cause the TPMS matched to the tire/wheel positions,
malfunction light and the DIC sensors to malfunction. using a TPMS relearn tool, in the
message should go off after If the TPMS is not functioning following order: driver side front tire,
successfully completing the properly, it cannot detect or signal a passenger side front tire, passenger
sensor matching process. See low tire condition. See your dealer side rear tire, and driver side rear.
"TPMS Sensor Matching for service if the TPMS malfunction See your dealer for service or to
Process" later in this section. light and DIC message comes on purchase a relearn tool.
. One or more TPMS sensors are and stays on. There are two minutes to match
missing or damaged. The the first tire/wheel position, and
malfunction light and the DIC TPMS Sensor Matching
five minutes overall to match all four
message should go off when the Process tire/wheel positions. If it takes
TPMS sensors are installed and Each TPMS sensor has a unique longer, the matching process stops
the sensor matching process is identification code. The identification and must be restarted.
performed successfully. See code needs to be matched to a new
your dealer for service. tire/wheel position after rotating the
. Replacement tires or wheels do vehicle’s tires or replacing one or
not match the original equipment more of the TPMS sensors. The
tires or wheels. Tires and wheels TPMS sensor matching process
other than those recommended should also be performed after
could prevent the TPMS from replacing a spare tire with a road
functioning properly. See Buying tire containing the TPMS sensor.
New Tires on page 10‑66.
Vehicle Care 10-63
The TPMS sensor matching process 6. Proceed to the passenger side Tire Inspection
is outlined below: front tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5. We recommend that the tires,
1. Set the parking brake.
including the spare tire, if the
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with 7. Proceed to the passenger side
rear tire, and repeat the vehicle has one, be inspected
the engine off. for signs of wear or damage at
procedure in Step 5.
3. Press Q and K on the Remote least once a month.
8. Proceed to the driver side rear
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter tire, and repeat the procedure in Replace the tire if:
at the same time for Step 5. The horn sounds
approximately five seconds. The
. The indicators at three or
two times to indicate the sensor
horn sounds twice to signal the identification code has been
more places around the tire
receiver is in relearn mode and matched to the driver side rear can be seen.
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE tire, and the TPMS sensor . There is cord or fabric
message displays on the DIC matching process is no longer
screen. showing through the tire's
active. The TIRE LEARNING rubber.
4. Start with the driver side ACTIVE message on the DIC
front tire. display screen goes off. . The tread or sidewall is
9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. cracked, cut, or snagged
5. Place the relearn tool against
the tire sidewall, near the valve deep enough to show cord or
10. Set all four tires to the fabric.
stem. Then press the button to recommended air pressure
activate the TPMS sensor. level as indicated on the Tire . The tire has a bump, bulge,
A horn chirp confirms that the and Loading Information label. or split.
sensor identification code has
been matched to this tire and
wheel position.
10-64 Vehicle Care

. The tire has a puncture, cut, Adjust the front and rear tires to
or other damage that cannot the recommended inflation
be repaired well because of pressure on the Tire and
the size or location of the Loading Information label after
damage. the tires have been rotated. See
Tire Pressure on page 10‑57
Tire Rotation and Vehicle Load Limits on
Tires should be rotated every page 9‑16.
12 000 km (7,500 mi). See Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor
Maintenance Schedule on System. See Tire Pressure
page 11‑3. Monitor Operation on
Tires are rotated to achieve a Use this rotation pattern when page 10‑60.
uniform wear for all tires. The rotating the tires. Check that all wheel nuts are
first rotation is the most Do not include the spare tire in properly tightened. See “Wheel
important. the tire rotation. Nut Torque” under Capacities
Any time unusual wear is and Specifications on
noticed, rotate the tires as soon page 12‑2.
as possible and check the wheel
alignment. Also check for
damaged tires or wheels. See
When It Is Time for New Tires
on page 10‑65 and Wheel
Replacement on page 10‑71.
Vehicle Care 10-65
When It Is Time for New Inspection on page 10‑64 and Tire

{ WARNING Tires Rotation on page 10‑64 for
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the Factors, such as maintenance,
parts to which it is fastened, can The rubber in tires ages over time.
temperatures, driving speeds, This also applies to the spare tire,
make wheel nuts become loose vehicle loading, and road conditions
after time. The wheel could come if the vehicle has one, even if it is
affect the wear rate of the tires. never used. Multiple conditions
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure
rust or dirt from places where the
maintenance affect how fast aging
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
takes place. Tires will typically need
an emergency, a cloth or a paper to be replaced due to wear before
towel can be used; however, use they may need to be replaced
a scraper or wire brush later to due to age. Consult the tire
remove all rust or dirt. manufacturer for more information
on when tires should be replaced.
Lightly coat the center of the
wheel hub with wheel bearing
grease after a wheel change or
tire rotation to prevent corrosion
Treadwear indicators are one way to
or rust build-up. Do not get
tell when it is time for new tires.
grease on the flat wheel Treadwear indicators appear when
mounting surface or on the the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
wheel nuts or bolts. or less of tread remaining. Some
commercial truck tires may not have
treadwear indicators. See Tire
10-66 Vehicle Care
Vehicle Storage Buying New Tires If the tires have an all‐season tread
design, the TPC Spec number will
Tires age when stored normally GM has developed and matched be followed by MS for mud and
mounted on a parked vehicle. Park specific tires for the vehicle. The snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on
a vehicle that will be stored for at original equipment tires installed page 10‑50 for additional
least a month in a cool, dry, clean were designed to meet General information.
area away from direct sunlight to Motors Tire Performance Criteria
slow aging. This area should be free Specification (TPC Spec) system GM recommends replacing all the
of grease, gasoline or other rating. When replacement tires are tires at the same time. Uniform tread
substances that can deteriorate needed, GM strongly recommends depth on all tires will help to
rubber. buying tires with the same TPC maintain the performance of the
Spec rating. vehicle. Braking and handling
Parking for an extended period can
performance may be adversely
cause flat spots on the tires that GM's exclusive TPC Spec system affected if all the tires are not
may result in vibrations while considers over a dozen critical replaced at the same time. See Tire
driving. When storing a vehicle for specifications that impact the Inspection on page 10‑63 and Tire
at least a month, remove the tires or overall performance of the Rotation on page 10‑64 for
raise the vehicle to reduce the vehicle, including brake system information on proper tire rotation.
weight from the tires. performance, ride and handling,
traction control, and tire pressure
monitoring performance. GM's TPC
Spec number is molded onto the
tire's sidewall near the tire size.
Vehicle Care 10-67
{ WARNING { WARNING { WARNING

Tires could explode during Mixing tires of different sizes, Using bias-ply tires on the
improper service. Attempting brands, or types may cause loss vehicle may cause the wheel
to mount or dismount a tire of control of the vehicle, resulting rim flanges to develop cracks
could cause injury or death. in a crash or other vehicle after many miles of driving.
Only your dealer or authorized damage. Use the correct size, A tire and/or wheel could fail
tire service center should brand, and type of tires on all suddenly and cause a crash.
mount or dismount the tires. wheels. Use only radial-ply tires with
This vehicle may have a different the wheels on the vehicle.
size spare than the road tires
originally installed on the vehicle. If the vehicle tires must be replaced
When new, the vehicle included a with a tire that does not have a TPC
spare tire and wheel assembly Spec number, make sure they are
with a similar overall diameter as the same size, load range, speed
the road tires and wheels, so it is rating, and construction (radial) as
all right to drive on it. The spare the original tires.
tire was developed for use on this
vehicle and will not affect vehicle
handling.
10-68 Vehicle Care
Vehicles that have a tire pressure Different Size Tires and

monitoring system could give an
Wheels
{ WARNING
inaccurate low‐pressure warning if
non‐TPC Spec rated tires are If wheels or tires are installed that If different sized wheels are used,
installed. See Tire Pressure Monitor are a different size than the original there may not be an acceptable
System on page 10‑59. equipment wheels and tires, vehicle level of performance and safety if
performance, including its braking, tires not recommended for those
The Tire and Loading Information wheels are selected. This
label indicates the original ride and handling characteristics,
stability, and resistance to rollover increases the chance of a crash
equipment tires on the vehicle. See
may be affected. If the vehicle has and serious injury. Only use GM
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑16
electronic systems such as antilock specific wheel and tire systems
for the label location and more
information about the Tire and brakes, rollover airbags, traction developed for the vehicle, and
Loading Information label. control, and electronic stability have them properly installed by a
control, the performance of these GM certified technician.
systems can also be affected.
See Buying New Tires on
page 10‑66 and Accessories and
Modifications on page 10‑3.
Vehicle Care 10-69
Uniform Tire Quality (UTQG) system does not apply Treadwear

Grading to deep tread, winter tires, The treadwear grade is a
compact spare tires, tires with comparative rating based on the
Quality grades can be found nominal rim diameters of
where applicable on the tire wear rate of the tire when tested
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), under controlled conditions on a
sidewall between tread shoulder or to some limited-production
and maximum section width. For specified government test
tires. course. For example, a tire
example:
While the tires available on graded 150 would wear one and
Treadwear 200 Traction AA General Motors passenger cars a half (1½) times as well on the
Temperature A and light trucks may vary with government course as a tire
The following information relates respect to these grades, they graded 100. The relative
to the system developed by the must also conform to federal performance of tires depends
United States National Highway safety requirements and upon the actual conditions of
Traffic Safety Administration additional General Motors Tire their use, however, and may
(NHTSA), which grades tires Performance Criteria (TPC) depart significantly from the
by treadwear, traction, and standards. norm due to variations in driving
temperature performance. This All Passenger Car Tires Must habits, service practices
applies only to vehicles sold in Conform to Federal Safety and differences in road
the United States. The grades Requirements In Addition To characteristics and climate.
are molded on the sidewalls of These Grades.
most passenger car tires. The
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
10-70 Vehicle Care
Traction – AA, A, B, C conditions on a specified indoor Wheel Alignment and Tire

The traction grades, from laboratory test wheel. Sustained Balance
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate The tires and wheels were aligned
and C. Those grades represent and balanced at the factory to
the tire's ability to stop on wet and reduce tire life, and
provide the longest tire life and best
pavement as measured under excessive temperature can lead overall performance. Adjustments to
controlled conditions on to sudden tire failure. The grade wheel alignment and tire balancing
specified government test C corresponds to a level of will not be necessary on a regular
surfaces of asphalt and performance which all basis. However, check the
concrete. A tire marked C may passenger car tires must meet alignment if there is unusual tire
have poor traction performance. under the Federal Motor Safety wear or if the vehicle is pulling to
Standard No. 109. Grades B and one side or the other. If the vehicle
Warning: The traction grade vibrates when driving on a smooth
assigned to this tire is based on A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory road, the tires and wheels might
straight-ahead braking traction need to be rebalanced. See your
tests, and does not include test wheel than the minimum
dealer for proper diagnosis.
acceleration, cornering, required by law. Warning: The
hydroplaning, or peak traction temperature grade for this tire is
characteristics. established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
Temperature – A, B, C overloaded. Excessive speed,
The temperature grades are A underinflation, or excessive
(the highest), B, and C, loading, either separately or in
representing the tire's resistance combination, can cause heat
to the generation of heat and its buildup and possible tire failure.
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled
Vehicle Care 10-71
Wheel Replacement Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING
Replace any wheel that is bent,
cracked, or badly rusted or Using the wrong replacement { WARNING
corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
Replacing a wheel with a used
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and nuts can be dangerous. It could
one is dangerous. How it has
wheel nuts should be replaced. affect the braking and handling of
If the wheel leaks air, replace it. been used or how far it has been
the vehicle. Tires can lose air,
Some aluminum wheels can be driven may be unknown. It could
and cause loss of control, causing
repaired. See your dealer if any of fail suddenly and cause a crash.
a crash. Always use the correct
these conditions exist. When replacing wheels, use a
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
new GM original equipment
Your dealer will know the kind of nuts for replacement.
wheel.
wheel that is needed.
Each new wheel should have the Notice: The wrong wheel can
same load-carrying capacity, also cause problems with bearing
diameter, width, offset, and be life, brake cooling, speedometer
mounted the same way as the or odometer calibration,
one it replaces. headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire
Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel
or tire chain clearance to the
nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor
body and chassis.
System (TPMS) sensors with new
GM original equipment parts.
10-72 Vehicle Care
Tire Chains WARNING (Continued)

Notice: If the vehicle has
P265/70R17 size tires, use tire
If your vehicle is a Hybrid, see the chains only where legal and only
Hybrid Supplement for more Use another type of traction when necessary. Use chains that
information. device only if its manufacturer are the proper size for the tires.
recommends it for the vehicle's Install them on the rear tires only.
{ WARNING tire size combination and
road conditions. Follow that Do not use chains on the front
If the vehicle has P265/65R18 or tires.
manufacturer's instructions. To
P275/55R20 size tires, do not use avoid vehicle damage, drive slow Tighten them as tightly as
tire chains. There is not enough and readjust or remove the possible with the ends securely
clearance. Tire chains used on a traction device if it is contacting fastened. Drive slowly and follow
vehicle without the proper amount the vehicle. Do not spin the the chain manufacturer's
of clearance can cause damage wheels. instructions. If the chains contact
to the brakes, suspension, the vehicle, stop and retighten
If traction devices are used, install them. If the contact continues,
or other vehicle parts. The area
them on the rear tires. slow down until it stops. Driving
damaged by the tire chains could
cause loss of control and a crash. too fast or spinning the wheels
with chains on will damage the
(Continued) vehicle.
Vehicle Care 10-73
If a Tire Goes Flat

{ WARNING { WARNING
It is unusual for a tire to blowout
while driving, especially if the tires Driving on a flat tire will cause Lifting a vehicle and getting
are maintained properly. If air goes permanent damage to the tire. under it to do maintenance or
out of a tire, it is much more likely to Re-inflating a tire after it has repairs is dangerous without the
leak out slowly. But if there ever is a been driven on while severely appropriate safety equipment and
blowout, here are a few tips about underinflated or flat may cause a training. If a jack is provided with
what to expect and what to do: blowout and a serious crash. the vehicle, it is designed only for
If a front tire fails, the flat tire Never attempt to re-inflate a tire changing a flat tire. If it is used for
creates a drag that pulls the vehicle that has been driven on while anything else, you or others could
toward that side. Take your foot off severely underinflated or flat. be badly injured or killed if the
the accelerator pedal and grip the Have your dealer or an authorized vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
steering wheel firmly. Steer to tire service center repair or is provided with the vehicle, only
maintain lane position, and then replace the flat tire as soon as use it for changing a flat tire.
gently brake to a stop, well off the possible.
road, if possible.
A rear blowout, particularly on a hybrid supplement for more
curve, acts much like a skid and information.
may require the same correction as
used in a skid. Stop pressing the
accelerator pedal and steer to
straighten the vehicle. It may be
very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake
to a stop, well off the road,
if possible.
10-74 Vehicle Care
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),
and wheel damage by driving slowly WARNING (Continued) use the following example as a
to a level place, well off the road, guide to assist in the placement of
if possible. Turn on the hazard 3. For vehicles with the wheel blocks (A).
warning flashers. See Hazard four-wheel-drive with a
Warning Flashers on page 6‑5. N (Neutral) transfer case
position, be sure the
{ WARNING transfer case is in a drive
gear— not in N (Neutral).
Changing a tire can be 4. Turn off the engine and do
dangerous. The vehicle can slip not restart while the vehicle
off the jack and roll over or fall is raised.
causing injury or death. Find a
5. Do not allow passengers to
level place to change the tire. To remain in the vehicle.
help prevent the vehicle from A. Wheel Block
moving: 6. Place wheel blocks on both B. Flat Tire
sides of the tire at the
1. Set the parking brake firmly. opposite corner of the tire The following information explains
being changed. how to use the jack and change
2. Put the shift lever in
a tire.
P (Park).
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-75
Tire Changing Use the following tools:
Removing the Spare Tire and

Tools
The equipment needed to change a
flat tire is stored under the storage
tray, located on the driver side trim
panel, over the rear wheelhouse.
A. Jack Knob
B. Wing Nut Retaining the
Tool Bag
C. Wing Nut Retaining the
Wheel Blocks
A. Jack
2. Turn the wing nut retaining the
tool bag (B) counterclockwise to B. Wheel Blocks
remove it. C. Jack Handle
3. Turn the jack knob (A) D. Jack Handle Extensions
counterclockwise to release the E. Wheel Wrench
jack and wheel blocks from the
Regular Wheelbase Shown, bracket.
Extended Wheelbase Similar
4. Turn the wing nut retaining the
1. Remove the tray to access the wheel blocks (C)
tools by pulling up on the finger counterclockwise to remove the
depression under the jack wheel blocks and the wheel
symbol. block retainer.
10-76 Vehicle Care
To access the spare tire, refer to the G. Tire/Wheel Retainer

following graphics and instructions: H. Spare Tire (Valve Stem
Pointed Down)
I. Hoist Shaft Access Hole
J. Hoist End of Extension Tool
K. Spare Tire Lock
1. Open the hoist shaft access
door (C) on the bumper to
access the spare tire lock (K).
2. To remove the spare tire
lock (K), insert the ignition key, 3. Assemble the two jack handle
turn it clockwise and then pull it extensions (D) and wheel
straight out. wrench (E), as shown.
A. Hoist Assembly
B. Hoist Shaft
C. Hoist Shaft Access Cover/Hole
D. Jack Handle Extensions
E. Wheel Wrench
F. Hoist Cable
Vehicle Care 10-77
If the spare tire does not lower to

the ground, the secondary latch
is engaged causing the tire not
to lower. See Secondary Latch
System on page 10‑85 for more
information.
4. Insert the open end of the 7. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle
extension (J) through the hole in with some slack in the cable to
the rear bumper (I) (hoist shaft access the tire/wheel retainer.
access hole). Separate the retainer from the
Be sure the hoist end (J) of the guide pin by sliding the retainer
extension connects to the hoist up the pin while pressing down
shaft. The ribbed square end of on the latch.
the extension is used to lower
the spare tire.
5. Turn the wheel wrench
counterclockwise to lower the 6. Use the wheel wrench hook to
spare tire to the ground. pull the hoist cable closer to
Continue to turn the wheel assist in reaching the spare tire.
wrench until the spare tire can
be pulled out from under the
vehicle.
10-78 Vehicle Care
Removing the Flat Tire and If the wheel has a bolt-on hub
Installing the Spare Tire cap, loosen the plastic nut caps
by turning the wheel wrench
1. Do a safety check before counterclockwise. The plastic
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes nut caps will be retained in the
Flat on page 10‑73 for more hub cap after it is removed from
information. the wheel.
Once the retainer is separated

from the guide pin, tilt the
retainer and pull it through the
center of the wheel along with
the cable and latch.
8. Put the spare tire near the
flat tire.
2. If the vehicle has a center cap
that covers the wheel fasteners,
place the chisel end of the wheel
wrench in the slot on the wheel
and gently pry the cap out. 3. Use the wheel wrench to loosen
all the wheel nuts. Turn the
wheel wrench counterclockwise
to loosen the wheel nuts. Do not
remove the wheel nuts yet.
Vehicle Care 10-79
Front Tire Flat: If the flat tire is

on a front tire of the vehicle, use
the jack handle and only one
jack handle extension. Attach
the wheel wrench to the jack
handle extension. Attach the
jack handle to the jack (A).
Position the jack on the frame
behind the flat tire where the
Jacking Locations (Overall View) frame sections overlap. Turn the
A. Front Position wheel wrench clockwise to raise
the vehicle. Raise the vehicle far
B. Rear Position enough off the ground so there
Front Position – 2500 Models
4. Position the jack under the is enough room for the spare tire
vehicle, as shown. to clear the ground.
Front Position – 1500 Models

10-80 Vehicle Care
Rear Tire Flat: If the flat tire is

on a rear tire of the vehicle, use { WARNING
the jack handle (B) and both jack
handle extensions (C). Attach Raising the vehicle with the jack
the wheel wrench (D) to the jack improperly positioned can
handle extensions (C). Attach damage the vehicle and even
the jack handle (B) to the make the vehicle fall. To help
jack (A). Use the jacking pad avoid personal injury and vehicle
provided on the rear axle. Turn damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
the wheel wrench (D) clockwise head into the proper location
to raise the vehicle. Raise the before raising the vehicle.
vehicle far enough off the
Rear Position – All Other Models ground so there is enough room
for the spare tire to clear the
ground.
{ WARNING
Getting under a vehicle when it is
lifted on a jack is dangerous.
If the vehicle slips off the jack,
you could be badly injured or
killed. Never get under a vehicle
when it is supported only by
a jack.
Rear Position – 1500 Models 5. Remove all of the wheel nuts.
6. Take off the flat tire.
Vehicle Care 10-81
{ WARNING { WARNING
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the Never use oil or grease on bolts
parts to which it is fastened, can or nuts because the nuts might
make wheel nuts become loose come loose. The vehicle's wheel
after time. The wheel could come could fall off, causing a crash.
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any 9. Tighten each wheel nut by hand.
rust or dirt from places where the Then use the wheel wrench to
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In tighten the nuts until the wheel is
an emergency, a cloth or a paper held against the hub.
towel can be used; however, use
7. Remove any rust or dirt from the 10. Turn the wheel wrench
a scraper or wire brush later to
wheel bolts, mounting surfaces, counterclockwise to lower the
and spare wheel. remove all rust or dirt.
vehicle. Lower the jack
completely.
8. Put the wheel nuts back on with
11. Tighten the nuts firmly in a
the rounded end of the nuts
crisscross sequence as shown
toward the wheel after mounting
by turning the wheel wrench
the spare tire. clockwise.
10-82 Vehicle Care
Notice: Improperly tightened Storing a Flat or Spare Tire

wheel nuts can lead to brake and Tools
pulsation and rotor damage. To
avoid expensive brake repairs,
evenly tighten the wheel nuts in
{ WARNING
the proper sequence and to the Storing a jack, a tire, or other
proper torque specification. See equipment in the passenger
Capacities and Specifications on compartment of the vehicle could
page 12‑2 for the wheel nut
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
torque specification.
{ WARNING When reinstalling the regular wheel
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in
Wheel nuts that are improperly or and tire, also reinstall either the the proper place.
incorrectly tightened can cause center cap or the bolt-on hub cap,
the wheels to become loose or depending on which one the
vehicle has. Notice: Storing an aluminum
come off. The wheel nuts should wheel with a flat tire under your
be tightened with a torque wrench . For center caps, line up the tab vehicle for an extended period of
to the proper torque specification on the center cap with the slot in time or with the valve stem
after replacing. Follow the torque the wheel. The cap only goes in pointing up can damage the
specification supplied by the one way. Place the cap on the wheel. Always stow the wheel
aftermarket manufacturer when wheel and press until it snaps with the valve stem pointing
using accessory locking wheel into place. down and have the wheel/tire
nuts. See Capacities and . For bolt-on hub caps, line up the repaired as soon as possible.
Specifications on page 12‑2 for plastic nut caps with the wheel
original equipment wheel nut nuts and tighten clockwise by
torque specifications. hand to get them started. Then
tighten with the wheel wrench
until snug.
Vehicle Care 10-83
Store the tire under the rear of the H. Spare Tire/Flat Tire (Valve Stem Make sure the retainer is fully
vehicle in the spare tire carrier. Pointed Down) seated across the underside of
Refer to the following graphics and I. Hoist Shaft Access Hole the wheel.
instructions to help you:
J. Hoist End of Extension Tool
K. Spare Tire Lock
1. Put the tire (H) on the ground at
the rear of the vehicle with the
valve stem pointed down, and to
the rear.
3. Assemble the two jack handle

A. Hoist Assembly extensions (D) and wheel
B. Hoist Shaft wrench (E) as shown.
C. Hoist Shaft Access Cover/Hole
2. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle.
D. Jack Handle Extensions Separate the tire/wheel retainer
E. Wheel Wrench from the guide pin. Pull the pin
through the center of the wheel.
F. Hoist Cable Tilt the retainer down through
G. Tire/Wheel Retainer the center wheel opening.
10-84 Vehicle Care
To store the tools, do the following:
4. Insert the open end of the

extension (J) through the hole in
the rear bumper (I) (hoist shaft
access hole). 7. Make sure the tire is stored
5. Raise the tire part way upward. securely. Push, pull (A), and then
Make sure the retainer is seated try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire A. Wheel Blocks
in the wheel opening. moves, use the wheel wrench to B. Tool Bag with Jack Tools
6. Raise the tire fully against the tighten the cable.
C. Retaining Bracket
underside of the vehicle by 8. Reinstall the spare tire lock.
turning the wheel wrench D. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Bag
9. Reinstall the hoist shaft access
clockwise until you hear two cover. E. Jack
clicks or feel it skip twice. The F. Wing Nut Retaining Wheel
cable cannot be overtightened. Blocks
G. Jack Knob
1. Return the tools (wheel wrench,
jack handle, and jack handle
extensions) to the tool bag (B).
Vehicle Care 10-85
2. Assemble wheel blocks (A) and Secondary Latch System

jack (E) together with the
wing nut (F). This vehicle has an
underbody-mounted tire hoist
3. Position the jack (E) and wheel assembly equipped with a
blocks (A) in the driver side trim secondary latch system. It is
panel over the wheelhouse. designed to stop the spare tire from
4. Turn the jack knob (G) clockwise suddenly falling off your vehicle. For
until the jack (E) is secured tight the secondary latch to work, the
in the mounting bracket. Be sure spare must be installed with the
to position the holes in the base valve stem pointing down. See
of the jack (E) onto the pin in the “Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
mounting bracket. Tools” under Tire Changing on
6. Return the storage tray to its page 10‑75.
5. Use the retaining bracket (C) to original stored position.
fasten the tool bag (B) on the
stud and turn the wing nut (D) { WARNING
clockwise to secure.
Before beginning this procedure
read all the instructions. Failure to
read and follow the instructions
could damage the hoist assembly
and you and others could get
hurt. Read and follow the
instructions listed next.
10-86 Vehicle Care
To release the spare tire from the 3. Loosen the cable by turning the
secondary latch: wrench counterclockwise three
or four turns.
4. Repeat this procedure at least
two times. If the spare tire
lowers to the ground, continue
with Step 5 under “Removing the
Spare Tire and Tools” under Tire
Changing on page 10‑75.
5. If the spare does not lower, turn
the wrench counterclockwise
until approximately 15 cm (6 in)
A. Jack
of cable is exposed.
B. Wheel Blocks
6. Stand the wheel blocks on their
shortest ends, with the backs 7. Place the bottom edge of the
1. Check under the vehicle to see if
facing each other. jack (A) on the wheel blocks (B),
the cable end is visible. If the
separating them so that the jack
cable is not visible proceed to
is balanced securely.
Step 6.
2. If it is visible, first try to tighten
the cable by turning the wheel
wrench clockwise until you hear
two clicks or feel it skip twice.
You cannot overtighten the
cable.
Vehicle Care 10-87
12. Lower the jack by turning

the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Keep
lowering the jack until the
spare tire slides off the jack or
is hanging by the cable.
{ WARNING
8. Attach the jack handle, 9. Position the center lift point of Someone standing too close
extension, and wheel wrench to the jack under the center of the during the procedure could be
the jack and place it (with the spare tire. injured by the jack. If the spare
wheel blocks) under the vehicle 10. Turn the wrench clockwise to tire does not slide off the jack
toward the front of the rear raise the jack until it lifts the completely, make sure no one is
bumper. end fitting. behind you or on either side of
you as you pull the jack out from
11. Continue raising the jack until under the spare.
the spare tire stops moving
upward and is held firmly in
place. The secondary latch has 13. Disconnect the jack handle
released and the spare tire is from the jack and carefully
balancing on the jack. remove the jack. Use one hand
to push against the spare while
firmly pulling the jack out from
under the spare tire with the
other hand.
10-88 Vehicle Care
If the spare tire is hanging from Full-Size Spare Tire Your vehicle may have a different
the cable, insert the hoist end size spare tire than the road tires
of extension, and wheel Your vehicle, when new, had a originally installed on your vehicle.
wrench into the hoist shaft hole fully-inflated spare tire. A spare tire This spare tire was developed for
in the bumper and turn the may lose air over time, so check its use on your vehicle, so it is all right
wheel wrench counterclockwise inflation pressure regularly. See Tire to drive on it. If your vehicle has
to lower the spare the rest of Pressure on page 10‑57 and four-wheel drive and the different
the way. Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑16 size spare tire is installed, keep the
for information regarding proper tire vehicle in two-wheel drive.
14. Turn the wheel wrench in the inflation and loading your vehicle.
hoist shaft hole in the bumper For instruction on how to remove, After installing the spare tire on your
clockwise to raise the cable install or store a spare tire, see vehicle, you should stop as soon as
back up if the cable is hanging “Removing the Flat Tire and possible and make sure the spare
under the vehicle. Installing the Spare” and “Storing a tire is correctly inflated. Have the
Have the hoist assembly inspected Flat or Spare Tire and Tools” under damaged or flat road tire repaired or
as soon as you can. You will not be Tire Changing on page 10‑75. replaced as soon as you can and
able to store a spare or flat tire installed back onto your vehicle.
Notice: If the vehicle has This way, the spare tire will be
using the hoist assembly until it has four-wheel drive and a different
been inspected and/or replaced. available in case you need it again.
size spare tire is installed, do not
To continue changing the flat tire, drive in four-wheel drive until Do not mix tires and wheels of
see “Removing the Flat Tire and the flat tire is repaired and/or different sizes, because they will not
Installing the Spare Tire” under Tire replaced. The vehicle could be fit. Keep your spare tire and its
Changing on page 10‑75. damaged and the repairs would wheel together. If your vehicle has a
not be covered by the warranty. spare tire that does not match your
Never use four-wheel drive when vehicle's original road tires and
a different size spare tire is wheels in size and type, do not
installed on the vehicle. include the spare in the tire rotation.
Vehicle Care 10-89
Jump Starting 2. Get the vehicles close enough

WARNING (Continued) so the jumper cables can reach,
For more information about the but be sure the vehicles are not
vehicle battery, see Battery on If you do not follow these steps touching each other. If they
page 10‑28. exactly, some or all of these are, it could cause a ground
things can hurt you. connection you do not want. You
If the vehicle is a Hybrid, see the
Hybrid manual for more information. would not be able to start your
Notice: Ignoring these steps vehicle, and the bad grounding
If the vehicle's battery (or batteries) could result in costly damage to could damage the electrical
has run down, you may want to use the vehicle that would not be systems.
another vehicle and some jumper covered by the warranty.
cables to start your vehicle. Be sure To avoid the possibility of the
to use the following steps to do it Trying to start the vehicle by vehicles rolling, set the parking
safely. pushing or pulling it will not brake firmly on both vehicles
work, and it could damage the involved in the jump start
procedure. Put the automatic
{ WARNING vehicle.
transmission in P (Park) or a
1. Check the other vehicle. It must manual transmission in
Batteries can hurt you. They can have a 12-volt battery with a N (Neutral) before setting the
be dangerous because: negative ground system. parking brake. If the vehicle has
. They contain acid that can Notice: Only use a vehicle that a four-wheel-drive transfer case
burn you. has a 12-volt system with a with a N (Neutral) position, be
. They contain gas that can negative ground for jump sure the transfer case is in a
explode or ignite. starting. If the other vehicle does drive gear, not in N (Neutral).
not have a 12-volt system with a
. They contain enough negative ground, both vehicles
electricity to burn you. can be damaged.
(Continued)
10-90 Vehicle Care
Notice: If any accessories are left terminal. You should always use See Engine Compartment
on or plugged in during the jump these remote terminals instead Overview on page 10‑6 for more
starting procedure, they could be of the terminals on the battery. information on the location of the
damaged. The repairs would not If the vehicle has a remote remote positive (+) and remote
be covered by the vehicle positive (+) terminal, it is located negative (−) terminals.
warranty. Whenever possible, under a red plastic cover at the
turn off or unplug all accessories
on either vehicle when jump
positive battery post. To uncover { WARNING
the remote positive (+) terminal,
starting the vehicle. open the red plastic cover. An electric fan can start up even
3. Turn off the ignition on both when the engine is not running
vehicles. Unplug unnecessary and can injure you. Keep hands,
accessories plugged into the clothing and tools away from any
accessory power outlets. Turn underhood electric fan.
off the radio and all the lamps
that are not needed. This avoids
sparks and helps save both
batteries. And it could save the { WARNING
radio!
Using an open flame near a
4. Open the hood on the other battery can cause battery gas to
vehicle and locate the explode. People have been hurt
positive (+) and negative (−) doing this, and some have been
terminal locations on that blinded. Use a flashlight if you
vehicle. The remote negative (−) terminal need more light.
Your vehicle has a remote is a stud located on the right (Continued)
positive (+) jump starting front of the engine, where the
terminal and a remote negative battery cable attaches.
negative (−) jump starting
Vehicle Care 10-91
5. Check that the jumper cables do

WARNING (Continued) not have loose or missing
insulation. If they do, you could
Be sure the battery has enough get a shock. The vehicles could
water. You do not need to add be damaged too.
water to the battery installed in
your new vehicle. But if a battery Before you connect the cables,
has filler caps, be sure the right here are some basic things you
amount of fluid is there. If it is low, should know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) or to a remote
add water to take care of that
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
first. If you do not, explosive gas
has one. Negative (−) will go to a
could be present. heavy, unpainted metal engine
Battery fluid contains acid that part or to a remote negative (−) 6. Connect the red positive (+)
can burn you. Do not get it on terminal if the vehicle has one. cable to the positive (+) terminal
you. If you accidentally get it in Do not connect positive (+) to of the vehicle with the dead
your eyes or on your skin, flush negative (−) or you will get a battery. Use a remote
the place with water and get short that would damage the positive (+) terminal if the
medical help immediately. battery and maybe other parts vehicle has one.
too. And do not connect the 7. Do not let the other end touch
negative (−) cable to the metal. Connect it to the
negative (−) terminal on the dead positive (+) terminal of the
{ WARNING battery because this can cause good battery. Use a remote
sparks. positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
Fans or other moving engine
parts can injure you badly. Keep has one.
your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
10-92 Vehicle Care
8. Now connect the black 10. Now start the vehicle with the
negative (−) cable to the good battery and run the
negative (−) terminal of the engine for a while.
good battery. Use a remote 11. Try to start the vehicle that had
negative (−) terminal if the the dead battery. If it will not
vehicle has one. start after a few tries, it
Do not let the other end touch probably needs service.
anything until the next step. The Notice: If the jumper cables are
other end of the negative (−) connected or removed in the
cable does not go to the dead wrong order, electrical shorting
battery. It goes to a heavy, may occur and damage the
unpainted metal engine part or vehicle. The repairs would not be
to the remote negative (−) Jumper Cable Removal
terminal on the vehicle with the Always connect and remove the A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine
dead battery. jumper cables in the correct Part or Remote Negative (−)
9. Connect the other end of the order, making sure that the Terminal
negative (−) cable to the remote cables do not touch each other or B. Good Battery or Remote
negative (−) terminal, on the other metal. Positive (+) and Remote
vehicle with the dead battery. Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote
Positive (+) Terminal
Vehicle Care 10-93
To disconnect the jumper cables Towing Recreational Vehicle

from both vehicles do the following:
Towing
1. Disconnect the black Towing the Vehicle If the vehicle has a hybrid engine,
negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the bad battery. Notice: To avoid damage, the see the hybrid manual for more
disabled vehicle should be towed information.
2. Disconnect the black with all four wheels off the
negative (−) cable from the Recreational vehicle towing means
ground. Care must be taken with towing the vehicle behind another
vehicle with the good battery. vehicles that have low ground vehicle – such as behind a motor
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) clearance and/or special home. The two most common types
cable from the vehicle with the equipment. Always flatbed of recreational vehicle towing are
good battery. on a car carrier. known as dinghy towing and dolly
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) Consult your dealer or a towing. Dinghy towing is towing the
cable from the other vehicle. professional towing service if the vehicle with all four wheels on the
disabled vehicle must be towed. ground. Dolly towing is towing the
5. Return the remote positive (+) See Roadside Assistance Program vehicle with two wheels on the
terminal cover, if the vehicle has (U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8 or ground and two wheels up on a
one, to its original position. Roadside Assistance Program device known as a dolly.
(Mexico) on page 13‑10.
To tow the vehicle behind another
vehicle for recreational purposes,
such as behind a motor home, see
“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in this
section.
10-94 Vehicle Care
Here are some important things to Dinghy Towing Two-wheel-drive vehicles and
consider before recreational vehicle four-wheel drive vehicles with a
towing: Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles and single speed automatic transfer
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles with a case should not be towed with all
. What is the towing capacity of Single Speed Automatic
the towing vehicle? Be sure to four wheels on the ground.
Transfer Case Two-wheel-drive transmissions have
read the tow vehicle
manufacturer's no provisions for internal lubrication
recommendations. while being towed. Four-wheel drive
vehicles with a single speed
. What is the distance that will be automatic transfer case have no
travelled? Some vehicles have neutral position and will spin the
restrictions on how far and how transmission when the rear
long they can tow. wheels turn.
. Is the proper towing equipment
going to be used? See your
dealer or trailering professional
for additional advice and
equipment recommendations.
. Is the vehicle ready to be Notice: If the vehicle is towed
towed? Just as preparing the with all four wheels on the
vehicle for a long trip, make sure ground, the drivetrain
the vehicle is prepared to be components could be damaged.
towed. The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Do not
tow the vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground.
Vehicle Care 10-95
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles with a 3. Securely attach the vehicle 5. Release the parking brake only
Two Speed Automatic being towed to the tow vehicle. after the vehicle being towed is
Transfer Case firmly attached to the towing
{ WARNING vehicle.
6. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF
Shifting a four-wheel-drive and remove the key — the
vehicle's transfer case into steering wheel will still turn.
N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle
to roll even if the transmission is After towing, see “Shifting Out of
Neutral” under Four-Wheel Drive
in P (Park). The driver or others
(Single Speed Automatic Transfer
could be injured. Make sure the
Case) on page 9‑42 or Four-Wheel
parking brake is firmly set before
Drive (Two Speed Automatic
the transfer case is shifted to Transfer Case) on page 9‑37 for the
N (Neutral). proper procedure to take the vehicle
out of the Neutral position.
Use the following procedure to 4. Shift the transfer case to
dinghy tow a four-wheel drive N (Neutral). See See
vehicle with a two speed automatic Four-Wheel Drive (Single Speed
transfer case: Automatic Transfer Case) on
page 9‑42 or Four-Wheel Drive
1. Position the vehicle being towed (Two Speed Automatic Transfer
behind the tow vehicle and shift Case) on page 9‑37.
the transmission to P (Park).
2. Turn the engine off and firmly set
the parking brake.
10-96 Vehicle Care
Dolly Towing – Front Towing warranty. Never tow the vehicle Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles with a
(Front Wheels Off the Ground) with the rear wheels on the Two Speed Automatic
ground. Transfer Case
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles and
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles with a Two-wheel-drive vehicles and
Single Speed Automatic four-wheel drive vehicles with a
Transfer Case single speed automatic transfer
case should not be towed with the
rear wheels on the ground.
Two-wheel-drive transmissions have
no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed. Four-wheel drive
vehicles with a single speed
automatic transfer case have no
neutral position and will spin the
transmission when the rear
wheels turn.
Use the following procedure to dolly
To dolly tow a two‐wheel‐drive tow a four-wheel drive vehicle from
vehicle or a four-wheel drive vehicle the front:
with a single speed automatic
Notice: If a two-wheel drive 1. Attach the dolly to the tow
transfer case, the vehicle must be
vehicle or a four-wheel drive vehicle following the dolly
towed with the rear wheels on the
vehicle with a single speed manufacturer's instructions.
dolly. See “Rear Towing (Rear
automatic transfer case is towed Wheels Off the Ground)” later in this 2. Drive the front wheels onto the
with the rear wheels on the section for more information. dolly.
ground, the transmission could
3. Shift the transmission to
be damaged. The repairs would
P (Park).
4. Firmly set the parking brake.
Vehicle Care 10-97
7. Secure the vehicle to the dolly Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off
{ WARNING following the manufacturer's the Ground)
instructions.
Shifting a four-wheel-drive
vehicle's transfer case into 8. Release the parking brake only
N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle after the vehicle being towed is
to roll even if the transmission is firmly attached to the towing
in P (Park). The driver or others vehicle.
could be injured. Make sure the 9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
parking brake is firmly set before After towing, see “Shifting Out of
the transfer case is shifted to N (Neutral)” under Four-Wheel Drive
N (Neutral). (Single Speed Automatic Transfer
5. Use an adequate clamping Drive (Two Speed Automatic
device designed for towing to Transfer Case) on page 9‑37.
ensure that the front wheels are Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles and
locked into the straight position. Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles with a
6. Shift the transfer case to Single Speed Automatic
N (Neutral). See Four-Wheel Transfer Case
Drive (Single Speed Automatic Use the following procedure to dolly
Transfer Case) on page 9‑42 or tow the vehicle from the rear:
Four-Wheel Drive (Two Speed
Automatic Transfer Case) on 1. Attach the dolly to the tow
page 9‑37. vehicle following the dolly
manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the
dolly.
10-98 Vehicle Care
3. Firmly set the parking brake. Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles with a

See Parking Brake on Two Speed Automatic { WARNING
page 9‑46. Transfer Case
Shifting a four-wheel-drive
4. Put the transmission in P (Park). Use the following procedure to dolly vehicle's transfer case into
tow a four-wheel drive vehicle from N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle
5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly
the rear: to roll even if the transmission is
following the manufacturer's
instructions. 1. Attach the dolly to the tow in P (Park). The driver or others
vehicle following the dolly could be injured. Make sure the
6. Use an adequate clamping
manufacturer's instructions. parking brake is firmly set before
device designed for towing to
ensure that the front wheels are 2. Drive the rear wheels onto the the transfer case is shifted to
locked into the straight position. dolly. N (Neutral).
7. For four-wheel drive vehicles 3. Firmly set the parking brake.
with a single speed automatic See Parking Brake on 7. Shift the transfer case to
transfer case, shift the transfer page 9‑46. N (Neutral). See Four-Wheel
case into Two-Wheel Drive High. Drive (Single Speed Automatic
4. Put the transmission in P (Park). Transfer Case) on page 9‑42 or
See Four-Wheel Drive (Single
Speed Automatic Transfer Case) 5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly Four-Wheel Drive (Two Speed
on page 9‑42 or Four-Wheel following the manufacturer's Automatic Transfer Case) on
Drive (Two Speed Automatic instructions. page 9‑37.
Transfer Case) on page 9‑37. 6. Use an adequate clamping 8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. device designed for towing to After towing, see “Shifting Out of
ensure that the front wheels are N (Neutral)” under Four-Wheel Drive
locked into the straight position. (Single Speed Automatic Transfer
Drive (Two Speed Automatic
Transfer Case) on page 9‑37.
Vehicle Care 10-99
Appearance Care Notice: Avoid using high industrial chimneys, etc., can
pressure washes closer than damage the vehicle's finish if they
30 cm (12 in) to the surface of the remain on painted surfaces. Wash
Exterior Care vehicle. Use of power washers the vehicle as soon as possible.
Washing the Vehicle exceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) If necessary, use non-abrasive
can result in damage or removal cleaners that are marked safe for
To preserve the vehicle's finish, of paint and decals. painted surfaces to remove foreign
wash it often and out of direct matter.
sunlight. Rinse the vehicle well, before
washing and after, to remove all Occasional hand waxing or mild
Notice: Do not use petroleum cleaning agents completely. If they polishing should be done to remove
based, acidic, or abrasive are allowed to dry on the surface, residue from the paint finish. See
cleaning agents as they can they could stain. your dealer for approved cleaning
damage the vehicle's paint, metal, products.
or plastic parts. If damage Dry the finish with a soft, clean
occurs, it would not be covered chamois or an all-cotton towel to Notice: Machine compounding or
by the vehicle's warranty. avoid surface scratches and water aggressive polishing on a
Approved cleaning products can spotting. basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
be obtained from your dealer. may damage it. Use only
Finish Care non-abrasive waxes and polishes
Follow all manufacturer
directions regarding correct Application of aftermarket clearcoat that are made for a basecoat/
product usage, necessary safety sealant/wax materials is not clearcoat paint finish on the
precautions, and appropriate recommended. If painted surfaces vehicle.
disposal of any vehicle care are damaged, see your dealer to To keep the paint finish looking new,
product. have the damage assessed and keep the vehicle garaged or
repaired. Foreign materials such as covered whenever possible.
calcium chloride and other salts, ice
melting agents, road oil and tar, tree
sap, bird droppings, chemicals from
10-100 Vehicle Care
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Windshield and Wiper Blades Tires

Parts
Clean the outside of the windshield Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to
Regularly clean bright metal parts with glass cleaner. clean the tires.
with water or chrome polish on
Clean rubber blades using lint-free Notice: Using petroleum-based
chrome or stainless steel trim,
cloth or paper towel soaked with tire dressing products on the
if necessary.
windshield washer fluid or a mild vehicle may damage the paint
For aluminum, never use auto or detergent. Wash the windshield finish and/or tires. When applying
chrome polish, steam, or caustic thoroughly when cleaning the a tire dressing, always wipe off
soap to clean. A coating of blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and any overspray from all painted
wax, rubbed to high polish, is a buildup of vehicle wash/wax surfaces on the vehicle.
recommended for all bright metal treatments may cause wiper
parts. streaking. Wheels and Trim — Aluminum
or Chrome
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/ Replace the wiper blades if they
Lenses and Emblems are worn or damaged. Damage can Use a soft, clean cloth with mild
be caused by extreme dusty soap and water to clean the wheels.
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun, After rinsing thoroughly with clean
soft cloth, and a car washing soap snow and ice. water, dry with a soft, clean towel.
to clean exterior lamps and lenses. A wax may then be applied.
Follow instructions under "Washing Weatherstrips
Keep the wheels clean using a soft,
the Vehicle" later in this section. Apply silicone grease on clean cloth with mild soap and
weatherstrips to make them last water. Rinse with clean water. After
longer, seal better, and not stick or rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft,
squeak. See Recommended Fluids clean towel. A wax may then be
and Lubricants on page 11‑12. applied.
Vehicle Care 10-101
Notice: Chrome wheels and other Steering, Suspension, and Underbody Maintenance
chrome trim may be damaged if Chassis Components Use plain water to flush dirt and
the vehicle is not washed after
Visually inspect front and rear debris from the vehicle's underbody.
driving on roads that have been
suspension and steering system for Your dealer or an underbody car
sprayed with magnesium,
damaged, loose, or missing parts or washing system can do this. If not
calcium, or sodium chloride.
signs of wear. Inspect the power removed, rust and corrosion can
These chlorides are used on
steering for proper hook-up, binding, develop.
roads for conditions such as ice
and dust. Always wash the leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually
check constant velocity joints,
Sheet Metal Damage
chrome with soap and water after
exposure. rubber boots, and axle seals for If the vehicle is damaged and
leaks. requires sheet metal repair or
Notice: To avoid surface damage, replacement, make sure the body
do not use strong soaps, Body Component Lubrication repair shop applies anti-corrosion
chemicals, abrasive polishes, Lubricate all key lock cylinders, material to parts repaired or
cleaners, brushes, or cleaners hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and replaced to restore corrosion
that contain acid on aluminum or steel fuel door hinge unless the protection.
chrome-plated wheels. Use only components are plastic. Applying
approved cleaners. Also, never Original manufacturer replacement
silicone grease on weatherstrips parts will provide the corrosion
drive a vehicle with aluminum or with a clean cloth will make them
chrome-plated wheels through an protection while maintaining the
last longer, seal better, and not stick vehicle warranty.
automatic car wash that uses or squeak.
silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes. Damage could occur
and the repairs would not be
10-102 Vehicle Care
Finish Damage Use a soft bristle brush to remove To prevent damage, do not clean
dust from knobs and crevices on the the interior using the following
Quickly repair minor chips and
instrument cluster. Using a mild cleaners or techniques:
scratches with touch-up materials
soap solution, immediately remove . Never use a razor or any other
available from your dealer to avoid
hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect sharp object to remove a soil
corrosion. Larger areas of finish
repellant from all interior surfaces or from any interior surface.
damage can be corrected in your
permanent damage may result.
dealer's body and paint shop. . Never use a brush with stiff
Your dealer may have products for bristles.
Chemical Paint Spotting cleaning the interior. Use cleaners
Airborne pollutants can fall upon specifically designed for the . Never rub any surface
and attack painted vehicle surfaces surfaces being cleaned to prevent aggressively or with excessive
causing blotchy, ring-shaped permanent damage. To prevent pressure.
discolorations, and small, irregular overspray, apply all cleaners directly . Do not use laundry detergents or
dark spots etched into the paint to the cleaning cloth. Cleaners dishwashing soaps with
surface. should be removed quickly. Never degreasers. For liquid cleaners,
allow cleaners to remain on the use approximately 20 drops
Interior Care surface being cleaned for extended per 3.78L (1 gal) of water.
periods of time. A concentrated soap solution will
To prevent dirt particle abrasions, leave a residue that creates
regularly clean the vehicle's interior. Cleaners may contain solvents that
can become concentrated in the streaks and attracts dirt. Do not
Immediately remove any soils. Note use solutions that contain strong
that newspapers or dark garments interior. Before using cleaners, read
and adhere to all safety instructions or caustic soap.
that can transfer color to home
furnishings can also permanently on the label. While cleaning the . Do not heavily saturate the
transfer color to the vehicle's interior, maintain adequate upholstery when cleaning.
interior. ventilation by opening the doors
and windows.
. Do not use solvents or cleaners
containing solvents.
Vehicle Care 10-103
Interior Glass Fabric/Carpet 3. Start on the outside edge of the

soil and gently rub toward the
To clean, use a terry cloth fabric Start by vacuuming the surface
center. Rotate the cleaning cloth
dampened with water. Wipe droplets using a soft brush attachment. If a
to a clean area frequently to
left behind with a clean dry cloth. rotating brush attachment is being
prevent forcing the soil in to the
Commercial glass cleaners may be used during vacuuming, only use it
fabric.
used, if necessary, after cleaning on the floor carpet. Before cleaning,
the interior glass with plain water. gently remove as much of the soil 4. Continue gently rubbing the
as possible using one of the soiled area until there is no
Notice: To prevent scratching,
following techniques: longer any color transfer from
never use abrasive cleaners on
the soil to the cleaning cloth.
automotive glass. Abrasive . Gently blot liquids with a paper
cleaners or aggressive cleaning towel. Continue blotting until no 5. If the soil is not completely
may damage the rear window more soil can be removed. removed, use a mild soap
defogger. solution followed only by club
. For solid soils, remove as much
soda or plain water.
as possible prior to vacuuming.
If the soil is not completely
To clean:
removed, it may be necessary to
1. Saturate a clean lint-free use a commercial upholstery
colorfast cloth with water or club cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small
soda. Microfiber cloth is hidden area for colorfastness before
recommended to prevent lint using a commercial upholstery
transfer to the fabric or carpet. cleaner or spot lifter. If ring
2. Remove excess moisture by formation occurs, clean the entire
gently wringing until water does fabric or carpet.
not drip from the cleaning cloth. Following the cleaning process, a
paper towel can be used to blot
excess moisture.
10-104 Vehicle Care
Instrument Panel, Leather, Do not use cleaners that increase Wood Panels
Vinyl, & Other Plastic Surfaces gloss, especially on the instrument
Use a clean cloth moistened in
panel. Reflected glare can decrease
Use a soft microfiber cloth warm, soapy water (use mild dish
visibility through the windshield
dampened with water to remove washing soap). Dry the wood
under certain conditions.
dust and loose dirt. For a more immediately with a clean cloth.
thorough cleaning, use a soft Notice: Use of air fresheners may
microfiber cloth dampened with a cause permanent damage to Speaker Covers
mild soap solution. plastics and painted surfaces. Vacuum around a speaker cover
If an air freshener comes in gently, so that the speaker will not
Notice: Soaking or saturating contact with any plastic or
leather, especially perforated be damaged. Clean spots with just
painted surface in the vehicle, water and mild soap.
leather, as well as other interior blot immediately and clean with a
surfaces, may cause permanent soft cloth dampened with a mild
damage. Wipe excess moisture soap solution. Damage caused by
from these surfaces after air fresheners would not be
cleaning and allow them to dry covered by the vehicle warranty.
naturally. Never use heat, steam,
spot lifters or spot removers. Do
not use cleaners that contain
silicone or wax-based products.
Cleaners containing these
solvents can permanently change
the appearance and feel of leather
or soft trim and are not
recommended.
Vehicle Care 10-105
Care of Safety Belts Floor Mats Use the following guidelines for
proper floor mat usage.
Keep belts clean and dry.
{ WARNING . The original equipment floor
{ WARNING If a floor mat is the wrong size or
mats were designed for the
vehicle. If the floor mats need
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. is not properly installed, it can replacing, it is recommended
It may severely weaken them. In interfere with the pedals. that GM certified floor mats be
a crash, they might not be able to Interference with the pedals can purchased. Non-GM floor mats
provide adequate protection. cause unintended acceleration may not fit properly and may
Clean safety belts only with mild and/or increased stopping interfere with the pedals. Always
soap and lukewarm water. distance which can cause a crash check that the floor mats do not
and injury. Make sure the floor interfere with the pedals.
mat does not interfere with the . Use the floor mat with the
pedals. correct side up. Do not turn
it over.
. Do not place anything on top of
the driver side floor mat.
. Use only a single floor mat on
the driver side.
. Do not place one floor mat on
top of another.
10-106 Vehicle Care
2 NOTES
Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and General Information Your dealer recognizes the

importance of providing
Maintenance Your vehicle is an important
investment. This section describes
competitively priced maintenance
and repair services. With trained
the required maintenance for the technicians, the dealer is the place
General Information vehicle. Follow this schedule to help for routine maintenance such as oil
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 protect against major repair changes and tire rotations and
expenses resulting from neglect or additional maintenance items like
Maintenance Schedule inadequate maintenance. It may tires, brakes, batteries, and wiper
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3 also help to maintain the value of blades.
the vehicle if it is sold. It is the
Special Application Services Notice: Damage caused by
responsibility of the owner to have
Special Application improper maintenance can lead to
all required maintenance performed.
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 costly repairs and may not be
Your dealer has trained technicians covered by the vehicle warranty.
Additional Maintenance who can perform required Maintenance intervals, checks,
and Care maintenance using genuine inspections, recommended fluids,
Additional Maintenance replacement parts. They have and lubricants are important to
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 up‐to‐date tools and equipment for keep the vehicle in good working
fast and accurate diagnostics. condition.
Recommended Fluids, Many dealers have extended
Lubricants, and Parts The Tire Rotation and Required
evening and Saturday hours,
Recommended Fluids and Services are the responsibility of the
courtesy transportation, and online
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 vehicle owner. It is recommended to
scheduling to assist with service
Maintenance Replacement have your dealer perform these
needs.
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14 services every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.
Proper vehicle maintenance helps to
Maintenance Records keep the vehicle in good working
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-15 condition, improves fuel economy,
and reduces vehicle emissions.
11-2 Service and Maintenance
Because of the way people use The Additional Required

vehicles, maintenance needs vary. Services ‐ Severe are for vehicles { WARNING
There may need to be more that are:
frequent checks and services. Performing maintenance work can
. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic be dangerous and can cause
The Additional Required in hot weather.
Services ‐ Normal are for serious injury. Perform
vehicles that: . Mainly driven in hilly or maintenance work only if the
mountainous terrain. required information, proper tools,
. Carry passengers and cargo and equipment are available.
within recommended limits on . Frequently towing a trailer.
If they are not, see your dealer to
the Tire and Loading Information . Used for high speed or have a trained technician do the
label. See Vehicle Load Limits competitive driving.
on page 9‑16. work. See Doing Your Own
. Used for taxi, police, or delivery Service Work on page 10‑4.
. Are driven on reasonable road service.
surfaces within legal driving
limits. Refer to the information in the
Maintenance Schedule Additional
. Use the recommended fuel. See Required Services ‐ Severe chart.
Recommended Fuel on
page 9‑63.
Refer to the information in the
Maintenance Schedule Additional
Required Services ‐ Normal chart.
Maintenance Engine Oil Change Tire Rotation and Required

When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL Services Every 12 000 km/
Schedule SOON message displays, have the 7,500 mi
Owner Checks and Services engine oil and filter changed within Rotate the tires, if recommended for
the next 1 000 km/600 mi. If driven the vehicle, and perform the
At Each Fuel Stop under the best conditions, the following services. See Tire
. Check the engine oil level. See engine oil life system might not Rotation on page 10‑64.
Engine Oil on page 10‑7. indicate the need for vehicle service
for more than a year. The engine oil
. Check engine oil level and oil
Once a Month and filter must be changed at least life percentage. If needed,
once a year and the oil life system change engine oil and filter, and
. Check the tire inflation
must be reset. Your trained dealer reset oil life system. See Engine
pressures. See Tire Pressure on
technician can perform this work. Oil on page 10‑7 and Engine Oil
page 10‑57.
If the engine oil life system is reset Life System on page 10‑10.
. Inspect the tires for wear. See accidentally, service the vehicle . Check engine coolant level. See
Tire Inspection on page 10‑63. within 5 000 km/3,000 mi since the Engine Coolant on page 10‑17.
. Check the windshield washer last service. Reset the oil life . Check windshield washer fluid
fluid level. See Washer Fluid on system when the oil is changed.
level. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑25. See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑25.
page 10‑10.
. Visually inspect windshield wiper
blades for wear, cracking,
or contamination. See Exterior
Care on page 10‑99. Replace
worn or damaged wiper blades.
See Wiper Blade Replacement
on page 10‑34.

. Check tire inflation pressures. . Visually inspect fuel system for . Check parking brake and
See Tire Pressure on damage or leaks. automatic transmission park
page 10‑57. . Visually inspect exhaust system mechanism. See Park Brake and
. Inspect tire wear. See Tire and nearby heat shields for P (Park) Mechanism Check on
Inspection on page 10‑63. loose or damaged parts. page 10‑33.
. Visually check for fluid leaks. . Lubricate body components. See
. Check accelerator pedal for
Exterior Care on page 10‑99. damage, high effort, or binding.
. Inspect engine air cleaner filter. Replace if needed.
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on . Check starter switch. See Starter
page 10‑14. Switch Check on page 10‑32.
. Visually inspect gas strut for
signs of wear, cracks, or other
. Inspect brake system. . Check automatic transmission damage. Check the hold open
. Visually inspect steering, shift lock control function. See ability of the strut. See your
suspension, and chassis Automatic Transmission Shift dealer if service is required.
components for damaged, loose, Lock Control Function Check on .
page 10‑32. Inspect sunroof track and seal,
or missing parts or signs of if equipped. See Sunroof on
wear. See Exterior Care on . Check ignition transmission lock. page 2‑25.
page 10‑99. See Ignition Transmission Lock
Check on page 10‑33.
. Check hybrid low pressure
. Check restraint system coolant level, if equipped.
components. See Safety System
Check on page 3‑29.

Footnotes — Maintenance d) Or every five years, whichever

Schedule Additional Required comes first. See Cooling System on
Services — Normal page 10‑16.
a) Check all fuel and vapor lines e) Or every 10 years, whichever
and hoses for proper hook‐up, comes first. Inspect for fraying,
routing, and condition. Check that excessive cracking, or damage;
the purge valve, if the vehicle has replace, if needed.
one, works properly. Replace as
needed.
b) Or every four years, whichever
comes first.
c) Do not directly power wash the
transfer case output seals. High
pressure water can overcome the
seals and contaminate the transfer
case fluid. Contaminated fluid will
decrease the life of the transfer
case and should be replaced.

Footnotes — Maintenance d) Or every five years, whichever Special Application

Schedule Additional Required comes first. See Cooling System on
Services — Severe page 10‑16. Services
a) Check all fuel and vapor lines e) Or every 10 years, whichever . Severe Commercial Use
and hoses for proper hook‐up, comes first. Inspect for fraying, Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassis
routing, and condition. Check that excessive cracking, or damage; components every 5 000 km/
the purge valve, if the vehicle has replace, if needed. 3,000 mi.
one, works properly. Replace as . Have underbody flushing service
needed.
performed once a year.
b) Or every four years, whichever
comes first.
c) Do not directly power wash the
transfer case output seals. High
pressure water can overcome the
seals and contaminate the transfer
case fluid. Contaminated fluid will
decrease the life of the transfer
case and should be replaced.
Additional Battery Brakes

The battery supplies power to start Brakes stop the vehicle and are
Maintenance and Care the engine and operate any crucial to safe driving.
Your vehicle is an important additional electrical accessories. . Signs of brake wear may include
investment and caring for it properly . To avoid break‐down or failure to chirping, grinding, or squealing
may help to avoid future costly start the vehicle, maintain a noises, or difficulty stopping.
repairs. To maintain vehicle battery with full cranking power. . Trained dealer technicians have
performance, additional
maintenance services may be . Trained dealer technicians have access to tools and equipment
required. It is recommended that the diagnostic equipment to test to inspect the brakes and
your dealer perform these the battery and ensure that the recommend quality parts
services — their trained dealer connections and cables are engineered for the vehicle.
technicians know your vehicle best. corrosion‐free.
Fluids
Your dealer can also perform a Belts
thorough assessment with a Proper fluid levels and approved
multi‐point inspection to recommend . Belts may need replacing if they fluids protect the vehicle’s
when your vehicle may need squeak or show signs of systems and components. See
attention. The following list is cracking or splitting. Recommended Fluids and
intended to explain the services and . Trained dealer technicians can Lubricants on page 11‑12 for GM
conditions to look for that may inspect the belts and approved fluids.
indicate services are required. recommend replacement when . Engine oil and windshield
necessary. washer fluid levels should be
checked at every fuel fill.
. Instrument cluster lights may
come on to indicate that fluids
may be low and need to be
filled.
Hoses Shocks and Struts Tires

Hoses transport fluids and should Shocks and struts help aid in control Tires need to be properly inflated,
be regularly inspected to ensure for a smoother ride. rotated, and balanced. Maintaining
that there are no cracks or leaks. . Signs of wear may include the tires can save money, fuel, and
With a multi‐point inspection, your steering wheel vibration, bounce/ can reduce the risk of tire failure.
dealer can inspect the hoses and sway while braking, longer . Signs that the tires need to be
advise if replacement is needed. stopping distance, or uneven replaced include three or more
Lamps tire wear. visible treadwear indicators; cord
. As part of the multi‐point or fabric showing through the
Properly working headlamps, rubber; cracks or cuts in the
taillamps, and brake lamps are inspection, trained dealer
technicians can visually inspect tread or sidewall; or a bulge or
important to see and be seen on split in the tire.
the road. the shocks and struts for signs
of leaking, blown seals, . Trained dealer technicians can
. Signs that the headlamps need or damage, and can advise inspect and recommend the right
attention include dimming, failure when service is needed. tires. Your dealer can also
to light, cracking, or damage. provide tire/wheel balancing
The brake lamps need to be services to ensure smooth
checked periodically to ensure vehicle operation at all speeds.
that they light when braking. Your dealer sells and services
. With a multi‐point inspection, name brand tires.
your dealer can check the lamps
and note any concerns.
Vehicle Care Windshield Wiper Blades

To help keep the vehicle looking like For safety, appearance, and the Wiper blades need to be cleaned
new, vehicle care products are best viewing, keep the windshield and kept in good condition to
available from your dealer. For clean and clear. provide a clear view.
information on how to clean and . Signs of damage include . Signs of wear include streaking,
protect the vehicle’s interior and scratches, cracks, and chips. skipping across the windshield,
exterior, see Interior Care on and worn or split rubber.
. Trained dealer technicians can
page 10‑102 and Exterior Care on
page 10‑99. inspect the windshield and . Trained dealer technicians can
recommend proper replacement check the wiper blades and
Wheel Alignment if needed. replace them when needed.
Wheel alignment is critical for
ensuring that the tires deliver
optimal wear and performance.
. Signs that the alignment may
need to be adjusted include
pulling, improper vehicle
handling, or unusual tire wear.
. Your dealer has the required
equipment to ensure proper
wheel alignment.
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specfication, or equivalent, of
Engine Oil the proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend is
recommended. See Engine Oil on page 10‑7.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
Engine Coolant
See Engine Coolant on page 10‑17.
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 12377967, in
Hydraulic Brake System
Canada 89021320).
Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protection
Windshield Washer
requirements.
Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 89021184, in Canada 89021186).
Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Key Lock Cylinders
Canada 10953474).
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
Chassis Lubrication
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Front Axle (1500 Series Vehicles with SAE 80W-90 Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021671, in
Four-Wheel Drive) Canada 89021672).
Front Axle (2500 Series Vehicles with SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021677, in
Four-Wheel Drive) Canada 89021678).
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021677, in
Rear Axle
Canada 89021678).
Transfer Case (Four-Wheel Drive) DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Front Axle Propshaft Spline or
Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant (GM Part No. 12345879, in
One-Piece Propshaft Spline
Canada 10953511).
(Two-Wheel Drive with Auto. Trans.)
Hood Hinges
Canada 10953474).
Outer Tailgate Handle Pivot Points
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Weatherstrip Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).
Synthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. 12371287, in
Weatherstrip Squeaks
Canada 10953437).
Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Standard Filter 15908916* A3086C*
High Capacity Filter 15908915 A3085C
Oil Filter 89017524 PF48
Spark Plugs 12621258 41-110
Wiper Blades
Front – 55.0 cm (21.6 in) 25877402 —
Rear – 30.0 cm (11.8 in) 25820122 —
*15908915 (A3085C) high-capacity air cleaner filter may be substituted.
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading
Odometer
Reading
Odometer
Reading
Odometer
Reading
Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN is
Vehicle Identification the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications”
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 on page 12‑2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4 Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove
box, has the following information:
. Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
. Model designation.
This legal identifier is in the front . Paint information.
corner of the instrument panel, on .
the left side of the vehicle. It can be Production options and special
seen through the windshield from equipment.
outside. The VIN also appears on Do not remove this label from the
the Vehicle Certification and Service vehicle.
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.
12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
If your vehicle is a Hybrid, see the Hybrid manual for more information.
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑12 for more information.
Capacities
Application
Metric English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a amount, see the refrigerant label located under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Cooling System
5.3L V8 17.3 L 18.3 qt
6.0L V8 16.5 L 17.4 qt
Engine Oil with Filter 5.7 L 6.0 qt
Fuel Tank
Regular 98.4 L 26.0 gal
Extended 1500 Series 119.2 L 31.5 gal
Extended 2500 Series 147.6 L 39.0 gal
Technical Data 12-3
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Transmission Fluid (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement)
6L80-E Transmission 5.7 L 6.0 qt
6L90-E Transmission 6.0 L 6.3 qt
Transfer Case Fluid 1.5 L 1.6 qt
Wheel Nut Torque 190 Y 140 lb ft
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Spark Plug Gap
5.3L V8 FlexFuel with Active Fuel Management™
0 1.02mm (0.040 in)
(Iron Block) (LMG)
5.3L V8 FlexFuel with Active Fuel Management™
7 1.02mm (0.040 in)
(Aluminum Block) (LC9)
6.0L V8 (Iron Block) (L96) G 1.02 mm (0.040 in)
12-4 Technical Data
Engine Drive Belt Routing

information.
Customer Information 13-1
Courtesy Transportation
Customer Program (U.S. and
Customer Information
Information Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Collision Damage Repair Customer Satisfaction
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-15 Procedure (U.S. and
Customer Information Service Publications Canada)
Customer Satisfaction Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-18
Your satisfaction and goodwill are
Procedure (U.S. and Reporting Safety Defects important to your dealer and to
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Satisfaction Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
the United States with the sales transaction or the
Procedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-3 Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Customer Assistance Offices operation of the vehicle will be
Reporting Safety Defects to resolved by your dealer's sales or
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-5 the Canadian
Customer Assistance Offices service departments. Sometimes,
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19 however, despite the best intentions
(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Assistance for Text of all concerned, misunderstandings
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20 can occur. If your concern has not
Telephone (TTY) Users (U.S.
and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Vehicle Data Recording and been resolved to your satisfaction,
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-7 the following steps should be taken:
Privacy
GM Mobility Reimbursement Vehicle Data Recording and STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
Program (U.S. and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20 with a member of dealership
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-20 management. Normally, concerns
Roadside Assistance Program OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21 can be quickly resolved at that level.
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-21 If the matter has already been
Roadside Assistance Radio Frequency reviewed with the sales, service,
Program (Mexico) . . . . . . . . . 13-10 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-22 or parts manager, contact the owner
Scheduling Service Radio Frequency of your dealership or the general
Appointments (U.S. and Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22 manager.
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
13-2 Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a When contacting Chevrolet, 40 days. If you do not agree with the
member of dealership management, remember that your concern will decision given in your case, you
it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer's may reject it and proceed with any
resolved by your dealership without facility. That is why we suggest other venue for relief available
further help, in the U.S., call the following Step One first. to you.
Chevrolet Customer Assistance STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: You may contact the BBB Auto Line
Center at 1-800-222-1020. In Both General Motors and your Program using the toll-free
Canada, call General Motors of dealer are committed to making telephone number or write them at
Canada Customer Care Centre at sure you are completely satisfied the following address:
1-800-263-3777 (English), with your new vehicle. However,
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). BBB Auto Line Program
if you continue to remain unsatisfied Council of Better Business
We encourage you to call the after following the procedure Bureaus, Inc.
toll-free number in order to give your outlined in Steps One and Two, you 4200 Wilson Boulevard
inquiry prompt attention. Have the can file with the Better Business Suite 800
following information available to Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program Arlington, VA 22203-1838
give the Customer Assistance to enforce your rights.
representative: Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
The BBB Auto Line Program is an www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
. Vehicle Identification out-of-court program administered
Number (VIN). This is available by the Council of Better Business This program is available in all
from the vehicle registration or Bureaus to settle automotive 50 states and the District of
title, or the plate at the top left of disputes regarding vehicle repairs or Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
the instrument panel and visible the interpretation of the New Vehicle vehicle age, mileage, and other
through the windshield. Limited Warranty. Although you may factors. General Motors reserves
be required to resort to this informal the right to change eligibility
. Dealership name and location. limitations and/or discontinue its
dispute resolution program prior to
. Vehicle delivery date and filing a court action, use of the participation in this program.
present mileage. program is free of charge and your
case will generally be heard within
STEP THREE — Canadian For further information concerning Customer Satisfaction

Owners: In the event that you do eligibility in the Canadian Motor
not feel your concerns have been Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
Procedure (Mexico)
addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call
procedure outlined in Steps One the General Motors Customer Care
and Two, General Motors of Canada Centre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),
Limited wants you to be aware 1-800-263-7854 (French),
of its participation in a no-charge or write to:
Mediation/Arbitration Program. The Mediation/Arbitration Program
General Motors of Canada Limited c/o Customer Care Centre
has committed to binding arbitration General Motors of Canada Limited Did you get the Warranty Extension
of owner disputes involving Mail Code: CA1-163-005 Plan? This plan is recommended by
factory-related vehicle service 1908 Colonel Sam Drive General Motors to supplement the
claims. The program provides for Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 warranty included with the new
the review of the facts involved by vehicle purchase.
an impartial third party arbiter, and Your inquiry should be accompanied
may include an informal hearing by the Vehicle Identification See your dealer for details.
before the arbiter. The program is Number (VIN).
designed so that the entire dispute
settlement process, from the time
you file your complaint to the final
decision, should be completed in
about 70 days. We believe our
impartial program offers advantages
over courts in most jurisdictions
because it is informal, quick, and
free of charge.
Customer Assistance If you have a problem that has not STEP THREE
Procedure been satisfactorily handled through If your case is not resolved in a
the normal means, we suggest the reasonable amount of time by your
Owner satisfaction and goodwill are following steps:
very important to your dealer and dealer, please call the General
General Motors. STEP ONE Motors Customer Assistance
Center (CAC) and provide the
Normally, any problem with the Explain your case to your dealer following information:
transaction, sale, or usage of the service agent, service manager,
vehicle must be handled by your dealer sales agent, or sales . Name
dealer sales or service departments. manager, depending on your case. . Address
However, we recognize that despite Make sure that they have all
the good intentions of all parties
. Phone number
necessary information. They are
involved, sometimes a interested in your continual
. Model year
misunderstanding may occur. satisfaction. . Brand
STEP TWO . Vehicle Identification
If you are not satisfied, please Number (VIN)
contact the general manager or your . Mileage
dealership owner to ask for their . Delivery date
help. If they are not able to resolve
your case, ask them to contact the . Description of the problem
right people at General Motors for . Dealership name
support, if needed.
. Dealership address
See Customer Assistance Offices
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5 or
Customer Assistance Offices
Customer Assistance Canada Mexico, Central America, and

Offices (U.S. and Canada) General Motors of Canada Limited Caribbean Islands/Countries
Customer Care Centre, Mail Code: (Except Puerto Rico and U.S.
Chevrolet encourages customers Virgin Islands)
CA1-163-005
to call the toll-free number for
1908 Colonel Sam Drive General Motors de Mexico, S. de
assistance. However, if a customer
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 R.L. de C.V.
wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,
www.gm.ca Customer Assistance Center
the letter should be addressed to:
1-800-263-3777 (English) Av. Ejercito Nacional #843
United States 1-800-263-7854 (French) Col. Granada
Chevrolet Motor Division 1-800-263-3830 (For Text C.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Telephone devices (TTYs)) 01-800-466-0800
Center Roadside Assistance: Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0800
P.O. Box 33170 1-800-268-6800
Detroit, MI 48232-5170 Overseas
www.Chevrolet.com
Please contact the local General
1-800-222-1020
Motors Business Unit.
1-800-833-2438 (For Text
Telephone Devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-243-8872
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Customer Assistance United States and Canada Customer Assistance for

Offices (Mexico) 1-866-466-8190 Text Telephone (TTY)
To contact the Customer Assistance Costa Rica Users (U.S. and Canada)
Center (CAC), use the phone To assist customers who are deaf,
numbers listed in this section. 00-800-052-1005
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired
Customer assistance is available Guatemala and who use Text Telephones
Monday through Friday, 08:00 to (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY
20:00 hours, and Saturdays from 1-800-999-5252
equipment available at its Customer
08:00 to 15:00 hours. Panama Assistance Center. Any TTY user in
All e-mail inquiries to the Customer 00-800-052-0001 the U.S. can communicate with
Assistance Center (CAC) should be Chevrolet by dialing:
sent to: cac.chevrolet@gm.com. Dominican Republic 1-800-833-2438. TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.
Mexico 1-888-751-5301
From Mexico City El Salvador
5329-0811 800-6273
From Other Mexico Locations Honduras
01-800-466-0811 800-0122-6101

. Locate owner resources such as
Online Owner Center Other Helpful Links
lease-end, financing, and
Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com warranty information.
Manage your vehicle (U.S.) at
chevrolet.com. Click on Chevrolet Merchandise — . Retrieve your favorite articles,
“Owners,” then “Manage My www.chevymall.com quizzes, tips and multimedia
Chevrolet/Owners Login.” Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/ galleries organized into the
pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do Features and Auto Care
Information and services
Sections.
customized for your specific . FAQ
vehicle — all in one convenient . Download the owner manual for
. Contact Us
place. your vehicle, quickly and easily.
. Digital owner manual, warranty Chevrolet Owner Centre . Find the
information, and more. (Canada) chevroletowner.ca Chevrolet-recommended
. Take a trip to the Chevrolet Owner maintenance services for your
Storage for online service and
Centre: vehicle.
maintenance records.
. Chevrolet dealer locator for
. Chat live with online help
service nationwide. representatives.
. Use the Vehicle Tools section.
. Exclusive privileges and offers.
. Recall notices for your specific
. Access third party enthusiast
vehicle. sites and social media networks.
. OnStar and GM Cardmember
Services Earnings summaries.

. Location of the vehicle.
GM Mobility General Motors of Canada also
has a Mobility Program. Call . Model, year, color, and license
Reimbursement Program 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for plate number of the vehicle.
(U.S. and Canada) details. TTY users call
1-800-263-3830.
. Odometer reading, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), and
delivery date of the vehicle.
Roadside Assistance
Program (U.S. and
. Description of the problem.
Canada) Coverage
For U.S.‐purchased vehicles, call Services are provided up to 5 years/
1‐800‐243‐8872; (Text Telephone 160 000 km (100,000 mi), whichever
This program is available to
(TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438). comes first.
qualified applicants for cost
reimbursement of eligible For Canadian‐purchased vehicles, In the U.S., anyone driving the
aftermarket adaptive equipment call 1-800-268-6800. vehicle is covered. In Canada, a
required for the vehicle, such as person driving the vehicle without
Service is available 24 hours a day, permission from the owner is not
hand controls or a wheelchair/
365 days a year. covered.
scooter lift for the vehicle.
For more information on the limited Calling for Assistance Roadside Assistance is not a part of
offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or When calling Roadside Assistance, the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
call the GM Mobility Assistance have the following information Chevrolet and General Motors of
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text ready: Canada Limited reserve the right to
Telephone (TTY) users, call make any changes or discontinue
1-800-833-9935.
. Your name, home address, and the Roadside Assistance program at
home telephone number. any time without notification.
. Telephone number of your
location.
Chevrolet and General Motors of

. Flat Tire Change: Service to Services Specific to Canadian
Canada Limited reserve the right to change a flat tire with the spare Purchased Vehicles
limit services or payment to an tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
owner or driver if they decide the must be in good condition and . Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement
claims are made too often, or the properly inflated. It is the owner's is approximately $5 Canadian.
same type of claim is made many responsibility for the repair or Diesel fuel delivery may be
times. replacement of the tire if it is not restricted. Propane and other
covered by the warranty. fuels are not provided through
Services Provided this service.
. Battery Jump Start: Service to
. Emergency Fuel Delivery: . Lock-Out Service: Vehicle
jump start a dead battery.
Delivery of enough fuel for the registration is required.
vehicle to get to the nearest Services Not Included in . Trip Routing Service: Detailed
service station. Roadside Assistance
maps of North America are
. Lock‐Out Service: Service to . Impound towing caused by provided when requested either
unlock the vehicle if you are violation of any laws. with the most direct route or the
locked out. A remote unlock may . Legal fines. most scenic route. There is a
be available if you have OnStar. limit of six requests per year.
For security reasons, the driver
. Mounting, dismounting, Additional travel information is
must present identification or changing of snow tires, also available. Allow three
before this service is given. chains, or other traction devices. weeks for delivery.
. Emergency Tow from a Public
. Towing or services for vehicles
Road or Highway: Tow to the driven on a non-public road or
nearest Chevrolet dealer for highway.
warranty service, or if the vehicle
was in a crash and cannot be
driven. Assistance is also given
when the vehicle is stuck in the
sand, mud, or snow.

. Trip Interruption Benefits and
Assistance: Must be over
Roadside Assistance This program expires two years
from the date of the invoice for the
250 kilometers from where Program (Mexico) vehicle, regardless of vehicle
your trip was started to As a new owner, your vehicle is mileage and changes in vehicle
qualify. General Motors of automatically enrolled in the ownership.
Canada Limited requires Roadside Assistance program. The
pre-authorization, original For more information about the
services are available at no cost renewal of this program at the end
detailed receipts, and a copy under the terms and conditions of
of the repair orders. Once of its term, contact the Chevrolet
the program. The Roadside Customer Assistance Center at
authorization has been received, Assistance program is not part of,
the Roadside Assistance advisor 01-800-466-0800.
or included, in the coverage
will help to make arrangements provided by the New Vehicle Limited Services Provided
and explain how to receive Warranty.
payment.
. Flat Tire Change: If unable to
Roadside Assistance provides change a flat tire, Roadside
. Alternative Service: If assistance to the driver and Assistance will provide towing
assistance cannot be provided passengers while driving the vehicle service to the nearest authorized
right away, the Roadside within your city of residence or on Chevrolet dealership. It is the
Assistance advisor may give any passable road in Mexico, the owner's responsibility for the
permission to get local United States, and Canada. repair or replacement of the tire.
emergency road service. You Services are subject to the This service is limited to the
will receive payment, up to $100, limitations described in the following transfer of the vehicle to the
after sending the original receipt pages. Program coverage varies by repair facility.
to Roadside Assistance. country.
Mechanical failures may be
. Emergency Fuel Delivery:
covered, however any cost for Roadside Assistance is available Delivery of enough fuel for the
parts and labor for repairs not 24 hours a day, 365 days of vehicle to get to the nearest
covered by the warranty are the the year. service station.
owner responsibility.

. Lock-Out Service: Service to When the vehicle is not
. *Trip Interruption: This service
unlock the vehicle if you are accessible to be towed, all is provided if you are prevented
locked out. maneuvers required to access it from further usage of your
. Battery Jump Start: Service to will be at the owner's expense. vehicle while traveling and it is
jump start a dead battery. not possible for the nearest
If the vehicle is in another city Chevrolet dealership to repair
. *Emergency Messages: outside of your residence, the vehicle the same day,
Transmission of urgent phone Roadside Assistance is limited requiring the vehicle to stay at
messages. to moving the vehicle to the the dealership for a night or
nearest dealer. If you would like more. If this happens, in addition
. *Emergency Calls: Call for the vehicle moved to a different
emergency services. to the previously listed services
dealer, you will be asked to and prior to confirmation by the
. *Dealership Location cover the difference in cost at dealership, you are entitled to
Assistance: Information the time of the move. choose one of the following
regarding addresses and If the vehicle cannot be received alternatives, within the limits of
telephone numbers for Chevrolet by the nearest Chevrolet dealer existing Roadside Assistance
dealers. due to scheduling conflicts, the program guidelines. If the costs
. Emergency Towing: Tow to the vehicle will be taken to a safe exceed the amount authorized
nearest dealer for warranty place where it will remain for up for these services, you must pay
service if the vehicle cannot be to 48 hours until it can be taken the difference at the time of
driven. to the dealer. If the storage costs service.
exceed the amount authorized, Roadside Assistance will
If the vehicle is involved in an
the owner is responsible to pay coordinate hotel
accident during the commission
the difference at the time of accommodations for all vehicle
of a crime, administrative
service. Contact Roadside travelers for up to two nights.
violation, or breach of traffic
Assistance for more information
regulations, Roadside
on authorized amounts.
Assistance will not provide
service.
A rental car will be provided for

. *Complimentary Services Not Included in Roadside
up to two days and the vehicle Transportation for Vehicle Pick Assistance
must be returned to its original Up: Transportation to pick up
your vehicle after repairs are Roadside Assistance does not
destination, excluding vehicles cover or reimburse services for the
with a carrying capacity greater complete. Once the dealer has
reported that the vehicle has following:
than 3.5 tons.
been repaired, Roadside . Events caused by fraud or bad
Complimentary Transportation: If Assistance will provide bus or faith by the driver.
you prefer to continue your commercial airline one-way . Vehicle immobilization situations
trip to the intended destination service (subject to availability)
or return to your place of due to a major force or
for the person designated by you
residence, and the trip requires unforeseen circumstances, such
to collect your vehicle at the
more than eight hours driving on as natural phenomena of
dealership's location if you or the
the road, transportation for the an extraordinary nature,
designated person are not in the
driver and passengers by first earthquakes, volcanic eruptions,
same town or city as the
class bus or coach commercial and other cyclonic storms.
dealership.
airline will be provided to a . Vehicle immobilization situations
location chosen by Roadside *These services are not provided
arising from car accidents
Assistance, depending on for U.S. or Canada residents. All
caused by the driver of the
availability at the chosen services provided in the U.S. and
vehicle or third parties. This
destination. Restrictions apply Canada are at the owner's expense
means any occurrence that
based on vehicle specifications. and will be reimbursed by Roadside
causes physical injury to the
Assistance.
If you are on the road, taxi occupants and/or the vehicle
service to the nearest bus caused by external forces.
station or airport will be
provided.

. Acts of terrorism, riot or uproar, Routine vehicle repair costs are Chevrolet reserves the right to make
armed forces or police actions not covered by the Roadside any changes or discontinue the
which prevent timely delivery of Assistance program. For more Roadside Assistance program at
assistance services. information, see your new vehicle any time without notification.
. Food service, beverages, warranty.
telephone calls, or other extra Contacting Roadside Assistance Scheduling Service
costs. Accommodation costs Appointments
apply only to Mexico per the Roadside Assistance services are of
terms and conditions of the no cost to you and available (U.S. and Canada)
Roadside Assistance program. 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. When the vehicle requires warranty
Costs are only incurred in situations service, contact your dealer and
. Any damage to the vehicle that exceed the limits of the
without intent, derived from the request an appointment. By
program, some of which are listed scheduling a service appointment
services provided. previously in this section. and advising the service consultant
. Cost of towing a trailer when To contact Roadside Assistance by of your transportation needs, your
choosing a Chevrolet dealer that phone, use the following numbers: dealer can help minimize your
is nearest to the temporary inconvenience.
storage facility for the disabled Mexico
vehicle. If the vehicle cannot be scheduled
01-800-466-0800 into the service department
. Cost of all maneuvers required immediately, keep driving it until it
United States
to access the vehicle when it is can be scheduled for service,
not available to be towed. 1-866-466-8901 unless, of course, the problem is
. Cost of fuel provided. Canada safety related. If it is, please call
your dealership, let them know this,
1-800-268-6800 and ask for instructions.
E-mail
asistencia.chevrolet@gm.com
If your dealer requests you to bring entitled “Limited Warranty and Public Transportation or Fuel
the vehicle for service, you are Owner Assistance Information” Reimbursement
urged to do so as early in the work furnished with each new vehicle If the vehicle requires overnight
day as possible to allow for provides detailed warranty coverage warranty repairs, and public
same-day repair. information. transportation is used instead of
Transportation Options your dealer's shuttle service, the
Courtesy Transportation expense must be supported by
Program (U.S. and Warranty service can generally be original receipts and can only be up
completed while you wait. However, to the maximum amount allowed by
Canada) if you are unable to wait, GM helps GM for shuttle service. In addition,
To enhance your ownership to minimize inconvenience by for U.S. customers, should you
experience, we and our participating providing several transportation arrange transportation through a
dealers are proud to offer Courtesy options. Depending on the friend or relative, limited
Transportation, a customer support circumstances, your dealer can offer reimbursement for reasonable fuel
program for vehicles with the one of the following: expenses may be available. Claim
Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty Shuttle Service amounts should reflect actual costs
Coverage period in Canada), and be supported by original
extended powertrain, and/or Shuttle service is the preferred receipts. See your dealer for
hybrid-specific warranties in both means of offering Courtesy information regarding the allowance
the U.S. and Canada. Transportation. Dealers may provide amounts for reimbursement of fuel
shuttle service to get you to your or other transportation costs.
Several Courtesy Transportation destination with minimal interruption
options are available to assist in of your daily schedule. This includes Courtesy Rental Vehicle
reducing inconvenience when one-way or round-trip shuttle service
warranty repairs are required. Your dealer may arrange to provide
within reasonable time and distance you with a courtesy rental vehicle or
Courtesy Transportation is not a parameters of your dealer's area. reimburse you for a rental vehicle
part of the New Vehicle Limited that you obtain if the vehicle is kept
Warranty. A separate booklet for an overnight warranty repair.
Rental reimbursement will be limited General Motors reserves the right to Collision parts are the best choice to
and must be supported by original unilaterally modify, change, ensure that the vehicle's designed
receipts. This requires that you sign or discontinue Courtesy appearance, durability, and safety
and complete a rental agreement Transportation at any time and to are preserved. The use of Genuine
and meet state/provincial, local, and resolve all questions of claim GM parts can help maintain the GM
rental vehicle provider requirements. eligibility pursuant to the terms and New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Requirements vary and may include conditions described herein at its Recycled original equipment parts
minimum age requirements, sole discretion. may also be used for repair. These
insurance coverage, credit card, parts are typically removed from
etc. You are responsible for fuel Collision Damage Repair vehicles that were total losses in
usage charges and may also be
responsible for taxes, levies, usage
(U.S. and Canada) prior crashes. In most cases, the
parts being recycled are from
fees, excessive mileage, or rental If the vehicle is involved in a
undamaged sections of the vehicle.
usage beyond the completion of the collision and it is damaged, have the
A recycled original equipment GM
repair. damage repaired by a qualified
part may be an acceptable choice to
technician using the proper
It may not be possible to provide a maintain the vehicle's originally
equipment and quality replacement
like vehicle as a courtesy rental. designed appearance and safety
parts. Poorly performed collision
performance; however, the history of
Additional Program repairs diminish the vehicle resale
these parts is not known. Such parts
Information value, and safety performance can
are not covered by the GM New
be compromised in subsequent
All program options, such as shuttle Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
collisions.
service, may not be available at related failures are not covered by
every dealer. Please contact your Collision Parts that warranty.
dealer for specific information Genuine GM Collision parts are new
about availability. All Courtesy parts made with the same materials
Transportation arrangements will be and construction methods as the
administered by appropriate dealer parts with which the vehicle was
personnel. originally built. Genuine GM
Aftermarket collision parts are also Insuring the Vehicle If the vehicle is leased, the leasing
available. These are made by company may require you to have
Protect your investment in the GM
companies other than GM and may insurance that ensures repairs with
vehicle with comprehensive and
not have been tested for the vehicle. Genuine GM Original Equipment
collision insurance coverage. There
As a result, these parts may fit Manufacturer (OEM) parts or
are significant differences in the
poorly, exhibit premature durability/ Genuine Manufacturer replacement
quality of coverage afforded by
corrosion problems, and may not parts. Read the lease carefully, as
various insurance policy terms.
perform properly in subsequent you may be charged at the end of
Many insurance policies provide
collisions. Aftermarket parts are not the lease for poor quality repairs.
reduced protection to the GM
covered by the GM New Vehicle
vehicle by limiting compensation for If a Crash Occurs
Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
damage repairs through the use of
failure related to such parts is not If there has been an injury, call
aftermarket collision parts. Some
covered by that warranty. emergency services for help. Do not
insurance companies will not
specify aftermarket collision parts. leave the scene of a crash until all
Repair Facility matters have been taken care of.
When purchasing insurance, we
GM also recommends that you recommend that you ensure that the Move the vehicle only if its position
choose a collision repair facility that vehicle will be repaired with GM puts you in danger, or you are
meets your needs before you ever original equipment collision parts. instructed to move it by a police
need collision repairs. Your dealer If such insurance coverage is not officer.
may have a collision repair center available from your current Give only the necessary information
with GM-trained technicians and insurance carrier, consider switching to police and other parties involved
state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be to another insurance carrier. in the crash.
able to recommend a collision repair
center that has GM-trained For emergency towing see
technicians and comparable Roadside Assistance Program (U.S.
equipment. and Canada) on page 13‑8 or
Roadside Assistance Program
Gather the following information: Managing the Vehicle Damage Genuine GM parts. Remember,
. Driver name, address, and Repair Process if the vehicle is leased, you may be
telephone number. obligated to have the vehicle
In the event that the vehicle requires repaired with Genuine GM parts,
. Driver license number. damage repairs, GM recommends even if your insurance coverage
.
that you take an active role in its does not pay the full cost.
Owner name, address, and repair. If you have a pre-determined
telephone number. repair facility of choice, take the If another party's insurance
. Vehicle license plate number. vehicle there, or have it towed there. company is paying for the repairs,
Specify to the facility that any you are not obligated to accept a
. Vehicle make, model, and repair valuation based on that
required replacement collision parts
model year. insurance company's collision policy
be original equipment parts, either
. Vehicle Identification new Genuine GM parts or recycled repair limits, as you have no
Number (VIN). original GM parts. Remember, contractual limits with that company.
recycled parts will not be covered by In such cases, you can have control
. Insurance company and policy of the repair and parts choices as
number. the GM vehicle warranty.
long as the cost stays within
. General description of the Insurance pays the bill for the repair, reasonable limits.
damage to the other vehicle. but you must live with the repair.
Depending on your policy limits,
Choose a reputable repair facility your insurance company may
that uses quality replacement parts. initially value the repair using
See “Collision Parts” earlier in this aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
section. the repair professional, and insist on
If the airbag has inflated, see What
Will You See after an Airbag
Inflates? on page 3‑37.
Service Publications In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Or write to:

Owner Manual, and Warranty
Ordering Information Booklet.
Helm, Incorporated
Attention: Customer Service
Service Manuals RETAIL SELL PRICE: 47911 Halyard Drive
Service Manuals have the diagnosis $35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and Plymouth, MI 48170
and repair information on the shipping fees. Prices are subject to change without
engines, transmission, axle, Without Portfolio: Owner notice and without incurring
suspension, brakes, electrical, Manual only. obligation. Allow ample time for
steering, body, etc. delivery.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
Service Bulletins $25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and All listed prices are quoted in U.S.
shipping fees. funds. Make checks payable in U.S.
Service Bulletins give additional
funds.
technical service information Current and Past Models
needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks. Technical Service Bulletins and
Each bulletin contains instructions Manuals are available for current
to assist in the diagnosis and and past model GM vehicles.
service of the vehicle. ORDER TOLL FREE:
1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday
Owner Information 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time
Owner publications are written For Credit Card Orders Only
specifically for owners and intended (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit
to provide basic operational Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.
information about the vehicle. The
Owner Manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all
models.
Reporting Safety However, NHTSA cannot Reporting Safety Defects

become involved in individual to the Canadian
Defects problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
Government
Reporting Safety Defects If you live in Canada, and you
To contact NHTSA, you may call
to the United States the Vehicle Safety Hotline
believe that the vehicle has a safety
defect, notify Transport Canada
Government toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 immediately, and notify General
If you believe that your vehicle (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to Motors of Canada Limited.
has a defect which could cause http://www.safercar.gov; or Call Transport Canada at
a crash or could cause injury or write to: 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
death, you should immediately Administrator, NHTSA Transport Canada
inform the National Highway 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. Road Safety Branch
Traffic Safety Administration Washington, D.C. 20590 80 rue Noel
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Gatineau, QC J8Z 0A1
You can also obtain other
General Motors.
information about motor
If NHTSA receives similar vehicle safety from
complaints, it may open an http://www.safercar.gov.
investigation, and if it finds that
a safety defect exists in a group
of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign.
Reporting Safety Defects Vehicle Data Event Data Recorders

to General Motors Recording and This vehicle has an Event Data
In addition to notifying NHTSA Recorder (EDR). The main purpose
(or Transport Canada) in a situation
Privacy of an EDR is to record, in certain
like this, notify General Motors. This GM vehicle has a number of crash or near crash-like situations,
sophisticated computers that record such as an airbag deployment or
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write: hitting a road obstacle, data that will
information about the vehicle’s
Chevrolet Motor Division performance and how it is driven. assist in understanding how a
Chevrolet Customer Assistance For example, the vehicle uses vehicle's systems performed. The
Center computer modules to monitor and EDR is designed to record data
P.O. Box 33170 control engine and transmission related to vehicle dynamics and
Detroit, MI 48232-5170 performance, to monitor the safety systems for a short period of
conditions for airbag deployment time, typically 30 seconds or less.
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 The EDR in this vehicle is designed
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 and deploy airbags in a crash, and,
if so equipped, to provide antilock to record such data as:
(French), or write:
braking to help the driver control the . How various systems in the
General Motors of Canada Limited vehicle. These modules may store vehicle were operating.
Customer Care Centre, Mail Code: data to help your dealer technician
CA1-163-005 service the vehicle. Some modules
. Whether or not the driver and
1908 Colonel Sam Drive may also store data about how you passenger safety belts were
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 operate the vehicle, such as rate of buckled/fastened.
fuel consumption or average speed. . How far, if at all, the driver was
These modules may also retain the pressing the accelerator and/or
owner’s personal preferences, such brake pedal.
as radio presets, seat positions, and . How fast the vehicle was
temperature settings. traveling.
This data can help provide a better GM will not access this data or OnStar®
understanding of the circumstances share it with others except: with the
in which crashes and injuries occur. consent of the vehicle owner or, If the vehicle is equipped with an
if the vehicle is leased, with the active OnStar system, that system
Important: EDR data is recorded may also record data in crash or
by the vehicle only if a non-trivial consent of the lessee; in response
to an official request by police or near crash-like situations. The
crash situation occurs; no data is OnStar Terms and Conditions
recorded by the EDR under normal similar government office; as part of
GM's defense of litigation through provides information on data
driving conditions and no personal collection and use and is available
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and the discovery process; or, as
required by law. Data that GM at www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
crash location) is recorded. www.onstar.ca (Canada), or by
However, other parties, such as collects or receives may also be
used for GM research needs or may pressing the Q button and
law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of be made available to others for speaking to an advisor. See OnStar
personally identifying data routinely research purposes, where a need is Overview on page 14‑1.
acquired during a crash shown and the data is not tied to a
investigation. specific vehicle or vehicle owner. Navigation System
To read data recorded by an EDR, If the vehicle has a navigation
special equipment is required, and system, use of the system may
access to the vehicle or the EDR is result in the storage of destinations,
needed. In addition to the vehicle addresses, telephone numbers, and
manufacturer, other parties, such as other trip information. Refer to the
law enforcement, that have the navigation manual for information on
special equipment, can read the stored data and for deletion
information if they have access to instructions.
the vehicle or the EDR.
Radio Frequency Radio Frequency Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:
Identification (RFID) Statement
1. The device may not cause
RFID technology is used in some This vehicle has systems that harmful interference.
vehicles for functions such as tire operate on a radio frequency that
pressure monitoring and ignition comply with Part 15 of the Federal 2. The device must accept any
system security, as well as in Communications Commission (FCC) interference received, including
connection with conveniences such rules and with Industry Canada interference that may cause
as key fobs for remote door locking/ Standards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310. undesired operation of the
unlocking and starting, and device.
in-vehicle transmitters for garage Changes or modifications to any of
door openers. RFID technology in these systems by other than an
GM vehicles does not use or record authorized service facility could void
personal information or link with any authorization to use this equipment.
other GM system containing
personal information.
OnStar 14-1
OnStar OnStar Overview The OnStar system status light is

next to the OnStar buttons. If the
status light is:
OnStar Overview . Solid Green: System is ready.
OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 . Flashing Green: On a call.
OnStar Services . Red: Indicates a problem.
Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Push Q or call 1‐888‐4‐ONSTAR
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 If equipped, this vehicle has a (1‐888‐466‐7827) to speak to an
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 comprehensive, in-vehicle system Advisor.
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 that can connect to a live Advisor
for Emergency, Security, Navigation,
Push X to:
OnStar Additional Information Connection, and Diagnostic . Make a call, end a call,
OnStar Additional Services. or answer an incoming call.
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
. Give OnStar Hands-Free Calling
voice commands.
. Give OnStar Turn-by-Turn
Navigation voice commands.
Requires the available Directions
and Connections service plan.
14-2 OnStar
Push Q to connect to a live OnStar Services Navigation

Advisor to: OnStar navigation requires the
. Verify account information or Emergency Directions and Connections
update contact information. With Automatic Crash Response, service plan.
. Get driving directions. Requires the built-in system can automatically Push Q to receive directions or
the available Directions and connect to help in a crash even if have them sent to the vehicle
Connections service plan. you cannot ask for it. navigation screen. Destinations can
. Receive On-Demand Push ] to connect to an also be forwarded to the vehicle
Diagnostics for a check on the Emergency Advisor. GPS from Google Maps™ or
vehicle’s key operating systems. technology is used to identify the MapQuest.com. The OnStar
vehicle location and can provide mapping database is continuously
. Receive Roadside Assistance. updated. Visit www.onstar.com for
critical information to emergency
Push ] to get a priority connection personnel. The Advisor is also coverage maps.
to an Emergency Advisor available trained to offer critical assistance in Turn-by-Turn Navigation
24/7 to: emergency situations.
. Get help for an emergency. 1. Push Q to connect to a live
. Be a Good Samaritan or
Security Advisor.
respond to an AMBER Alert. OnStar provides services like Stolen 2. Request directions.
Vehicle Assistance, Remote Ignition 3. Directions are downloaded to the
. Get crisis assistance and
Block, and Roadside Assistance, vehicle.
evacuation routes.
if the vehicle is equipped with these
services. OnStar can unlock the 4. Follow the voice-guided
vehicle doors remotely, if it is commands.
equipped with automatic door locks,
and can help police locate the
vehicle if it is stolen.
OnStar 14-3
Using Voice Commands Repeat Other Navigation Services

During a Planned Route 1. Push X. System responds:
Available from OnStar
Cancel Route “OnStar ready,” then a tone. OnStar eNav: Allows subscribers
to send destinations from Google
1. Push X. System responds: 2. Say “Repeat.” System responds
Maps and MapQuest.com to their
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. Say with the last direction given, then
Turn-by-Turn Navigation or
“Cancel route.” System responds with “OnStar ready,”
screen-based navigation system.
responds: “Would you like to then a tone.
When ready, the directions will be
cancel route directions to your 3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voice downloaded to the vehicle.
destination?” commands.
Destination Download: Push Q,
2. Say “Yes.” System responds: Get My Destination then request the Advisor to
“OK, route canceled.” download directions to the
1. Push X. System responds:
3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voice navigation system in the vehicle.
“OnStar ready,” then a tone.
commands. After the call ends, push the “Go”
2. Say “Get my destination.” button on the navigation screen to
Route Preview System responds with miles to begin driving directions.
1. Push X. System responds: the destination, then responds
Destinations can also be
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. with “OnStar ready,” then a tone.
downloaded on the go. For
2. Say “Route Preview.” System 3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voice information about eNav, Destination
responds with the next three commands. Download, and coverage maps visit
maneuvers. www.onstar.com.
3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voice
commands.
14-4 OnStar
Connections Retrieve My Number 4. Pick a name tag. “System

responds: ”About to store
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows 1. Push X. System responds: <name tag>. Does that
calls to be made and received from “OnStar ready.” sound OK?”
the vehicle. The vehicle can also be
2. Say “My Number.” System 5. Say “Yes” or “No” to try again.
controlled from a cell phone through
responds: “Your OnStar System responds: “OK, storing
the OnStar RemoteLink mobile app.
Hands-Free Calling number is.” <name tag>.”
See www.onstar.com for
coverage maps. End a Call Place a Call Using a Stored
Hands-Free Calling Push X. System responds: Number
1. Push X. System responds: “Call ended.” 1. Push X. System responds:
“OnStar ready.” Store a Name Tag for Speed “OnStar ready.”
2. Say “Dial.” System responds: Dialing 2. Say “Call <name tag>.” System
“Please say the name or number responds: “OK, calling
1. Push X. System responds: <name tag>.”
to call.”
“OnStar ready.”
3. Say the entire number without Verify Minutes and Expiration
pausing, including a “1” and the 2. Say “Store.” System responds:
area code. System responds: “Please say the number you Push X and say “minutes” then
“OK calling.” would like to store.” “verify” to check how many minutes
3. Say the entire number without remain and their expiration date.
pausing. System responds:
“Please say the name tag.”
OnStar 14-5
OnStar Mobile App OnStar Additional How OnStar Service Works

With an iPhone® or Information Automatic Crash Response,
Android™-based mobile device, an Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,
OnStar RemoteLink mobile app can Transferring Service Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
be downloaded. The vehicle can be Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,
remote started, if equipped, or the Push Q to request account transfer Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-Turn
doors can be unlocked from eligibility information. The Advisor Navigation, and Hands-Free Calling
anywhere there is cell phone can assist in canceling or removing are available on most vehicles. Not
service. It can also check the fuel account information. If OnStar all OnStar services are available
level, tire pressure, and oil life. receives information that vehicle everywhere or on all vehicles. For
It can connect to an OnStar Advisor ownership has changed, OnStar more information, a full description
anytime. For OnStar mobile app may send a voice message to the of OnStar services, system
compatibility or further information, vehicle, requesting updated account limitations, and OnStar terms and
see www.onstar.com. information. conditions, see www.onstar.com
(U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada);
Reactivation for Subsequent
Diagnostics Owners
contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY
OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics will
perform a vehicle check every Push Q and follow the prompts to 1‐877‐248‐2080; or push Q to
month. It will check the engine, speak to an Advisor as soon as speak with an Advisor. OnStar
transmission, antilock brakes, and possible after acquiring the vehicle. services require a vehicle electrical
major vehicle systems. It also The Advisor will update vehicle system, wireless service, and GPS
checks the tire pressures, if the records and will explain the OnStar satellite technologies to be available
vehicle is equipped with the Tire service offers and options available. and operating for features to
Pressure Monitoring System. If a function properly. These systems
diagnostics check is needed may not operate if the battery is
discharged or disconnected.
between e-mails, push Q, and an
Advisor can run a check.
14-6 OnStar
OnStar service cannot work unless See Radio Frequency Statement on TTY Users
your vehicle is in a place where page 13‑22 for information
OnStar has the ability to
OnStar has an agreement with a regarding Part 15 of the Federal
communicate to the deaf,
wireless service provider for service Communications Commission (FCC)
hard‐of‐hearing, or speech‐impaired
in that area, and the wireless rules and Industry Canada
customers while in the vehicle. The
service provider has coverage, Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
available dealer‐installed TTY
network capacity, reception, and
Services for People with system can provide in-vehicle
technology compatible with OnStar’s
Disabilities access to all of the OnStar services,
service. Service involving location
except Virtual Advisor and OnStar
information about the vehicle cannot Advisors provide services to help Turn‐by‐Turn Navigation.
work unless GPS signals are subscribers with physical disabilities
available, unobstructed, and and medical conditions. Onstar.com
compatible with the OnStar
hardware. OnStar service may not Push Q for help with: The website provides access to
work if the OnStar equipment is not account information, manages the
. Locating a gas station with an OnStar subscription, and allows
properly installed or it has not been attendant to pump gas.
properly maintained. If equipment or viewing of videos of each service.
software is added, connected,
. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc., Get subscription plan pricing and
or modified, OnStar service may not that meets accessibility needs. sign up for OnStar Vehicle
work. Other problems beyond Diagnostics. Click on the
. Providing directions to the “My Account” tab on the
OnStar’s control may prevent closest hospital or pharmacy in
service such as hills, tall buildings, home page.
urgent situations.
tunnels, weather, electrical system
design and architecture of the
vehicle, damage to the vehicle in a
crash, or wireless phone network
congestion or jamming.
OnStar 14-7
OnStar Personal Identification Potential Issues

. In emergency situations, OnStar
Number (PIN) can use the last stored GPS
Some OnStar services are disabled location to send to emergency
A PIN is needed to access some of after five days. OnStar cannot responders.
the OnStar services, like Remote perform Remote Door Unlock or
Door Unlock and Stolen Vehicle Stolen Vehicle Assistance after the
. A temporary loss of GPS can
Assistance. You will be prompted to vehicle has been off continuously cause loss of the ability to send
change the PIN the first time when for five days. After five days, OnStar a Turn-by-Turn Navigation route.
speaking with an Advisor. To can contact Roadside Assistance The Advisor may give a verbal
change the OnStar PIN, call OnStar and a locksmith to help gain access route or may ask for a call back
and provide the Advisor with the to the vehicle. after the vehicle is driven into an
current number. open area.
Global Positioning
Warranty System (GPS) Cellular and GPS Antennas
OnStar equipment may be . Obstruction of the GPS can Avoid placing items over or near the
warranted as part of the new-vehicle occur in a large city with tall antenna to prevent blocking cellular
limited warranty. The manufacturer buildings; in parking garages; and GPS signal reception. Cellular
of the vehicle furnishes detailed around airports; in tunnels, reception is required for OnStar to
warranty information. underpasses, or parking send remote signals to the vehicle.
garages; or in an area with very
Languages dense trees. If GPS signals are
The vehicle can be programmed to not available, the OnStar system
respond in French or Spanish. Push should still operate to call
Q and ask an Advisor. Advisors OnStar. However, OnStar could
can speak French or Spanish. have difficulty identifying the
exact location.
14-8 OnStar
Unable to Connect to OnStar Add-on Electrical Equipment

Message The OnStar system is integrated
If there is limited cellular coverage into the electrical architecture of the
or the cellular network has reached vehicle. Do not add any electrical
maximum capacity, this message equipment. See Add-On Electrical
may come on. Push Q to try the Equipment on page 9‑90. Added
call again or try again after driving a electrical equipment may interfere
few miles into another cellular area. with the operation of the OnStar
system and cause it to not operate.
Vehicle and Power Issues
Privacy
OnStar services require a vehicle
electrical system, wireless service, The complete OnStar Privacy
and GPS satellite technologies to be Statement may be found at
available and operating for features www.onstar.com. Privacy-sensitive
to function properly. These systems users of wireless communications
may not operate if the battery is are cautioned that the privacy of any
discharged or disconnected. information sent via wireless cellular
communications cannot be assured.
Third parties may unlawfully
intercept or access transmissions
and private communications without
consent.
INDEX i-1
A Airbag System (cont'd) Anti-theft

What Makes an Airbag Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Accessories and
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36 Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-44
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
What Will You See after an Antilock Brake
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37 System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Active Fuel Management® . . . . . 9-30
When Should an Airbag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Add-On Electrical
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35 Appearance Care
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-90
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-32 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99
Adding a Snow Plow or
Airbags Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-102
Similar Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-90
Adding Equipment to the Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Additional Information,
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44 Assistance Program,
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-18 Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8, 13-10
Adjustable Throttle and
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Brake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Servicing Airbag-Equipped CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Adjustments
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44 CD/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30 Audio System
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-14
Alarm System Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Anti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15 Rear Seat (RSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-46
Airbag System
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-46
Antenna
How Does an Airbag
Rear Side Window . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Passenger Sensing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39
i-2 INDEX
Automatic Battery (cont'd) Bulb Replacement (cont'd)

Dimming Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21 Voltage and Charging Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37 License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-39
Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-34 Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Level Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48 Stoplamps, and
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32 Brake Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Pedal and Adjustable Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Automatic Transmission Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35 System Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-23 C
Shift Lock Control Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44 California
Auxiliary Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-64
Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-31 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Perchlorate Materials
Roof Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Axle, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-22 Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii
B Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 Capacities and
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Carbon Monoxide
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
INDEX i-3
Cargo Cleaning Cover

Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99 Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Cautions, Danger, and Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-102 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5, 13-6
Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10, 8-11 Text Telephone (TTY)
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-20 Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Customer Information
Check Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-15 Service Publications
Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-18
Ignition Connections, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . 14-4 Customer Satisfaction
Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-33 Continuous Damping Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1, 13-3
Child Restraints Control (CDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51
Infants and Young Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 D
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-49 Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-15
Lower Anchors and Coolant Danger, Warnings, and
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-55 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-47 Engine Temperature Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-20
Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63, 3-66 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Daytime Running
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-51 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41 Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39 Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Courtesy Transportation
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
i-4 INDEX
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Driving (cont'd) Emergency, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31 Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-16 Engine
Diagnostics, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13 Check and Service Engine
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Dual Automatic Climate Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Door Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6
Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38 DVD Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Rear Seat Entertainment Coolant Temperature
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-35 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 DVD/CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4 Cooling System Messages . . .5-39
Driver Information E Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 E85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66 Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
Driving Electrical Equipment, Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Characteristics and Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-90 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-70 Electrical System Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Engine Compartment Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41 Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . .5-14
For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-29 Fuses and Circuit Overheated Protection
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12 Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41 Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . .9-12 Instrument Panel Fuse Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .9-15 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45 Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
INDEX i-5
Engine (cont'd) Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63

Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-65
Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-31 Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-105 E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . .9-66
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25 Fluid Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-29
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Automatic Transmission . . . . .10-11 Filling a Portable Fuel
Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-79 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-69
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-20 Four-Wheel Drive Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-67
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . 9-37, 9-42 Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-64
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-64
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-2 Fog Lamps Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-26
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Management, Active . . . . . . . . . .9-30
F Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-63
Fan Four-Wheel Requirements, California . . . . .9-64
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29, 9-37, 9-42 System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Features Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-88
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10 Front Fog Lamp Fuses
Filter, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27 Engine Compartment
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-14 Front Seats Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Fuses and Circuit
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-5 Heated and Ventilated . . . . . . . .3-10 Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
i-6 INDEX
G Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Heater

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
GM Mobility Reimbursement Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-56
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Gasoline
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-64
Gauges H Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-12
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Engine Coolant
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-5 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Headlamps How to Wear Safety Belts
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 I
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Daytime Running Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Ignition Transmission Lock
Warning Lights and Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-27 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
General Information High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2 Infants and Young Children,
Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1 Heated Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-69 Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Heated and Ventilated Front Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . 1-2
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
INDEX i-7
J Lamps (cont'd) Lights (cont'd)

Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-20 Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-23
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41 Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
K Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-41 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Keyless Entry LATCH System Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3 Replacing Parts after a High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-62 High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
LATCH, Lower Anchors and Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
L Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-55 Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-17
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-50 Level Control Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Lamps Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51 StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Auxiliary Roof Liftgate Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Carbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-3 Lighting Traction Control System
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 (TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51
Exterior Lamps Off Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Locks
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Lights Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Antilock Brake System Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
i-8 INDEX
Locks (cont'd) Messages Mirrors (cont'd)

Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44 Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Anti-theft Alarm System . . . . . . .5-44 Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Battery Voltage and Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-26 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37 Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Lower Anchors and Tethers Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38 Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
for Children (LATCH Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-39 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40 Trailer Tow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40 Monitor System, Tire
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41 Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
M Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41 N
Maintenance Object Detection System . . . . .5-41 Navigation
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15 Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-43 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Maintenance Schedule Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44 Vehicle Data Recording
Recommended Fluids Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45 and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37 New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . 9-37, 9-42 Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-20 Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47
Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Mirrors
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35 Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Automatic Dimming
Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
INDEX i-9
O OnStar® (cont'd) Parking

Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 Assist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54
Object Detection System
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-1 Brake and P (Park)
Object Detection, Side Blind
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-33
Zone Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30 Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-29
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Operation, Infotainment Passenger Airbag Status
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Ordering Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-39
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Service Publications . . . . . . . . 13-18 Perchlorate Materials
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Outlets Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3
Oil
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Personalization
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Overheated Engine Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10
Protection Phone
Engine Oil Pressure
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-48
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Power
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Overview, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-47
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 P Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
OnStar® Park
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27 Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-27
Additional Information . . . . . . . .14-5
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29 Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4
Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22 Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
i-10 INDEX
Power Assist Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Rear Climate Control Reimbursement Program,

Pregnancy, Using Safety System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10, 8-11 GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Rear Seat Audio (RSA) Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Privacy System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Radio Frequency Rear Seat Entertainment Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-22 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35 Replacement
Program Rear Seat Audio (RSA) . . . . . . .7-46 Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Courtesy Transportation . . . . 13-14 Rear Seats Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Proposition 65 Warning, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Replacement Parts
California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Rear Side Window Antenna . . . 7-14 Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-46
Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14
R Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-59 Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-46
Radio Frequency Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-6 Replacing LATCH System
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-22 Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22 Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-22 Replacing Safety Belt
Radios Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 System Parts after a Crash . . . 3-30
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Recommended Reporting Safety Defects
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-63 Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-19
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13 Recommended Fluids and General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Records Restraints
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15 Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-53
Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51 Recreational Vehicle Retained Accessory
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93 Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Ride Control Systems
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
INDEX i-11
Roads Safety Defects Reporting Security

Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-19 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Roadside Assistance General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8, 13-10 U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Roof Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Service
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25 Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 Accessories and
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64 Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-13 Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4
Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4 Seats Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Running the Vehicle While Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-15
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31 Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Maintenance, General
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
S Heated and Ventilated Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10 Publications Ordering
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29 Heated, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29 Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-5 Scheduling Appointments . . . 13-13
How to Wear Safety Belts Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21 Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4 Shift Lock Control Function
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Check, Automatic
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22 Second Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Third Row Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16 Shifting
Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-30 Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-28 Secondary Latch System . . . . . 10-85 Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
Securing Child Side Blind Zone Alert . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63, 3-66
i-12 INDEX
Signals, Turn and Storage Areas Tires

Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-90 Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
Specifications and Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
StabiliTrak Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15 Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88
OFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-60
Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-59
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 T Secondary Latch System . . . 10-85
Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Taillamps Terminology and
Steps Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Power Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-6 Uniform Tire Quality
Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-17 Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17 Wheel Alignment and Tire
Storage Third-Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Throttle, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22 Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-71
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
INDEX i-13
Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Transportation Program, V

Towing Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Vehicle
Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-70 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-79 Turn and Lane-Change
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-69 Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Identification
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-93 Turn Signal
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-74 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . .9-90
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93 U Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47
Traction Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-54 Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Control System (TCS)/ Uniform Tire Quality Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Trailer Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-56 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93
Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . .9-90 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-61 Vehicle Care
Tow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-56 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-74 Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37, 9-42
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Transmission
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
i-14 INDEX
W When It Is Time for New

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Warning
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-53
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Warning Lights, Gauges,
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Windshield
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Winter
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-34
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47
Wipers
Wheels
Rear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71

Chevrolet Tahoe Owners

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Chevrolet Tahoe Owners

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2012 - 2nd - 11/9/11 Black plate (1,1)

2012 Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Rear Seat Infotainment . . . . . . . 7-35

2012 Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual M

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1

This manual describes features that Canadian Vehicle Owners

Using this Manual Symbols

Vehicle Symbol Chart + : Fuses

In Brief Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

English Version Shown; Metric Similar

Initial Drive L : Press and release to locate

When the vehicle starts, the parking Door Locks

Power Folding Mirrors Shown,

To adjust the power lumbar support,

To recline a manual seatback:

Power Reclining Seatbacks Memory Features Storing Memory Positions

J: Press to heat the seat and Safety Belts Passenger Sensing

With Power Folding Mirrors

See Power Mirrors on page 2‑19 for Park Tilt Mirrors

Interior Mirror Steering Wheel Do not adjust the steering wheel

Interior Lighting Dome Lamp Override Reading Lamps

Exterior Lighting AUTO: Automatically turns on the Windshield Wiper/Washer

Rear Wiper Window Wiper/Washer Climate Controls

Climate Control System

A. Fan Control F. Driver and Passenger

C. Recirculation G. Rear Window Defogger

D. Air Delivery Mode Control See Climate Control Systems on

Base Trim Shown (Uplevel Similar)

2. Press the plus/minus buttons, Four-Wheel Drive

4 m : Use the Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle Features

Satellite Radio Portable Audio Devices Bluetooth®

Steering Wheel Controls b / g : Press to silence the vehicle Cruise Control

If equipped, some audio controls ¨ : Press to seek the next radio

Ultrasonic Parking Assist Power Outlets Universal Remote System

The TPMS warning light alerts you

Replace the vehicle's tires with

TTY Users (U.S.): 1-888-889-2438 Online Owner Center

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, and Doors

2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys and Locks See your dealer if a replacement

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-3

Remote Keyless Entry Remote Keyless Entry

2-4 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-5

Programming Transmitters to Battery Replacement

2-6 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-7

2-8 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Remote Start Ready There are several ways to lock and

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-9

Power Door Locks Delayed Locking Automatic Door Locks

2-10 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Safety Locks To set the locks, insert a key into Doors

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-11

Manual Liftgate Operation

2-12 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Power Liftgate Operation There are several ways to open and

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-13

2-14 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-15

2-16 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-17

2-18 Keys, Doors, and Windows